La 110

Installation and Operation Manual
LA-110
Dedicated ATM IAD
LA-110
Dedicated ATM IAD
Installation and Operation Manual
Notice
This manual contains information that is proprietary to RAD Data Communications Ltd. ("RAD"). No
part of this publication may be reproduced in any form whatsoever without prior written approval by
RAD Data Communications.
Right, title and interest, all information, copyrights, patents, know-how, trade secrets and other
intellectual property or other proprietary rights relating to this manual and to the LA-110 and any
software components contained therein are proprietary products of RAD protected under international
copyright law and shall be and remain solely with RAD.
LA-110 is a registered trademark of RAD. No right, license, or interest to such trademark is granted
hereunder, and you agree that no such right, license, or interest shall be asserted by you with respect
to such trademark.
You shall not copy, reverse compile or reverse assemble all or any portion of the Manual or the LA-
110. You are prohibited from, and shall not, directly or indirectly, develop, market, distribute, license,
or sell any product that supports substantially similar functionality as the LA-110, based on or derived
in any way from the LA-110. Your undertaking in this paragraph shall survive the termination of this
Agreement.
This Agreement is effective upon your opening of the LA-110 package and shall continue until
terminated. RAD may terminate this Agreement upon the breach by you of any term hereof. Upon
such termination by RAD, you agree to return to RAD the LA-110 and all copies and portions thereof.
For further information contact RAD at the address below or contact your local distributor.
International Headquarters U.S. Headquarters

RAD Data Communications Ltd. RAD Data Communications Inc.
24 Raoul Wallenberg St. 900 Corporate Drive

Tel Aviv 69719 Israel Mahwah, NJ 07430 USA
Tel: 972-3-6458181 Tel: (201) 529-1100, Toll free: 1-800-444-7234
Fax: 972-3-6498250 Fax: (201) 529-5777
E-mail: market@rad.com E-mail: market@radusa.com
© 2000–2004 RAD Data Communications Ltd. Publication No. 144-200-02/05

Limited Warranty
RAD warrants to DISTRIBUTOR that the hardware in the LA-110 to be delivered hereunder shall be
free of defects in material and workmanship under normal use and service for a period of twelve (12)
months following the date of shipment to DISTRIBUTOR.
If, during the warranty period, any component part of the equipment becomes defective by reason of
material or workmanship, and DISTRIBUTOR immediately notifies RAD of such defect, RAD shall have
the option to choose the appropriate corrective action: a) supply a replacement part, or b) request
return of equipment to its plant for repair, or c) perform necessary repair at the equipment's location.
In the event that RAD requests the return of equipment, each party shall pay one-way shipping costs.
RAD shall be released from all obligations under its warranty in the event that the equipment has been
subjected to misuse, neglect, accident or improper installation, or if repairs or modifications were
made by persons other than RAD's own authorized service personnel, unless such repairs by others
were made with the written consent of RAD.
The above warranty is in lieu of all other warranties, expressed or implied. There are no warranties
which extend beyond the face hereof, including, but not limited to, warranties of merchantability and
fitness for a particular purpose, and in no event shall RAD be liable for consequential damages.
RAD shall not be liable to any person for any special or indirect damages, including, but not limited to,
lost profits from any cause whatsoever arising from or in any way connected with the manufacture,
sale, handling, repair, maintenance or use of the LA-110, and in no event shall RAD's liability exceed
the purchase price of the LA-110.
DISTRIBUTOR shall be responsible to its customers for any and all warranties which it makes relating
to LA-110 and for ensuring that replacements and other adjustments required in connection with the
said warranties are satisfactory.
Software components in the LA-110 are provided "as is" and without warranty of any kind. RAD
disclaims all warranties including the implied warranties of merchantability and fitness for a particular
purpose. RAD shall not be liable for any loss of use, interruption of business or indirect, special,
incidental or consequential damages of any kind. In spite of the above RAD shall do its best to provide
error-free software products and shall offer free Software updates during the warranty period under
this Agreement.
RAD's cumulative liability to you or any other party for any loss or damages resulting from any claims,
demands, or actions arising out of or relating to this Agreement and the LA-110 shall not exceed the sum
paid to RAD for the purchase of the LA-110. In no event shall RAD be liable for any indirect, incidental,
consequential, special, or exemplary damages or lost profits, even if RAD has been advised of the
possibility of such damages.
This Agreement shall be construed and governed in accordance with the laws of the State of Israel.
General Safety Instructions
The following instructions serve as a general guide for the safe installation and operation of
telecommunications products. Additional instructions, if applicable, are included inside the manual.
Safety Symbols
This symbol may appear on the equipment or in the text. It indicates
potential safety hazards regarding product operation or maintenance to
operator or service personnel.
Warning
Danger of electric shock! Avoid any contact with the marked surface while
the product is energized or connected to outdoor telecommunication lines.
Protective earth: the marked lug or terminal should be connected to the building
protective earth bus.
Some products may be equipped with a laser diode. In such cases, a label
with the laser class and other warnings as applicable will be attached near
the optical transmitter. The laser warning symbol may be also attached.
Warning Please observe the following precautions:
• Before turning on the equipment, make sure that the fiber optic cable is
intact and is connected to the transmitter.
• Do not attempt to adjust the laser drive current.
• Do not use broken or unterminated fiber-optic cables/connectors or look
straight at the laser beam.
• The use of optical devices with the equipment will increase eye hazard.
• Use of controls, adjustments or performing procedures other than those
specified herein, may result in hazardous radiation exposure.
ATTENTION: The laser beam may be invisible!
Always observe standard safety precautions during installation, operation and maintenance of this
product. Only qualified and authorized service personnel should carry out adjustment, maintenance or
repairs to this product. No installation, adjustment, maintenance or repairs should be performed by
either the operator or the user.
Handling Energized Products
General Safety Practices
Do not touch or tamper with the power supply when the power cord is connected. Line voltages may
be present inside certain products even when the power switch (if installed) is in the OFF position or a
fuse is blown. For DC-powered products, although the voltages levels are usually not hazardous,
energy hazards may still exist.
Before working on equipment connected to power lines or telecommunication lines, remove jewelry
or any other metallic object that may come into contact with energized parts.
Unless otherwise specified, all products are intended to be grounded during normal use. Grounding is
provided by connecting the mains plug to a wall socket with a protective earth terminal. If an earth lug
is provided on the product, it should be connected to the protective earth at all times, by a wire with a
diameter of 18 AWG or wider. Rack-mounted equipment should be mounted only in earthed racks
and cabinets.
Always make the ground connection first and disconnect it last. Do not connect telecommunication
cables to ungrounded equipment. Make sure that all other cables are disconnected before
disconnecting the ground.
Connection of AC Mains
Make sure that the electrical installation complies with local codes.
Always connect the AC plug to a wall socket with a protective ground.
The maximum permissible current capability of the branch distribution circuit that supplies power to
the product is 16A. The circuit breaker in the building installation should have high breaking capacity
and must operate at short-circuit current exceeding 35A.
Always connect the power cord first to the equipment and then to the wall socket. If a power switch is
provided in the equipment, set it to the OFF position. If the power cord cannot be readily
disconnected in case of emergency, make sure that a readily accessible circuit breaker or emergency
switch is installed in the building installation.
Connection of DC Mains
Unless otherwise specified in the manual, the DC input to the equipment is floating in reference to the
ground. Any single pole can be externally grounded.
Due to the high current capability of DC mains systems, care should be taken when connecting the DC
supply to avoid short-circuits and fire hazards.
DC units should be installed in a restricted access area, i.e. an area where access is authorized only to
qualified service and maintenance personnel.
Make sure that the DC supply is electrically isolated from any AC source and that the installation
complies with the local codes.
The maximum permissible current capability of the branch distribution circuit that supplies power to
the product is 16A. The circuit breaker in the building installation should have high breaking capacity
and must operate at short-circuit current exceeding 35A.
Before connecting the DC supply wires, ensure that power is removed form the DC circuit. Locate the
circuit breaker of the panel board that services the equipment and switch it to the OFF position. When
connecting the DC supply wires, first connect the ground wire to the corresponding terminal, then the
positive pole and last the negative pole. Switch the circuit breaker back to the ON position.
A readily accessible disconnect device that is suitably rated and approved should be incorporated in
the building installation.
Connection of Data and Telecommunications Cables
Data and telecommunication interfaces are classified according to their safety status.
The following table lists the status of several standard interfaces. If the status of a given port differs from
the standard one, a notice will be given in the manual.
Note that this is a general list; it does not imply that LA-110 has all these ports.
Ports Safety Status

V.11, V.28, V.35, V.36, RS-530, SELV Safety Extra Low Voltage:
X.21, 10 BaseT, 100 BaseT,
Ports which do not present a safety hazard. Usually
Unbalanced E1, E2, E3, STM, DS-2,
up to 30 VAC or 60 VDC.
DS-3, S-Interface ISDN, Analog voice
E&M
xDSL (without feeding voltage), TNV-1 Telecommunication Network Voltage-1:
Balanced E1, T1, Sub E1/T1
Ports whose normal operating voltage is within the
limits of SELV, on which overvoltages from
telecommunications networks are possible.
FXS (Foreign Exchange Subscriber) TNV-2 Telecommunication Network Voltage-2:
Ports whose normal operating voltage exceeds the
limits of SELV (usually up to 120 VDC or telephone
ringing voltages), on which overvoltages from
telecommunication networks are not possible. These
ports are not permitted to be directly connected to
external telephone and data lines.
FXO (Foreign Exchange Office), xDSL TNV-3 Telecommunication Network Voltage-3:
(with feeding voltage), U-Interface
Ports whose normal operating voltage exceeds the
ISDN
limits of SELV (usually up to 120 VDC or telephone
ringing voltages), on which overvoltages from
telecommunication networks are possible.
Always connect a given port to a port of the same safety status. If in doubt, seek the assistance of a
qualified safety engineer.
Always make sure that the equipment is grounded before connecting telecommunication cables. Do
not disconnect the ground connection before disconnecting all telecommunications cables.
Some SELV and non-SELV circuits use the same connectors. Use caution when connecting cables.
Extra caution should be exercised during thunderstorms.
When using shielded or coaxial cables, verify that there is a good ground connection at both ends. The
earthing and bonding of the ground connections should comply with the local codes.
The telecommunication wiring in the building may be damaged or present a fire hazard in case of
contact between exposed external wires and the AC power lines. In order to reduce the risk, there are
restrictions on the diameter of wires in the telecom cables, between the equipment and the mating
connectors.
FXS Port
The FXS port of LA-110 is classified as TNV-3 per EN 60950 safety standard. The port will withstand
surges per ITU-T K.20 up to 1.5 kV without external current limiting circuits.
Caution To reduce the risk of fire, use only No. 26 AWG or larger telecommunication line cords.
Attention Pour réduire les risques s’incendie, utiliser seulement des conducteurs de
télécommunications 26 AWG ou de section supérieure.
Some ports are suitable for connection to intra-building or non-exposed wiring or cabling only. In such
cases, a notice will be given in the installation instructions.
Do not attempt to tamper with any carrier-provided equipment or connection hardware.
Electromagnetic Compatibility (EMC)

The equipment is designed and approved to comply with the electromagnetic regulations of major
regulatory bodies. The following instructions may enhance the performance of the equipment and will
provide better protection against excessive emission and better immunity against disturbances.
A good earth connection is essential. When installing the equipment in a rack, make sure to remove all
traces of paint from the mounting points. Use suitable lock-washers and torque. If an external
grounding lug is provided, connect it to the earth bus using braided wire as short as possible.
The equipment is designed to comply with EMC requirements when connecting it with unshielded
twisted pair (UTP) cables. However, the use of shielded wires is always recommended, especially for
high-rate data. In some cases, when unshielded wires are used, ferrite cores should be installed on
certain cables. In such cases, special instructions are provided in the manual.
Disconnect all wires which are not in permanent use, such as cables used for one-time configuration.
The compliance of the equipment with the regulations for conducted emission on the data lines is
dependent on the cable quality. The emission is tested for UTP with 80 dB longitudinal conversion loss
(LCL).
Unless otherwise specified or described in the manual, TNV-1 and TNV-3 ports provide secondary
protection against surges on the data lines. Primary protectors should be provided in the building
installation.
The equipment is designed to provide adequate protection against electro-static discharge (ESD).
However, it is good working practice to use caution when connecting cables terminated with plastic
connectors (without a grounded metal hood, such as flat cables) to sensitive data lines. Before
connecting such cables, discharge yourself by touching earth ground or wear an ESD preventive wrist
strap.
FCC-15 User Information
This equipment has been tested and found to comply with the limits of the Class A digital device,
pursuant to Part 15 of the FCC rules. These limits are designed to provide reasonable protection
against harmful interference when the equipment is operated in a commercial environment. This
equipment generates, uses and can radiate radio frequency energy and, if not installed and used in
accordance with the Installation and Operation manual, may cause harmful interference to the radio
communications. Operation of this equipment in a residential area is likely to cause harmful
interference in which case the user will be required to correct the interference at his own expense.
Canadian Emission Requirements

This Class A digital apparatus meets all the requirements of the Canadian Interference-Causing
Equipment Regulation.
Cet appareil numérique de la classe A respecte toutes les exigences du Règlement sur le matériel
brouilleur du Canada.
Warning per EN 55022 (CISPR-22)

Warning This is a class A product. In a domestic environment, this product may cause
radio interference, in which case the user will be required to take adequate
measures.
Cet appareil est un appareil de Classe A. Dans un environnement résidentiel, cet

Avertissement appareil peut provoquer des brouillages radioélectriques. Dans ces cas, il peut
être demandé à l’utilisateur de prendre les mesures appropriées.
Dieses ist ein Gerät der Funkstörgrenzwertklasse A. In Wohnbereichen können

Achtung bei Betrieb dieses Gerätes Rundfunkströrungen auftreten, in welchen Fällen der
Benutzer für entsprechende Gegenmaßnahmen verantwortlich ist.
Declaration of Conformity
Manufacturer's Name: RAD Data Communications Ltd.
Manufacturer's Address: 24 Raoul Wallenberg St.

Tel Aviv 69719
Israel
declares that the product:
Product Name: LA-110
conforms to the following standard(s) or other normative document(s):
EMC: EN 55022:1998 Information technology equipment – Radio disturbance

characteristics – Limits and methods of measurement.
EN 55024:1998 Information technology equipment – Immunity characteristics

– Limits and methods of measurement.
Safety: EN 60950: 2000 Safety of information technology equipment.
Supplementary Information:
The product herewith complies with the requirements of the EMC Directive 89/336/EEC, the Low
Voltage Directive 73/23/EEC and the R&TTE Directive 1999/5/EC. The product was tested in a typical
configuration.
Tel Aviv, 22nd January, 2003
Haim Karshen
VP Quality
European Contact: RAD Data Communications GmbH, Otto-Hahn-Str. 28-30, 85521

Ottobrunn-Riemerling, Germany
Preface
Foreword
This manual describes the technical characteristics, applications, installation and operation of
LA-110.
Manual Organization
This manual is organized as follows:
Chapter 1. Introduction
presents the main features and typical applications of the LA-110, describes the various
equipment versions, presents a functional description of the LA-110 and lists the
technical characteristics of the LA-110 systems.
Chapter 2. Installation
provides detailed installation instructions for LA-110 systems.
Chapter 3. Operation and Preliminary Configuration
provides general operating instructions and preliminary configuration instructions for
LA-110 systems.
Chapter 4. Diagnostics
describes the diagnostic functions supported by LA-110 units.
Chapter 5. Configuring LA-110 for Typical Applications
explains how to configure LA-104 for typical applications.
Appendix A. Connection Data
provides connection data for the LA-110.
Appendix B. Alarm Messages
explains the alarm messages generated by LA-110 systems.
Appendix C. Supervision Language
provides a command reference and detailed instructions for using the LA-110
supervision language.
Appendix D. Downloading of Software and Configuration Files
provides procedures for using the TFTP protocol to download (install) software and
upload/download LA-110 configuration files.
Appendix E. Database Initialization
provides instructions for initializing the LA-110 database (that is, reloading the
factory-default parameter values) as a means to recover in case it is not possible to
establish communication with the LA-110 using a terminal or a Telnet host.
Appendix F. Operating Environment
describes the operating environment of the LA-110, to provide the background
information required for understanding the LA-110 configuration parameters and its
performance monitoring capabilities.
Conventions
Note A note draws attention to a general rule for a procedure, or to exceptions to a rule.
A caution warns of possible damage to the equipment if a procedure is not

Caution
followed correctly.
A warning alerts to the presence of important operating and maintenance

(servicing) instructions in the literature accompanying the equipment. If these
instructions are not followed exactly, possible bodily injury may occur.
Warning
Contents
Chapter 1. Introduction
1.1 Overview..................................................................................................................... 1-1
Purpose ................................................................................................................................ 1-1
WAN Interfaces .................................................................................................................... 1-1
Local Interfaces..................................................................................................................... 1-2
Versions................................................................................................................................ 1-5
Management ........................................................................................................................ 1-6
Alarm Collection................................................................................................................... 1-7
Diagnostics and Statistics....................................................................................................... 1-7
1.2 Typical Applications..................................................................................................... 1-8
LAN Services ........................................................................................................................ 1-9
Leased Line Services over ATM ........................................................................................... 1-10
Frame Relay Support over ATM .......................................................................................... 1-13
VoDSL over LES.................................................................................................................. 1-14
1.3 Physical Description................................................................................................... 1-17
1.4 Functional Description............................................................................................... 1-19
Network Interface Subsystem .............................................................................................. 1-20
ATM Processor.................................................................................................................... 1-22
LAN Interface ..................................................................................................................... 1-23
Ethernet Payload Processor ................................................................................................. 1-23
Data Port Interface.............................................................................................................. 1-28
Data Port Payload Processor ...............................................................................................1-29
FXS User Ports .................................................................................................................... 1-30
ISDN User Port ................................................................................................................... 1-31
E1 User Port ....................................................................................................................... 1-32
DSP Option ........................................................................................................................ 1-34
Timing ................................................................................................................................ 1-35
Management Subsystem ..................................................................................................... 1-36
Statistics Collection ............................................................................................................. 1-39
Test and Diagnostics Capabilities......................................................................................... 1-40
Alarms ................................................................................................................................ 1-40
1.5 Technical Specifications............................................................................................. 1-41
ATM Features ..................................................................................................................... 1-41
Network Interfaces.............................................................................................................. 1-41
User Interfaces.................................................................................................................... 1-42
General .............................................................................................................................. 1-45
Chapter 2. Installation
2.1 Introduction................................................................................................................. 2-1
Safety Precautions................................................................................................................. 2-2
Protection against Electrostatic Discharge (ESD) ..................................................................... 2-2
2.2 Site Requirements........................................................................................................ 2-3
Physical Requirements .......................................................................................................... 2-3
Power Requirements............................................................................................................. 2-3
Uplink and User Connections ............................................................................................... 2-4
Management Connections .................................................................................................... 2-5
Front and Rear Panel Clearance ............................................................................................ 2-5
Ambient Requirements ......................................................................................................... 2-5
2.3 Package Contents ........................................................................................................ 2-5
2.4 Unpacking LA-110....................................................................................................... 2-6
LA-110 Installation and Operation Manual i

Table of Contents
2.5 LA-110 Enclosures ....................................................................................................... 2-6

LA-110 Front Panel............................................................................................................... 2-6
LA-110 Rear Panels............................................................................................................... 2-6
2.6 Preparing the LA-110 Unit for Installation .................................................................... 2-8
Preparations for Installation – LA-110 Units with Uplink E1 Interface ..................................... 2-8
2.7 Installing the LA-110 Unit .......................................................................................... 2-11
2.8 Connecting the Interfaces .......................................................................................... 2-11
Connecting Uplink.............................................................................................................. 2-11
Connecting User Interfaces ................................................................................................. 2-12
Connecting a Terminal........................................................................................................ 2-13
Connecting LA-110 to Management Station or Telnet Host.................................................. 2-13
2.9 Connecting the Power ............................................................................................... 2-13
Connecting the Internal Power Supply ................................................................................ 2-13
Connecting the External Power Supply ................................................................................ 2-14
Chapter 3. Operation and Preliminary Configuration
3.1 Operating Instructions ................................................................................................. 3-1
Turn-on Procedure ............................................................................................................... 3-1
Normal Indications ............................................................................................................... 3-3
Turn-off Procedure ............................................................................................................... 3-4
3.2 Preliminary Configuration Using Plug & Play ................................................................ 3-4
General Information ............................................................................................................. 3-4
Preparations ......................................................................................................................... 3-5
Procedure for Plug & Play ..................................................................................................... 3-5
3.3 Preliminary Configuration ............................................................................................ 3-6
Forced Login......................................................................................................................... 3-6
Preparation for Preliminary Configuration.............................................................................. 3-7
Starting a Configuration Session............................................................................................. 3-8
General Procedures for Web Browsers .................................................................................. 3-9
3.4 LA-110 Supervision Language .................................................................................... 3-12
Supervision Language Syntax...............................................................................................3-12
General Configuration Procedure........................................................................................ 3-14
Ending a Configuration Session............................................................................................ 3-17
Index of Commands ........................................................................................................... 3-18
3.5 Menu Structure.......................................................................................................... 3-22
Chapter 4. Diagnostics
4.1 Diagnostic Tests ........................................................................................................... 4-1
LOOPback Functions............................................................................................................ 4-1
REMOTE NETWORK Loopback ............................................................................................ 4-1
LOCAL DATA Loopback ....................................................................................................... 4-2
REMOTE DATA Loopback .................................................................................................... 4-3
REMOTE USER Loopback ..................................................................................................... 4-3
LOCAL USER Loopback........................................................................................................ 4-4
REMOTE REMOTE DATA Loopback ..................................................................................... 4-5
4.2 Troubleshooting........................................................................................................... 4-6
Troubleshooting Using LA-110 Indications ............................................................................ 4-6
Troubleshooting Voice Transmission Supported by ISDN Ports .............................................. 4-8
Troubleshooting Voice Transmission Supported by FXS Ports ................................................. 4-8
Troubleshooting Data and E1 Ports .......................................................................................4-8
Troubleshooting LAN Services............................................................................................... 4-9
4.3 Frequently Asked Questions ........................................................................................ 4-9
4.4 Technical Support...................................................................................................... 4-11
ii LA-110 Installation and Operation Manual

Table of Contents
Chapter 5. Configuring LA-110 for Typical Applications

5.1 Introduction................................................................................................................. 5-1
5.2 Configuring Timing Reference...................................................................................... 5-1
5.3 Configuring Network Uplink ........................................................................................ 5-2
Application ........................................................................................................................... 5-2
Configuration Procedure ....................................................................................................... 5-3
5.4 Configuring Serial Data Port......................................................................................... 5-6
Frame Relay to Frame Relay Network Interworking (FRF.5).................................................... 5-6
Frame Relay to ATM – Service Interworking (FRF.8)............................................................... 5-8
Transferring Structured AAL1 Bit Stream on Data Port ......................................................... 5-10
Transferring Unstructured AAL1 Bit Stream on Data Port ..................................................... 5-16
5.5 E1 Port Applications................................................................................................... 5-18
Transmitting Fractional E1 over ATM-CES............................................................................ 5-18
Transmitting Full E1 over AAL1 ........................................................................................... 5-21
Transmitting PRI over AAL2 - LES ........................................................................................ 5-23
Transmitting E1 UNI over SHDSL ........................................................................................ 5-25
5.6 FXS Port Application .................................................................................................. 5-27
FXS Loop Emulation Service (LES) – with ELCP .................................................................... 5-27
FXS Loop Emulation Service (LES) – without ELCP ............................................................... 5-29
5.7 ISDN Applications ..................................................................................................... 5-31
ISDN Loop Emulation Service (LES) ..................................................................................... 5-31
ISDN PRI/Phone Extension over ATM.................................................................................. 5-33
5.8 LAN Port Applications................................................................................................ 5-36
Configuring LA-110 for a Typical Bridging Application ......................................................... 5-36
Configuring LA-110 for a Typical Routing Application.......................................................... 5-38
Configuring LA-110 for a Typical VLAN-Aware Application.................................................. 5-40
Typical LAN Applications .................................................................................................... 5-42
Appendix A. Connection Wiring (Pin Assignment)

Appendix B. Alarm Messages
Appendix C. Supervision Language
Appendix D. Transferring Software and Configuration Files
Appendix E. Database Initialization
Appendix F. Operating Environment
LA-110 Installation and Operation Manual iii

Table of Contents
List of Figures
1-1. Typical Application................................................................................................................ 1-8
1-2. Basic IP Router Application ................................................................................................. 1-10
1-3. Providing Leased Line Services ............................................................................................ 1-11
1-4. Typical AAL1 Stream Application......................................................................................... 1-11
1-5. Fractional E1 Application..................................................................................................... 1-12
1-6. Basic Frame Relay Application – Network Interworking Mode ............................................. 1-14
1-7. Basic Frame Relay Application – Service Interworking Mode ............................................... 1-14
1-8. VoDSL Application Using LES over AAL2 ............................................................................. 1-15
1-9. Using LES over AAL2 for Voice Traffic Carried by the LA-110 E1 Port .................................. 1-15
1-10. LA-110 3D View ............................................................................................................... 1-17
1-11. Typical LA-110 Rear Panel (V.35 Data Port) ....................................................................... 1-17
1-12. Typical LA-110 Rear Panel (Four ISDN Ports) ..................................................................... 1-18
1-13. Typical LA-110 AC Power Supply Unit .............................................................................. 1-18
1-14. LA-110 Functional Block Diagram ..................................................................................... 1-19
1-15. Firewall ............................................................................................................................. 1-26
1-16. Mapping E1 UNI into SHDSL ............................................................................................ 1-34
2-1. Typical LA-110 Front Panel ................................................................................................... 2-6

2-2. Typical LA-110 Rear Panel (V.35 Data Port) .......................................................................... 2-7
2-3. Typical LA-110 Rear Panel (Four ISDN Ports) ........................................................................ 2-7
2-4. LA-110 Cover Screws ............................................................................................................ 2-8
2-5. Releasing LA-110 Cover Catches ........................................................................................... 2-9
2-6. LA-110, Location of E1 Interface Jumpers ............................................................................ 2-10
2-7. Closing the LA-110 Cover.................................................................................................... 2-11
2-8. External Power Supply Unit ................................................................................................. 2-15
3-1. Forced Login ......................................................................................................................... 3-7

3-2. Web Browser Access, Typical Log-in Window ...................................................................... 3-10
3-3. Web Browser Access, User Name and Password Entry Window .......................................... 3-11
3-4. Web Browser Access, Typical Main Menu Window .............................................................. 3-11
3-5. Main Menu and Inventory ................................................................................................... 3-23
3-6. Configuration > System Menu (General Parameters, Clock, Control Port, Date & Time)...... 3-23
3-7. Configuration > System (Management) ............................................................................... 3-24
3-8. Configuration > Physical Layer............................................................................................ 3-25
3-9. Configuration > Logical Layer > ATM and E1 ..................................................................... 3-26
3-10. Configuration > Logical Layer > ISDN.............................................................................. 3-26
3-11. Configuration > Logical Layer > FXS ................................................................................ 3-27
3-12. Configuration > Logical Layer > Serial.............................................................................. 3-28
3-13. Configuration > Logical Layer > LAN (Router) .................................................................. 3-29
3-14. Configuration > Logical Layer > LAN (Bridge) .................................................................. 3-29
3-15. Configuration > Logical Layer > LAN (VLAN-Aware) ........................................................ 3-30
3-16. Monitoring > System and Physical Layer ........................................................................... 3-30
3-17. Monitoring > Logical Layer (ATM)..................................................................................... 3-31
3-18. Monitoring > Logical Layer (User, LAN, Serial).................................................................. 3-31
3-19. Diagnostics........................................................................................................................ 3-31
3-20. S/W & File Transfer ........................................................................................................... 3-32
iv LA-110 Installation and Operation Manual

Table of Contents
4-1. REMOTE NETWORK Loopback............................................................................................. 4-2

4-2. LOCAL DATA Loopback........................................................................................................ 4-2
4-3. REMOTE DATA Loopback..................................................................................................... 4-3
4-4. REMOTE USER Loopback...................................................................................................... 4-4
4-5. LOCAL USER Loopback ........................................................................................................ 4-4
4-6. REMOTE REMOTE DATA Loopback...................................................................................... 4-5
5-1. Network Uplink Configuration............................................................................................... 5-2

5-2. Def Network – SHDSL .......................................................................................................... 5-3
5-3. Def Network – ADSL............................................................................................................. 5-4
5-4. Dsp Network – SHDSL .......................................................................................................... 5-5
5-5. Dsp Network – ADSL ............................................................................................................ 5-5
5-6. FR to FR Application.............................................................................................................. 5-6
5-7. Def Data – FR to FR .............................................................................................................. 5-6
5-8. Add Conn Data – FR to FR .................................................................................................... 5-7
5-9. Dsp Data – FRF.5 .................................................................................................................. 5-7
5-10. Dsp Conn Data – FRF.5....................................................................................................... 5-8
5-11. FR to ATM Application ........................................................................................................ 5-8
5-12. Def Data – FRF.8................................................................................................................. 5-9
5-13. Add Conn Data – FRF.8 ...................................................................................................... 5-9
5-14. Dsp Data – FRF.8 .............................................................................................................. 5-10
5-15. Dsp Conn Data – FRF.8..................................................................................................... 5-10
5-16. Structured AAL1 Connection on Data Port ........................................................................ 5-11
5-17. Def Sysparams – AAL1 Site A............................................................................................. 5-11
5-18. Def User – AAL1 Site A ..................................................................................................... 5-12
5-19. Add Bundle – AAL1 Site A................................................................................................. 5-12
5-20. Add Conn User – AAL1 Site A ........................................................................................... 5-13
5-21. Def Sysparams – AAL1 Site B............................................................................................. 5-13
5-22. Def Data – AAL1 Site B ..................................................................................................... 5-13
5-23. Add Conn Data – AAL1 Site B ........................................................................................... 5-14
5-24. Dsp Pm Data – AAL1 ........................................................................................................ 5-15
5-25. Dsp Pm User – AAL1......................................................................................................... 5-15
5-26. Unstructured AAL1 Connection on Data Port .................................................................... 5-16
5-27. Def Sysparams – AAL1 Unstructured ................................................................................. 5-16
5-28. Def Data – AAL1 Unstructured.......................................................................................... 5-16
5-29. Add Conn Data – AAL1 Unstructured................................................................................ 5-17
5-30. Dsp Pm Data – AAL1 Unstructured ................................................................................... 5-17
5-31. FE1 over ATM-CES Application.......................................................................................... 5-18
5-32. Def Sysparams – FE1 over ATM-CES.................................................................................. 5-18
5-33. Def User – FE1 over ATM-CES........................................................................................... 5-19
5-34. Add Bundle – FE1 over ATM-CES ...................................................................................... 5-19
5-35. Add Conn User – FE1 over ATM-CES ................................................................................ 5-20
5-36. Dsp Pm User – FE1 over ATM-CES .................................................................................... 5-20
5-37. Full E1 over AAL1.............................................................................................................. 5-21
5-38. Def Sysparams – Full E1 over AAL1 ................................................................................... 5-21
5-39. Def User – Full E1 over AAL1 ............................................................................................ 5-21
5-40. Add Conn User – Full E1 over AAL1 .................................................................................. 5-22
5-41. Dsp Pm User – Full E1 over AAL1...................................................................................... 5-22
5-42. PRI over AAL2 Application ................................................................................................ 5-23
LA-110 Installation and Operation Manual v

Table of Contents
5-43. Def Sysparams – PRI.......................................................................................................... 5-24

5-44. Add PRI............................................................................................................................. 5-25
5-45. E1 UNI over SHDSL Application........................................................................................ 5-25
5-46. Def Sysparams................................................................................................................... 5-26
5-47. Def User – E1 UNI ............................................................................................................ 5-26
5-48. FXS LES Application........................................................................................................... 5-27
5-49. Def Sysparams – FXS LES................................................................................................... 5-28
5-50. Dsp Conn User – FXS LES.................................................................................................. 5-29
5-51. FXS LES Application........................................................................................................... 5-29
5-52. Def Sysparams – FXS LES – without ELCP .......................................................................... 5-30
5-53. Dsp Conn Use – FXS LES –without ELCP ........................................................................... 5-31
5-54. ISDN LES Application ........................................................................................................ 5-31
5-55. Def Sysparams – ISDN LES ................................................................................................ 5-32
5-56. ISDN PRI Extension over ATM........................................................................................... 5-33
5-57. ISDN Phone Extension over ATM ...................................................................................... 5-33
5-58. Def Sysparams................................................................................................................... 5-34
5-59. Def User ........................................................................................................................... 5-35
5-60. Dsp Conn User.................................................................................................................. 5-35
5-61. Bridging Application .......................................................................................................... 5-36
5-62. Def LAN – Bridging ........................................................................................................... 5-36
5-63. Add Bridge Interface.......................................................................................................... 5-37
5-64. DSP PM LAN – Bridging .................................................................................................... 5-37
5-65. LAN Routing Application ................................................................................................... 5-38
5-66. Def LAN – LAN Routing .................................................................................................... 5-38
5-67. Add IP Interface – LAN Routing ......................................................................................... 5-38
5-68. Add IP Interface – WAN Routing ....................................................................................... 5-39
5-69. Def Default Gateway – LAN Routing ................................................................................. 5-39
5-70. Ping – LAN Routing ........................................................................................................... 5-39
5-71. Dsp Pm LAN – LAN Routing.............................................................................................. 5-40
5-72. VLAN-Aware Application................................................................................................... 5-40
5-73. DEF LAN – VLAN aware.................................................................................................... 5-41
5-74. ADD BRIDGE INTERFACE................................................................................................. 5-41
5-75. ADD BP (LAN) .................................................................................................................. 5-41
5-76. ADD BP (WAN)................................................................................................................. 5-42
5-77. ADD VLAN MEMBER ........................................................................................................ 5-42
5-78. Def LAN – PPPoA WAN interface with DHCP Server ........................................................ 5-43
5-79. Add IP Interface – PPPoA WAN interface with DHCP Server ............................................. 5-43
5-80. Def Sysparams – PPPoA WAN interface with DHCP Server ............................................... 5-43
5-81. Add DHCP – PPPoA WAN interface with DHCP Server .................................................... 5-44
5-82. Add WAN interface – PPPoA WAN Interface with DHCP Server ....................................... 5-45
5-83. Add NAT – PPPoA WAN interface with DHCP Server ....................................................... 5-45
5-84. Def Default Gateway – PPPoA WAN interface with DHCP Server ..................................... 5-46
5-85. Add IP Interface – PPPoA WAN interface with DHCP server and HOST address ............... 5-46
5-86. Add NAT Transparent – PPPoA WAN Interface with DHCP Server and HOST Address...... 5-46
5-87. Add NAT Single – PPPoA WAN Interface with DHCP Server and HOST Address............... 5-47
5-88. Add PAT – PPPoA WAN Interface with DHCP Server and HOST Address.......................... 5-47
5-89. Add IP Interface – Add Another Subnet for Intranet Only .................................................. 5-47
5-90. Add NAT Transparent – Enable Access from the WAN to the Second Subnet .................... 5-48
5-91. Add NAT Single – Enable Access from the WAN to the Second Subnet.............................. 5-48
vi LA-110 Installation and Operation Manual

Table of Contents
5-92. Add PAT – PAT for HTTP Server........................................................................................ 5-49

5-93. Add PAT – PAT for Mail Server .......................................................................................... 5-49
5-94. Add PAT – PAT for FTP Server........................................................................................... 5-49
List of Tables
1-1. LA-110 Versions .................................................................................................................... 1-5
1-2. Default (Plug & Play) CID Assignment.................................................................................. 1-17
1-3. Typical Ranges for SHDSL Network Interface ...................................................................... 1-21
2-1. LA-110 Front Panel Indicators ................................................................................................ 2-6

2-2. LA-110 Rear Panel Components............................................................................................ 2-7
3-1. General LA-110 Configuration Procedure............................................................................ 3-14

3-2. Configuration Screens and Commands ................................................................................ 3-18
4-1. Troubleshooting Chart ........................................................................................................... 4-6
LA-110 Installation and Operation Manual vii

Table of Contents
viii LA-110 Installation and Operation Manual

Chapter 1
Introduction
1.1 Overview
Purpose
LA-110 is an advanced ATM Integrated Access Device (IAD) that provides voice,
data and LAN services over ATM networks for small and medium-sized businesses.
The services supported by LA-110 include:
• High-quality leased lines for analog voice or data
• ISDN BRI or PRI access
• High-speed data (serial and Frame Relay)
• Ethernet with MAC bridge and IP router for LAN-to-LAN or Internet access.
This wide range of services provides maximum flexibility for service integration,
ease of use and scalability. Moreover, LA-110 uses cost-effective xDSL lines for
connection to the ATM network, offering long range over widely available twisted
wire pairs.
LA-110 is a compact unit in a stylized plastic case with low power consumption
that can easily fit on any desktop, however it can also be installed in standard
equipment racks.
WAN Interfaces
Physical Interfaces
The LA-110 has one WAN (uplink) port, used to connect to the ATM network (this
port is often referred to as an uplink port). The WAN port can be ordered with one
of the following interfaces:
• 2-wire or 4-wire SHDSL interface in accordance with ITU-T Rec. G.991.2
• ADSL interface in accordance with ITU-T Rec. G.992.1 (Annex A). The
interface can be configured to use either echo canceling or frequency division
multiplex (FDM). In addition, the ADSL interface can be configured to support
signal formats defined in additional standards and particular implementations,
for example, ANSI T1.413, etc.
• E1 interface.
Overview 1-1
Chapter 1 Introduction LA-110 Installation and Operation Manual
ATM Network Interface

The ATM network interface provides an ATM user-network interface (UNI) per
ATM User-Network Interface (UNI) Specification (Version 3.1). The interface
supports the following ATM adaptation layers:
• AAL1 – used for transparent transport of serial data streams, and for circuit
emulation services (CES)
• AAL2 – used to provide ATM Forum Loop Emulation Services (LES), which
support PSTN and ISDN BRI and PRI access
• AAL5 – used for packet traffic (Frame Relay, Ethernet, IP).
The network port supports a wide range of ATM service categories (Classes of
Service – CoS in ITU-T terminology): CBR, VBR, UBR and UBR+. The LA-110
supports per-connection user-configurable traffic shaping and traffic contract
enforcing, for improved QoS and efficient utilization of the ATM uplink
bandwidth.
Local Interfaces
The LA-110 can be equipped with up to three local ports (see also the Versions
section below):
• LAN port
• Data port (ordering option)
• User port (ordering option).
The types and main characteristics of the local interfaces available for these
LA-110 ports are described below.
LAN Port
The LAN port has an Ethernet 10/100BaseT interface. The port operating rate
(10 or 100 Mbps) and operating mode (half or full duplex) can be determined by
autonegotiation, or by manual configuration. Automatic MDIX allows using straight
or crossed cables for the LAN connection.
Note The automatic MDIX is supported by the LA-110 units with the data and E1
interfaces.
The user can configure the LAN port to serve either as a MAC bridge or IP router:
• MAC Bridge. The MAC bridge can be configured with up to 16 WAN ports
(each using its own PVC). It can provide access-only functionality (between
LAN and WAN), or full bridge functionality (LAN access and switching among
the WAN ports). The MAC bridge accepts static MAC addresses.
In the MAC bridge mode, LA-110 can be configured to transfer PPP over
Ethernet (PPPoE) traffic.
• VLAN Handling. LA-110 bridge operation supports VLAN-unaware and
VLAN-aware modes. One bridge port is configured on the Ethernet side and
up to 16 ports on the ATM side. LA-110 supports up to 16 VCs that can be
assigned to the bridge ports (up to 3 VCs per bridge port in order to handle
priority-tagged frames). Depending on the LA-110 position in the network, the
bridge can be configured to permit or prohibit VC to VC traffic.
1-2 Overview
LA-110 Installation and Operation Manual Chapter 1 Introduction
In the VLAN-unaware mode, LA-110 forwards packets according to their

MAC address only. VLAN tags are ignored and remain intact when passing
from the bridge.
In the VLAN-aware mode, the LA-110 bridge learns, floods and forwards
packets according to the MAC and VID values. The packets can be
forwarded only to the bridge ports that are members of the packet’s VID, or
if it was appended to it during the ingress process.
• IP Router. The IP router supports static routing and user-selectable routing
protocols (RIP1 and/or RIP2). The user can configure 1 or 2 IP ports on the
LAN side (sharing the physical LAN port), and up to 16 WAN ports (each using
its own PVC). The user can also configure a separate host IP port for router
management, for example, for RIP updates.
In addition to routing functions, the IP router can also provide
user-configurable DHCP relay or server services, and various types of address
translation services (NAT/NAPT and PAT).
In the IP router mode, the LA-110 can be configured to use encapsulation per
RFC2684 (which replaces RFC1483), or transfer the traffic using PPP over ATM
(PPPoA). The user can select the PPP transport method (VC multiplexing or
LLC encapsulation) per RFC2364. For PPP traffic, the LA-110 supports PAP
and CHAP client authentication.
DNS Relay
• LA-110 can be activated as a DNS relay. The hosts on the Local LAN initiate
DNS requests to the LA-110, and then LA-110 forwards the DNS requests
toward the DNS server (the address of the DNS server is given by the PPP
mechanism). The reply from the DNS server is forwarded to the host by
LA-110.
Firewall
In order to provide a security environment to the network, LA-110 has a built-in
firewall that tracks and controls the flow of the communication.
Optional Data Port

The data port is a synchronous serial port with DCE interface. The interface type is
V.35or X.21. The port can be configured to operate at rates of n×64 kbps in the
range of 64 to 2048 kbps.
The service type is user-configurable:
• Transparent transmission of serial data stream
• Frame Relay service for connection to Frame Relay equipment. Up to 16
DLCIs are supported. The user can select between service interworking per
FRF.8 and network interworking per FRF.5.
Optional User Port

The optional user port can be ordered with one of the following configurations:
• Voice Interfaces. These interfaces support voice-over-DSL (VoDSL)
applications. You can order one of the following voice interfaces:
Overview 1-3
Four analog voice/fax ports with FXS interfaces (POTS service). Each FXS
interface provides feed current, on-hook/off-hook detection and ringing to
the user’s phone set. The FXS ports include near-end echo canceling.
Four ISDN S0 BRI ports for connection to user’s ISDN terminals (service).
Each port carries two payload (B) channels, for a total of 8 payload
channels. The interface type, NT or TE, is selectable. NT interfaces provide
phantom feed to user’s terminals.
Voice is transmitted using toll-quality 64 kbps PCM modulation per ITU-T Rec.
G.711, with user-selected companding law (A-law or µ-law). To reduce the
uplink bandwidth needed for voice transmission, voice compression using
32 kbps ADPCM encoding per ITU-T Rec. G.726 can be ordered.
In addition to PCM/ADPCM conversion, the ADPCM digital signal processor
also performs echo canceling for ISDN channels; if ADPCM is not used, echo
canceling for ISDN channels can be separately ordered.
The voice channels enable full-service access to PSTN or private networks via
voice gateways supporting the ATM Forum Loop Emulation Services (LES)
standard. AF-VMOA-0145.000. LA-110 also supports the Emulated Loop
Control Protocol (ELCP), which enables the voice gateway to remotely
configure the voice channels operational profile.
For compatibility with national implementations, the PSTN signaling
characteristics are user-selectable.
• E1 (2048 kbps) Port. The LA-110 can be equipped with one E1 port
complying with ITU-T Rec. G.703. The port has two interfaces, 120Ω
balanced and 75Ω unbalanced; at any time, only one interface can be active.
The operating mode of this port can be configured for a wide range of
applications. The supported modes depend on the user-selected AAL:
AAL1: G732N or G732S framed service, with or without support for CRC-4
in accordance with ITU-T Rec. G.706. When G732S framing is used, the
E1 port supports channel-associated signaling (CAS). CAS enables
connection to digital PBXs and other TDM equipment (multiplexers, digital
cross-connect (DXC) switches, etc.).
When using the framed mode, the E1 signal is transported using the ATM
Circuit Emulation Service (CES) Version 2.0, AF-VTOA-0078.000. The
LA-110 supports two CES modes:
Structured CES mode: LA-110 handles the incoming signal as
independent user-defined bundles of N × 64 kbps channels that can be
independently routed over different VC connections
Unstructured CES mode: LA-110 handles the incoming signal as a single
bit stream transported over a single VC connection.
For optimum utilization of available uplink bandwidth, dynamic bandwidth
CES (DB-CES) is also supported. When using DB-CES, the LA-110 uses the
voice channel activity information carried by CAS to request uplink
bandwidth when the channel is active (off-hook) and release the bandwidth
when the channel is idle (on-hook).
When the optional ADPCM voice compression and echo canceller option is
installed, the user can select for each individual timeslots the modulation
type (PCM or ADPCM) and the use of echo canceling.
1-4 Overview
With AAL1, the E1 port can also be configured for unframed (transparent)
service. In this mode, the 2.048 Mbps signal received by the LA-110 E1
port is transparently transferred on a bit-by-bit basis.
AAL2: when AAL2 is selected, the LA-110 uses LES for voice support, with
or without ELCP. The user can select from a range of application identifiers,
which determine the supported signaling methods:
CAS signaling (always without ELCP)
PSTN signaling (providing V5.2 functionality) for voice channels, with or
without ELCP
Digital Signaling System 1 (DSS1) for ISDN BRI and PRI, with or without
ELCP.
The voice service characteristics are similar to those described above for
FXS and ISDN ports.
When the ELCP protocol is enabled, the voice gateway can control the
profile in use (however, some functions depend on whether the optional
ADPCM voice compression and/or echo canceller option is installed). The
profile determines the modulation type (PCM or ADPCM), as well as the
utilization of the individual timeslots. Moreover, with ELCP, the voice
gateway can automatically download the required voice and ISDN channel
configuration without requiring manual configuration activities (a feature
referred to as plug-&-play channel configuration).
With AAL2, the E1 port can also be configured for remote access ISDN PRI,
using DSS1 with ELCP support. The user can specify the active timeslots on
the PRI trunk.
In addition, LA-110 accepts E1 UNI data stream and transmits it
transparently over SHDSL line.
Versions
The local interfaces that can be ordered for each of the three ports described
above depend on the uplink (network) interface type. Table 1-1 lists the LA-110
versions in accordance with the interfaces that can be ordered for each type of
network interface.
Table 1-1. LA-110 Versions
Local Port Network Interface
SHDSL ADSL E1
LAN port Supported Supported Supported
Data port Supported Supported Not supported
User port:
• Voice ports (FXS or ISDN) Supported Supported Not supported
• E1 port Supported Not supported Supported
Overview 1-5
Management
Management Functions
The LA-110 has a local management subsystem that controls the operation of all of
its circuits. The subsystem supports various management interfaces, including
inband and out-of-band (SNMP) management, Telnet, and local management via
an ASCII terminal or a Web browser. RADview management software is also
available to support large networks.
The local management subsystem can communicate through the following ports:
• Dedicated serial RS-232 port, intended for direct connection to a simple ASCII
terminal (or a PC running any terminal emulation utility). The port provides
access to the entire available configuration, diagnostics, performance and
alarm monitoring functions. All the necessary software is stored in LA-110; no
data is stored in the terminal.
• Inband management via the ATM uplink, using SNMP or Telnet. Telnet has the
same capabilities and uses the same procedures as the terminal. The LA-110
SNMP agent supports all the standard MIBs for E1, xDSL, Frame Relay, CES
and DB-CES as well as the private RAD MIBs.
• Out of band management via the LAN port using SNMP and Telnet. This
option is supported when the LAN port is configured to use the IP router.
The operation of the LA-110 management subsystem and of its other circuits is
determined by software stored in flash memory. The software can be updated
from a remote central location, using TFTP or from a terminal directly connected
to the LA-110 serial control port.
Automatic Configuration Options (Plug & Play)

The LA-110 is designed to enable automatic configuration from a remote location,
without requiring the intervention of an operator (plug & play functionality).
Plug & play means that after the LA-110 is installed and connected to its operating
environment, the unit needs only to be powered up. The LA-110 supports two
automatic configuration methods:
• Fully automatic configuration using DHCP in conjunction with TFTP. To use
this method, the using organization must configure a DHCP server, located at
an appropriate location within the operator’s network management center.
When the LA-110 is powered up, it automatically starts operating as a DHCP
client and broadcasts a DHCP server discovery message.
When the dedicated DHCP server answers, it provides the IP address to be
configured as the LA-110 inband management address and information
needed to retrieve a configuration file from a TFTP server. The LA-110 then
uses the parameters received from the DHCP server to retrieve its
configuration file using TFTP, and starts using the downloaded configuration.
• Alternative mechanism based on automatic learning of its inband management
IP address. This mechanism is active as long as the default parameter values
are in effect: LA-110 then learns its inband management IP address from the
destination IP address carried in the first IP packet received through the default
inband management VCC. This is sufficient for Telnet access.
1-6 Overview
Moreover, if the first packet is an SNMP packet, LA-110 also adds the source IP
address as a manager. After learning these parameters, the plug-&-play
functionality is disabled, and the LA-110 is subject to the regular management
and configuration rules. TFTP can then be used to download a configuration file.
Note Whenever necessary, the plug-&-play functionality can be enabled again by
restoring the factory-default parameters.
The automatic configuration method used by the LA-110 upon power-up is
determined by its factory-default parameters, specified at ordering time.
Alarm Collection
The LA-110 management subsystem monitors on-line critical functions. The
subsystem generates time-stamped alarm messages that cover all the system
events. The time stamp is provided by an internal real-time clock. The alarm
messages can be read on-line by means of the local supervisory terminal or a Telnet
host, and are automatically sent as traps to selected management stations.
The alarms log file can also be sent, using TFTP, to a remote host.
Diagnostics and Statistics

LA-110 offers comprehensive diagnostics and statistics for all its ports and network
layers. The LA-110 supports the following diagnostics and statistics functions:
• Collection of application layer performance statistics
• ATM layer performance statistics and control (OAM support). The end-to-end
and segment QoS is evaluated using F5 OAM cells, including AIS, RDI, LB, CC
and activation cells.
• Physical layer diagnostics: loopback tests and performance statistics.
The collected data enables the system administrator to monitor the transmission
performance, and thus the quality of service provided to users, for statistical
purposes, and can also be used to identify transmission problems.
In addition, the LA-110 supports the ICMP ping function for IP connectivity
testing.
Typical Applications 1-7

1.2 Typical Applications

Figure 1-1 shows a network using several LA-110 in typical applications that
illustrate its versatility.
POTS
Network
Management
Station
LA-110
PSTN
ATM over
SHDSL V.35
V5.2
Ro uter
ATM Public ATM ATM

Network
Voice Gateway ATM over ISDN
DS LAM ADSL
ATM
BAS
IP
LA-110
Internet
ATM over
SHDSL
LAN
E1
LA-110
PBX
Figure 1-1. Typical Application
The uplink (WAN) side of each LA-110 is connected to the ATM network via a
DSLAM, using SHDSL or ADSL. The range over SHDSL or ADSL, when using a
single twisted pair, can be up to several kilometers.
In the applications shown in Figure 1-1, LA-110 units serve several phones (POTS
or ISDN terminals), digital PBX and various types of data equipment.
The voice traffic received through the FXS (POTS) and ISDN user ports is carried
over AAL2. The use of AAL2 allows dynamic use of bandwidth, and also enables
multiple voice circuits to be carried simultaneously over a single VC using ELCP.
The voice traffic is terminated at a voice gateway, which provides the connection
to the PSTN through V5.2 trunks.
The E1 port can be used as a voice port over AAL2. In addition, the port can also
be used as a fractional E1 port over AAL1. In this case, the port supports voice and
data traffic, with selectable service characteristics that meet the requirements of a
wide range of applications.
1-8 Typical Applications

The data traffic supported by the Ethernet LAN port, or by the data port (either
serial synchronous data or Frame Relay traffic) is carried on AAL5, with the ATM
service category (UBR, UBR+, VBR or CBR) being selected in accordance with the
application requirements. Data traffic transported through the ATM network is
terminated at the Broadband Access Server (BAS). The BAS converts the ATM data
streams into IP packets for Internet access.
Additional details on the wide range of services supported by the LA-110 and its
various capabilities are given below.
LAN Services
The LA-110 LAN port supports autonegotiation, for automatic adaptation to the
operating mode of the Ethernet LAN to which it is connected.
The LAN port can be configured to operate either as a MAC bridge, or as an IP
router.
• The MAC bridge provides Layer 2 connectivity with transparent VLAN support
for the user’s equipment. PPPoE traffic can also be transparently transferred.
• The IP router provides Layer 3 connectivity. Routing can be based on the
RIP1, RIP2 or both; static routes can also be defined. For flexibility, two LAN
ports can be defined over the physical LAN port of the LA-110, with their IP
addresses in different subnets.
Note When the LAN port is configured as bridge, an inband management IP address must
be defined.
When the LAN port is configured as IP router, the LA-110 management subsystem
also uses the IP addresses of the ports for out-of-band access.
Both the MAC bridge and the IP router can be configured to support multiple
WAN connections (up to 16) for routing to different destinations. Each connection
is defined over a separate PVC. The user can configure for each PVC the ATM
connection parameters, and therefore can control the uplink bandwidth that may
be used for each destination.
Figure 1-2 shows a basic application using the LA-110 LAN services to provide
Internet access to the user’s equipment connected to its LAN port. The LA-110
data and user ports may also be used together with the LAN port, however for
clarity in Figure 1-2 only the utilization of the LAN port is shown.
An important advantage of LA-110 is that it can provide all the additional services
normally available on standalone IP routers:
• DHCP services. The LA-110 can be configured in accordance with the user’s
application requirements either as a DHCP relay or server:
In the DHCP relay mode, the LA-110 relays DHCP requests from the LAN
port to a specified DHCP server on the WAN, which provides the actual
configuration parameters.

• Network Address Translation/Network Address/Port Translation (NAT/NAPT)

services. NAT/NAPT enables the user to assign private IP addresses to the
stations connected to the LAN, and temporarily assign a global IP address
when any station needs access to the “outside” world. This enables converting
a large number of private IP addresses to a smaller number of global IP
addresses, or even to a single IP address.
• Port Address Translation (PAT). PAT complements NAT/NAPT by allowing
outside access to certain stations on the LAN, although they are assigned
private addresses.
• Support for PPP traffic, including PAP and CHAP client authentication and
selection of the transport method (VC multiplexing or LLC encapsulation per
RFC2364).
Subnet Mask Negotiation

The carrier can supply LA-110 units at customer premises with IP interfaces,
without pre-configuring an IP address.
ATM
Network Internet
LA-110
BAS
LAN DS LAM
Figure 1-2. Basic IP Router Application
Note For additional details, refer to Appendix F.
Leased Line Services over ATM

The LA-110 can be used as an ATM CSU/DSU to provide leased line services over
ATM networks, using SHDSL over the existing twisted pair infrastructure for
connection to a DSLAM.
LA-110 can be ordered with both E1 and serial data ports, and the LA-110 can
provide leased line services for both ports as long as the total required bandwidth
does not exceed the uplink bandwidth.
Note The data port can also be used for Frame Relay services instead of leased line
services, as explained in the Frame Relay Support over ATM section below.
Figure 1-3 shows a leased line application using the LA-110. In this application, the
LA-110 enables interconnecting routers with serial interfaces (for example, X.21 or
V.35) to the WAN, over the ATM connection. In addition, Figure 1-3 shows the
LA-110 used to provide a fractional E1 link for interconnecting two digital PBXs
with E1 trunks.

X.21/V.35
E1
LA-110
Ro uter
PBX
ATM
Network
LA-110
E1
X.21/V.35 DS LAM DS LAM
LA-110
Ro uter PBX
LAN
Figure 1-3. Providing Leased Line Services
Handling of Data Port Traffic

When configured for data stream applications, the data port transmits the serial
data stream transparently through the ATM connection at the CBR service
category. Therefore, the AAL1 stream mode supports any Layer 2 protocol.
The data traffic is transported using AAL1 encapsulation and a cell structure similar
to that specified in the ATMF CES Interoperability Specification. The user can
select between the structured and unstructured cell structures (for the 64 kbps
rate, the selection is between structured service with, or without pointer).
Note For additional details on the various standards, refer to Appendix F.
The supported data rates are N × 64 kbps, in the range of 64 to 2048 kbps.
Only a single ATM connection (PVC) can be defined for the data port. Figure 1-4
shows the use of the LA-110 data port in a typical AAL1 stream application.
Site A Site B
ATM
Network
LA-110 LA-110
Ro uter Ro uter
LAN DS LAM DSLAM LAN
Figure 1-4. Typical AAL1 Stream Application
Handling of E1 Port Traffic

For leased line applications, the traffic received at the E1 port is always
encapsulated using AAL1 at the CBR service category. When using AAL1, the user
can select the framing mode: G732N, G732S or unframed.
The other characteristics can be adapted to the specific application requirements:
• Unframed mode: enables transparent (bit-by-bit) transmission of a 2048 kbps
ITU-T Rec. G.703 signal, irrespective of its framing structure and contents
(voice, data, video, and any proprietary framing).
This service is similar to the transparent AAL1 stream mode supported for the
data port, and it also uses a cell structure similar to that specified in the ATMF
CES Interoperability Specification. The user can select between the structured
and unstructured cell structures. When using the unframed mode, only a single
ATM connection (PVC) can be defined for the E1 port.

There are applications that need using the unframed mode even when the
user’s signal has a standard frame format. The unframed mode is necessary
when timeslot 0 of a standard frame format (G732N, G732S, etc.) must be
transferred transparently, end-to-end, through the ATM network. This permits
free use of the national bits, Sa4 to Sa8, end-to-end monitoring of the alarm
status and end-to-end monitoring transmission performance using the CRC-4
function (see Appendix F for a description of these functions).
Note RAD proprietary management protocol, as implemented in Megaplex, DXC and
other RAD TDM equipment, can use the national bits for inband management.
• Framed modes (G732N, G732S ). In the framed modes, timeslot 0 is always
terminated at the E1 interface; for G732S framing, timeslot 16 is also
terminated.
When using a framed mode, the user must define timeslot utilization. The
utilization is defined by configuring timeslot bundles. A bundle can include
any number of timeslots (that is, its rate is n×64 kbps), however any particular
timeslot may be included in only one bundle. The allowed number of
timeslots, n, depends on the framing mode:
G732S framing: 1 to 30 timeslots. Timeslot 16 cannot be included in a
bundle, because it carries the channel-associated signaling (CAS)
information. This is the framing mode usually selected for connection to the
digital E1 trunk of a PBX. Figure 1-5 shows the LA-110 used to provide
fractional E1 services for connecting the digital trunk of the PBX at one site,
for example, at the headquarters, to other digital PBXs located at other sites
(branch offices).
G732N framing: 1 to 31 timeslots.
Branch Office
Headquarters LA-11 0
DS LAM
ATM
Network
LA-110 Branch Office
PBX
DS LAM
LA-11 0
DS LAM
Figure 1-5. Fractional E1 Application
The ATM connection (PVC) and the associated parameters of each bundle can
be independently configured. The user can also select the connection type for
each bundle:
CES. The E1 N × 64 kbps structured mode is used. For this connection type,
the user can enable or disable the transmission of signaling information
(CAS – available when G732S framing is used). Signaling is usually ignored
when the bundle timeslots carry data, but is necessary for voice channels,
for example, in the application shown in Figure 1-5.

The payload carried by timeslots is transparently transferred, even when the

LA-110 includes the voice compression (ADPCM) option: ADPCM and
echo canceling can be used only when using AAL2 (LES). Therefore, DTMF,
fax and modem signals always pass transparently.
DB-CES: dynamic bandwidth utilization for 64 kbps timeslot trunking using
CES. The DB-CES uses the E1 N × 64 kbps structured mode, together with
a method for dynamic bandwidth utilization, which is based on the
detection of voice channel activity.
This connection type uses the signaling information (CAS) to determine
whether a channel is in use or not, and therefore requires the G732S
framing mode. Bandwidth is therefore allocated on the uplink only for
active channels: any bandwidth not actually needed becomes available to
the other LA-110 ports. This capability may also be used in the application
shown in Figure 1-5.
Transparent mode: the bundle is transferred using the unstructured mode.
This is suitable for fractional E1 service: the timeslots included in the bundle
carry a n×64 kbps serial data stream, and this stream is transparently
transferred over the ATM network.
Note For additional details on CES and DB-CES, refer to Appendix F.
Frame Relay Support over ATM

The LA-110 data port can be configured to support Frame Relay services. The user
can select the Frame Relay management protocol in accordance with the LA-110
operating environment: ITU-T Rec. Q.933, LMI or ANSI T1.617, and the protocol
version (user side, network side or both).
The Frame Relay mode is supported over AAL5.
In the Frame Relay mode, the LA-110 data port can be used to interconnect
legacy Frame Relay equipment, for example, routers, over the ATM network, or
connect between Frame Relay and ATM terminals.
LA-110 supports up to 16 DLCIs. In addition, the user can select the Frame Relay
interworking mode: service interworking per FRF.8 or network interworking per
FRF.5.
Network Interworking Mode

The network interworking mode, defined in FRF.5, is used to interconnect Frame
Relay equipment through an ATM network. A basic application is shown in
Figure 1-6.
In the network interworking mode, the ATM connection (PVC) can be used to
carry either a single Frame Relay logical connection (a mode called one-to-one
connection) or multiplex several logical connections (up to 16) on the same PVC.
In the latter mode (called many-to-one connection), the ATM connection
parameters defined by the user apply to all the DLCIs multiplexed on the same
PVC.
The user can configure the way the Frame Relay traffic control parameters are
converted to the cell loss priority indicator used on the ATM connection.

Site A Site B
Frame Relay Frame Relay

Connection ATM Connection
Network
LA-110 LA-110
Ro uter Ro uter
DS LAM DS LAM
Figure 1-6. Basic Frame Relay Application – Network Interworking Mode
Service Interworking Mode

The service interworking mode, defined in FRF.8, is used to interconnect an
equipment unit with Frame Relay interface to an equipment unit with ATM
interface. A basic application is shown in Figure 1-7. The user can define the
desired ATM connection parameters in accordance with the application
requirements.
To enable interworking between Frame Relay and ATM equipment, it is necessary
to define the conversion parameters:
• Protocol handling method: header encapsulation or translation between
RFC2427 (RFC1490) on the Frame Relay side to RFC2684 (RFC1483) on the
ATM side, and the CRC mode on the Frame Relay side (CRC-16 or CRC-32)
• Conversion between Frame Relay traffic control parameters and the cell loss
priority indicator used on the ATM connection.
Frame Relay
Connection ATM ATM
Network
LA-110
Ro uter Ro uter
DS LAM
Figure 1-7. Basic Frame Relay Application – Service Interworking Mode
VoDSL over LES

The Loop Emulation Service (LES) using AAL2 is used to provide voiceband
services over bandwidth-constrained ATM connections, for example, connections
using DSL systems (this type of service is referred to as voice over DSL, or VoDSL).
LA-110 supports LES for each of the three user port types that may be installed:
FXS, ISDN or E1.
LES enables establishing connections between an end user to a destination
reached through a PSTN, and therefore requires transferring signaling information
from the end user’s equipment (phone, ISDN terminal, PBX, etc.) to a dedicated
equipment unit, called voice gateway, located at a central office or local exchange.
Figure 1-8 shows the LA-110 used in VoDSL applications over LES. The voice
traffic received through the FXS or ISDN user ports is carried over the ATM
network on one PVC and is terminated at a voice gateway, which provides the
connection to the PSTN through V5.2 trunks.
Note In addition to the voice traffic, the LA-110 can also support data traffic, for example,
LAN traffic, carried on AAL5 with the ATM service category (UBR, UBR+, VBR or
CBR) selected in accordance with the application requirements.

FX S
LA-110
PSTN V5.2 ATM LAN

Network
Voice Gate way
DS LAM
ISDN
LA-110
LAN
Figure 1-8. VoDSL Application Using LES over AAL2
In addition to LES, LA-110 also supports the Emulated Loop Control Protocol
(ELCP). ELCP enables the voice gateway to perform channel activation and user
port control functions.
With ELCP, the E1 user port can also be configured to support ISDN PRI remote
access. This mode provides 30 payload timeslots, and an additional timeslot is
needed for the D channel.
When the number of timeslots needed for user’s traffic is smaller, the user can
configure the E1 port for fractional E1 utilization. In this case, the user specifies the
timeslots in use. This releases more uplink bandwidth for the other LA-110 ports.
Figure 1-9 shows an application using LES to transport traffic received by the E1
port.
Ce ntra l Office Customer’s Premises
V5.2 AT M
PSTN
Netw ork
Voice Gateway LA-110
PBX
DS LAM
Figure 1-9. Using LES over AAL2 for Voice Traffic Carried by the LA-110 E1 Port
To ensure compatibility, the voice gateway and the VoDSL end user’s equipment
can be preconfigured for the most common application environments, by
specifying an application identifier. The application identifiers supported by the
LA-110 are as follows:
• LES using CAS for POTS & DSS1 for BRI (without ELCP)
• LES using PSTN for POTS & DSS1 for BRI (without ELCP)
• LES using PSTN for POTS & DSS1 for BRI (with ELCP)
• LES using PSTN for POTS & DSS1 for PRI and BRI (with ELCP)
• LES using DSS1 for remote access PRI (PRI only, with ELCP).

With LES, an ATM connection can carry multiple types of traffic, for example,
multiple analog voice channels and ISDN BRI channels, each with its associated
signaling information, over the same PVC. When ELCP is not used, it is necessary
to use CAS signaling; with ELCP, it is necessary to use CCS signaling.
Note DTMF signaling is transparently transferred, as any analog signal.
The discrimination among the different channels carried over the same PVC is
made by assigning a channel identifier (CID). The lowest channels (up to 15) are
reserved for the protocol traffic; the other channels can be assigned CIDs in the
range of 16 to 223.
LES, together with the ELCP protocol, supports features that increase bandwidth
utilization and enhance versatility:
• Idle call suppression – enables setting up a connection when a channel
becomes active, and releasing the uplink bandwidth when a call is no longer
active.
• Silence detection and removal. This feature detects the short intervals of
silence occurring during an active call. The beginning and end of the intervals
are marked by special codes, and bandwidth is released for other users. At the
receiving end, a comfort noise generator fills the silence intervals with an
adequate level of background noise.
• Control over the voice encoding method, using predefined profiles in
accordance with ITU-T Rec. I.366.1 and I.366.2. The supported profiles are 7
to 12; LA-110 without the ADPCM option supports only profile 9. The profiles
actually control three parameters:
The supported voice encoding methods
The use of silence detection
The number of payload bytes in an AAL2 cell.
• Control over echo cancellation. When a channel uses an echo canceller, the
canceller is temporarily disabled when the voice gateway detects fax or
modem signals in that channel.
• Transport of wideband data: when using ADPCM, the voice gateway will
switch a channel to PCM while the channel carries a wideband modem signal,
and then return to the regular profile.
Another advantage of LES is plug-&-play configuration of voice channels, which
enables starting service immediately, without requiring manual configuration. The
LA-110 supports plug-&-play as follows:
• When using LES using CAS for POTS & DSS1 for BRI (without ELCP), the
default CID allocation is in accordance with ATMF standard. The default
allocation is described in Table 1-2: if the voice gateway uses the same
assignment, voice service can start as soon as the ATM connection is
established.
• When using an application identifier supporting ELCP, all the connections are
assigned CID = 0, and the voice gateway assigns the actual CID when a voice
path must be connected (the voice gateway used CID = 8 for this purpose).

Table 1-2. Default (Plug & Play) CID Assignment
Channel Type CID Assignment key Range of Assigned CID

FXS (POTS) 15 + FXS port number 16 to 19
ISDN D Channel 127 + ISDN BRI port number 128 to 131
ISDN B Channel 1 158 + (2 × ISDN BRI port number) 160 to 166
ISDN B Channel 2 159 + (2 × ISDN BRI port number) 161 to 167
1.3 Physical Description

LA-110 is a compact unit, intended for installation on desktops or shelves.
Figure 1-10 shows a general view of the LA-110.
The unit height is 1U (1.75 in). An optional rack-mount adapter kit, RM-33,
enables installing one LA-110 in a 19-inch rack.
Figure 1-10. LA-110 3D View
The LA-110 front panel includes only indicators that indicate its operating status.
All the connections are made to connectors located on the rear panel. LA-110 has
two different enclosures, depending on the user interface type:
• Data and E1 user interfaces: internal power supply and 9-pin D-type female
control terminal port (see Figure 1-11)
• FXS, ISDN BRI and PRI user interfaces: external power supply and RJ-45
control terminal port (see Figure 1-12).
LINE LINE
RX TX B A DCE
12 4 5 3 6 4 5
DCE
CONTROL E1/T1 SHDSL

V.35
Figure 1-11. Typical LA-110 Rear Panel (V.35 Data Port)
Physical Description 1-17

Figure 1-12. Typical LA-110 Rear Panel (Four ISDN Ports)
The rear panel includes the following connectors:

• Network port – provides the uplink connection (SHDSL, ADSL or E1, in
accordance with order).
• LAN port – provides the 10/100BaseT Ethernet LAN interface.
• DATA port – for connection to user's data or Frame Relay equipment. Supports
X.21, and V.35 interfaces.
• User port(s) – includes the FXS, ISDN or E1 interface, in accordance with
order.
• CONTROL connector – for connection to a local terminal.
• POWER connector – for connection to the power source. LA-110 with FXS,
ISDN BRI and PRI interfaces use AC power supply unit, which converts the AC
mains voltage to the regulated voltages needed by LA-110. The AC power
supply unit supplies +3.3V, +5V and -48V, and has a 6-pin power connector.
Figure 1-13 shows a typical power supply unit.
Figure 1-13. Typical LA-110 AC Power Supply Unit
1-18 Functional Description

1.4 Functional Description

The LA-110 functional block diagram is shown in Figure 1-14.
LA-110
Ethernet
LAN Payload
LAN Port
Interface Processor
Data Port Payload

Data Port Processor
Interface
User
E1
E1 Port Interface
Network
or ATM
Interface
Processor (SHDSL,
ISDN Interface ADSL or
Channel 1 E1)
Channel 2
Quad "S" ISDN
Channel 3 Interface
Channel 4 Internal PCM Bus Timeslot

Assigner
Feed
or DSP
- Echo Canceller
FXS Interface - ADPCM Converter
Channel 1
Channel 2 Quad FXS PCM
Channel 3 Interface Codec
Channel 4
Ringer Feed
Control
CONTROL Management
Port Port Timing Subsystem
Subsystem
Interface
Power
Power
Supply
Figure 1-14. LA-110 Functional Block Diagram
Functional Description 1-19

LA-110 includes the following main subsystems:

• Network interface
• ATM processor
• LAN interface
• Ethernet payload processor
• Data port interface
• Data port payload processor
• User interface (FXS, ISDN, or E1)
• DSP
• Timeslot assigner
• Timing subsystem
• Management subsystem
• Power supply.
Network Interface Subsystem

The LA-110 network port can be ordered with one of the following interfaces:
• 2-wire SHDSL interface
• 2/4-wire SHDSL interface
• ADSL interface
• E1 interface.
For a description of the main SHDSL, ADSL and E1 characteristics, refer to
Appendix F.
SHDSL Network Interfaces

The 2/4-wire SHDSL interface complies with ITU-T Rec. G.991.2 and ETSI TS
101524-1 and uses TC-PAM line coding. The user can select various physical layer
parameters for best match to the specific characteristics of the equipment
connected to the other end of the link.
The operating mode of the LA-110 network interface is normally STU-R (SHDSL
terminal unit – remote), which is the mode suitable for use at the CPE side. In this
mode, the LA-110 synchronizes to the clock provided by the equipment
connected to the other end of the SHDSL link, usually a DSLAM.
However, for maintenance purposes, the network interface can also be configured
as STU-C (SHDSL terminal unit – CO side). The SHDSL port can be configured to
carry data rates of 192 to 2304 kbps over 2-wire, or 384 (each pair is 192 kbps) to
4608 (each pair is 2304) over 4-wire; the corresponding line rates are 8 kbps
higher, because of the SHDSL overhead. The line rates for 2-wire are: 200, 392,
520, 776, 1032, 1160, 1544, 2056 and 2312 kbps. Using a lower line rate
increases the range, as shown in Table 1-3. When you configure for 4-wire, the
rate you select will be applied to each pair, i.e. if you select 200 kbps for 4-wire,
each pair will be 200 kbps, giving a total of 400 kbps.

The actual data rate can be automatically selected during the link setup process,
and can be adapted during operation to cope with changing transmission
conditions. For example, increased interference may decrease the rate, however
the link will return to the highest possible rate as soon as the conditions return to
normal.
Table 1-3. Typical Ranges for SHDSL Network Interface
Data Rate Range

2-wire 4-wire
384 to 512 kbps 5.5 km 6.38 km
576 to 832 kbps 5.0 km 5.47 km
896 to 1152 kbps 4.5 km 5.16 km
1216 to 1344 kbps 4.2 km 5.16 km
1408 to 1856 kbps 3.9 km 4.56 km
1920 to 2176 kbps 3.5 km 4.56 km
2304 kbps 3.3 km 4.52 km
2432 to 3072 kbps – 3.95 km
3200 to 4624 kbps – 3.34 km
ADSL Interface
The ADSL interface complies with ITU-T G.992.1 Annex A and ETSI ETR328, and
uses DMT line coding. The user can select between echo canceling and frequency
division multiplex (FDM), and can also select various physical layer parameters for
best match to the specific characteristics of the equipment connected to the other
end of the link. In addition, the ADSL interface can be configured to support signal
formats defined in additional standards, for example, ANSI T1.413, and several
widely used particular implementations.
The operating mode of the LA-110 network interface is ATU-R (ADSL terminal unit
– remote), which is the mode suitable for use at the CPE side. In this mode, the
LA-110 synchronizes to the clock provided by the equipment connected to the
other end of the ADSL link, usually a DSLAM.
The data rates are up to 8 Mbps in the downstream direction and up to 1 Mbps in
the upstream direction.
E1 Interface
The E1 interface complies with ITU-T Rec. G.704, G.706, G.732, G.823
requirements. The jitter performance complies with ITU-T Rec. G.823. The E1
network interface uses G732N or G732S framing, with or without CRC-4. The
maximum payload rate of the E1 uplink is 1664 kbps. The E1 network port
supports balanced (120Ω) and unbalanced (75Ω) interfaces.
The E1 network interface operating in the following timing modes: Loopback,
Derived from User, Internal.

ATM Processor
Note For a description of the ATM environment, refer to Appendix F.
Payload Processing
The ATM processor provides an ATM user-network interface (UNI) in accordance
with the ATM User-Network Interface (UNI) Specification (Version 3.1).
The processor can receive data from the following sources:
• Ethernet payload processor
• Data port
• User port (through a PCM bus and timeslot assigner)
• Management subsystem.
The ATM processor performs segmentation and reassembly (SAR) for each of the
data streams received through the various user ports and formats the flow associated
with each ATM connection in accordance with the applicable AAL cell structure.
The various type of AAL are used as follows:
• AAL1 – for transparent transport of data received from the data port, and from
the E1 user port when providing circuit emulation services (that is, when
operating in the CES, DB-CES and transparent modes).
• AAL2 – for transport of voice traffic using LES. Voice traffic may be received
from the user ports (FXS, ISDN BRI and PRI access, and PSTN access).
• AAL5 – used for packet traffic: Frame Relay traffic received from the data port,
LAN traffic, and management traffic.
For each flow, the ATM processor performs the shaping and policing (traffic contract
enforcing) needed to provide the various ATM service categories (Classes of Service
– CoS in ITU-T terminology): CBR, VBR, UBR and UBR+, in accordance with the
traffic contract parameters defined by the user per connection (PVC).
Each ATM service category has its own queue, which is then processed by the
function. The shaper multiplexes the various flows into a single ATM trunk, for
transmission through the network to the ATM network.
Jitter Buffer
The ATM network introduces a delay that consists of two components:
• Cell transfer delay (CTD): this component represents the average transport time
within the ATM network, and therefore it is assumed to be constant for each VC.
• Cell delay variation (CDV): this is a varying component that represents the
jitter, or variation in the delay experienced by any cell.
The reassembly process on the receive side of the ATM network needs a buffer in
which the reassembled cell stream is stored before it is transmitted out the user
interface. The size of the buffer should be large enough to accommodate the
largest CDV present on a VC to prevent underflow and overflow, yet not so large
as to induce excessive overall delay.
LA-110 jitter buffer size can be configured in the range of 0 to 20 msec. This
parameter is global (i.e., all the VCs use the same buffer).

Support for Operations, Administration and Maintenance (OAM)

The ATM processor also provides the OAM support functions in accordance with
ITU-T Rec. I.610, for example, performs continuity checks, generates alarm
indications, sends loopback requests and activates loopbacks in accordance with
the received OAM cells, etc.
The ATM processor can also collect performance monitoring data for the ATM layer.
LAN Interface
LA-110 includes a 10/100BaseT Ethernet LAN port. The interface supports
autonegotiation. The user can configure the advertised data rate (10 or 100 Mbps)
and operating mode (half duplex or full duplex). Alternatively, autonegotiation can
be disabled and the rate and operating mode be directly specified.
Note The LAN port of the LA-110 units with date and E1 interfaces supports automatic
MDIX.
Ethernet Payload Processor

The LAN port traffic can be processed either by a MAC bridge or by an IP router.
Their characteristics are described below.
The additional services supported by the IP router (DHCP, NAT/NAPT and PAT)
are also described.
Bridge Characteristics
LA-110 can be configured to serve as an Ethernet MAC bridge with VLAN support
between its LAN port and the network. The bridge can be configured with up to
16 WAN ports (each using its own PVC).
Bridge functionality is selectable:
• Access only: forwarding between LAN and WAN ports
• Full bridge functionality: LAN access and switching among the WAN ports.
The bridge operates at the physical and data link layers of the OSI model, and
therefore it is completely transparent to higher-level protocols, such as TCP/IP,
DECnet, XNS, ISO, and to operating systems, such as Unix or Windows.
The bridge operates as a media access (MAC) layer remote bridge with
self-learning capabilities. It learns and automatically recognizes the addresses of
the nodes attached to the local LAN (the LAN directly attached to the LA-110
Ethernet interface), and uses this information to filter the LAN traffic before
sending it through one of the WAN ports. In addition, the user can define static
MAC addresses (up to 32). The user can configure the aging time of learned
addresses; static addresses are stored until deleted by the user.
The bridge supports up to 2048 hosts on the local LAN.
For compatibility with other equipment, the format of the bridge frames can be
configured (with or without CRC, in accordance with RFC 1483).

The user can also enable support for the Point-to-Point protocol over Ethernet
(PPPoE), to allow the local nodes to connect to the Internet through the LA-110
and enjoy most of the benefits of a direct connection.
The internal bridge can contain up to nine ports (one on the LAN side and up to
16 on the WAN side). The bridge operates in the VLAN-aware and VLAN-unaware
modes.
VLAN-Aware Operation
This section describes the frame forwarding process in the VLAN-aware mode.
Accept Filter. When the frame is received by one of the bridge ports, it passes
from the accept filter. If the incoming port is configured to accept only VLAN-
tagged, all untagged or priority-tagged frames are discarded at this stage. If the
accept filter is configured to accept all, all frames (tagged and untagged) are
accepted.
VLAN Association. The VLAN association mechanism assigns PVID (port VID) to
any untagged or priority-tagged frame before forwarding it to the ingress filter.
Ingress Filter. The ingress filter (if enabled) discards any frame whose VID is not a
member of the VLAN that is assigned to the port.
Learning. If the frame is admitted, it is handled by the learning process which
learns the source MAC, VID and incoming port triplet.
Forwarding. Forwarding decisions are taken according to the learning table, along
with the user-configurable static entries and aging information. The frames can be
dropped, forwarded to specific port or flooded to a group of ports.
Egress Filter. The egress filter discards any frame whose VID (as determined by the
ingress process) is not associated with the outgoing port.
Egress Stripping. At the egress stripping stage it is decided whether to remove the
VLAN tag according to the outgoing port and VID combination. This means, that
priority-tagged frames are not transmitted out of a VLAN-aware bridge; outgoing
frames are either untagged or VLAN-tagged.
Frame Transmission. Once a frame passes the egress stripping stage, it ready to
be transmitted outside. After the outbound bridge is determined, the original
priority tag is analyzed. If the frame does not have priority tag, it is handled as if
has zero priority. Then the frame is transmitted on outbound bridge port VC that
handles this priority. If no VC is assigned to this priority, the frame is dropped.
VLAN-Unware Operation
The VLAN-unaware process is similar to the VLAN-aware mode with the VID
values ignored. Upon reception, the frames are handled by the learning and
forwarding processes. All decisions are taken according to MAC addresses only
(VLAN tags are ignored).
IP Router Characteristics
LA-110 can be configured to serve as an IP router between the LAN port and the
network. When using the IP router, LA-110 also supports TFTP.

The number of router ports is configurable:

• One or two LAN ports. The two ports, both defined on the physical LAN port,
must be configured in different subnets.
• One to 16 WAN ports, each using its own PVC.
• Optional host port for router management, for example, for RIP updates.
The IP router can be configured to use only static routing (where the user can
define up to 32 entries), or static routing together with user-selected routing
protocols: RIP I, RIP II, or both RIP I and RIP II. The IP router supports the Address
Resolution Protocol (ARP) and the ICMP ping function for checking IP
connectivity.
When using a routing protocol, the IP router can record in its routing table up to
80 dynamically learned networks or IP hosts. The user can configure the aging
time of learned routes; static routes are stored until deleted by the user.
A default gateway can be defined on either a LAN or WAN port: for a LAN
interface, a next hop IP address is needed (no next hop IP address is needed for a
WAN interface because it is an unnumbered interface).
In the IP router mode, the LA-110 can be configured to use encapsulation per
RFC2684 (which replaces RFC1483), or transfer the traffic using PPP over ATM
(PPPoA).
The user can select the PPP transport method in accordance with RFC2364:
• VC multiplexing
• LLC encapsulation.
For PPP traffic, the LA-110 supports PAP and CHAP client authentication.
IPCP Subnet Mask support allows Customer Premises Equipment (CPE) to
connect to a Broadband Access Server (BAS) and obtain an IP address and subnet
range that the CPE can use to populate the DHCP server database. The IP address
is also used to configure an IP interface over the LAN port. The IP Address is
dynamically allocated by the DHCP Server, using the DHCP Pool that was
allocated over the PPP connection.
In order to connect one of the LANs to Subnet Mask Negotiation, it’s IP Address
should be 0.0.0.0. When the IP Address is allocated from the PPP, the 0.0.0.0 IP
Address is replaced in the data base by the allocated IP Address.
Only one Subnet Mask Negotiation on WAN interface can be enabled at the same
time – in order to avoid allocating the LAN IP address according to a few WAN
interfaces (a one-on-one connection).
The linked LAN interface can be deleted only after disabling the Subnet Mask
Negotiation on the PPP connection.

DNS Relay
This implementation uses a translation table containing the address of the host
requesting, the identification of the original DNS request message and the new
identification with which the request will be sent to DNS server. Whenever
LA-110 receives a DNS request from one of its hosts, it sends the same request to
the DNS server with the IP address on its LAN interface as source address. The
DNS server will then reply to LA-110, which will send the reply to the requesting
host.
If a DNS server does not answer, the host’s request will timeout.
DNS Relay can also be used with single NAT.
Firewall
The user can set a firewall on each one of the router interfaces (WAN, LAN). A
firewall contains the following information:
• Interface – the interface to which the firewall is attached
• Direction – inbound or outbound.
If the user configures inbound direction, the firewall will block frames entering this
interface. A blocked frame will not proceed into the router.
If the user configures outbound direction, the firewall will block frames
transmitted from this interface. Frames will arrived to the firewall after being
routed to this interface.
Inbound Direction
Public Private
Network Network
Firewall Router
Outound Direction
Public Private
Network Network
Router Firewall
Figure 1-15. Firewall

The user can add and delete rules per firewall (per interface). Every firewall
contains up to 20 rules.
When adding a rule, the user should specify the following information:
• High end of destination IP range
• Low end of destination IP range
• High end of source IP range
• Low end of source IP range
• IP number

• High end of destination port range

• Low end of destination port range
• High end of source port range
• Low end of source port range
• ICMP Type.
The basic rule of the firewall is: What is not explicitly allowed is denied.
The user can create a log file containing information about packets that the firewall
discard, thus helping to track attempts to break the security.
DHCP Services
The user can select whether to enable DHCP services on the LA-110 IP router.
Two types of services can be provided:
• DHCP relay services: in this mode, the IP router relays DHCP requests to a
predefined DHCP server. The user can specify the maximum number of hops
that a DHCP request can traverse before being discarded.
• DHCP server services: in this mode, the IP router itself serves as the DHCP
server, which provides, in response to DHCP requests an IP address, an IP
subnet mask, a default gateway, and the IP addresses of two DNS servers
(primary and secondary). The user can define up to 10 different DHCP address
pools. For each pool, the user specifies the IP address range, the default
gateway, the primary and secondary DNS servers, and the lease time.
At any time, the IP router can provide only one of the three services listed above.
NAT/NAPT Services
The LA-110 IP router can also provide network address translation (NAT) and
network address/port translations (NAPT), simultaneously for multiple hosts and
multiple sessions per host.
The total number of NAT and NAPT translations is 20. Each translation can be
defined to apply to either a LAN or WAN port:
• When the address translation is defined on a LAN port, the real IP addresses
are located on the LAN side, and the virtual addresses are located on the
WAN side.
• When the address translation is defined on a WAN port, the real IP addresses
are located on the WAN side, and the virtual addresses are located on the
LAN side.
Four types of translations can be defined:
• Dynamic (temporary) translation of a group of virtual IP addresses to a smaller
group of real IP addresses, in accordance with the usage requirements
received from the hosts using virtual IP addresses. This type is similar to the
basic traditional NAT, as described in RFC2663 and RFC3022.
• Static (permanent) translation of a specific virtual IP address to a specific real IP
address. This is a form of bidirectional NAT, as described in RFC2663.

• Transparent translation (no translation at all): the real and virtual IP addresses
are identical. This is a form of bidirectional NAT, as described in RFC2663.
• Dynamic utilization of a single IP address in accordance with usage
requirements received from the virtual IP addresses, using transport identifiers
(port numbers) for multiplexing. In this case, This type is similar to NAPT, a
form of traditional NAT, as described in RFC2663 and RFC3022.
All the translations, except for the transparent translation, hide the virtual
addresses from the outside world (“outside” is determined by the type of interface,
as explained above).
PAT Services
PAT is a static translation that specifies a unique mapping between a
[real IP address; port; protocol] and a [virtual IP address; port]. Its purpose is to
enable access from the real IP side to a host using a virtual IP address that is
included in an existing dynamic NAPT definition.
Therefore, a PAT translation can be defined only if a matching dynamic NAPT
translation exists (matching means that a SINGLE PAT entry has the same real IP
and virtual entries). The total number of PAT translation definitions is 10.
To help the user make valid definitions, the LA-110 supports predefined options
for the most common services: the available selections are Telnet (port 23), Web
(port 80), FTP (port 20 or 21), SNMP (port 161), TFTP (port 69), DNS (port 53),
SMTP (port 25), and POP3 (port 110). The protocol is TCP, except for Web and
DNS, for which it is possible to select either TCP or UDP. In addition, a user-
selected range of port numbers with either TCP or UDP protocol can also be
defined.
Data Port Interface

The LA-110 data port is a synchronous serial port with DCE interface.
The port interface supports V.35 and X.21 interfaces, terminating in a 34-pin
female (V.35) or a 15-pin D-type female (X.21) connectors.
• For connection to user equipment with V.35 DTE interface: adapter cable
The port can be configured to operate at rates of N × 64 kbps in the range of 64 to
2048 kbps.
The data port uses DCE timing, that is, it provides transmit and receive clock
signals to the equipment connected to the data port. The clock polarity can be
selected in accordance with the specific requirements of the equipment connected
to the data port:
• Normal polarity: clock falling edge occurs in the middle of the bit interval
• Inverted polarity: clock rising edge occurs in the middle of the bit interval.

Data Port Payload Processor

The data payload processor processes the data port traffic, for transmission through
the ATM processor, in accordance with the application mode selected by the user:
• AAL1 stream
• Frame Relay.
AAL1 Stream Mode

In this application, the data stream at the selected data rate (n×64 kbps) is
transferred transparently. Therefore, the AAL1 stream mode supports any Layer 2
protocol and only one connection can be defined on the port.
The user can however select two options related to the flow control signals
included in the data port interface:
• Ignore the DCD and RTS signals: in this case, the data path to the far end is
always open.
• Obey the DCD and RTS signals: in this case, the data path to the far end
opens only when the RTS signal received from the local terminal is asserted
(the local terminal indicates that it has data to send), or the far end sends data
(DCD output in the local data port is then asserted).
The data traffic is transported at the CBR service category, using AAL1
encapsulation and a cell structure similar to that specified in the ATMF CES
Interoperability Specification. The user can select between the structured and
unstructured cell structures (for the 64 kbps rate, the selection is between
structured service with, or without pointer).
Frame Relay Mode
Note For a description of the Frame Relay environment, refer to Appendix F.
When the LA-110 data port is configured to support Frame Relay services, the
traffic is carried over AAL5, at the ATM service category selected by the user. The
user can define the desired ATM connection parameters in accordance with the
application requirements.
The number of supported DLCIs (Data Link Connection Identifiers) is 16, and the
allowed range is 16 through 991.
The user can configure the desired data rate (N × 64 kbps in the range of 64 to
2048 kbps), and can also select the CRC polynomial used for error detection
(CRC-16 or CRC-32), in accordance with the requirements of the Frame Relay
equipment connected to the data port.
The user can select whether to use a Frame Relay management protocol. The
supported options include:
• ITU-T Rec. Q.933, Annex A: user side, network side or both
• ANSI T1.617, Annex D: user side, network side or both
• LMI: user side, network side or both
• No Frame Relay management protocol.
The user can also enable CLLM.

In addition, the user can select the Frame Relay interworking mode: service
interworking per FRF.8 or network interworking per FRF.5.
• The network interworking mode, defined in FRF.5, is used to interconnect
Frame Relay equipment through an ATM network. The user can configure the
way the Frame Relay traffic control parameters are converted to the cell loss
priority indicator used on the ATM connection, and back.
In the network interworking mode, the ATM connection (PVC) can be used in
two ways:
To carry either a single Frame Relay logical connection. This mode is called
one-to-one connection
To multiplex several logical connections (up to 16) on the same PVC. In this
mode, called many-to-one connection, the ATM connection parameters
defined by the user apply to all the DLCIs multiplexed on the same PVC.
• The service interworking mode, defined in FRF.8, is used to interconnect an
equipment unit with Frame Relay interface to an equipment unit with ATM
interface.
To enable interworking between Frame Relay and ATM equipment, it is
necessary to define the conversion parameters:
Protocol handling method: header encapsulation or translation between
RFC2427 (RFC1490) on the Frame Relay side to RFC2684 (RFC1483) on
the ATM side
Conversion between Frame Relay traffic control parameters and the cell
loss priority indicator used on the ATM connection. The user can select the
following parameters:
The processing of the FECN bit received from the Frame Relay
equipment
The method used to derive the cell loss priority (CLP) bit to be sent in
the ATM network cells, from the DE bit of Frame Relay frames (the
original DE bit is also mapped to the DE-FR-SSCS bit in the Frame Relay
service-specific convergence sublayer (SSCS).
FXS User Ports

LA-110 can be ordered with four FXS independent analog voice interfaces, for direct
connection to subscribers’ POTS phone, fax or voiceband modem equipment.
Port Interface Characteristics
Each FXS port has a 2-wire interface with nominal impedance of 600Ω. Each port
provides power feed and ringing to the subscriber’s equipment.
• The nominal feed voltage is -48V
• The ring voltage is 60 VRMS. The maximum ringer load is 3 Ren. The standard
ring frequency is 25 Hz, however other frequencies in the range of 15 to
50 Hz are available upon specific order.
The subscriber’s signaling detection is based on DC loop closure in accordance
with EIA RS-464 loop start protocol.

Voice Port Signal Processing

The input and output audio levels of each channel can be independently selected,
for best performance. The signals are then encoded by a PCM codec, using
64 kbps PCM encoding per ITU-T Rec. G.711. The codec quality enables
transparent transfer of DTMF signaling, Group III fax signals and voice band
modems.
The user can select the companding law:
• A-law for use in countries using the E1 standard
• µ-law for use in countries using the T1 standard.
Each channel includes a near-end echo canceller. The echo canceller can be
disabled when processing fax or modem signals.
The connection between the FXS ports subsystem and the ATM processor is made
through a PCM bus, and a timeslot assigner that provides routing flexibility. The
bus also transfers the channel-associated signaling information. For compatibility
with national implementations, the PSTN signaling characteristics are
user-selectable.
The transport of analog voice requires LES over AAL2, which allows several voice
connections to share the same VC. The ELCP protocol can also be used.
ISDN User Port

LA-110 can be ordered with four independent ISDN BRI S0 interfaces complying
with ETSI 300012 and ITU-T Rec. I.430. The port characteristics are compatible
with many types of ISDN switches, including NTT, 5ESS, DMS-100 and NI1.
Port Interface Characteristics

Each “S” port supports two 64-kbps B channels, which carry payload data, and
one 16 kbps D channel, which carries signaling information.
Each port supports full duplex transmission of the 2B+D channels over
unconditioned 4-wire telephone loops (two twisted pairs). The nominal line
impedance is 100Ω. The line data rate is 192 kbps, and the line coding is
pseudoternary.
LA-110 can be ordered configured to the following operating modes:
• NT: The network termination (NT) mode enables direct connection of ISDN
terminal equipment to the “S” ports.
Each ISDN “S” NT interface provides current feed to the user’s terminal
equipment. The nominal feed voltage is -48 VDC.
• TE: The TE (terminal equipment) mode enables the connection of the “S” ports to
network termination (NT) units. This is the mode that should be used when the
ports are connected to an ISDN switch.
ISDN Port Signal Processing

The total number of ISDN payload (B) channels is 8; the signaling information
carried by the D channels is multiplexed into a single 64 kbps D channel.

The connection between the ISDN ports subsystem and the ATM processor is
made through a PCM bus, and a timeslot assigner that provides routing flexibility.
The ISDN ports require use of LES over AAL2, which allows several connections to
share the same VC. The ELCP protocol can also be used. The signaling information
carried by the multiplexed 64 kbps D channel is transported transparently to the
voice gateway.
E1 User Port
LA-110 can be ordered with one user E1 port.
E1 Port Characteristics
The E1 port interface complies with ITU-T Rec. G.703, G.704, G.706 and G.732
(see Appendix F for details). The jitter performance complies with ITU-T Rec. G.823.
The port has two interfaces:
• 120Ω balanced, for use over 120Ω twisted pairs
• 75Ω unbalanced, for use over coaxial cables.
The unit includes one RJ-45 balanced connector. The unbalanced interface is
provided via an RJ-45-to-BNC adapter cable.
To adapt the interface characteristics to the operating conditions, the user can
select the maximum line attenuation that can be compensated for by the port
interface while still meeting the BER objectives:
• Maximum line attenuation of 30 dB: this attenuation corresponds to that
required of LTU interfaces. This value should be selected only for the balanced
interface.
• Maximum line attenuation of 12 dB: this attenuation corresponds to that
required of DSU interfaces. This value should be selected whenever the line
attenuation does not exceed 12 dB, because it may provide better
performance on noisy lines than the 30 dB setting.
The port interface supports the following framing modes:
• G732S: 16 frames per multiframe, with support for channel-associated
signaling (CAS). This mode provides 30 payload timeslots. The user can select
the CAS sampling interval in the range of 0.1 to 2.0 sec.
• G732N: 2 frames per multiframe, without support for CAS. This mode
provides 31 payload timeslots.
• Unframed mode (supported only when the LA-110 is configured to use AAL1).
• ISDN PRI remote access mode (supported only when the LA-110 is configured
to use AAL2).
For the G732S and G732N framing modes, the user can select additional
parameters, in accordance with the specific application requirements:
• Enable/disable the use of the CRC-4 function per ITU-T Rec. G.706. This
function enables monitoring the E1 line transmission performance.
• Select the idle code inserted in empty timeslots.
• Select a frame synchronization algorithm faster than that specified in the
standard.

E1 Port Signal Processing

The data stream provided by the E1 interface is sent over the PCM bus and is
connected to the ATM processor through the timeslot assigner. The timeslot
assigner provides the timeslot switching flexibility needed to meet the application
requirements:
• When using the G732S or G732N framing mode over AAL1, the timeslots
carried by the E1 port are divided into timeslot bundles. Each bundle can
contain any desired number of timeslots (channels), but any timeslot may be
included in a single bundle. The selection of the timeslots in each bundle is
performed by the timeslot assigner.
Each of the bundles defined by the user can be transported over a separate
ATM connection (PVC) using the structured CES mode. In the CES mode, the
user can select the number of payload bytes inserted in each cell, to reduce
the cell filling latency. The user can also select whether to transfer the signaling
associated with these timeslots (needed when the timeslots carry voice
channels) or not (when the timeslots carry data channels or fractional E1
service).
Another alternative available over AAL1 is the use of Dynamic Bandwidth
Allocation – Circuit Emulation Service (DB-CES). In this mode, the LA-110
recognizes the activity of voice channels in accordance with their CAS (ABCD)
signaling bits, and either frees or allocates uplink bandwidth accordingly.
Therefore, DB-CES can only be used when the interface uses the G732S
framing mode. The user can freely select the ABCD bit sequence used to
identify an idle channel in accordance with the particular application. For
convenience, the user can also select one of several predefined sequences
corresponding to widely used applications:
E&M interface and PLAR (private line automatic ringdown) applications
FXO or FXS interfaces with loop start signaling
FXO or FXS interfaces with ground start signaling
R2 signaling protocol (a type of channel-associated signaling protocol for E1
trunks that enables the setting up, metering and disconnection of phone
calls using decadic pulse dialing). This signaling protocol may be needed
when the user’s phones do not use DTMF signaling.
The third alternative available over AAL1 is transparent transport of the
bundles, without CAS.
• When using AAL2, the LA-110 uses LES for voice support, with or without
ELCP. The user can select from a range of application identifiers, which
determine the supported signaling methods:
CAS signaling (always without ELCP). The user can customize the signaling
characteristics in accordance with national applications.
PSTN signaling (providing V5.2 functionality) for voice channels, with or
without ELCP.
Digital Signaling System 1 (DSS1) for ISDN BRI and PRI, with or without
ELCP.

ISDN PRI remote access with ELCP. For this application, the framing (the
contents of timeslot 0) and the interpretation of the signaling information
(transferred in a separate timeslot (timeslot 16) using the common channel
signaling (CCS) protocol in accordance with DSS1) are automatically
adapted to ISDN PRI standards.
The user can freely select the active timeslots carried by the E1 port
interface (same as for fractional service, except that timeslot 16 is always
included). The other timeslots are then ignored. This frees the uplink
bandwidth that may otherwise be reserved for unused timeslots.
With ELCP, the user can also specify national variants (simply by selecting the
country name), and several other global parameters:
The default voice encoding profile. The available profiles are 7 to 12 in
accordance with ITU-T Rec. I.366.1 and I.366.2; LA-110 without the
ADPCM option supports only profile 9. However, the actually used profile
is selected by the voice gateway.
ISDN activation mode: this is always non-permanent, to enable the voice
gateway to control channel utilization.
E1 UNI
LA-110 performs transparent transfer of the ATM-based E1 UNI services over
SHDSL infrastructure at the rate of 1984 kbps. The E1 UNI interface provides the
following:
• No limit on number of VCs and VPs
• No CBR per VC
• Loopback and OAM support.
Figure 1-16 illustrates mapping of E1 UNI into SHDSL.
VC1
VC2
VC3
VC4
E1 UNI SHDSL
Figure 1-16. Mapping E1 UNI into SHDSL
DSP Option
To reduce the uplink bandwidth needed for voice transmission, a DSP option is
available. The DSP performs voice compression using 32 kbps ADPCM encoding
per ITU-T Rec. G.726. Three options can be ordered:
• Voice compression for 4 channels, for LA-110 with FXS interfaces.
• Voice compression for 8 channels, for LA-110 with ISDN interfaces.
• Voice compression for 30 channels, for LA-110 with E1 interfaces.

In addition to PCM/ADPCM conversion, the digital signal processor can also

perform echo canceling for ISDN channels or for E1 voice channels.
The DSP operates on the data flowing over the PCM bus, which connects the user
port to the timeslot assigner. The user can specify the timeslots to be processed:
• For the ISDN interface, echo canceling is simultaneously enabled/disabled for
all the B channels.
• For E1 port, the user can specify the individual timeslots to be processed by
the echo canceller.
Note Timeslots processed by ADPCM or echo canceller are no longer transparent,
therefore neither function may be enabled for timeslots carrying data.
Even when ADPCM is not used, echo canceling for ISDN channels can be
separately ordered.
Timing
The LA-110 includes a timing subsystem that supplies all the clock signals needed
by its internal circuits. The timing modes used by each LA-110 port, and the
LA-110 system timing modes are described below.
Port Timing Modes

The timing modes used by the various ports are as follows:
• LAN Port. The timing signals needed by the LAN port are derived from the
LA-110 system clock. The LAN port carries frame traffic, and therefore it is
essentially an asynchronous port.
• Data Port. The data port is a synchronous port, and its timing mode is DCE,
that is, the port supplies transmit and receive clock signals (derived from the
system clock) to the equipment connected to this port.
• FXS Ports. The FXS ports operate synchronously at the rate determined by the
LA-110 system clock.
• ISDN Ports. The ISDN ports operate synchronously:
The transmit path of the ISDN ports uses the LA-110 system clock
The receive path of the ISDN ports uses the clock signal recovered from the
receive signal.
Since in most applications the ISDN ports are used in the NT mode, the user’s
equipment locks its timing to the incoming line signal provided by the LA-110
ISDN port. Therefore, the receive clock signal is locked to the transmit clock
signal.
• E1 Port. The E1 port operates synchronously:
The transmit path uses the LA-110 system clock
The receive path uses the clock signal recovered from the receive signal.
This signal may be selected as reference source for the LA-110 system
clock.
• Network Port. The network port operates synchronously. The timing mode for
an LA-110 installed on the CPE side (that is, a unit operating in the STU-R or
ATU-R mode) is as follows:

The transmit path uses the LA-110 system clock

The network port also processes the incoming signal to retrieve the network
timing reference (NTR) signal, a 8 kHz clock signal derived from the SHDSL
or ADSL signal received from the CO side equipment.
When the LA-110 network port is configured as CO side unit (that is,
STU-C) determines the timing of the unit at the CPE side. In this mode, it
can also be configured to provide the NTR timing information.
System Timing Mode

LA-110 supports flexible timing modes to enable hierarchical timing distribution in
the network. The LA-110 system timing can be locked to the following sources:
• NTR: when the DSLAM to which the LA-110 unit is connected can supply an
NTR clock, the LA-110 can extract the NTR clock and use it as its timing
reference. This is the recommended mode, because it locks the LA-110 timing
to the timing reference of the DSLAM, which is usually highly accurate.
• Clock signal recovered from the E1 port receive signal (provided the LA-110
unit is equipped with an E1 port). This mode locks the LA-110 timing to the
timing reference of the far end E1 equipment, which is usually accurate.
• Adaptive timing: clock locked to the average arrival rate of the ATM cells
carrying voice channels. This mode can be used to improve voice transmission
quality by decreasing the probability of buffer underflow/overflow events for
voice traffic, by ensuring that the internal PCM bus clock rate is locked to the
average rate of voice packets
• Internal oscillator. This option should be used only when the LA-110 network
port is configured as CO side unit.
Management Subsystem
LA-110 has a local management subsystem that controls the operation of all of its
circuits. The subsystem supports various management interfaces, including inband
and out-of-band (SNMP) management, Telnet, Web browser and local
management via an ASCII terminal. RADview management software is also
available to support large networks.
The local management subsystem can communicate through the following ports:
• Dedicated serial port, intended for direct connection to an ASCII terminal,
provides access to all the available configuration, diagnostics, performance and
alarm monitoring functions.
The serial port has an asynchronous RS-232 DCE interface. The serial port rate
can be set to any standard rate in the range of 300 to 115,200 bps. Automatic
detection of incoming data rate is also supported. The user can configure
LA-110 to automatically send any alarms detected during its operation through
this port.
• Inband management via the ATM uplink, using SNMP. The user can define up
to 10 network management stations to receive traps in accordance with user’s
criteria, however the number of management stations is not limited.
In addition to SNMP, Telnet is also supported. Telnet has the same capabilities
and uses the same procedures as the terminal.

Note Telnet and local terminal sessions cannot be simultaneously active.

The inband management traffic uses AAL5, and is encapsulated in accordance
with RFC1483 for IP routed traffic over ATM. To avoid uplink overloading by
inband management traffic, the total management data rate is limited to 32 kbps.
The management traffic can be configured on a dedicated inband
management VCC (this is always necessary when the LAN port is configured to
use the MAC bridge); if the LAN port is configured to use the IP router, the
management traffic can use the IP router PVCs.
• Out-of-band management via the LAN port using SNMP and Telnet, supports
unlimited number of managers. This option is supported when the LAN port is
configured to use the IP router.
Web-Based Configuration
The LA-110 Web-based configuration enables a quick, comfortable control of the
device. The Web user interface enables user configuration via HTTP client. The
default address can be later changed by the user.
The LA-110 Web management utility supports the following Web browsers:
• Internet Explorer 5.0, 5.5, 6.0, running on Windows™ 98, Windows™ 2000,
Windows™ XP
• Netscape Communicator 7.1, running on Windows™ NT or Unix.
Two-Level Authentication
LA-110 supports two-level password protection:
• User Level. The first level of access which requires a name and password, and
enables the user to view all settings, display the contents of registers etc. and
make listings and/or printouts of the settings, including statistics.
• Superuser. The second level which enables the user to change parameters
related to the WAN settings of LA-110 and its voice parameters (at AAL2 level).
In addition, superusers perform administration of the user names and
passwords for the first and second authority levels.
The operation of the LA-110 management subsystem and of its other circuits is
determined by software stored in flash memory. The software can be updated
using one of the following options:
• Updating from a remote central location, using TFTP. This provides the
network operator with the tools needed for effective distribution of software
updates and upgrades, and addition of new services as they become available.
• When a ConfiguRAD session is in progress, the LA-110 software can be
updated from a management station using HTTP protocol.
• Local downloading from a terminal directly connected to the LA-110 serial
control port, using the XMODEM protocol.
Note TFTP and HTTP file transfers can also be used to upload and download the LA-110
configuration database, and transfer the alarm and firewall logs for remote analysis
and archiving.

Automatic Configuration Options (Plug & Play)

The LA-110 is designed to enable automatic configuration from a remote location,
without requiring the intervention of an operator (plug & play functionality).
Plug & play means that after the LA-110 is installed and connected to its operating
environment, the unit needs only to be powered up. It then automatically receives
its management IP address, and all the configuration procedures can be performed
from the remote location.
The LA-110 supports two automatic configuration methods:
• Fully automatic configuration using DHCP in conjunction with TFTP. This
operates as follows:
When LA-110 is powered up, it automatically starts operating as a DHCP
client, and broadcasts a DHCP server discovery message via the default
management VCC of the uplink.
The DHCP server, located at an appropriate location within the operator’s
network management center, returns the following information:
The IP address to be configured as the LA-110 inband management
address (the address is usually set using the DEF ADDR ATM command).
The IP address of the TFTP server designated as source of LA-110
configuration database files.
The name of the configuration database file to be retrieved from the
prescribed TFTP server.
LA-110 then uses the parameters received from the DHCP server to
retrieve its configuration file, and starts using it. LA-110 adds one field to its
DataBase: FileName. The first time LA-110 receives file name, it is saved,
so that the next time it can compare. If it is the same file it is not necessary
to download this configuration again. The IP address that was found will be
used as the management IP.
• An alternative mechanism based on automatic learning of its inband
management IP address. This mechanism is active as long as the default
parameter values are in effect: LA-110 then learns its inband management IP
address from the destination IP address carried in the first IP packet received
through the default inband management VCC. This is sufficient for Telnet
access.
Moreover, if the first packet is an SNMP packet, LA-110 also adds the source
IP address as a manager (this address is usually set with the ADD NMS
command).
After learning these parameters, the plug-&-play functionality is disabled, and
LA-110 is subject to the regular management and configuration rules. TFTP
can then be used to download a configuration file.
Note Whenever necessary, the plug-&-play functionality can be enabled again by
restoring the factory-default parameters.
The automatic configuration method used by LA-110 upon power-up is
determined by its factory-default parameters, specified at ordering time.

Statistics Collection
LA-110 collects performance monitoring statistics at the physical and ATM layers
for the network interface, and for each user-side port. It is also possible to display
statistics data for individual connections (AAL1, AAL5).
The data port statistics are collected over 15-minute intervals, for up to 24 hours.
The data collected for the last 24 hours is stored for display by management
functions. The LA-110 also stores the statistics collected for the last six days with
24-hour resolution.
ATM Layer
In addition to the general traffic performance monitoring statistics, LA-110 also
monitors the different ATM layers: physical, ATM layer and adaptation layer
performance and collects specific performance data for Operation, Administration
and Maintenance (OAM) traffic in accordance with ITU-T Rec. I.610:
• At the port level, LA-110 collects general OAM performance data (total
number of transmitted and received OAM cells):
Loopbacks (LB) tests
Continuity check (CC)
AIS (Alarm Indication Signal)
RDI (Remote Defect Indication) in an ATM network.
• At the connection level, the LA-110 collects detailed OAM performance data.
• LA-110 also can send OAM loopback requests on a specific connection and
collect loopback request and response data (both successful and failed).
Optional E1 Port
The statistics collected by LA-110 for the physical (E1) layer of the E1 port are
derived from the line signal and CRC-4 data. The collected parameters include
code violations, local errored seconds, local severely errored seconds, local
seconds with severe framing error events, local seconds with AIS reception, local
unavailable seconds, and remote unavailable seconds.
Data Port
The statistics collected for the data port are as follows:
• When using the Frame Relay mode, LA-110 collects data on the total number
of received and transmitted frames, the number of frames received and
transmitted with the congestion indicator set, and the number of frames
received and discarded.
• When using the AAL1 Stream mode, LA-110 collects traffic data.
Ethernet Port
The statistics collected for the Ethernet port include the total number of received
and transmitted frames, and the number of frames received, but discarded.

Test and Diagnostics Capabilities

LA-110 has comprehensive diagnostics capabilities that include the following types
of user-controlled loopbacks:
• Remote network loopback
• Local data port loopback
• Remote data port loopback
• Local user port loopback
• Remote user port loopback
• Remote remote data port loopback.
• Initiation of OAM loopback requests to test a VCC
• Ping for IP connectivity checks.
Alarms
LA-110 stores alarms detected during its operation in a buffer that can hold up to
200 alarms. During regular operation, the terminal shows if there are any alarms in
the alarm buffer thus notifying the local operator that alarm conditions have been
detected. The local operator can then review the contents of the alarm buffer on
the terminal, and can delete old alarms.
For on-line monitoring, the user can enable automatic sending of alarms to the
supervision terminal, Telnet hosts, and management stations (for SNMP
management purposes, LA-110 automatically converts some alarms to traps). The
user can select the types of traps to be sent to each network management station.

1.5 Technical Specifications
ATM Features
ATM Interface UNI per ATM User-Network Interface (UNI) Specification (Version 3.1) for
PVCs only
AAL Support AAL1 Supports CES and DB-CES

AAL2 Supports LES and ELCP
AAL5 Supports LES and ELCP
ATM QoS Traffic Shaping Per VC
ATM Service Categories CBR Constant Bit Rate
VBR Variable Bit Rate
UBR+ Unspecified Bit Rate with minimum
desired cell rate
UBR Unspecified Bit Rate
F5 OAM Cells As per ITU-T Rec. I.610
VPI Range 0 through 31
VCI Range 0 through 255
Maximum Number of 16
VCs
Clock Sources Recovered from received xDSL interface (NTR)

Recovered from received E1 interface
Adaptive clock
Internal
Network Interfaces
SHDSL Interface 2-wire or 2/4-wire SHDSL per ITU-T Rec. G.991.2, Annex A, B
Line code TC-PAM
Range See Table 1-3
Connector RJ-45
Data Rates N × 64 kbps (N ≥ 3), 200 to 2312 kbps
Handshake Protocol ITU-T Rec. G994.1
EOC Support Mandatory
Technical Specifications 1-41

ADSL Interface Per ITU-T Rec. G.992.1 Annex A, with user-selectable mode (echo canceling
and frequency division multiplex) and frequency bins
Line Code Full DMT
Connector RJ-45
Data Rates Up to 8 Mbps downstream, 1 Mbps upstream
E1 Interface Payload Rate N × 64 kbps (N = 1–26)
Compliance ITU-T Rec. G.704, G.706, G.732, G.823
Framing G732N or G732S, with or without CRC-4
Line Rate 2.048 Mbps ± 32 ppm
Line Code HDB3
Line Interface • 120Ω, balanced
• 75Ω, unbalanced
Receive Input Level 0 to -30 dB or 0 to -12 dB, in accordance with
user’s configuration
Transmit Output Level • Balanced: ±3V ±10%
• Unbalanced: ±2.37V ±10%
Jitter ITU-T Rec. G.823
Connectors • Balanced: RJ-45
• Unbalanced: two BNC (via adapter cable)
User Interfaces
Serial Data Port Data Rate N × 64 kbps in the range of 64 to 2048 kbps
Data Link Protocol • Frame Relay using AAL5
• Transparent (AAL1 stream) using AAL1
Frame Relay • Network interworking per FRF.5
Interworking Functions • Service interworking per FRF.8
Frame Relay Up to 16 DLCIs
Connections
Timing DCE
Type • V.35 via 34-pin VAPL female connector
• X.21 15-pin D-type female connector
LAN Port Interface 10/100BaseT Ethernet
Note: MDIX is supported by LA-110 with data and
E1 ports.
Connector RJ-45
1-42 Technical Specifications

Functionality • Ethernet MAC bridge with or without VLAN

support
• IP router
IP Router Mode Routing Static, RIP I, RIP II, RIPI and RIPII
Number of Ports • 1 or 2 LAN ports
(User-Configurable) • 1 to 16 WAN ports
• Host port (optional)
DHCP Services • DHCP relay
• DHCP server with up to 10 user-configurable
address pools
NAT Services • Dynamic translation
• Static translation
• Transparent translation
• Single NAT
PAT Services Port Address Translation
PPPoA Support Per RFC2364
Bridge Mode Number of Ports • 1 LAN port
(User-Configurable)
• 1 to 16 WAN ports
PPPoE Support
ISDN BRI S0 Number and Type Four “S” ports
Ports
Compliance ETS 300012, ITU-T Rec. I.430, compatible with
NTT, 5ESS, DMS-100 and NI1 switches
Bit Rate 192 kbps
Line Coding Pseudo-ternary
Port Mode • NT with phantom feed
• TE
Line Impedance 100Ω
Connector RJ-45
Analog FXS Number of Port Four
Voice Ports
Interface FXS interface for direct connection to a 2-wire
telephone, RS-464 loop start
Nominal Impedance 600Ω
Return Loss (ERL) Better than 20 dB

Encoding • 64 kbps PCM per ITU-T Rec. G.711 and AT&T

PUB-43801, µ-Law or A-Law
• 32 kbps ADPCM per ITU-T Rec. G.726
(ordering option)
Frequency Response ±0.5 dB: 300 to 3000 Hz
(Ref: 1020 Hz) ±1.1 dB: 250 to 3400 Hz
Signal/Total Distortion 0 to -30 dBm0: better than 33 dB
(ITU-T Rec. G.712, +3 to -45 dBm0: better than 22 dB
G.713 Method 2)
Idle Channel Noise Better than -70 dBm0 (+20 dBrnc)
Transformer Isolation 1500 VRMS
Echo Cancellation In accordance with ITU-T Rec. G.168, tail end,
(ordering option) maximum 4 msec
Connector RJ-11
E1 Port Compliance ITU-T Rec. G.703, G.704, G.706, G.732, G.823
Framing • Unframed
• Framed: G732N with or without CRC-4
G732S with or without CRC-4
• ISDN PRI
Line Rate 2.048 Mbps ±32 ppm
Line Code HDB3, AMI
Line Impedance 120Ω, balanced or 75Ω, unbalanced
Transmit Level Balanced, ±3V ±10%
Unbalanced, ±2.37V ±10%
Receive Level 0 to -30 dB or 0 to -12 dB, user-selectable
Jitter ITU-T Rec. G.823
Connectors Balanced: RJ-45
Unbalanced: Two BNC (via adapter cable)
Management Management Interfaces • Inband: SNMP, Telnet, Web
• Out-of-band: LAN port, serial RS-232
CONTROL port
• Remote management via uplink or user ports
Serial Port Terminal ASCII terminal
Interface Asynchronous RS-232 DCE
Baud Rate 300 bps to 115.2 kbps, and automatic detection
Connector • 9-pin D-type female (LA-110 with data and E1 ports)
• RJ-45 (LA-110 with FXS, ISDN BRI and PRI ports)

General
Physical Height 437 mm /1.7 in (1U)
Width 432 cm /19 in
Depth 243 cm /9.5 in
Weight 2.3 kg /5.0 lb
Power Internal Power Supply AC/DC source: 100–240 VAC or -48 to -60 VDC,
7.5W max
External Power Supply 100 to 230 VAC (±10%), 50/60 Hz, 13W max,
Environment Temperature 0 to 50° C/32 to 122° F
Humidity Up to 90%, non-condensing
EMI/RFI FCC part 15 class A
ETS 300019 1.3, Class 3.1
ETS 300019-2-2 Class T2.3
EN55022 Class B (ordering option)
Immunity EN50024
Safety EN60950, UL60950, CSA 22.2 No. 60950
EN300386-2, ITU K.21, K.45


Chapter 2
Installation
2.1 Introduction
This chapter provides installation instructions for LA-110.
The chapter presents the following information:
• Safety precautions for installation personnel and users
• Site requirements
• General description of equipment enclosures, the available interface options,
and the LA-110 panels
• Mechanical and electrical installation instructions for LA-110.
After installing the system, it is necessary to configure it in accordance with the
specific user's requirements. Two configuration methods are supported:
• Manual preliminary system configuration, performed by means of a
supervision terminal directly connected to the LA-110 (procedures for using
the terminal are given in Chapter 3). The software necessary for using the
terminal is stored in LA-110.
Note If the LA-110 software is not yet loaded or must be updated, refer to Appendix D
for detailed software installation instructions.
• Automatic configuration, using the “plug & play” capability. This capability
enables a remote management system or Telnet host to assign a management
IP address to the LA-110 through the ATM uplink, and then configure the unit
through the uplink.
The LA-110 also supports the downloading of a complete set of configuration
parameters by transferring a configuration file using TFTP.
After the preliminary configuration and during routine operations, LA-110 can also
be managed by means of Telnet hosts or SNMP-based network management
stations, e.g., RADview. Refer to the User's Manual of the network management
station for operating instructions; Telnet hosts use the supervision terminal
procedures.
Introduction 2-1
Chapter 2 Installation LA-110 Installation and Operation Manual
Safety Precautions
No internal settings, adjustment, maintenance, and repairs may be performed

by either the operator or the user; such activities may be performed only by
skilled service personnel who are aware of the hazards involved.
Always observe standard safety precautions during installation, operation, and
Warning maintenance of this product.
For your protection and to prevent possible damage to equipment when a fault
condition, e.g., a lightning stroke or contact with high-voltage power lines,
occurs on the cables connected to the equipment, the LA-110 unit must be
properly grounded at any time. Any interruption of the protective (grounding)
Grounding connection inside or outside the equipment, or the disconnection of the
protective ground terminal can make this equipment dangerous. Intentional
interruption is prohibited.
Dangerous voltages may be present on the cables connected to LA-110.

• Never connect cables to an LA-110 unit if it is not properly installed and
grounded.
Warning • Disconnect all the cables connected to the connectors of the LA-110 before
disconnecting the LA-110 power cable.
Before switching on this equipment and before connecting any other cable, the
protective ground terminal of LA-110 must be connected to a protective ground.
The grounding connection is made through the power cables. Therefore:
1. The DC power cable of the external AC power supply unit must be connected
to the LA-110 POWER connector.
2. One end of the AC power cable connected to the AC power supply unit, and
the plug at other end must always be inserted in a socket (outlet) with a
protective ground contact.
3. The protective action must not be negated by use of an extension cord (power
cable) without a protective conductor (grounding).
Whenever LA-110 units are installed in a rack, make sure that the rack is properly
grounded and connected to a reliable, low-resistance grounding system.
Protection against Electrostatic Discharge (ESD)

An electrostatic discharge occurs between two objects when an object carrying static
electrical charges touches, or is brought near enough, the other object. Static
electrical charges appear as result of friction between surfaces of insulating materials,
separation of two such surfaces and may also be induced by electrical fields.
Routine activities such as walking across an insulating floor, friction between
garment parts, friction between objects, etc. can easily build charges up to levels
that may cause damage, especially when humidity is low.
2-2 Introduction
LA-110 Installation and Operation Manual Chapter 2 Installation
Whenever feasible, during installation works use standard ESD protection wrist
straps to discharge electrostatic charges. It is also recommended to use garments
and packaging made of antistatic materials or materials that have high resistance,
yet are not insulators.
It is also important to make sure that other equipment, in particular customer’s
data equipment connected to the LA-110 data port, is properly grounded
(connected to the protective, or safety, ground) before attempting to connect it to
LA-110.
2.2 Site Requirements
Physical Requirements
The LA-110 device is intended for installation on desktop and shelves. All the
connections are made to the rear panel.
For installation in 19-inch racks, RAD offers the RM-33 rack mount kit. An LA-110
installed with the RM-33 kit occupies a height of 1U.
Power Requirements
Internal Power Supply

AC-powered LA-110 units should be installed within 1.5m (5 ft) of an
easily-accessible grounded AC outlet capable of furnishing the voltage in
accordance with LA-110 nominal supply voltage.
DC-powered LA-110 units require a -48 VDC power source, which must be
adequately isolated from the main supply.
External Power Supply

LA-110 is powered from AC mains, through an external AC power supply unit that
supplies the regulated DC voltages needed by the LA-110 internal circuits. The
external AC power supply unit connects to the AC source through a 1.5m (5 feet)
cable, terminated in a standard IEC three-pronged plug, and connects to LA-110
through an integral DC cable terminated in a multipin connector.
LA-110 units should be installed within 1.5m (5 feet) of an easily accessible
grounded AC outlet capable of furnishing the required AC supply voltage, in the
range of 100 to 230 VAC, 50/60 Hz. The current version of LA-110 is supplied
with an AC power supply unit that supplies +3.3V, +5V and -48 VDC (these
ratings are listed on the AC power supply unit). These units are easily identified by
the type of power connector: 6-pin connector.
Note The lower negative voltage of the previous versions results in a lower maximum
range for FXS voice and ISDN “S” interfaces. This is relevant only when such
interfaces are installed in LA-110.
However, it is not allowed (nor is it possible) to connect an LA-110 unit with one
type of connector to an AC power supply unit with the other type of connector.
Site Requirements 2-3

Uplink and User Connections

This section presents general requirements regarding the connections to the
various LA-110 interfaces. Note that your unit cannot include all the interfaces
listed below.
If you need specific information regarding pin allocations in the LA-110 interface
connectors and wiring data for adapter cables, refer to Appendix A.
Uplink Connections
LA-110 may be ordered with an SHDSL 2-wire or 4-wire uplink interface, with an
ADSL or E1 uplink interface. The interface is terminated in an RJ-45 connector.
Each of the interfaces listed above is intended for operation over twisted pairs
meeting the requirements of the corresponding standards (typically, this means
24 AWG (0.5 mm) or 26 AWG (0.4 mm) unloaded twisted pairs).
The E1 uplink interface can be connected to the unbalanced coaxial cables via the
CBL-RJ45/2BNC/E1 adapter cable.
The interface is protected against surges in accordance with ITU-T Rec. K.21.
User E1 Link Connections

The LA-110 user E1 port has two interfaces:
• 120Ω balanced interface for operation over two twisted pairs, terminated in an
RJ-45 eight-pin connector
• 75Ω unbalanced interface for operation over coaxial cables, provided via
RJ-45-to-BNC adapter cable.
The LA-110 E1 interfaces must not be directly connected to unprotected public
telecommunication networks. The connection to such networks must be made
through a network termination unit that provides separation between the interface
conductors and the telecommunication network conductors in accordance with
the applicable local regulations.
User Synchronous Data Port Connections

The LA-110 synchronous data port supports the following DCE interfaces:
• V.35, via 34-pin female connector
• X.21, via 15-pin, D-type connector.
LAN Port Connections

The LAN port has a 10/100BaseTX Ethernet interface terminated in an RJ-45
connector, for connection to LANs operating on UTP media.
The LAN connector of the LA-110 units with FXS, ISDN BRI and PRI ports is wired
as a station port, for connection through a “straight” (point-to-point) cable to an
Ethernet hub port.
The LAN connector of the LA-110 units with data and E1 ports supports automatic
MDIX, correcting connection polarity errors. This allows using straight or crossed
cables for the LAN connection.
2-4 Site Requirements

ISDN Port Connections

LA-110 can be ordered with four ISDN “S” interfaces. Each interface is terminated
in an RJ-45 connector, and requires two twisted pairs meeting the requirements of
the applicable standards (typically, this means 24 AWG (0.5 mm) or 26 AWG
(0.4 mm) unloaded twisted pairs).
The connections of the ISDN “S” ports depend on the interface type, TE or NT:
• NT interface: intended for connection to user’s equipment having ISDN “S”
TE ports, for example, to ports of user’s ISDN terminals. The connection is
made by a straight cable (wired point-to-point). When using the NT interface,
each port provides current feed to the user’s equipment.
• TE interface: intended for connection to user’s equipment having ISDN “S”
NT ports, for example, to ports of an ISDN switch. The connection is made by
a cross cable (see Appendix A). When using the TE interface, the ports do not
require external feed current, neither do they close a DC current loop.
Management Connections
The out-of-band management port of LA-110 has a serial RS-232 asynchronous
DCE interface terminated in a 9-pin D-type connector, designated CONTROL.
Front and Rear Panel Clearance

Allow at least 90 cm (36 inches) of frontal clearance for operator access. Allow at
least 10 cm (4 inches) clearance at the rear of the unit for interface cable
connections. However, during installation, replacement and cable connections a
larger clearance; at least 90 cm (36 inches) is needed.
Ambient Requirements
The ambient operating temperature of LA-110 is 0 to 50°C (32 °F to 122 °F), at a
relative humidity of up to 90%, non-condensing. LA-110 is cooled by free air
convection.
2.3 Package Contents

The LA-110 package includes the following items:
• LA-110 unit
• AC power supply unit (for LA-110 units with FXS, ISDN BRI and PRI interfaces)
• AC power cord
• AC/DC adapter plug (for LA-110 units with data and E1 interfaces)
• RM-33 kit for rack installation (if ordered)
• Technical documentation CD
• CBL-RJ45/2BNC/E1 adapter cable for unbalanced E1 uplink or user interface
• CBL-RJ45/D9/F/6FT cable for ASCII terminal connection (for LA-110 units with
FXS, ISDN BRI and PRI interfaces). .
Package Contents 2-5

2.4 Unpacking LA-110

1. Unpack the equipment.
2. Take out the LA-110 carefully and place it securely on a clean and flat surface.
3. Inspect the product for damage.
4. Report any damage found immediately.
2.5 LA-110 Enclosures

This section presents a physical description of the various versions of LA-110 units.
LA-110 Front Panel

Figure 2-1 shows the LA-110 front panel. The front panel includes only the LA-110
indicators.
Table 2-1 explains the functions of the indicators located on the LA-110 front
panel.
LA-110
PWR
WAN
LAN
Figure 2-1. Typical LA-110 Front Panel
Table 2-1. LA-110 Front Panel Indicators
Indicator Function
PWR (green) ON – LA-110 is powered up
WAN (red/green) ON (green) – Uplink (WAN side) is synchronized and is ready for normal
operation
ON (red) – Uplink is not synchronized
Blinks (green/red) – Uplink synchronization process is in progress.
LAN (green) ON – Transmit and/or receive activity is detected on the LAN port
LA-110 Rear Panels

All the connections are made to connectors located on the rear panel. LA-110 has
two different enclosures, depending on the user interface type:
• Data and E1 user interfaces: built-in power supply and 9-pin D-type female
control terminal port (see Figure 2-2)
• FXS, ISDN BRI and PRI user interfaces: external power supply and RJ-45
control terminal port (see Figure 2-3).
2-6 LA-110 Enclosures

LINE LINE
RX TX B A DCE
12 4 5 3 6 4 5
DCE
CONTROL E1/T1 SHDSL

V.35
Figure 2-2. Typical LA-110 Rear Panel (V.35 Data Port)
Figure 2-3. Typical LA-110 Rear Panel (Four ISDN Ports)
Table 2-2. LA-110 Rear Panel Components
Item Function
POWER Connector Power connector
DATA Connector 34-pin (V.35) or 15-pin D-type (X.21) female connector for connection to the
user synchronous data port
ETH Connector RJ-45 connector for connection to the LAN port, which has a 10/100BaseTX
station interface
SHDSL or ADSL Connector RJ-45 connector for connection to the uplink interface. The interface type is
marked above the connector, and the functions of the pins in this connector are
marked under the connector
CONTROL Connector • 9-pin, D-type, female connector for connecting LA-110 with data and E1
interfaces to supervisory terminal port, which has an RS-232 DCE interface
• RJ-45 connector for connecting LA-110 with FXS, ISDN BRI and PRI
interfaces to supervisory terminal port, which has an RS-232 DCE interface
ISDN Connector 1, 2, 3, 4 Four RJ-45 connectors for connection to the LA-110 user ISDN ports
FXS Connector 1, 2, 3, 4 Four RJ-11 connectors for connection to the LA-110 user analog FXS ports
E1 Connector RJ-45 user E1 port connector
LA-110 Enclosures 2-7

2.6 Preparing the LA-110 Unit for Installation

Caution for Installation
Before starting, review the safety and ESD precautions given in Section 2.1.
This section presents instructions for preparing LA-110 units for installation in
accordance with your specific application requirements.
Preparations for Installation – LA-110 Units with Uplink E1 Interface

LA-110 units with uplink E1 interfaces have several jumpers on the component
side of the E1 uplink sub-board that select the interface type (balanced or
unbalanced) to be used in your specific installation.
Before installing LA-110, you must open the LA-110 enclosure, check the position
of the jumpers the in accordance with the information given below, and when
necessary change jumpers positions as required.
To open the LA-110 enclosure:
1. Refer to Figure 2-4 and open the three screws that fasten the LA-110 cover.
Keep screws in a safe place, for reuse.
Release
Screws
Figure 2-4. LA-110 Cover Screws
2. Refer to Figure 2-5 and release the cover catches as illustrated in the figure. If
pushing the catches with the nails of your fingers is difficult, you may use a
narrow-blade screwdriver.
2-8 Preparing the LA-110 Unit for Installation

Press in this
direction with
your index
finger and...
Cover
Catches
… simultaneously
press upward edge
of bottom cover
with your thumb
Figure 2-5. Releasing LA-110 Cover Catches
3. After catches are released, the cover will easily slide off.
To remove the E1 uplink sub-board:
1. Unscrew the three screws holding the E1 uplink sub-board.
2. Remove the sub-board by lifting it straight up.
To check and change E1 interface jumper positions:
1. Turn the E1 uplink sub-board around to get access to the jumpers (refer to
Figure 2-6 to identify the jumper locations).
2. Set the jumpers to the appropriate positions to select the E1 uplink interface
type.
Note In addition to the jumpers identified in these figures, the LA-110 boards include
additional jumpers, preset by the manufacturer, that must not be moved.
Preparing the LA-110 Unit for Installation 2-9

J1 J3
UNBAL
Balanced Unbalanced
BAL
JP3 JP3
JP2 JP2
JP3
JP2
Figure 2-6. LA-110, Location of E1 Interface Jumpers
To close LA-110 enclosure:

1. Refer to Figure 2-7, and place cover as shown.
2-10 Preparing the LA-110 Unit for Installation

Figure 2-7. Closing the LA-110 Cover
2. Push cover in the direction shown in Figure 2-7, until you hear the cover
catches click as they lock the cover in place.
3. Refer to Figure 2-4 and fasten the cover with its three screws.
2.7 Installing the LA-110 Unit

for Installation
Caution Before starting, review the safety and ESD precautions given in Section 2.1.
This section presents instructions for installing LA-110 units in accordance with
your specific application requirements.
LA-110 units are intended for installation on desktops, shelves or in 19-inch racks.
Do not connect power to the enclosure before it is installed in the designated
position. For rack installation, a rack mount kit, RM-33, is available from RAD.
Refer to the RM-33 installation leaflet for detailed instructions.
2.8 Connecting the Interfaces

Before starting, refer to the site installation plan and identify the cables intended
for connection to this LA-110 unit.
Connecting Uplink
See general information on uplink connections in the Uplink and User Connections
subsection of this chapter.
The connection to the uplink port is made to the RJ-45 connector marked ADSL or
SHDSL, in accordance with the interface type installed in the LA-110.
Connecting the Interfaces 2-11

Connecting User Interfaces

See general information on connections in the Uplink and User Connections
subsection of this chapter. Ignore sections covering connections to ports not
included on your LA-110 unit.
Connecting Cables to E1 User Port

The E1 user port terminates in an 8-pin RJ-45 balanced connector. Unbalanced E1
interface is provided via CBL-RJ45/2BNC/E1 adapter cable.
To connect the balanced E1 or T1 interface:
• Connect the E1 line to the RJ-45 connector designated E1.
To connect the unbalanced E1 interface:
1. Connect the RJ-45 connector of the adapter cable to the RJ-45 port designated
E1.
2. Connect the receive cable to the red coaxial connector of the adapter cable.
3. Connect the transmit cable to the green coaxial connector of the adapter cable
Connecting Cable to LAN Port

The connection to the LAN port is made to the RJ-45 connector designated LAN.
Automatic MDIX function of the LA-110 units with data and E1 ports allows using
straight and cross cables for LAN connection.
For the LA-110 units with FXS, ISDN BRI and PRI ports use one of the following
connection methods:
• Use a standard (station) cable wired point-to-point for direct connection to an
Ethernet hub port.
• Use a cross cable for connection to another station port, e.g., to a PC with
Ethernet NIC.
Connecting Cable to User Synchronous Data Port

The user data port has a 34-pin or 15-pin D-type female connector, designated
DCE.
Connect the user’s equipment using appropriate cables.
Note To avoid ESD at the user data port:
• It is recommended that the DTE device (to be connected to the LA-110 data
port) be connected to the PROTECTIVE EARTH (safety ground).
• Verify that the LA-110 main power plug is disconnected from the wall socket.
• Connect the serial data cable to LA-110.
• Connect the power cable to LA-110.
Connecting Cables ISDN “S” Ports

ISDN “S” ports have RJ-45 8-pin connectors. Each ISDN “S” module has four
ports, identified by their number, 1 to 4.
Connect the user’s equipment using the prescribed cables. See the ISDN Port
Connections in Appendix A for cabling guidelines.
2-12 Connecting the Interfaces

Connecting a Terminal
When using a supervision terminal (including a PC running a terminal emulation
program), connect it to the DB-9 connector, designated DCE CONTROL, by
means of a straight cable (for LA-110 units with data and E1 interfaces).
For the LA-110 with FXS, ISDM BRI and PRI interfaces, connect the CONTROL
port to the RJ-45 connector, designated CONTROL, by means of the
CBL-RJ45/D9/F/6FT cable.
Connecting LA-110 to Management Station or Telnet Host

The link to network management stations using SNMP, and/or to Telnet hosts can
be provided in two ways:
• Inband, through the ATM uplink. This connection is automatically available
when the uplink cable is connected, provided IP connectivity to the
management station or Telnet host is available through the uplink port.
• Through the LAN interface, provided IP connectivity to the management
station or Telnet host is available through the LAN this port is connected to (for
example, when the management station or Telnet host is attached to the LAN).
This completes the installation of the LA-110 unit. Refer to Chapter 3 for turn-on
and preliminary configuration instructions.
2.9 Connecting the Power
Connecting the Internal Power Supply

LA-110 with the data and E1 interfaces accepts either 110–240 VAC or
-48/-60 VDC power through the same power inlet.
Before connecting or disconnecting any cable, the protective earth terminals of
this unit must be connected to the protective ground conductor of the mains
(AC or DC) power cord. If you are using an extension cord (power cable) make
Warning sure it is grounded as well.
Any interruption of the protective (grounding) conductor (inside or outside the
instrument) or disconnecting of the protective earth terminal can make this
unit dangerous. Intentional interruption is prohibited.
Connecting AC Power
AC power is supplied to LA-110 through a standard 3-prong socket.
AC power should be supplied via a 1.5m (5 ft) standard power cable terminated
by a standard 3-prong socket. A cable is provided with the unit.
To connect AC power:
1. Connect the power cable to the power connector on the LA-110 rear panel.
2. Connect the power cable to the mains outlet.
The unit turns on automatically upon connection to the mains.
Connecting the Power 2-13

Connecting DC Power
A special IEC 60320 adapter for the -48/-60 VDC power connection is supplied
with the unit.
To connect DC power:
• Refer to the DC power supply connection supplement for instructions how to
wire the DC adapters, and to the Handling Energized Products section.
Connecting the External Power Supply

LA-110 with the FXS, ISDN BRI and PRI interfaces receive power from an external
power supply (see Figure 2-8).
Any interruption of the protective (grounding) conductor (inside or outside the
device) or disconnecting the protective earth terminal can make the device
dangerous. Intentional interruption is prohibited.
Before switching this LA-110 unit on and before connecting any other cable,
LA-110 protective earth terminals must be connected to protective ground.
This connection is made through the DC and AC power cables and the AC
Warning power supply unit. The AC power cord plug should only be inserted in an
outlet provided with a protective ground (earth) contact. The protective action
must not be negated by use of an extension cord (power cable) without a
protective conductor (grounding).
Dangerous voltages may be present on the cables connected to the LA-110:
• Never connect cables to an LA-110 unit if it is not properly installed and
grounded. This means that its power cable must be inserted in an outlet
provided with a protective ground (earth) contact before connecting any
user or network (uplink) cable to the LA-110.
• Disconnect all the cables connected to the connectors of the LA-110 before
disconnecting the LA-110 power cable.
Caution LA-110 does not have a power on/off switch, and therefore it will start operating as
soon as power is applied. It is recommended to use an external power on/off
switch to control the connection of power to the LA-110. For example, the circuit
breaker used to protect the supply line to the LA-110 may also serve as the on/off
switch.
To connect the external power supply

1. Push the 6-pin connector (see Figure 2-8) of the cable, on the output of the
external power supply unit (P/S-AC/5/3.3/-48) that RAD supplies, into POWER
on the back panel of LA-110, until it snaps into place.
2. Connect the 3-pronged input plug of the external power supply unit to a
2m (6.6 ft) standard power cable, and then to the mains outlet.
2-14 Connecting the Power

Figure 2-8. External Power Supply Unit
First, connect the external power supply to LA-110, and only then connect the
external power supply to the mains. Not following this procedure can cause a
Warning
unit malfunction.
Connecting the Power 2-15

2-16 Connecting the Power

Chapter 3
Operation and Preliminary
Configuration
This chapter provides general operating instructions and preliminary configuration
instructions for LA-110 units.
For a complete description of LA-110 supervision language, refer to Appendix C.
3.1 Operating Instructions
Turn-on Procedure
Preparations
1. Before first-time turn-on, check that the installation and the required cable
connections have been correctly performed in accordance with the
instructions given in Chapter 2.
2. To enable monitoring LA-110 during power-up and preliminary configuration
procedures, it is recommended to connect a terminal to the CONTROL
connector of LA-110.
Any standard ASCII terminal (dumb terminal or personal computer emulating
an ASCII terminal) equipped with an RS-232 communication interface can be
used to control the LA-110 operation. For best results, use VT-100 terminal
emulation.
To monitor the power-up process, configure the terminal for 115.2 kbps, one
start bit, eight data bits, no parity, and one stop bit. Select the full-duplex
mode, echo off, and disable any type of flow control.
Operating Instructions 3-1

Chapter 3 Operation and Preliminary Configuration LA-110 Installation and Operation Manual
Turning On LA-110
Caution LA-110 does not have a power on/off switch, and therefore it will start operating as
soon as power is applied.
To turn on LA-110:
1. Connect LA-110 to power as explained in Chapter 2.
The LA-110 PWR indicator turns on; the other indicators remain off.
2. Wait for the completion of the power-up self-test and initialization. This takes
about one minute.
If the terminal is configured as explained in the Preparations section above,
it will display various messages during the power-up. These messages are
intended for technical personnel and no action is required.
A typical display is shown below (your display may differ with respect to file names
and other details).
BB0
Booting
Loading ...
Decompressing to RAM.
Processing archive: FLASH

Extracting SHDSL-RO.BIN .................................................
................................................................CRC OK
Running ...
Note If the terminal is configured to another rate, you will see only random strings of
characters during the booting process.
3. After Running ... is displayed, indicating successful completion of power-up
self-test and initialization, press <Enter> three times.
4. When you use the device for the first time, you must change the password
(from the default password). Refer to Forced Login (terminal management) or
Performing First Log-In (Web browser management).
1. Enter the default password (1234 for Superuser mode or 1234user for User
mode).
2. Use <F> or <B> to tab between Superuser and User mode.
3. Enter Current Password.
4. Enter New Password.
5. Enter New Password again (for confirmation).
3-2 Operating Instructions

LA-110 Installation and Operation Manual Chapter 3 Operation and Preliminary Configuration
6. Select action to follow illegal passwords:

Wait 5 minutes after 3 illegal passwords
Not Applicable.
5. If your password is accepted, you should see SUPERUSER MODE

(provided you entered a valid SUPERUSER password), followed by the
working prompt (the default prompt is LA110>).
If you see USER MODE, you cannot perform configuration activities, or any
other type of traffic-affecting activity. The LA-110 default USER MODE
password is: 1234user.
If your password is rejected, you will see ILLEGAL PASSWORD followed by the
Note
password prompt, PASSWORD>. In this case, try entering the password again.
6. The terminal displays LA-110 Supervisory Port on-Line. Type ‘H’ for Help.
If the password has been changed and is not known, refer to Appendix C.
Notes • If you enter an incorrect password three times in sequence, access to LA-110 is
disabled for 5 minutes (this is announced by the message Illegal password for 3
times, please wait 5 minutes.) In this case, wait at least 5 minutes before typing
anything. If not, the interdiction interval is restarted (the 5 minutes are always
counted from the last entry). Turning LA-110 off and then back on will not help
either.
• If the terminal is configured to another rate, you may have to press <Enter>
several times before you will see the message.
• In this manual, all the examples show the default working prompt, LA110>.
Normal Indications
Note For a description of LA-110 front panel indicator functions, refer to Chapter 2.
As long as LA-110 is powered, the PWR indicator lights steadily.
WAN Interface Status Indications

If the connection to the ATM network has not yet been established, the WAN
indicator lights steadily in red.
If the equipment at the other end of the uplink is operational and the uplink is
physically connected, the WAN indicator should display the following indications:
• When the uplink synchronization process starts, the WAN indicator starts
flashing (alternating between red and green).
• After uplink synchronization process is completed, the WAN indicator lights
steadily in green.
If you intend to use plug-&-play automatic configuration, make sure the WAN
indicator lights steadily in green.
Operating Instructions 3-3

LAN Interface Status Indications

If the LA-110 LAN port is not yet connected to an active LAN, the LAN indicator is
off.
After the connection is made and the auto-negotiation process is successfully
completed, the LAN indicator lights steadily or flashes at the rate of the traffic, in
accordance with the traffic flow through the LA-110 LAN interface.
Turn-off Procedure
To turn off LA-110:
• Disconnect the power from the unit.
3.2 Preliminary Configuration Using Plug & Play
General Information
Purpose
The purpose of the plug & play function is to enable fully automatic configuration
of a newly installed LA-110 unit from a remote location, inband, through the same
uplink that is used to connect the LA-110 to the ATM network.
Plug & play is actually achieved by performing the following sequence of
operations:
1. Automatic assignment of inband management IP address to LA-110.
2. Use of inband management to perform manual configuration of parameters
(using a Telnet host, or an SNMP-based network management station) and/or
download a complete configuration database (using TFTP) that contains all the
parameters needed by the specific LA-110 to provide the subscribed services
to the user’s equipment connected to its ports, in accordance with the terms of
the service contract.
Note LA-110 software can also be updated, using TFTP for downloading.
When Plug & Play can be Used

The plug & play function is active whenever the LA-110 uses the factory-default
parameters. The specific parameter values necessary for plug & play are as follows:
• Inband management VCC: 0.32 and enabled
• Inband management IP address: 0.0.0.0.
You can restore the factory-default parameters at any time, by entering the INIT
DB command (command line interface) or by selecting Factory Default in the
Configuration > System menu (menu-driven interface).
Note If you cannot communicate with the LA-110, restore the factory-default parameters
via Boot Manager, using the procedure of Appendix E.
3-4 Preliminary Configuration Using Plug & Play

How Plug & Play is Started

When the default parameter values are loaded, LA-110 learns its new inband
management IP address from the destination IP address carried in the first IP
packet received through the default inband management VCC (the address is
usually set using the DEF ADDR ATM command). This is sufficient for Telnet
access.
Moreover, if the first packet is an SNMP packet, LA-110 also adds the source IP
address as a manager (the address is usually set with the ADD NMS command).
After learning these parameters, the plug & play functionality is disabled, and
LA-110 is subject to the regular management and configuration rules.
Note Whenever necessary, the plug & play functionality can be enabled again by
restoring the factory-default parameters by selecting Reset from the Configuration >
System menu.
Preparations
The plug & play function is immediately available after the uplink is synchronized
(this is indicated by the WAN indicator lighting steadily in green).
Procedure for Plug & Play

To use Plug & Play:
1. Use the plug & play function to assign an IP address to the inband
management port of the LA-110 unit without the intervention of a local
operator. For example, send via Telnet a command through the inband
management VCC (or the RADview station may try to contact the LA-110 via
SNMP).
2. Using a Telnet host and the supervision language described in Appendix C, use
the procedure described in Appendix D to download a configuration file using
TFTP. At this stage, the downloading can also be made through the LA-110
LAN port.
The new configuration takes effect after LA-110 is reset (this occurs automatically
after successful downloading).
Preliminary Configuration Using Plug & Play 3-5

3.3 Preliminary Configuration

This section covers the general preliminary activities needed when plug-&-play
function is not used. In this case, the complete set of LA-110 configuration
operations can be performed from an ASCII terminal connected to the CONTROL
port on LA-110 rear panel. The supported functions include modification of the
configuration and mode of operation, including setting system default values.
All configuration and monitoring activities are performed, using the following two
methods:
• By entering commands (command line interface)
• By selecting options in menus (menu-driven terminal interface and Web-based
ConfiguRAD).
The same functions can also be performed from a remote site using Telnet hosts or
SNMP-based network management stations. For detailed information, refer to the
user manuals covering the corresponding management facilities.
To prevent unauthorized modification of the operating parameters, LA-110
supports two access levels:
• Superuser – can perform all the activities supported by the LA-110
management facility
• User – can only access the status and performance monitoring screens, but
cannot perform traffic-affecting activities (for example, in the user access mode
it is not possible to modify the LA-110 configuration and operation mode).
The access level for the current session is determined by the user name and
password entered at the beginning of the session.
The access level can be changed only after the current session ends.
Forced Login
When you use the device for the first time, you must change the password (from
the default password).
To login (terminal):
1. Enter the default password.
2. Toggle between Superuser and User mode, using F and B keys.
3. Enter current password (1234 for Superuser mode or 1234user for User
mode).
Not Applicable.
3-6 Preliminary Configuration

PASSWORD>****
SUPERUSER MODE
The LA110's password is the default password,

In order to keep working, you must change the password.
User Type : Superuser

Current Password : ****
New Password : ****

Confirm New password : ****
Wait 5 min after : 3 Illegal passwords
New password was successfully changed.
Figure 3-1. Forced Login
Preparation for Preliminary Configuration

To perform a local configuration, connect a terminal to the CONTROL port on the
LA-110 front panel, as described in Section 3.1 – Preparations.
CONTROL Port Characteristics

LA-110 communicates with the supervision terminal through the CONTROL
connector.
• Supported data rates: 300, 1200, 2400, 4800, 9600, 19200, 38400, 57600
and 115200 bps. In addition, when the Auto function is enabled, the
CONTROL port can recognize the operating data rate of the terminal by
analyzing the timing of three consecutive Carriage Return + Line Feed
characters (generated by pressing <Enter> three times. The detected data rate
is then used for the current communication session. The default value is
115200 bps.
• Start bits: 1
• Word format: 7 or 8 data bits
• Parity: Odd, Even, or Disabled
• Stop bits: 1.
Terminal Characteristics
Any standard ASCII terminal (dumb terminal or personal computer emulating an
ASCII terminal) equipped with an RS-232 communication interface can be used to
control the LA-110 operation. For best results, it is recommended to use VT-100
terminal emulation.
Preliminary Configuration 3-7

Software
The software necessary to run the LA-110 supervision program is contained in the
LA-110 device. Moreover, LA-110 stores all the configuration information
generated or altered during the communication with the terminal: no information
is stored in the terminal.
Telnet (IP) Host Characteristics
Typically, the Telnet host is a PC or a UNIX station, with the appropriate suite of
TCP/IP protocols. The host can be directly connected to the LAN connector of the
managed LA-110.
However, the host may also be located at a remote site, the only requirement
being that IP communication is established between that site and LA-110.
Starting a Configuration Session

To begin a configuration session:
1. Configure the terminal to the communication parameters used by the
CONTROL port: select the full-duplex mode, turn terminal echo off and
disable any type of flow control.
2. Whenever possible, select VT-100 terminal emulation.
3. Set the following default communication parameters for the initial
configuration session: 115.2 kbps, eight data bits, no parity, and one stop bit.
4. Connect the serial communication port of the terminal to the CONTROL port
of LA-110.
5. Turn the supervision terminal on.
6. After Running ... is displayed, indicating successful completion of power-up
self-test and initialization, press <Enter> three times.
7. When you use the device for the first time, you must change the password
(from the default password). Refer to Forced Login.
8. The terminal will display LA-110 Supervisory Port on-Line.
9. Type ‘H’ for help, followed by the password prompt, PASSWORD>. If the
LA-110 password has not yet been changed, type the default password, 1234,
and then press <Enter>.
If your password is accepted, you should see SUPERUSER MODE
(provided you entered a valid Superuser password), followed by the
working prompt (the default prompt is LA110>).
Note If you see USER MODE, you cannot perform configuration activities, or any other
type of traffic-affecting activity. The LA-110 default USER MODE password is
1234user.
If your password is rejected, you will see ILLEGAL PASSWORD followed by
the password prompt, PASSWORD>. In this case, try entering again the
password. If the password has been changed and is not known, refer to
Appendix C.

10. At the LA110> prompt, enter required command to start unit configuration.
or
At the LA110> prompt, type menu to activate the menu-driven terminal
interface.
General Procedures for Web Browsers

Web Browser Requirements
The following Web browsers can be used to access the LA-110 supervision utility
from any location that enables access to the LA-110 using Internet protocols.
• Internet Explorer 5.0, 5.5, 6.0, running on Windows™ 98, Windows™ 2000,
Windows™ XP
• Netscape Communicator 7.1, running on Windows™ NT or Unix.
Performing First Log-In

When you use the device for the first time, you must change the password (from
the default password).
To log-in for the first time:
1. Connect the LAN port of LA-110 to the network interface card of your PC via
a cross cable.
2. Open the Web browser.
3. Disable any pop-up blocking software, such as Google Popup Blocker.
4. Enter the IP address of the LA-110 in the address field of the browser in the
following format: http://’IP address’ and then press <Enter> to command the
browser to connect (‘IP address’ stands for the actual LA-110 IP address).
5. After the opening window (see Figure 3-2) is displayed, click LOGIN.
The Password Entry window is displayed (see Figure 3-3).
6. Enter a user name (superuser or user)
7. Enter the default user name and password (1234 for Superuser mode or
1234user for User mode).
Note If log-in has failed (wrong user name or password), LA-110 gives additional log-in
attempt before the 5-minute timeout is forced.
8. Click Submit.
The Main menu is displayed
9. In the Main menu, click Change Password.
The Change Password menu is displayed.
10. Enter Current Password.


Not Applicable.
14. Save your changes.
The full Main menu is displayed.
15. Proceed with the LA-110 configuration.
Figure 3-2. Web Browser Access, Typical Log-in Window

Figure 3-3. Web Browser Access, User Name and Password Entry Window
Figure 3-4. Web Browser Access, Typical Main Menu Window

Navigating the ConfiguRAD Menus

ConfiguRAD is a Web-based remote access terminal management software. It
provides a user-friendly interface for configuring, collecting statistics and
performing diagnostic tests on the LA-110 units.
To choose an option:
1. Click a link in the ConfiguRAD screen to display the next menu.
2. Once the target screen is displayed, select a value from the drop-down box or
enter it in a text box.
Some of the LA-110 menus have a 'Save' option. When choosing options from
these menus, you must confirm your choice by selecting 'Save', otherwise your
entry will be ignored.
At the left-hand bottom corner ConfiguRAD provides some auxiliary management
tools:
• Status – shows the number of users currently managing LA-110
• Trace – opens an additional pane for system messages, progress indicators
(ping, software and configuration file downloads) and alarms. It is
recommended to keep the trace pane open all the time.
• Refresh All – refreshes all ConfiguRAD display elements.
Logging Out
To end the current session:
• In the Main menu, click Logout.
Note LA-110 allows only one management session to be active at a time. If the
Web-based management session was not ended properly (for example, by closing
the Web browser window), you have to wait five minutes before attempting the
next log-in. If you try to log in during the five-minute security timeout, LA-110 does
not allow to proceed to the Main menu, displaying ‘Too Many Users’ message.
Likewise, the Web-based management session cannot be initiated, if a terminal or
Telnet session is still in progress.
3.4 LA-110 Supervision Language
Supervision Language Syntax

• Except when starting a new session, commands can be entered only when the
working prompt is displayed. The default working prompt is LA110>. The
prompt always appears at the beginning of a new line, and the cursor appears
to the right of the prompt.
• Commands are case-insensitive, for example, you can type commands in
either lower case and/or upper case letters, and they will be interpreted as
upper case only. The only exception is the DEF NAME command, which
enables the user to change the working prompt: you can use both lower-case
and upper-case letters, and your entry is accepted and used as is.
3-12 LA-110 Supervision Language

• Commands addressed to a specific port identify that port by its type. For your
convenience, the port type designators are listed below:
NETWORK – uplink (ATM) port
LAN – LAN port
USER – the user port(s) installed on the LA-110: E1, ISDN or FXS
DATA – serial synchronous DATA port.
• In the various commands, you may use IF instead of INTERFACE.
• To correct typing errors, backspace by pressing the <Backspace> key until
the error is cleared, and then type the correct characters.
• To clear the whole command string before its entry is completed, press
<Ctrl+C> (that is, hold the <Ctrl> key down and type C). This will display
the LA-110 prompt, and you can enter a new command.
• The screens present one line at a time.
• To advance to the next field in the same line, press <Tab> (sometimes space
is also accepted).
• To select among a list of predefined parameters within a field, press F
(forward) or B (backward).
• If a field requires an alphanumerical entry, type the desired characters.
• After selecting the desired values in the current line, press the <Enter> key to
advance to the next line. The next line of parameters is displayed only after the
<Enter> key is pressed.
• Commands must end with a carriage return <Enter>.
• You can edit the previous command by pressing <Ctrl+A>. LA-110 stores the
last command in a special buffer, and <Ctrl+A> retrieves the previous
command from that buffer. The retrieved command appears on the command
line: to edit it, press the <Backspace> key to clear the section to be changed,
and then type the desired characters.
• Press <Ctrl+D> to execute the last command again.
• To obtain help, type H.
• After pressing <Enter> in the last data field line, LA-110 checks its validity.
If the command is accepted, you will see the current date and time
(retrieved from the real-time clock of LA-110), following by the prompt,
and executes the command.
In case an error is detected during the command evaluation, the command
is not executed. Instead, the terminal displays an error message that
explains the problem. The correct command must then be entered again.
Some of the parameter values entered by the user are also evaluated even
during command entry.
LA-110 Supervision Language 3-13

General Configuration Procedure

LA-110 configuration procedures are performed in the following order:
1. Define the general parameters
2. Define the system parameters
3. Configure the physical parameters of each port
4. Configure the port connections.
5. Configure other parameters and characteristics.
Table 3-1 presents the steps needed to perform a general configuration procedure.
Note that the actual steps needed for your particular installation may be different
from the list appearing in Table 3-1.
Table 3-1. General LA-110 Configuration Procedure
Step Action Use the Command Menu Path

1 Reset the database to the default parameters INIT DB Main menu > Configuration >
System > Date & Time > Factory
Default
2 Define terminal control codes DEF TERM SET Main menu > Configuration >
System > Control Port > Terminal
3 Define control port characteristics DEF SP PORT Main menu > Configuration >
System > Control Port
DEF PASSWORD Main menu > Configuration >
System > Control Port > Change
Password
4 Set LA-110 system time and date DEF TIME Main menu > Configuration >
DEF DATE System > Date & Time
5 Define LA-110 system characteristics DEF SYSPARAMS Main menu > Configuration >
System > General Parameters

Table 3-1. General LA-110 Configuration Procedure (Cont.)

6 Define the parameters of the various physical Main menu > Configuration >
interfaces: Physical Layer > ATM
Network port DEF NETWORK
Main menu > Configuration >
Logical Layer > ATM
LAN port DEF LAN Main menu > Configuration >
Physical Layer > LAN
Logical Layer > LAN > Port
Application
DATA port DEF DATA Main menu > Configuration >
Physical Layer > Serial
Logical Layer > Serial >
Application
User port(s) DEF USER Main menu > Configuration >
Physical Layer > E1 (ISDN or FXS)
7 Define LA-110 reference clock source DEF CLOCK Main menu > Configuration >
System > Clock
8 Define connections for the various ports ADD CONN DATA Main menu > Configuration >
Logical level > Serial >
Connections
ADD CONN USER Main menu > Configuration >
Logical Layer > User >
Connection
ADD BUNDLE Main menu > Configuration >
(E1 port only) Logical Layer > User > Bundle
ADD PRI Main menu > Configuration >
(E1 port only) Logical Layer > User > PRI


9 Define relevant routing data and configure ADD BRIDGE Main menu > Configuration >
associated services INTERFACE Logical Layer > LAN > IF
Configuration > Interface
ADD STATIC MAC Main menu > Configuration >
ADDR Logical Layer > LAN > IF
or Configuration > MAC Address
ADD IP Logical Layer > LAN > IF
INTERFACE Configuration > Interface
ADD STATIC Main menu > Full setup >
ROUTING Configuration > Logical Layer >
LAN > IF Configuration > Static
routing
DEF DEFAULT Main menu > Configuration >
GATEWAY Logical Layer > LAN > IF
Configuration > Default Gateway
ADD NAT Main menu > Configuration >
Logical Layer > LAN IF
Configuration > NAT
ADD PAT Main menu > Configuration >
Configuration > PAT
ADD DHCP Main menu > Configuration >
Configuration > DHCP
10 Define management configuration DEF ADDR ATM Main menu > Configuration >
System > Management > Inband
Management > ATM Address
ADD NMS Main menu > Configuration >
System > Management > SNMP >
Manager List
DEF COMMUNITY Main menu > Configuration >
System > Management > SNMP >
Community
11 Define logistic information DEF ID Main menu > Configuration >
System > Management > Device
Information > Description
DEF NAME Main menu > Configuration >
System > Management > Device
Information


12 Activate connections ACTIVATE BRIDGE –
INTERFACE
or
ACTIVATE IP
INTERFACE
ACTIVATE CONN
DATA
ACTIVATE CONN
USER
13 Define firewall configuration ADD FW Main menu > Configuration >
Configuration > Firewall
14 Define VLAN ADD BP Main menu > Configuration >
Logical Layer > LAN > VLAN
Configuration > VLAN Member
ADD VLAN MEMBER Main menu > Configuration >
Logical Layer > LAN > VLAN
Ending a Configuration Session

To end the current session (terminal):
• Enter the EXIT command, when managing LA-110 via command line interface.
or
• Type & and press <Enter>, when managing LA-110 via menu-driven interface.
In addition, LA-110 automatically terminates the current session after no user input
activity is detected for the log-off timeout interval (the default is 10 minutes). After
a session is ended, it is necessary to enter a valid password again to start a new
session.

Index of Commands
Table 3-2 lists all configuration parameters of the LA-110 management software
and corresponding commands, and gives short description of their purposes. Full
description of the parameters and their possible values is given in Appendix C in
the form of supervision language commands.
To find detailed description of a parameter:
1. Locate required parameter or configuration screen of the menu. Refer to the
first column of Table 3-2 and to the menu maps at the end of this chapter.
Table 3-2 divides configuration parameters into following subgroups:
Main menu > Inventory
Main menu > Configuration > System
Main menu > Configuration > Physical Layer
Main menu > Configuration > Logical Layer
Main menu > Monitoring > System
Main menu > Monitoring > Physical Layer
Main menu > Monitoring > Logical Layer
Main menu > Diagnostics (see also Chapter 4)
Main menu > S/W and File Transfer (see also Appendix D).
2. Refer to the second column of Table 3-2 to find a corresponding supervision

language command.
3. Refer to Appendix C for the detailed description of the command and its values.
Table 3-2. Configuration Screens and Commands
Menu Path Command Purpose
Main menu > Inventory

Main menu > Inventory DSP SYS Displays general information on the LA-110
Main menu > Configuration >System
Main menu > Configuration DEF SYSPARAMS Define the general LA-110 system parameters
>System > General Parameters
Main menu > Configuration DEF CLOCK Define the LA-110 system clock reference source
>System > Clock
Main menu > Configuration ADD NMS Define the IP address of a new network management
>System > Management station (NMS), and select the enterprise-specific traps that
will be sent to the new network management station
Main menu > Configuration DEF ADDR ATM Define the ATM management connection parameters
>System > Management > Inband
Management > Inband
Management > ATM Address
Main menu > Configuration DEF SP PORT Define supervisory port interface characteristics
>System > Control Port

Table 3-2. Configuration Screens and Commands (Cont.)

Main menu > Configuration DEF DATE Set the date for the LA-110 internal real-time clock
>System > Date & Time > Date
Main menu > Configuration DEF TIME Set the time for the LA-110 internal clock
>System > Date & Time > Time
Main menu > Configuration > DEF PASSWORD Define management session password
System > Control Port > Change
Password
Main menu > Configuration INIT DB Load the set of factory-default parameter values into the
>System > Factory Default database
Main menu > Configuration RESET Reset LA-110
>System > Reboot
Main menu > Configuration > Physical Layer
Main menu > Configuration > DEF NETWORK Define the parameters of the LA-110 uplink port
Physical Layer > ATM/SHDSL
(ADSL)
Main menu > Configuration > DEF USER Define the parameters of the LA-110 user interface (E1,
Physical Layer >FXS/E1/ISDN ISDN or FXS)
Main menu > Configuration > DEF DATA Define the operating mode of the synchronous data port
Physical Layer > Serial
Main menu > Configuration > Logical Layer
Main menu > Configuration > DEF NETWORK Define the parameters of the LA-110 uplink port
Logical Layer > ATM
Main menu > Configuration > DEF SYSPARAMS Define the general LA-110 system parameters
Logical Layer > User
AAL1 ADD BUNDLE Create a timeslot bundle on the E1 user port
Logical Layer > E1 > Bundle
AAL1 ADD CONN USER Add a new connection to an LA-110 user port, and specify
Main menu > Configuration > the parameters required to set up this connection
Logical Layer > E1 > Connection
AAL2 ADD PRI Define timeslot utilization on the E1 user port, when
Main menu > Configuration > operated in the ISDN PRI mode
Logical Layer > User > PRI
Main menu > Configuration > ADD CONN USER Add a new connection to an LA-110 user port, and specify
Logical Layer > ISDN the parameters required to set up this connection
Main menu > Configuration > ADD CONN USER Add a new connection to an LA-110 user port, and specify
Logical Layer > FXS > Connection the parameters required to set up this connection
Main menu > Configuration > ADD PSTN Define PSTN interfacing characteristics
Logical Layer > FXS > PSTN
Serial data DEF DATA Define the operating mode of the synchronous data port
Logical Layer > Serial > Application
Main menu > Configuration > ADD CONN DATA Add a new connection to the synchronous data port, and
Logical Layer > Serial > Connection specify the parameters required to set up this connection

Router mode DEF LAN Define the configuration parameters for the LAN port
Application > Port Application
Main menu > Configuration > ADD DHCP Add DHCP address pool
Application > DHCP Server
Main menu > Configuration > DEF SYSPARAMS Enable or disable LA-110 to receive a DNS request from
Logical Layer > LAN > Port the host
Application > DNS Relay
Main menu > Configuration > ADD IP IF Define the parameters needed to set up IP interface for the
Logical Layer > LAN > IF LA-110 LAN port, when configured to operate in the router
Configuration > Interface mode
Main menu > Configuration > ADD STATIC ROUTING Add static routes to the router table of the LAN port (when
Logical Layer > LAN > IF the LAN port is configured to operate in the router mode)
Configuration > Static Routing
Main menu > Configuration > DEF DEFAULT GATEWAY Define the WAN interface of the router serving as default
Logical Layer > LAN > IF gateway (when the LAN port is configured to operate in the
Configuration > Default Gateway router mode)
Main menu > Configuration > ADD NAT Add network address translation
Logical Layer > LAN > IF
Configuration > NAT
Main menu > Configuration > ADD PAT Add port address translation
Configuration > PAT
Main menu > Configuration > ADD DHCP Add a DHCP address pool
Configuration > DHCP
Main menu > Configuration > ADD FIREWALL Define the parameters for firewall security.
Configuration > Firewall
Bridge mode DEF LAN Define the configuration parameters for the LAN port
Application
Main menu > Configuration > ADD BRIDGE IF Define the parameters needed to set up a WAN interface
Logical Layer > LAN > IF for the LA-110 LAN port, when configured to operate in
Configuration > Interface the bridge mode
Main menu > Configuration > ADD STATIC MAC ADDR Add a static MAC address to the LAN MAC table (when the
Logical Layer > LAN > IF LAN port is configured to operate in the bridge mode)
Configuration > MAC Address
VLAN-aware mode DEF LAN Define the configuration parameters for the LAN port
Application

Main menu > Configuration > ADD BRIDGE IF Define the parameters needed to set up a WAN interface
Logical Layer > LAN > IF for the LA-110 LAN port, when configured to operate in
Configuration > Interface the bridge mode
Main menu > Configuration > ADD STATIC MAC ADDR Add a static MAC address to the LAN MAC table (when the
Logical Layer > LAN > IF LAN port is configured to operate in the bridge mode)
Configuration > MAC Address
Main menu > Configuration > ADD BP Create a port on the LA-110 internal bridge, configure its
Logical Layer > LAN > VLAN parameters, assign VCs to the port and define VLAN
Configuration > Bridge Port priorities to be handled by the VCs
Main menu > Configuration > ADD VLAN MEMBER Assign a VLAN to the bridge port, configure egress filtering
Logical Layer > LAN > VLAN parameters and assign name to the VLAN
Main menu > Monitoring > System
Main menu > Monitoring > System DSP ALM Display the contents of the alarm buffer
> Alarm Log
Main menu > Monitoring > System CLR ALM LOG Clear the alarm history buffer
> Clear Alarm Log
Main menu > Monitoring > System DSP SYSERR Delete the diagnostic errors array
> System Error Log
Main menu > Monitoring > System DSP FW LOG Display firewall log
> Firewall Log
Main menu > Monitoring > System CLR FW LOG Clear firewall log
> Clear Firewall Log
Main menu > Monitoring > System CLR PM Reset all the performance monitoring counters to 0, and
> Clear PM thus clear all the performance monitoring data stored by
LA-110
Main menu > Monitoring > Physical Layer
Main menu > Monitoring > Physical DSP PM NETWORK Displays the performance monitoring statistics for the ATM
Layer > Network network interface physical layer
Main menu > Monitoring > Physical DSP PM USER Display performance monitoring statistics for the user port
Layer > E1/ISDN (E1 or ISDN)
Main menu > Full Setup > DSP PM LAN Display the performance monitoring statistics for the LAN
Monitoring > Physical Layer > LAN port
Main menu > Monitoring > Physical DSP PM DATA Display performance monitoring statistics for the data port
Layer > Serial
Main menu > Monitoring > Logical Layer
Main menu > Monitoring > Logical DSP PM ATM Display the performance monitoring statistics for the ATM
Layer > ATM > Network network interface physical layer in the network
Main menu > Monitoring > Logical DSP PM CONN OAM Display the OAM performance monitoring statistics for a
Layer > ATM > OAM > User USER selected user port connection
Main menu > Monitoring > Logical DSP PM CONN OAM Display the OAM performance monitoring statistics for a
Layer > ATM > OAM > Serial DATA selected connection on the data port
Main menu > Monitoring > Logical DSP PM OAM Display the OAM performance monitoring statistics on the
Layer > ATM > OAM > Total LA-110 uplink

Main menu > Monitoring > Logical DSP PM OAM STATUS Display the OAM traffic status for the LA-110 uplink
Layer > ATM > OAM > Status
Main menu > Monitoring > Logical DSP PRI Display timeslot utilization for the E1 user port, when
Layer > User configured to operate in the ISDN PRI mode
Main menu > Monitoring > Logical DSP PM IP Displays IP performance monitoring statistics on the LAN
Layer > LAN > IP port router (only when configured to operate in the router
mode)
Main menu > Monitoring > Logical DSP PM IP IF Display the performance monitoring statistics for a specified
Layer > LAN > IP Interface IP interface (when the LAN port is configured to operate in
the router mode)
Main menu > Monitoring > Logical DSP PM CONN DATA Display performance monitoring statistics for a specified
Layer > Serial connection defined on the data port
Main menu > Diagnostics
Main menu > Diagnostics > Ping PING Ping an IP host
Main Menu > Diagnostics > Loop LOOP Activate a user-controlled loopback
Main Menu > Diagnostics > SEND LOOPBACK BRIDGE Send OAM loopback cells for a selected WAN interface of
Loopback > Bridge INTERFACE the LAN port bridge, when the port is configured to
operate as a bridge
Main Menu > Diagnostics > SEND LOOPBACK IP Send OAM loopback cells for a selected IP interface of the
Loopback > IP Interface INTERFACE LAN port router, when the port is configured to operate as
a router
Main Menu > Diagnostics > SEND LOOPBACK USER Send OAM loopback cells for a selected connection of the
Loopback > User user port (E1 or ISDN)
Main Menu > Diagnostics > SEND LOOPBACK DATA Send OAM loopback cells for a selected connection of the
Loopback > Data synchronous data port
Main menu > S/W & File Transfer
Main Menu > S/W & File Transfer > ACTIVATE TFTP Perform a file transfer using TFTP
File Transfer via TFTP
3.5 Menu Structure

If you choose to configure and monitor LA-110 via a menu-driven terminal or
ConfiguRAD interface, refer to Figure 3-5, Figure 3-6, Figure 3-7, Figure 3-8,
Figure 3-9, Figure 3-10, Figure 3-11, Figure 3-12, Figure 3-13, Figure 3-14, Figure 3-
15, Figure 3-16, Figure 3-17, Figure 3-18, Figure 3-19 and Figure 3-20 below.
If you want to return to the command-driven operation, select CLI in the Main
Note menu.
3-22 Menu Structure

Main Menu Inventory

Inventory System Parameters
Configuration Physical Configuration
Monitoring
Diagnostics
S/W & File Transfer
CLI
Figure 3-5. Main Menu and Inventory
General Parameters
Configuration System Coding Law
General Parameters Jitter Buffer [1-20]
System
Clock OAM Type
Physical Layer
Management OAM Fail Indication
Logical Layer
Control Port Adaptation Layer
Date & Time LES Default VPI
Factory Default LES Default VCI
Reboot Application Identifier
Call Termination
Nationality
Port 1 in Interface
Port 2 in Interface FXS or ISDN User Interface
Port 3 in Interface
Port 4 in Interface
CAS Signaling
SSCS Parameters
CPS Parameters
AAL2 Shaping Mode CAS Signaling
ISDN Activation Mode Normal
Ringing
Clock On Hook
System Clock Off Hook
NTR Reversed Polarity
Control Port SSCS Parameters

Encoding Selection
Baud Encoding Profile
Data DSP Gains
Parity
Terminal Terminal Change Password
Change Password Security Level
Date & Time Pop Alarm User Name
Log off Time [1-99] Old Password
Date
New Password
Time
Confirm New Password
Max Number of Login
Failure
Figure 3-6. Configuration > System Menu (General Parameters, Clock, Control Port, Date & Time)
Note The following parameters are available only if the adaptation layer is set to AAL2:
LES Default VP, LES Default VPI, LES Default VCI, Application Identifier, Nationality,
AAL2 Shaping Mode, SSCS Parameters, CPS Parameters, ISDN Activation Mode.
Menu Structure 3-23

Community
Management Device Information Read Community
Device Information Description Read Write Community
SMNP Name Trap Community
Inband Management ILMI Community
SNMP
Community Manager List
Manager List Index
IP Address
Inband Management Link Up and Down
ATM Address Alarm Trap
ILMI Address Status
Manager List Summary
ATM Address
IP Address
DHCP Client
Management VCC
Management VCC
VPI
ILMI Address VCI
VPI Status
VCI Continuity Check
Status LB Operation
LB Fail Threshold
LB Fail Indication
Service Category
Figure 3-7. Configuration > System (Management)
3-24 Menu Structure

Physical Layer
ATM ATM
SHDSL (ADSL) Cell Scrambling
FXS (E1 or ISDN) Idle Cell <CLP>
LAN
Serial SHDSL
Mode
Power Backoff
Standard
Line Probe Enable
Snext Margin
Current Margin
Asym Psd
Min Rate
Max Rate
ADSL
Framing Type
Trellis Code
Transmission Mode
Standard Compliance
Maximum Bits per Bin
Tx Frequency Bin - Start
Tx Frequency Bin - End
Rx Frequency Bin - Start
Rx Frequency Bin - End
Tx Power Attenuation
Pilot Tone Request
E1
Framing
Line Code
Receiver Sensitivity
Synchronization
Idle Code
CRC-4
Signaling Sample Time
Phantom
FXS Port 1 in Interface
Tx Gains Port 2 in Interface
Rx Gains Port 3 in Interface
Port 4 in Interface
ISDN
Phantom Echo Cancelation
Echo Cancellation Port 1 in Interface, B1
Port 1 in Interface, B2
LAN Port 2 in Interface, B1
Auto Negotiation Port 2 in Interface, B2
Max Capability Advertised Port 3 in Interface, B1
Default Type Port 3 in Interface, B2
Device MAC Address Port 4 in Interface, B1
Port 4 in Interface, B2
Serial
Interface Type
CRC
Baud
Hardware Flow Control
Inverted Clock
Figure 3-8. Configuration > Physical Layer
Menu Structure 3-25

Logical Layer ATM

ATM Shaping Mode
E1
Serial E1 Bundle Ts Table
LAN
Bundle Bundle Number Allocation Ts1 Ts2 Ts3 Ts4......Ts15
Connection Ts Table Yes No Yes Yes No
Echo Cancelling
Connection
Bundle Index
Connection Type
VPI
VCI
Rx Bytes per Cell
Tx Bytes per Cell
Continuity Check
LB Operation
LB Fail Threshold
LB Fail Indication
Rx, Tx Signaling Bits
Pointer
Pointer Parity
Signaling
Figure 3-9. Configuration > Logical Layer > ATM and E1
Logical Layer ISDN

ATM Port Index
ISDN VPI
Serial VCI
LAN Continuity Check
LB Operation
LB Fail Threshold
LB Fail Indication
CID D-Channel
CID B1-Channel
CID B2-Channel
Figure 3-10. Configuration > Logical Layer > ISDN
3-26 Menu Structure

Logical Layer FXS Connection

ATM Port Number in the Interface
FXS VPI (r/o in AAL2)
Serial VCI (r/o in AAL2)
LAN Continuity Check
LB Operation
LB Fail Threshold
LB Fail Indication
Status
PSTN Duration
Collision Priority Index
Meter Pulse Frequency Type
Off-hook Minimum Time (ms) Signal
On-hook Minimum Time (ms) Duration
Register Recall Minimum Time (ms) Status
Duration Duration Elements Summary
Rate
Attenuation Rate
Pulse Duration Rate Type (Enable Metering IE)
Cadence Ring Pulses per Hour
Digit Status
Rate Elements Summary
Attenuation
Attenuation Type (Attenuation IE)
Tx Value (in decibels)
Rx Value (in decibels)
Status
Attenuation Elements Summary
Pulse Duration
Index
Pulse Duration Type
Pulse Type
On Period (ms)
Off Perion (ms)
Status
Pulse Duration Elements Summary
Cadence Ring Status List

Cadence Ring Cadence Ring Type 1
Types Status List Cadence Ring Type 2
Cadence Type Index Cadence Ring Type 3
Cadence Ring Periods List Cadence Ring Type 4
Number of Periods Cadence Ring Type 5
Applicable in this Type Cadence Ring Type 6
Active Cadence Ring Cadence Ring Type 7
Elements Summary Cadence Ring Type 8
Cadence Ring Type 9
Digit Cadence Ring Type 10
On Period - min
On Period - max Periods List
Off Period - min Period # 1 - On Period
Off Period - max Period # 1 - Off Period
Inter Digit Time Period # 2 - On Period
Period # 2 - Off Period
Period # 3 - On Period
Figure 3-11. Configuration > Logical Layer > FXS
Menu Structure 3-27

Logical Layer Serial Application

ATM Application Port Application
FXS Connection Protocol
Serial CLLM
LAN
Connection (FR) Connection (AAL1 Stream)
or
Connection Number VPI [0 - 31]
DLCI VCI [0 - 255]
VPI Rx Byte per Cell [10 - 47]
VCI Tx Byte per Cell [10 - 47]
Interworking Continuity Check
Mode LB Operation
FR-SSCS-DLCI LB Fail Threshold
DE->CLP LB Fail Indication
CLP->DE Connection Type
DE<->CLP
Continuity Check
LB Operation
LB Fail Threshold
LB Fail Indication
Service Category
MBS
PCR
SCR
Figure 3-12. Configuration > Logical Layer > Serial
3-28 Menu Structure

Logical Layer LAN Port Application

ATM Port Application Port Application
FXS IF Configuration DHCP Server
Serial DNS Relay
LAN
IF Configuration Interface (LAN) Interface (WAN) Interface (Host)
Interface Attached IP Interface or Attached IP Interface or Attached IP IF
Static Routing IP Address IP Address IP Address
Default Gateway Aging Time Mask
NAT Timeout RIP
PAT RIP Encapsulation
DHCP DHCP Relay VPI
Firewall DHCP Server IP Address VCI
Max Hop Count Cont. Check
LB Operation
Static Routing LB Fail Threshold
Index LB Fail Indication
Net IP Service Category
Mask PCR
Matrica
Interface
Next Hop
Default Gateway
Interface
Active
NAT
NAT Status
Inbound Port
Protocol
Outside
Redirect Host
PAT
Index
Real IP
Virtual IP
Port
Protocol
DHCP
Enable/Disable DHCP
Router IP
First IP of DHCP Range
Last IP of DHCP Range
Netmask of DHCP Range
Allocation Table
Firewall
Security Level
IP Interface
Direction
FTP Option
Printing
Name
Rules
Figure 3-13. Configuration > Logical Layer > LAN (Router)
Interface
Logical Layer LAN Port Application Interface Number
ATM Port Application Port Application VPI
FXS IF Configuration Bridge Mode VCI
Serial Aging Time Cont. Check
LAN Encapsulation LB Operation
PPPoE LB Fail Threshold
IF Configuration LB Fail Indication
Service Category
1. Interface
2. MAC Address MAC Address
1. Number Static MAC Address
2. Static MAC Address
3. Interface
Figure 3-14. Configuration > Logical Layer > LAN (Bridge)
Menu Structure 3-29

Interface
Logical Layer LAN Port Application Interface Number
ATM Port Application Port Application VPI
FXS IF Configuration Bridge Mode VCI
Serial VLAN Configuration Aging Time Cont. Check
LAN Encapsulation LB Operation
PPPoE LB Fail Threshold
IF Configuration LB Fail Indication
Service Category
Interface
MAC Address MAC Address
Number Static MAC Address
VLAN Configuration
Static MAC Address
Bridge Port Bridge Port
VLAN Member VLAN ID
Bridge Port
Bridge Port
PVID
Accept Frame Type
Ingress Filtering
VLAN Member
Index
Bridge Port
VID
VLAN Name
Egress
Figure 3-15. Configuration > Logical Layer > LAN (VLAN-Aware)
Network General Information

General Information Current Date
Monitoring System Current Current Time
System Alarm Log Interval Seconds
Physical Layer Clear Alarm Log Intervals
Logical Layer System Error Log User E1 Framer Sync Status
Clear System Error Log General Information DSP Version
Firewall Log Current Op State
Clear Firewall Log Interval Globespan Software Version
Clear PM Bit Rate
LAN SNR
Physical Layer Loop Attenuation (db)
General Information
Network Current Transmit Power
ISDN/FXS/E1 Interval
LAN
Serial Data FR
General Information
Current
Interval
Figure 3-16. Monitoring > System and Physical Layer
3-30 Menu Structure

Monitoring Logical Layer ATM Network General Information

System ATM Network General Information Current Date
Physical Layer User OAM Current Current Time
Logical Layer LAN Interval Seconds
Serial Intervals General Information
OAM Current Date
User User E1 Current Time
LAN Port Index in the Interface Seconds
Serial General Information Connection Details
Total User E1 Table
Status General Information
LAN Current Date
Index Current Time
General Information Seconds
Interface Table Interface on Port
Data Fr General Information
Index on the Interface Current Date
General Information Current Time
Data (FR) Table Seconds
Connection Details
Total
General Information
General Information
Current Current Date
Interval Current Time
Seconds
Intervals
Figure 3-17. Monitoring > Logical Layer (ATM)
General Information
Current Date
Current Time
Monitoring Logical Layer User E1 Seconds
System ATM General Information Connection Details
Physical Layer User User E1 Table E1 Status
Logical Layer LAN ELCP PRI Status
Serial D-Channel CID
LAN
IP IP Interface General Information
IP Interface Index Current Date
General Information Current Time
Data Fr Interface Table Seconds
Index on the Interface Interface on Port
General Information General Information Status
AAL5 Statistics Current Date
FR Statistics Current Time
Seconds
Connection Details
Figure 3-18. Monitoring > Logical Layer (User, LAN, Serial)
Diagnostics Ping
Ping IP Address
Loop
Loopback Loop
None
Remote Network
Remote Data
Local Data
Local User
Remote User
Remote Remote Data
Loopback
Port
Conn Index
Send Loopback
Figure 3-19. Diagnostics
Menu Structure 3-31

S/W & File Transfer File Transfer via TFTP

Command
File Transfer via TFTP
Server IP
File Transfer via HTTP
Retry Timeout
Number of Retries
File Name
File Transfer via HTTP Download using HTTP
Download Command
Upload File
Upload Using HTTP

Command
Figure 3-20. S/W & File Transfer
3-32 Menu Structure

Chapter 4
Diagnostics
This chapter describes the LA-110 diagnostic functions and provides
troubleshooting instructions.
4.1 Diagnostic Tests
LOOPback Functions
LA-110 supports several types of loopbacks. All the available loopback functions
are described in the following paragraphs, including loopbacks supported only by
interfaces available only upon order. Therefore, ignore loopbacks related to
interfaces not available on your LA-110.
Loopbacks are activated by means of the LOOP command, and therefore in the
following paragraphs the loopbacks are identified by the designation displayed by
the supervision terminal.
At any time, only one loopback can be activated. Therefore, when a new loopback
is activated, any previous user-controlled loopback is automatically deactivated.
REMOTE NETWORK Loopback

The remote network loopback returns the cells received through the uplink toward
the network.
This loopback should be activated only when the uplink is synchronized.
Figure 4-1 shows the signal paths for a typical remote network loopback.
This test performs a complete check of the WAN link through the ATM network,
including the transmission plant connecting the two LA-110 units, and the network
interface and ATM processor of the local LA-110.
Diagnostic Tests 4-1

Chapter 4 Diagnostics LA-110 Installation and Operation Manual
User LA-110
Interface
Network
Interface
User Protocol ATM Network
Interface Conversion Processor Port
User
Interface
Figure 4-1. REMOTE NETWORK Loopback
LOCAL DATA Loopback

The local data port loopback returns the user data port transmit data via the
receive path of the port, to the user’s equipment connected to the port. During
the loopback, the local LA-110 sends an “All 1s” pattern (payload) to the remote
end of the link.
While the loopback is activated, the equipment connected to the corresponding
data port of LA-110 provides the test signal, and must receive its own transmission.
Figure 4-2 shows signal paths for a typical local data port loopback.
User LA-110
Interface
Network
Interface
DATA DATA Protocol ATM Network
Port Port Conversion Processor Port
User
Interface
Figure 4-2. LOCAL DATA Loopback
Note that the user's equipment connected to the local data port must be able to
operate properly when receiving its own signal, otherwise it will enter an alarm
state when the loopback is activated. If the equipment can operate normally
during the loopback, it must operate normally.
This test performs a complete check of the connections to the user's equipment,
and of the data port interface.
4-2 Diagnostic Tests

LA-110 Installation and Operation Manual Chapter 4 Diagnostics
REMOTE DATA Loopback

The remote data port loopback returns the received data port signal toward the
network.
The loopback is performed within the data port interface, by connecting the data
port receive signal to the input of its transmit path. The equipment connected to
the remote end of the link provides the test signal, and must receive its own
transmission. Figure 4-3 shows a typical remote data port loopback.
Note that the user's equipment must be able to operate properly when receiving
its own signal, otherwise it will enter an alarm state when the loopback is
activated. If the equipment can operate normally during the loopback, it must
operate normally.
The equipment connected to the local LA-110 starts receiving “All 1s” pattern
(unframed) stream.
This test performs a complete check of the data link through the ATM network,
including the cables connecting the remote equipment to the LA-110, the
transmission plant connecting the LA-110 unit, and the LA-110 unit itself.
LA-110
User
Interface
Network
Interface
DATA DATA Protocol ATM Network
Port Port Conversion Processor Port
User
Interface
Figure 4-3. REMOTE DATA Loopback
REMOTE USER Loopback

The remote user loopback returns the received E1 signal toward the network. The
loopback is performed within the E1 port interface.
Note The loopback cannot be used when the LA-110 uses the voice compression mode
(an ordering option).
While the loopback is activated, the equipment connected to the E1 port of the
remote LA-110 provides the test signal and must receive its own transmission.
The equipment connected to the local LA-110 starts receiving “All 1s” pattern (AIS).
Figure 4-4 shows the signal paths for a typical remote USER loopback. This test
fully checks the data link through the ATM network, including the cables
connecting the remote equipment to the LA-110, the transmission plant
connecting the LA-110 unit, and the LA-110 unit itself.
Diagnostic Tests 4-3

User LA-110
Interface
Network
User Interface
Interface Protocol ATM Network
Conversion Processor Port
E1
Port
E1 Port
Interface
Figure 4-4. REMOTE USER Loopback
LOCAL USER Loopback

The local user loopback returns the E1 user port transmit signal, after regeneration,
via the receive path. While the loopback is activated, the equipment connected to
the E1 user port of LA-110, provides the test signal and must receive its own
transmission.
Note
The loopback cannot be used when the LA-110 uses the voice compression mode
(an ordering option).
During the loopback, the local LA-110 sends “All 1s” pattern (payload) to the
remote end of the link.
Figure 4-5 shows the signal paths for a local user loopback. This test performs a
complete check of the connections to the local user's equipment.
User LA-110
Interface
Network
User Interface
Interface Protocol ATM Network
Conversion Processor Port
E1
Port
E1 Port
Interface
Figure 4-5. LOCAL USER Loopback
4-4 Diagnostic Tests

REMOTE REMOTE DATA Loopback

When the remote remote data port loopback is activated in the local
LA-110, the unit sends a proprietary loopback activation code in the AAL1 header.
This code initiates the remote data loopback in the remote RAD’s unit, returning
the received data port signal toward the network. In order to enable sending of the
loopback activation code, you must use the ADD CONN DATA command to set
the Connection Type to of the AAL1 stream to STRUCTURED (SIGNAL
TRANSPORT).
The loopback is performed within the data port interface of the remote RAD’s
unit, by connecting the data port receive signal to the input of its transmit path.
The equipment connected to the local end of the link provides the test signal, and
must receive its own transmission.
The equipment connected to the data interface on the remote LA-110 starts
receiving an “All 1s” pattern (unframed) stream during the test.
Figure 4-6 shows a typical remote remote data loopback.
Note that the user's equipment must be able to operate properly when receiving
its own signal, otherwise it will enter an alarm state when the loopback is
activated. If the equipment can operate normally during the loopback, it must
operate normally.
This test performs a complete check of the data link through the ATM network,
including the cables connecting the local equipment to the LA-110, the
transmission plant connecting the remote RAD’s unit, and the remote unit itself.
Remote Unit
User
Interface
Network
Interface
Network ATM Protocol DATA
Port Processor Conversion Port
User
Interface
Figure 4-6. REMOTE REMOTE DATA Loopback
Troubleshooting 4-5
4.2 Troubleshooting
Troubleshooting Using LA-110 Indications

In case a problem occurs, check the displayed alarm messages and refer to
Appendix B for their interpretation.
If the problem cannot be corrected by performing the actions listed in Appendix B,
refer to Table 4-1. Identify the trouble symptoms and perform the actions listed
under “Corrective Measures” in the order given, until the problem is corrected.
Table 4-1. Troubleshooting Chart
No. Trouble Symptoms Probable Cause Corrective Measures

1 LA-110 does not turn on 1. No power Check that the DC power cable is properly
connected to the LA-110 POWER connector.
Check that both ends of the AC power cable
are properly connected.
2. No AC power Check that AC power is available.
3. Defective DC power Replace the DC power supply unit.
supply unit
4. Defective LA-110 If the problem persists, contact the RAD
Technical Support Department.
2 The WAN indicator of the 1. External problem Check proper connections of the uplink cable
local LA-110 lights in red to the LA-110 SHDSL or ADSL connector.
Activate the remote network loopback at the
local LA-110. If the remote equipment
connected to the LA-110 uplink port does not
receive its own signal, check its operation and
replace if necessary.
3 The LAN indicator of the 1. Problem on LAN or Check for proper connection of the cable to the
local LA-110 is off its connections LAN port.
Check that at least one node is active on the
LAN, and that the hub or Ethernet switch to
which the LA-110 LAN port is connected is
powered.
Technical Support Department
4-6 Troubleshooting
Table 4-1. Troubleshooting Chart (Cont.)

4 The equipment attached to 1. Configuration Check that the LAN indicator of the local
the LAN port of the local problems LA-110 is on, or at least flashes from time to
LA-110 cannot time. If not, refer to Item 3 above.
communicate with other Check the LAN port configuration, and the
equipment on the WAN other LA-110 parameters that affect processing
of LAN traffic.
2. External problem If other ports of the LA-110 operate normally,
check the external equipment (for example,
default gateway and other routers) that process
the traffic coming from the local LA-110 LAN
port.
5 The equipment connected 1. Configuration Check the DATA port configuration, and the
to the local LA-110 DATA problems other LA-110 parameters.
port cannot communicate
2. External problem Activate the local loopback on the local data
with the remote end
port. Check that the user's equipment receives
its own signal while the loopback is connected.
If it does, the problem is external.
6 The local LA-110 reports a 1. External problem Activate the REMOTE USER loopback. Check
REMOTE SYNC LOSS alarm that the alarm state changes to OFF. If it does,
on the local E1 user port the problem is external.
2. Problem with E1 Activate the LOCAL USER loopback. Check
equipment that the E1 equipment connected to the local
connected to the LA-110 operates normally. If not, troubleshoot
local LA-110 its connections to the LA-110 and check its
operation.
7 The local LA-110 reports a 1. External problem Activate the LOCAL USER loopback. Check
LOCAL SYNC LOSS for the that the E1 equipment connected to the local
E1 user port LA-110 operates normally. If not, troubleshoot
its connections to the LA-110 and check its
operation.
Troubleshooting 4-7
Table 4-1. Troubleshooting Chart (Cont.)

8 A subscriber’s phone 1. Configuration Check the FXS user port configuration, and the
connected to a local LA-110 problems other LA-110 parameters.
port cannot communicate
with the remote end 2. External problem Activate the remote network loopback at the
remote LA-110. A strong sidetone should be
heard in the local phone earpiece. If not, check
the connections of the phone to the local
LA-110 and its operation and replace if
necessary.
Troubleshooting Voice Transmission Supported by ISDN Ports

When using an LA-110 equipped with ISDN ports, use the following procedure to
identify the cause of voice communication problems:
1. Check for good synchronization using the DSP PM NETWORK command.
2. Check using the DSP CONN USER command that all the D channels received
CID numbers from the voice gateway.
3. Check that when the ISDN phone is off-hook, the DSP PM ATM command
indicates an RX and TX traffic of 180 cells per second.
4. Check that while the ISDN phone is off-hook, the corresponding port of the
V5 switch connected to the voice gateway that serves the corresponding ISDN
port is in the Activate state.
5. Using the DSP PM USER command, check that the number of HDLC frames
increases each time you take the ISDN phone off-hook.
Troubleshooting Voice Transmission Supported by FXS Ports

When using an LA-110 equipped with FXS ports, use the following procedure to
identify the cause of voice communication problems.
1. Perform Steps 1, 2, 4 described above for an LA-110 equipped with ISDN
ports.
2. Using the DSP USER command, check that the port state is changed when you
take the phone off-hook.
Troubleshooting Data and E1 Ports

1. Check clock settings using the DSP SYS command.
2. Check clocks settings in all the user’s equipment served by the LA-110 link (for
example, PBX, routers).
3. Check that the configured bandwidth is sufficient, using the DSP PM
NETWORK command (the bandwidth is displayed in the Bit Rate field).
4-8 Troubleshooting
4. Check that all the parameters defined by means of the DEF USER command
are compatible with the user’s equipment served by the LA-110.
5. For problems with transmission by data ports, use the DEF DATA command to
change the Invert Clock setting to ENABLE (if problem is not corrected, return
the previous setting).
6. Check for negligible errors on the uplink (ADSL or SHDSL) using the DSP PM
NETWORK command.
7. In case of problems with transmission through the E1 port, open the LA-110
case in accordance with the instructions given in Chapter 2 and check that all
the jumpers are in the correct position for the desired E1 interface type
(balanced or unbalanced).
8. Try to increase the jitter buffer size to at least than 20 ms (use the DEF
SYSPARAMS command and then send a RESET command to the LA-110).
Troubleshooting LAN Services

Use the following commands to monitor the reception and transmission of frames
to and from the LA-110 LAN port, and to locate the problem either to the LA-110
or to external equipment (for example, routers or bridges):
1. DSP PM ATM for analyzing cells transmitted at the ATM level.
2. DSP PM LAN for analyzing frames at the user’s side of the LAN port.
3. DSP PM CONN LAN for analyzing LAN frames transmitted at the ATM level.
4. DSP PM IP for analyzing IP frame transmission performance (in particular,
check the discarded frames).
4.3 Frequently Asked Questions

Q: What is the minimum cell rate supported by LA-110?
A: The minimal cell rate that can be supported by LA-110 is the maximum cell rate
(after synchronization) divided by 139 and rounded up.
For example:
If the DSL line is synchronized at 2312 kbps (5452 cells/sec), the minimal
supported connection rate is 2312/139=16634 bps (rounded up) (40 cells/sec).
If the DSL line is synchronized at 4608 kbps (10866 cells/sec), the minimal
supported connection rate is 4608/139=33152 bps (rounded up) (79 cells/sec).
Note
The cell rate displayed (DSP PM NETWORK command) in any 2-wire DSL line
contains an 8 kbps overhead over the actual data rate. When the device displays
synchronization at 2320 kbps, the actual data rate over which cells can be
transmitted is 2320-8=2312 kbps. When using 4W this applies to every 2W
separately. If the 4W is synchronized in 2*2312, the actual data rate is 2 * (2312-8)
= 2* 2304 = 4608
Frequently Asked Questions 4-9

The above description specifies our ability to support minimum cell rate.
However, this raises several issues. For example, if the line has been
synchronized on 2-wire, then the minimum is 40 cell/sec. Later the device may
synchronize on 4-wire and then the minimum must change to 79 cells/sec.
Q: How do I calculate the LA-110 packetization delay per ATM cell for CES applications?
A: Calculating the LA-110 packetization delay per ATM cell:
Delay per cell = 47 / (8000 × N), where:
47 – Number bytes per cell in AAL1
8000 – Number of bytes in one timeslot
N – number of timeslots.
For example:
Delay for 64 kbps = 47/(8000 × 1) = 0.005875 = 5.875 msec
Delay for 384 kbps = 47/(8000 × 6) = 0.000979 = 979 µsec
To the results, add an additional 4 msec delay for the LA-110 processing time.
Q: Can a standard ISDN bus with S interface be terminated on the LA-110 BRI port?
A: The LA-110 BRI interface is used only as a physical extension of a standard ISDN bus
with an S interface over an ATM network. It does not terminate the S interface, and
it does not deal with messages. Two extension applications are possible using the
LA-110 with ISDN ports:
ISDN S interface to voice gateway.
ISDN S interface to another ISDN S interface (using LA-110 units on each
side).
You may connect any type of device (phones, computer fax modem) to the ISDN
bus and the LA-110 110 will provide the physical medium to support transmission
over an ATM network.
Q: In CDVT 'Optimization YES', when does LA-110 decide to send the cell?
A: LA-110 schedules the VC cells in the required spacing, according to the shaping
parameters (PCR in AAL1).
Q: How does LA-110 handle VLAN priority?

A: In bridging and routing mode, LA-110 supports transparent transmission of VLAN
frames up to 1522 bytes.
4-10 Frequently Asked Questions

4.4 Technical Support

Technical support for this product can be obtained from the local distributor from
whom it was purchased.
For further information, please contact the RAD distributor nearest you or one of
RAD's offices worldwide.
Technical Support 4-11

4-12 Technical Support

Chapter 5
Configuring LA-110 for
Typical Applications
5.1 Introduction
This chapter provides detailed instructions for configuring the most common
LA-110 applications. It includes:
• Configuring timing reference
• Configuring network uplink
• Serial data port applications
• E1 port applications
• FXS port application
• ISDN applications
• LAN port applications.
Each section shows the appropriate interface connections for those applications on
the LA-110 rear panel.
5.2 Configuring Timing Reference

For any application, a clock source must be determined before configuring the
LA-110 network and user interfaces.
The LA-110 system timing can be locked to the following clock sources:
• Internal clock
• Adaptive clock
• Derived from the main link
• Network Timing Reference (NTR).
To configure the timing reference:

• Type: def clock
Configuring Timing Reference 5-1

Chapter 5 Configuring LA-110 for Typical Applications LA-110 Installation and Operation Manual
The following clocking configurations are available:

• Internal clock: the timing of the sub-network and network interfaces is locked
to the IAD’s internal clock oscillator. This option may be used when two IADs
are connected back-to-back (without a DSLAM or ATM switch).
• Adaptive clock: the clock is regenerated from the ATM cells arrival rate. Use
this clocking option when the DSLAM does not support NTR, or in back-to-
back applications.
• Derived from the main link: the clock can be derived from the uplink. LA-
110 locks the clock and supplies it to its interfaces.
• NTR (Network Timing Reference): LA-110 recovers the clock from the 8 kHz
NTR clock. This is the recommended clock mode.
5.3 Configuring Network Uplink

LA-110 provides access to the ATM network using xDSL technologies.
Before different services can be offered (LAN, FR, E1 etc), LA-110 must be
synchronized opposite the DSLAM.
The technologies for connection to a DSLAM are:
• SHDSL
• ADSL.
Application
FXS
LA-110
PSTN ATM xDSL

V5.2 STM-1 LAN
Network
xDSL
Voice Gateway
DSLAM
ISDN
BAS LA-110
IP
Internet LAN
Figure 5-1. Network Uplink Configuration
5-2 Configuring Network Uplink

LA-110 Installation and Operation Manual Chapter 5 Configuring LA-110 for Typical Applications
Configuration Procedure
To set the physical layer mode:
1. Type: def network.
Figure 5-2 shows the screen for SHDSL and Figure 5-3 shows the screen for
ADSL.
2. Set the physical layer mode according to the DSLAM parameters.
This achieves synchronization between LA-110 and the DSLAM.
3. In back-to-back connections (for SHDSL only), set one device to CO and the
opposite to CPE.
LA110>def network
Physical Layer :
ATM Parameters:
Scramble Idle Cell CLP Shaping mode
-------- ------------- -----------------
Enable 1(ITU) HW Shaping, NCITS = 1
Mode Physical Interface

---- -----------------
C0 2 Wire
Power Backoff Standard

------------- --------
Enable ANNEX B
Line Probe Enable Snext Margin Current Margin Asym.PSD

----------------- ------------ -------------- --------------------
Adaptive Rate Disable Margin 1 db Margin SHDSL Rate Asym R1 Disable
Min Rate Max Rate

-------- --------
200 2312
SHDSL port added successfully.
Figure 5-2. Def Network – SHDSL
Configuring Network Uplink 5-3

LA110>def network
ADSL ANNEX-A Interface

======================
ATM Parameters:
=============
Scramble Idle cell CLP CDVT Optimization

-------- ------------- -----------------
Enable 1 (ITU) no
Physical Layer :
===============
Framing Type Trellis coding

------------ --------------
type 3 Trellis coding enabled
Transmission mode Standard compliance

----------------- -------------------
Frequency division G.dmt
Tx frequncy Bin Rx frequncy Bin

Maximum bits per bin Start End Start End
-------------------- --------------- ---------------
15 6 31 32 255
Tx Power attenuation Pilot tone request (PTR)

--------------------- ------------------------
0 db PTR enable
ADSL port added successfully
Figure 5-3. Def Network – ADSL
To verify proper configuration:

1. Type: dsp pm network to check uplink synchronization.
Refer to Figure 5-2 and Figure 5-4 for SHDSL, Figure 5-3 and Figure 5-5 for
ADSL.
5-4 Configuring Network Uplink

2. Verify that Framer Sync Status is Sync status.

3. Verify synchronization Bit Rate.
LA110>dsp pm network
SHDSL PM
---------
Current date : AUG. 28, 2003
Current time : 09:51:01
Seconds : 839
Intervals : 3
Framer Sync Status : No Sync DSP Version : 1

Op State : IDLE Globespan Software Version : R1.7.2
Bit Rate : 0 SNR : 0
Loop Attenuation : 0.0 (db) Transmit Power : 0.0
CRC Err Sec Severely Err Sec LOSW Sec Unavailable Sec
--------------------------------------------------------------------------
current : 0 0 0 0 0
15min : 0 0 0 0 0
24 hours : 0 0 0 0 0
***************************************************************************
Figure 5-4. Dsp Network – SHDSL
LA110>dsp pm network
ADSL ANNEX-A PM
===============
Current date : JUL. 14, 2003
Seconds : 142
Intervals : 1
Op State: HANDSHAKE
Bit rate Latency
Downstream Upstream Downstream Upstream SNR
------------------------------------------------------------
0 0 Interleave Interleave 0
Interleave Fast Errored frames Loss of signal defects

-----------------------------------------------------------------------------
1 Sec 0 0 0 0
15 min 0 0 0 0
From start 0 0 0 0
***************************************************************************
Hit any key to continue...
Figure 5-5. Dsp Network – ADSL
Configuring Network Uplink 5-5

5.4 Configuring Serial Data Port

This section contains procedures for configuring the serial port of LA-110 in the
following applications:
• Frame Relay to Frame Relay (FRF.5)
• Frame Relay to ATM (FRF.8)
• Structured AAL1 Cell on Data Port
• Unstructured AAL1 Cell on Data Port.
Frame Relay to Frame Relay Network Interworking (FRF.5)

LA-110 provides a solution for connecting Frame Relay equipment over an ATM
network to other Frame Relay equipment.
Site A Site B
Frame Relay Frame Relay

Connection xDSL ATM xDSL Connection
Network
LA-110 LA-110
Router Router
DSLAM DSLAM
Figure 5-6. FR to FR Application
To set the application mode of the LA-110 serial interface:

1. Set the LA-110 uplink to achieve synchronization between LA-110 and the
DSLAM (refer to Configuring Network Uplink in Section 5.3).
2. Type: def data.
3. Set the Application to Frame Relay.
4. Set the appropriate maintenance protocol as defined at the user side (FRAD).
5. Set Baud to the selected rate.
The serial data port is DCE and provides the clock to the user.
Physical Interface: V35
Application: Frame Relay
Protocol CRC
None 16 bit
Baud Inverted Clock

256 kbps Disable
CLLM
No
Figure 5-7. Def Data – FR to FR
5-6 Configuring Serial Data Port

To add ATM path between LA-110 and the DSLAM:

1. Type: add conn data (see Figure 5-8)
2. Set the same value for DLCI at both ends.
3. Set VPI/VCI.
This indicates the ATM path.
4. For FRF.5 application, set Interworking to Network.
LA110>add conn data
Adding connection number 1 to data port
DLCI VPI.VCI Interworking Active

16 3 .3 Network On
FR-SSCS-DLCI DE->CLP CLP->DE

16 convert conv-DE-&-CLP
Cont Check Bit-rate Allocated Buffers

off-two way UBR 50
The connection was added successfully.
Figure 5-8. Add Conn Data – FR to FR

1. Verify that the connection has been configured successfully by checking that
the information has been transmitted between both routers.
2. Verify end-to-end ATM link integrity. Type: send loopback data
To view the configuration parameters:
1. Type: dsp data (see Figure 5-9)
2. Type: dsp conn data (see Figure 5-10)
LA110>dsp data
FRAME RELAY Interface

Application : Frame Relay
Clock : DCE
Protocol : T1.617 network
CRC : 32 BIT
CLLM : no
Baud rate : 64k
Inverted Clock : Disable
Figure 5-9. Dsp Data – FRF.5
Configuring Serial Data Port 5-7

LA140>dsp conn data

Display mode : all

Inter- FR-SSCS- Cont
Index DLCI VPI.VCI DE->CLP CLP->DE working DLCI Check
1 16 3. 3 convert conv-DE-&-CLP network 16 off-two way
Alloc Bit Time-Since-

Index Mode FECN Buff rate MDCR SCR PCR MBS Last-Change
Active
1 ----- ----- 50 UBR ---- ---- ---- ---- 0:01:40
on
Figure 5-10. Dsp Conn Data – FRF.5
Frame Relay to ATM – Service Interworking (FRF.8)

In the FR to ATM (FRF.8) application, LA-110 provides a solution for connecting
Frame Relay equipment over an ATM network to ATM equipment (FRF.8).
Frame Relay
Connection xDSL STM-1 ATM STM-1
Network
LA-110
Router Router
DSLAM
Figure 5-11. FR to ATM Application
To set the application mode of the IAD serial interface:

2. Type: def data (see Figure 5-12).
3. Set Application to Frame Relay.
4. Set Protocol to the appropriate maintenance protocol as the user FRAD.
5. Set Baud to the selected rate.
The serial data port is DCE and provides the clock to the user.

LA110>def data
Physical Interface : V35
Protocol CRC
T1.617 network 32 BIT
Baud Inverted Clock

64k Disable
CLLM
no
Do you wish to save the changes ? (Y/N) y
The Baud rate was changed.
The LA 110 is Rebooting....
Figure 5-12. Def Data – FRF.8
To create an ATM path between LA-110 and the DSLAM:

1. Type add conn data (see Figure 5-13)
2. Set the same value for DLCI as you set at the FR router side.
3. Set VPI/VCI.
This indicates the ATM path.
4. For an FRF.8 application, set Interworking mode to Service.
5. Set the Mode to Translation.
This will convert FR traffic shaping parameters to ATM.
LA110>add conn data
Adding connection number 1 to data port
16 3.3 Service On
FECN Mode DE<->CLP
convert Translation convert
Cont Check Bit-rate Allocated Buffers
off-two way UBR 50
Figure 5-13. Add Conn Data – FRF.8


• Verify that the connection has been established successfully.
To view the configuration parameters:

1. Type: dsp data (see Figure 5-14)
2. Type: dsp conn data (see Figure 5-15)
LA110>dsp data

Clock : DCE
Protocol : T1.617 network
CRC : 32 BIT
CLLM : no
Baud rate : 64k
Figure 5-14. Dsp Data – FRF.8
LA110>dsp conn data

Display mode : all

3 .3 16 1 convert convert service --- off-two way
Alloc Bit Time-Since-

Index Mode FECN Buff rate MDCR SCR PCR MBS Last-Chang Active
1 translation convert 50 UBR ---- ---- ---- ---- 0:19:12 on
Figure 5-15. Dsp Conn Data – FRF.8
Transferring Structured AAL1 Bit Stream on Data Port

LA-110 supports structured AAL1 connections on the data port. This enables the
data port throughput to be terminated on a fractional/full E1 port, configured to
support AAL1 structured ATM cells.

Site B Site A
Fractional
V.35 xDSL ATM xDSL E1
Network
LA-110 LA-110 E1 Device
Server
DSLAM DSLAM
Figure 5-16. Structured AAL1 Connection on Data Port
Site A (LA-110 with E1 Port)

To enable transmitting fractional E1 over ATM:
2. Type: def sysparams
This sets the ATM adaptation layer to AAL1, in order to transmit fractional
E1 over ATM (CES- Circuit Emulation Service).
LA110>def sysparams
Coding Law : A law
DNS Relay : Enable
DHCP Server: N/A (use DEF LAN to change LAN to router mode)
Jitter Buffer (in ms) : 10
OAM Type : end-to-end
OAM Fail Indication : Enable
Adaptation layer : AAL 1
Figure 5-17. Def Sysparams – AAL1 Site A
To set the E1 port general parameters:

• Type: def user (see Figure 5-18)

Note Make sure that the physical layer parameters, such as: framing, synchronization, idle
code, and CRC-4 match the attached E1 equipment.
LA110>def user
E1 Interface - USER side
Physical Layer :
Framing Line-code Receiver-sensitivity

multi-frame (G.732S) HDB3 30 DB
Synchronization Idle-code CRC-4

FAST (1 sec) 7e on

100 msec
Figure 5-18. Def User – AAL1 Site A
To define the timeslots to be used in the ATM connection:

• Type: add bundle (see Figure 5-19)
An index number is assigned to the bundle (in Figure 5-19 index number 1
is used).
LA110>add bundle
Adding bundle number 1 :
Transmit and Receive Time Slots

1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 10 11 12 13 14 15
yes yes yes yes no no no no no no no no no no no
16 17 18 19 20 21 22 23 24 25 26 27 28 29 30 31
n/a no no no no no no no no no no no no no no no
Figure 5-19. Add Bundle – AAL1 Site A
To add an ATM connection/path between the local LA-110 unit and the
DSLAM:
• Type: add conn user (see Figure 5-20)
In this example (see Figure 5-20) VPI/VCI = 4/4 is used.

E1 Interface – USER Side

- - – - - - - - - - - - -
Adaptation layer: AAL 1
Bundle Index : 1
Connection Type : CES
Rx Bytes Tx Bytes
VPI.VCI Per Cell Per Cell Cont Check Active
- - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - -
4 .4 47 47 off two-way On
Pointer Parity : On
Signaling : No
LB Operation LB Fail Threshold LB Fail Indication
- - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - -
off N/A N/A
Figure 5-20. Add Conn User – AAL1 Site A
Site B (LA-110 with Serial Data Port)

To enable transmitting fractional E1 over ATM:
2. Type: def sysparams.
E1 over ATM (CES- Circuit Emulation Service).
LA110>def sysparams
Coding Law : A law
DNS Relay : Enable
Figure 5-21. Def Sysparams – AAL1 Site B
To set the general parameters of the data port:

• Type: def data (see Figure 5-22).
LA110>def data
Application: AAL1 Stream
DCD&RTS Baud Inverted Clock
- - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - -
Obey Signals 64k Disable
Figure 5-22. Def Data – AAL1 Site B

To add an ATM connection/path between the Site B remote LA-110 unit and
the DSLAM:
• Type: add conn data (see Figure 5-23)
In this example (see Figure 5-23) VPI/VCI = 4/4 is used.

Note Structured connection on the data port is equivalent to the LA-110 CES connection
on the E1 port with no signaling.
LA110>add conn data

ADD CONN - AAL1 STREAM
=======================
Rx Bytes Tx Bytes Connection

VPI.VCI Per Cell Per Cell Cont Check Type
- - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - -
4. 4 47 47 Off two-way Structured

- - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - -
off N/A N/A
Pointer
Parity Active
- - - - - - -
On On
Figure 5-23. Add Conn Data – AAL1 Site B

the information transmitted from Site A is received error-free at Site B.
2. Verify the transmitted and received information.
Type: dsp pm data (see Figure 5-24) and then dsp pm user (see Figure 5-25).
3. Verify that Tx and Rx are the same values.

LA110>dsp pm data
DATA PORT STATISTICS
--------------------
Current date : SEP. 09, 2003
Seconds : 94
Intervals : 0
Tx Total Rx Total
K bytes K bytes I-Circuit C-Circuit Loop
------------------------- --------- --------- ----
1 second : 0 0 Active Active Not Active
15 minutes : 0 0
24 hours * : 0 0
Figure 5-24. Dsp Pm Data – AAL1
LA110>dsp pm user
E1 PORT (USER SIDE) PHYSICAL LAYER STATISTICS
---------------------------------------------
Seconds : 465
Intervals : 0
ES UAS SES BES LOFC CSS

-------------------------------------------
1 second : 0 1 1 0 0 0
15 minutes : 1 456 466 0 1 32
24 hours * : ***** **** **** **** **** ****
Figure 5-25. Dsp Pm User – AAL1

Transferring Unstructured AAL1 Bit Stream on Data Port

LA-110 provides a solution for unstructured AAL1 connections on the data port.
Site A Site B
V.35 xDSL ATM xDSL V.35

Network
LA-110 LA-110
Server Server
DSLAM DSLAM
Figure 5-26. Unstructured AAL1 Connection on Data Port
To set the ATM adaptation layer to AAL1:

LA110>def sysparams
Coding Law : A law
DNS Relay : Enable
Figure 5-27. Def Sysparams – AAL1 Unstructured
To sets the general parameters of the data port:

• Type: def data.
LA110>def data
- - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - -
Figure 5-28. Def Data – AAL1 Unstructured
To add an ATM connection/path between the LA-110 units and the DSLAM:
• Type: add conn.
In this example VPI/VCI = 4/4 is used.

LA110>add conn data

=======================

- - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - -
4. 4 47 47 Off two-way Unstructured

- - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - -
off N/A N/A
Pointer
Parity Active
- - - - - - -
On On
Figure 5-29. Add Conn Data – AAL1 Unstructured

Type: dsp pm data.
3. Verify that Tx and Rx have the same value for the local and remote sites.
LA110>dsp pm data
--------------------
Seconds : 94
Intervals : 0
Tx Total Rx Total
------------------------- --------- --------- ----
15 minutes : 0 0
24 hours * : 0 0
Figure 5-30. Dsp Pm Data – AAL1 Unstructured

5.5 E1 Port Applications

This section contains procedures for configuring LA-110 in the following
applications:
• Transmitting fractional E1 over ATM-CES
• Transmitting full E1over AAL1
• Transmitting PRI over AAL2 – LES
• Transmitting E1 UNI.
Transmitting Fractional E1 over ATM-CES

In this application LA-110 provides a solution for connecting fractional E1
equipment over an ATM network.
Site A Site B
FE1 xDSL ATM xDSL FE1

Network
LA-110 LA-110
PBX PBX
DSLAM DSLAM
Figure 5-31. FE1 over ATM-CES Application
To transmit fractional E1 over ATM:

2. Type def sysparams.
E1 over ATM (CES – Circuit Emulation Service).
LA110>def sysparams
Coding Law : A law
DNS Relay : Enable
Figure 5-32. Def Sysparams – FE1 over ATM-CES
To set E1 port general parameters:

• Type def user (see Figure 5-33).
Note Make sure that the physical layer parameters, such as: framing, synchronization, idle
code, and CRC-4 match the attached E1 equipment.
5-18 E1 Port Applications

LA110>def user
Physical Layer :

multi-frame (G.732S) HDB3 30 DB

FAST (1 sec) 7e on

100 msec
Figure 5-33. Def User – FE1 over ATM-CES
To define the timeslots to be used in the ATM connection:

• Type add bundle (see Figure 5-34).
An index number is assigned to the bundle (in this example index number
1 is used).
LA110>add bundle
Adding bundle number 1 :

1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 10 11 12 13 14 15
yes yes yes yes no no no no no no no no no no no
16 17 18 19 20 21 22 23 24 25 26 27 28 29 30 31
Figure 5-34. Add Bundle – FE1 over ATM-CES
To add an ATM connection/path between LA-110 and the DSLAM:

• Type add conn.
This example uses VPI/VCI = 4/4.
E1 Port Applications 5-19

LA110>add conn user

- - – - - - - - - - - - -
Bundle Index : 1
Rx Bytes Tx Bytes
- - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - -
Pointer Parity : On
Signaling : No

- - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - -
off N/A N/A
Figure 5-35. Add Conn User – FE1 over ATM-CES

Type: dsp data and then dsp pm user.
3. Verify that Tx and Rx have the same value.
LA110>dsp pm user
---------------------------------------------
Seconds : 465
Intervals : 0

-------------------------------------------
1 second : 0 1 1 0 0 0
15 minutes : 1 456 466 0 1 32
24 hours * : ***** **** **** **** **** ****
Figure 5-36. Dsp Pm User – FE1 over ATM-CES

Transmitting Full E1 over AAL1

In this application LA-110 provides a solution for connecting full E1 equipment
Site A Site B
E1 xDSL ATM xDSL E1

Network
LA-110 LA-110
PBX PBX
DSLAM DSLAM
Figure 5-37. Full E1 over AAL1
To transmit full E1 over ATM:

This sets the ATM adaptation layer to AAL1, in order to transmit full E1
over ATM (CES- Circuit Emulation Service).
LA110>def sysparams
Coding Law : A law
DNS Relay : Enable
Figure 5-38. Def Sysparams – Full E1 over AAL1
To set the E1 port to unframed mode:

• Type def user (see Figure 5-39).
LA110>def user
Physical Layer :
Unframed E1(G.703) HDB3 30 DB
Figure 5-39. Def User – Full E1 over AAL1
To add an ATM connection/path between LA-110 and the DSLAM:

• Type add conn user (see Figure 5-40).
In this example we will use VPI/VCI = 4/4

LA110>add conn user
Adding connection number 1 to the USER side :

------- -------- -------- ---------- ----------
4 4 47 47 off-two way Unstructured
Pointer
Parity Active
------- -------
N/A on
- - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - -
off N/A N/A
Figure 5-40. Add Conn User – Full E1 over AAL1
To verify configuration:
1. Verify that the connection has been configured successfully by checking data
transmission between the PBXs.
2. Verify that the information transmitted from one PBX is received error free on
the other PBx.
3. Type dsp pm user to verify that the information has been transmitted and
received (see Figure 5-41).
LA110>dsp pm user
Current date : FEB. 11, 2003
Seconds : 893
Intervals : 70
1 second : 0 0 0 0 0 0
15 minutes : 0 0 0 0 0 0
24 hours * : 5 2670 2691 0 1 255
Figure 5-41. Dsp Pm User – Full E1 over AAL1

Transmitting PRI over AAL2 - LES

In this application LA-110 provides a solution for connecting PRI over AAL2.
Dynamic Bandwidth Allocation
(On demand)
Site A TS1 TS1 TS1
…
E1 xDSL ATM V5.2 (Alcatel) PSTN
Network PRI (TDSoft)
LA-110 Voice Gateway
PBX
DSLAM
Figure 5-42. PRI over AAL2 Application
Note CID granted by voice gateway upon channel activation by the PBX.
To set the ATM adaptation layer for AAL2:
2. Type: def sysparams (see Figure 5-43).
3. Set Application Identifier to LES using DSS1 for remote access PRI (PRI
only, with ELCP).

Coding Law : A law

DSN Relay : Enable
DHCP Server: N/A (use DEF LAN to change LAN to router mode).
LES Default VCC : VPI.VCI
--------------- : -------
1 32
Application Identifier :
----------------------
LES using DSS1 for remote access PRI (PRI only, with ELCP)
PORT MAP
- - - - -
USER – FXS Interface
- - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - -
Port Index in the Interface : 1 | 2 | 3 | 4 |
- - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - -
unblock unblock unblock unblock
LES Connection bandwidth : 223

Nationality : OTHER
SSCS PARAMETERS:
----------------
Encoding Selection Encoding Profile
------------------ ------------------
Master/Slave 10 - PCM – 64, ADPCM 32,44 octet packets, without silence
CPS PARAMETERS
------------------
CPS optimization : Single CPS no overlap
DSP Gains : 5 dB
AAL2 Shaping mode : CBR
ISDN Activation Mode: Non Permanent
Figure 5-43. Def Sysparams – PRI

To map the timeslots to the AAL2 service:

• Type: add pri (see Figure 5-44).
LA110>add pri
Adding PRI
There are 31 free connections for pri

1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 10 11 12 13 14 15
yes yes yes yes yes yes yes yes no no no no no no no
16 17 18 19 20 21 22 23 24 25 26 27 28 29 30 31
If PRI is added the device will reboot
Do you wish to save the changes ? (Y/N)
Figure 5-44. Add PRI

1. Verify that the connection has been established successfully.
2. Type dsp conn user to view configured parameters.
3. Pick up the phone.
You should hear a dial tone.
Transmitting E1 UNI over SHDSL

In this application LA-110 is used in a cellular backhauling application, transmitting
E1 UNI traffic from Node B over SHDSL line.
ATM
E1 UNI SHDSL STM-1
Network
Node B LA-110
DSLAM
Figure 5-45. E1 UNI over SHDSL Application
To transmit E1 UNI over SHDSL:



This sets the ATM adaptation layer to AAL1, in order to transmit E1 UNI
over SHDSL.
LA110>def sysparams
Coding Law : A law
DNS Relay : Enable
Figure 5-46. Def Sysparams
To set E1 port general parameters:

1. Type def user (see Figure 5-33).
2. Set the framing mode to E1 UNI (Not Multi-frame) for E1 UNI operation
without multiframe support or to E1 UNI (Multi-frame) for E1 UNI operation
with multiframe support.
LA110>def user
Physical Layer :

E1 UNI (Not Multi-frame) HDB3 30 DB

FAST (1 sec) 7e on

100 msec
Figure 5-47. Def User – E1 UNI
5-26 FXS Port Application

5.6 FXS Port Application

applications:
• FXS- LES with ELCP
• FXS- LES without ELCP (for USA/UK).
FXS Loop Emulation Service (LES) – with ELCP

In this application LA-110 provides a solution for connecting FXS phones over an
ATM network.
ATM FXS
PSTN V5.2 STM-1 xDSL
Network
LA-110 Fax
Voice Gateway
DSLAM
FXS
Figure 5-48. FXS LES Application
To determine the ATM adaptation layer for AAL2:

3. Set Application Identifier to LES using PSTN for POTS & DSS1 for BRI (with
ELCP).
FXS Port Application 5-27

LA110>def sysparams
Coding Law : A law

DSN Relay : Enable
--------------- : -------
1 32
----------------------
LES using PSTN for POTS & DSS1 for BRI (with ELCP)
Nationality : OTHER

SSCS PARAMETERS:
---------------
------------------ ------------------
CPS PARAMETERS
---------------
DSP Gains : 5 dB
Figure 5-49. Def Sysparams – FXS LES

2. Type dsp conn user (see Figure 5-50) to view configured parameters.

LA110>dsp conn user

FXS Interface
Display mode : all
Cont Time Since

Index VPI.VCI CID Check Active Port# Last Change
1 0.38 N/A off-two way on 1 0:02:38
2 0.38 N/A off-two way on 2 0:02:38
3 0.38 N/A off-two way on 3 0:02:38
4 0.38 N/A off-two way on 4 0:02:38
Figure 5-50. Dsp Conn User – FXS LES
FXS Loop Emulation Service (LES) – without ELCP

In this application LA-110 provides a solution for connecting FXS phones over an
ATM network.
ATM FXS
PSTN GR.703 STM-1 xDSL
Network
LA-110 Fax
Voice Gateway
DSLAM
FXS
Figure 5-51. FXS LES Application

3. Set Application Identifier to LES using CAS for POTS & DSS1 for BRI
(without ELCP).
4. Set CAS Signaling parameters according to your environment.
FXS Port Application 5-29

LA110>def sysparams
Coding Law : A law
DNS Relay : Enable
DHCP Server : Enable
Adaptation Layer : AAL 2
- - - - - - - - - - - -
1 32
- - - - - - - - - - - -
LES using CAS for POTS & DSS1 for BRI (without ELCP)
Nationality : OTHER
PORT MAP
- - - - -
- - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - -
- - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - -
CAS Signaling
- - - - - - -
Signal | Value | Status |
- - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - -
Normal | 0101 ( 0x5) | Active |
Ringing | 0000 ( 0x0) | Active |
On-Hook | 0101 ( 0x5) | Active |
Off-Hook | 1111 ( 0xF) | Active |
Reversed Polarity : | 0100 ( 0x4) | Not Active|
SSCS PARAMETERS:
----------------
------------------ ------------------
CPS PARAMETERS
--------------
DSP Gains : 5 dB
Figure 5-52. Def Sysparams – FXS LES – without ELCP


2. Type dsp conn user (see Figure 5-53) to view configured parameters.
LA110>dsp conn user
FXS Interface
=============
Display mode : all...................
Cont Time Since
----------------------------------------------------------------
1 0. 38 16 off-two way on 1 0:01:49
2 0. 38 17 off-two way on 2 0:01:49
3 0. 38 18 off-two way on 3 0:01:49
4 0. 38 19 off-two way on 4 0:01:49
Figure 5-53. Dsp Conn Use – FXS LES –without ELCP
MOD CONN USER:

• Type: mod conn user to change the CID number.
5.7 ISDN Applications

applications:
• ISDN – LES
• ISDN PRI/phone extension over ATM.
ISDN Loop Emulation Service (LES)

In this application LA-110 provides a solution for connecting an ISDN phone over
an ATM network.
ATM ISDN
PSTN V5.2 STM-1 xDSL
Network
LA-110 Fax
Voice Gateway
DSLAM
ISDN
Figure 5-54. ISDN LES Application
ISDN Applications 5-31


2. Type: def sysparams (see Figure 5-55).
3. Set Application Identifier to LES using PSTN for POTS & DSS1 for BRI (with
ELCP)
LA110>def sysparams
Coding Law : A law
DSN Relay : Enable
--------------- : -------
1 32
----------------------
Nationality : OTHER

SSCS PARAMETERS:
---------------
------------------ ------------------
CPS PARAMETERS
---------------
DSP Gains : 5 dB
Figure 5-55. Def Sysparams – ISDN LES

2. Type: dsp conn user to view configured parameters.
3. Check CID allocation for ISDN B&D channels when picking up the phone.
5-32 ISDN Applications

ISDN PRI/Phone Extension over ATM

In this application LA-110 provides a solution for connecting a local ISDN
PBX/phone to a remote ISDN PBX, via the LA-110 ISDN ports.
ISDN ISDN
Cross Cable xDSL ATM xDSL Straight cable
Network
LA-110 LA-110
PBX (TE) (NT) PBX
(NT) DSLAM DSLAM (TE)
Figure 5-56. ISDN PRI Extension over ATM
ISDN ISDN
Cross Cable xDSL ATM xDSL Straight cable
Network
LA-110 LA-110 TE
PBX (TE) (NT)
(NT) DSLAM DSLAM
Figure 5-57. ISDN Phone Extension over ATM

3. Set Application Identifier to CAS for POTS & DSS1 for BRI.
4. Set ISDN Activation Mode according to the PBX mode (Permanent or
Non-Permanent).

LA110>def sysparams
Coding Law : A law
DNS Relay : Enable
- - - - - - - - - - - -
1 32
- - - - - - - - - - - -
Nationality : OTHER
CAS Signaling
- - - - - - -
- - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - -
SSCS PARAMETERS:
- - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - -
------------------ -----------------
------------------ ------------------
CPS PARAMETERS
---------------
DSP Gains : 5 dB
Figure 5-58. Def Sysparams
5-34 ISDN Applications

To set ISDN S0 parameters:

• Type: def user (see Figure 5-59).
Note In this example we use the default parameters – all channels are enabled.
LA110>def user
ISDN Interface
-------------------------------------------------------------------------
Port Index in the Interface: 1 | 2 | 3 | 4 |
Channel : B1 B2 | B1 B2 | B1 B2 | B1 B2 |
Echo canceling : on on on on on on on on
Phantom : Enable Enable Enable Enable
ISDN port configured successfully
Figure 5-59. Def User
DBG MOD0
• Type: dbg mod0 in both LA-110 units.
Note The command is erased with reset or LA-110 power-off.

2. Type: dsp conn user (see Figure 5-60) to view configured parameters.
LA110>dsp conn user
ISDN Interface
Display mode : all

Cont Channel Time Since
Index VPI.VCI CID Check Active Type Port# Last Change
1 0. 38 128 off-two way on D Channel 1 0:17:08
2 0. 38 160 off-two way on B1 Channel 1 0:17:08
Figure 5-60. Dsp Conn User

5.8 LAN Port Applications

This section discusses:
• Typical bridging application
• Typical routing application
• Typical VLAN-aware application
• Typical LAN applications.
Configuring LA-110 for a Typical Bridging Application

In a bridging application LA-110 provides a solution to connect local/remote LANs
xDSL ATM xDSL

Network
LA-110 LA-110
LAN DSLAM DSLAM LAN
Figure 5-61. Bridging Application
To set the Ethernet interface parameters:

1. Connect a PC to LA-110, via an Ethernet cross cable, at both ends.
3. Type: def lan (see Figure 5-62)
4. Define Application as Ethernet bridge.
LA110>def lan
ETHERNET Interface
Auto Negotiation Max Capability Advertised Default Type

Enable 100BASE_T - full duplex mode 100BASE_T - half duplex mode
Application : Ethernet bridge
Bridge Mode Aging-Time Encapsulation PPPoE

Access only 5 Bridged Ethernet without CRC Disable
Figure 5-62. Def LAN – Bridging
To create an ATM path between the local and remote LANs:

• Type: add bridge interface (see Figure 5-63)
5-36 LAN Port Applications

LA110>add bridge interface

Adding interface number 1 to Bridge
VPI.VCI Bit-rate Cont Check Active

0 15 UBR off-two way on
PCR
10867
off N/A N/A
The interface was added successfully.
Figure 5-63. Add Bridge Interface

2. Ping from the local PC to the remote PC.
3. Type: dsp pm lan to view statistics (see Figure 5-64).
LA110>dsp pm lan
LAN INTERFACE STATISTICS

Current date : JUN. 02, 2003
Seconds : 293
Intervals : 1
Tx Total Rx Total Rx Discarded Tx Discarded

Frames Frames Frames Frames
1second : 0 0 0 0
15minutes : 0 0 0 0
24hours * : 0 0 0 0
Figure 5-64. DSP PM LAN – Bridging
LAN Port Applications 5-37

Configuring LA-110 for a Typical Routing Application

In a typical routing application, LA-110 provides a solution for LAN connection to
an IP network, over an ATM network.
IP ATM xDSL
Network Network
LA-110
BAS
DSLAM LAN
Figure 5-65. LAN Routing Application

3. Set Application to Ethernet Router.
A110>def lan
ETHERNET Interface
Enable 100BASE_T - full duplex mode 100BASE_T - half duplex
mode
Application : Ethernet Router
Figure 5-66. Def LAN – LAN Routing
To create a LAN interface:

1. Type: add ip interface (see Figure 5-67)
2. Set the LAN IP and Mask parameters.
LA110>add ip interface
Adding Interface number 1 to the Router:
Attached : LAN
IP Mask
192.168.20 .1 255.255.255.0
Aging time Timeout RIP

5 min 1 sec None
DHCP Relay: Disable
The router interface was added successfully.
Figure 5-67. Add IP Interface – LAN Routing
3. Type: add ip interface to create the WAN interface and the ATM path for this
interface.

LA110>ADD IP IF
Attached : WAN
IP Mask RIP
---- ---- ---
3 .3 .4 .5 255.255.0 .0 None
Encapsulation : RFC 1483

------- -------- ---------- ------
PCR
10867

off N/A N/A
Figure 5-68. Add IP Interface – WAN Routing
To define the LA-110 default gateway connection:

1. Type: def default gateway (see Figure 5-69)
2. Set the Interface number that will be used as a default gateway.
LA110>def default gateway
Interface Active
2 enable
The default gateway was defined successfully
Figure 5-69. Def Default Gateway – LAN Routing

2. Activate the ping command from the LA-110 to the destination IP address (see
Figure 5-70).
3. Type: dsp pm lan to view statistics (see Figure 5-71).
LA110>ping
Destination IP Number Time out(sec)
192.168.30 .10 10 1
Figure 5-70. Ping – LAN Routing

LA110>dsp pm lan
LAN INTERFACE STATISTICS
Seconds : 293
Intervals : 1

1 second : 0 0 0 0
15minutes : 0 0 0 0
24hours * : 0 0 0 0
Figure 5-71. Dsp Pm LAN – LAN Routing
Configuring LA-110 for a Typical VLAN-Aware Application

In a typical VLAN-aware application, two remote LA-110 units provide
VLAN-based access to the centrally located router connected to LA-110.
PVC 0/33
LA-110 (A)
VLAN 10
ATM xDSL
xDSL STM-1 STM-1
Network
LA-110 (C) xDSL
Router
DSLAM DSLAM
PVC 0/34
LA-110 (B)
VLAN 10
Figure 5-72. VLAN-Aware Application

3. Set Application to VLAN aware.
4. Repeat procedure for all LA-110 units, central and remote.

A110>def lan
ETHERNET Interface
Enable 100BASE_T - full duplex mode 100BASE_T - half duplex
mode
Application : VLAN aware
Figure 5-73. DEF LAN – VLAN aware
To add bridge interfaces:

1. Type add bridge if (Figure 5-74).
2. Set VPI.VCI to 0/33 for LA-110 (A) and to 0/34 for LA-110 (B).
3. For LA-110 (C), define two interfaces for the following connections: 0/33 and
0/34.
Adding interface number 1 to Bridge:

PCR
10867
off N/A N/A
Figure 5-74. ADD BRIDGE INTERFACE
To add bridge ports to the LAN and WAN interfaces:

1. Type ADD BP (Figure 5-75).
2. In the Index field, select LAN.
3. In the PVID field, select 10.
Index: LAN
PVID Accept frame type Ingress filtering
- - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - -
10 Admit all Disable
Figure 5-75. ADD BP (LAN)
4. Type ADD BP again (Figure 5-76).

5. In the Index field, select 1 (bridge interface).
6. In the Bind Bridge IF (Y/N)?, field select Y.
7. In the IF Index field, select 1 to define the VC (bridge interface) to be assigned
to the current bridge port.
8. Repeat steps 1–7 for LA-110 (B).
9. For LA-110 (C), repeat steps 1–7 twice to bind bridge port 1 to bridge interface
1 and bridge port 2 to bridge interface 2.

Index: 1
- - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - -
1 Admit all Disable
Bind Bridge IF (Y/N)? Y

IF Index VLAN Priority
0 1 2 3 4 5 6 7
-------- ---------------
1 Y Y N N N Y Y N
Figure 5-76. ADD BP (WAN)
To define bridge ports as VLAN members:

1. Type ADD VLAN MEMBER (Figure 5-77).
2. In the Bridge Port field, select LAN to define LAN bridge port as a VLAN 10
member.
3. In the VLAN ID field, select 10.
4. In the Bridge Port field, select 1 to define WAN bridge port 1as a VLAN 10
member.
5. In the VLAN ID field, select 10.
6. Repeat steps 1–5 for LA-110 (B), setting VLAN ID to 20.
7. For LA-110 (C), define the following ports as VLAN members:
LAN port – member of VLAN 10 and VLAN 20
WAN port 1 – member of VLAN 10
WAN port 2 – member of VLAN 20.
Bridge Port VLAN ID

----------- -------
LAN 10
Egress VLAN Name
------ ---------
Transparent
Figure 5-77. ADD VLAN MEMBER
Typical LAN Applications
PPPoA WAN Interface with DHCP

To configure PPPoA WAN interface with DHCP:
1. Type def lan (see Figure 5-78)
2. Define the LAN application as router.

LA110>def lan
ETHERNET Interface

Enable 100BASE_T - full duplex mode 100BASE_T - half duplex mode
Application : Ethernet router
Figure 5-78. Def LAN – PPPoA WAN interface with DHCP Server
3. Type: add ip interface (see Figure 5-79)

4. Define the LAN IP Interface.
Attached : LAN
IP Mask
10. 0. 0. 1 255. 0. 0. 0

5min 1 sec None
DHCP Relay: Disable
Figure 5-79. Add IP Interface – PPPoA WAN interface with DHCP Server

6. Set DHCP Server to Enable.
LA110>def sysparams
Figure 5-80. Def Sysparams – PPPoA WAN interface with DHCP Server
7. Type: add dhcp (see Figure 5-81)

8. Add a pool to the DHCP server.
9. Set the Primary DNS and Secondary DNS according to the NSP specification.

LA110>add dhcp
Adding DHCP Pool number 1
Lowest IP Highest IP Mask

10 .0 .0 .2 10 .0 .0 .10 255.0 .0 .0
Default Gateway
10 .0 .0 .1
Primary DNS Secondary DNS

0 .0 .0 .0 0 .0 .0 .0
Lease Time (in minutes): 600

The DHCP Pool was added successfully!
Figure 5-81. Add DHCP – PPPoA WAN interface with DHCP Server
10. Type: add ip interface.

11. Add a WAN IP Interface.
12. Set the Encapsulation to PPP LLC or PPP VC-Mux according to the
NSP specification.
Note If the IP address is allocated dynamically, don’t set the IP address field (the Host
Address should be defined – see PPPoA WAN Interface with DHCP Server and Host
Address .

LA110>ADD IP IF
Attached : WAN
IP Mask RIP
---- ---- ---
3 .3 .4 .5 255.255.0 .0 None
Encapsulation : PPP LLC MUXED
Username : test
Password : ******
Confirm Password : ******
Link Active Time : 900

------- -------- ---------- ------
PCR
10867

off N/A N/A
Figure 5-82. Add WAN interface – PPPoA WAN Interface with DHCP Server
13. Type: add nat (see Figure 5-83). You want all traffic that is forwarded through
the WAN interface to be translated to the IP address it received from the NSP.
Note NAT should be configured before PPP synchronization to take effect.
LA110>add nat
Nat type : Single
Interface : 2
Real IP Real Mask

0.0.0.0 255.255.255.255
Virtual IP Virtual Mask

10.0.0.0 255.0.0.0
Figure 5-83. Add NAT – PPPoA WAN interface with DHCP Server

14. Type: def default gateway (see Figure 5-84) and define a default gateway.
LA110>def default gateway
Interface Active
2 enable
The default gateway was defined successfully
Figure 5-84. Def Default Gateway – PPPoA WAN interface with DHCP Server
PPPoA WAN Interface with DHCP Server and Host Address

To configure PPPoA WAN Interface with DHCP server and HOST Address:
1. Type: add ip interface (see Figure 5-85) and add HOST interface.
Attached : HOST
IP Mask
192. 72.122.1 255.255.255.252
Figure 5-85. Add IP Interface – PPPoA WAN interface with DHCP server and HOST address
2. Type: add nat (see Figure 5-86)

Add Transparent NAT or Single NAT and PAT. If the source addresses for
frames sent from the host should not be translated, add a transparent NAT
for the HOST address (see Figure 5-86).
Note NAT should be configured before PPP synchronization takes effect.

If the HOST address should be translated to the address allocated by the
NSP add a single NAT (see Figure 5-87) and PAT (see Figure 5-88).
LA110>add nat
Nat type : Transparent
Interface : 2
Real IP Real Mask

192. 72.122.1 255.255.255.255

192. 72.122.1 255.255.255.255
Figure 5-86. Add NAT Transparent – PPPoA WAN Interface with DHCP Server and HOST Address

LA110>add nat
Nat type : Single
Interface : 2
Real IP Real Mask

0 .0 .0 .0 255.255.255.255

192. 72.122.1 255.255.255.255
Figure 5-87. Add NAT Single – PPPoA WAN Interface with DHCP Server and HOST Address
LA110>add pat
Adding PAT number :1
Real IP Virtual IP Port Protocol

---------- ------------ ----- ------------
0 .0 .0 .0 192. 72.122.1 Telnet (23) TCP
Figure 5-88. Add PAT – PPPoA WAN Interface with DHCP Server and HOST Address
Add Another Subnet for Intranet Only

To add another subnet for Intranet:
1. Type: add ip interface (see Figure 5-89).
2. Add the second LAN interface.
Since the single NAT that was added before only translates IP addresses
from the first LAN subnet, frames from this subnet will not be forwarded to
WAN connection.
Attached : LAN
IP Mask
11. 0. 0. 1 255. 0. 0. 0

5 min 1 sec none
DHCP Relay: Disable
Figure 5-89. Add IP Interface – Add Another Subnet for Intranet Only

Enable Access from the WAN to the Second Subnet

This is often used for servers where the session is initiated from the outside world.
If you do not want the addresses to be translated, add a Transparent NAT or a
Single NAT.
To add a transparent NAT:
• Type: add nat (see Figure 5-90).
LA110>add nat
Nat type : Transparent
Interface : 2
Real IP Real Mask

11. 0. 0. 0 255.255.255. 0

11. 0. 0. 0 255.255.255. 0
Figure 5-90. Add NAT Transparent – Enable Access from the WAN to the Second Subnet
Note NAT should be configured before PPP synchronization can take effect.
To add a single NAT:
• Type: add nat (see Figure 5-91).
LA110>add nat
Nat type : Single
Interface : 2
Real IP Real Mask

0. 0. 0. 0 255.255.255.255

11. 0. 0. 0 255.255.255. 0
Figure 5-91. Add NAT Single – Enable Access from the WAN to the Second Subnet
PAT
If you want one address for every server (SMTP, HTTP, FTP), add a PAT for every
server.
PAT for HTTP Server
To add a PAT for the HTTP Server:
• Type: add pat (see Figure 5-92).

LA110>add pat

0 .0 .0 .0 11. 0. 0. 2 Web (80) TCP
Figure 5-92. Add PAT – PAT for HTTP Server
PAT for Mail Server

To add a PAT for the Mail Server:
LA110>add pat

0 .0 .0 .0 11. 0. 0. 3 SMTP (25) TCP
Figure 5-93. Add PAT – PAT for Mail Server
PAT for FTP Server

To add a PAT for the FTP server:
LA110>add pat

0 .0 .0 .0 11. 0. 0. 4 Ftp (20,21) TCP
Figure 5-94. Add PAT – PAT for FTP Server


Appendix A
Connection Wiring (Pin
Assignment)
This appendix provides the information needed to connect to the various LA-110
interfaces.
The information presented in this appendix includes connector types, connector
pin functions and where applicable – the recommended wiring for relevant
adapter cables.
A.1 CONTROL Connector
D-Type Connector
The CONTROL connector of the LA-110 units with the data and E1 ports is a
9-pin D-type female connector with a serial RS-232 DCE interface, intended for
connection to a supervision terminal. Connector pin functions are listed in
Table A-1.
Table A-1. DB-9 CONTROL Connector Pin Functions
Pin Function
1 –
2 Tx
3 Rx
4 –
5 GND
6 –
7 –
8 –
9 –
RJ-45 Connector
The CONTROL connector of the LA-110 with the FXS, ISDN BRI and PRI ports is
an RJ-45 8-pin female connector with a serial RS-232 DCE interface, intended for
connection to a supervision terminal. Connector pin functions are listed in
Table A-2.
CONTROL Connector A-1

Appendix A Connection Wiring (Pin Assignment) LA-110 Installation and Operation Manual
• To connect a supervision terminal having a 9-pin connector to the CONTROL

connector, use CBL-RJ45/D9/F/6FT cable that is supplied by RAD. Figure A-1
shows the wiring diagram of this cable.
• To connect a supervision terminal having a 25-pin connector to the
CONTROL connector, use a standard 9-pin/25-pin adapter.
Table A-2. RJ-45 CONTROL Connector Pin Functions
Pin Function
1 Not connected
2 Not connected
3 Not connected
4 Signal Ground (SIG)
5 Receive Data (RXD) output to terminal
6 Transmit Data (TXD) input from terminal
7 Clear to Send (CTS) output to terminal
8 Request to Send (RTS) input from terminal
RJ-45
Connector 9-Pin D-Type Female
Connector
TXD 6 3
RXD 5 2
RTS 8 7
CTS 7 8
N.C 1 6
N.C 2 1
N.C 3 4
GND 4 5
LA-110 Side Terminal Side
Figure A-1. Wiring of CBL-RJ45/D9/F/6FT Cable
A-2 CONTROL Connector

LA-110 Installation and Operation Manual Appendix A Connection Wiring (Pin Assignment)
A.2 LA-110 Network Interfaces
2-Wire SHDSL and ADSL Network Interfaces

The 2-wire SHDSL and ADSL network interfaces of LA-110 use RJ-45 connectors
wired in accordance with Table A-3.
Table A-3. 2-Wire SHDSL and ADSL Network (Uplink) Interface Connector, Pin Functions
Pin Function
1, 2, 3 Not Connected
4 Ring
5 Tip
6, 7, 8 Not Connected
2/4-Wire SHDSL Network Interface

The 2/4-wire SHDSL network interface of the LA-110 uses RJ-48c connectors
wired in accordance with Table A-4:
• For 2-wire connect Line A
• For 4-wire connect both Line A and Line B.
Table A-4. 2/4-Wire SHDSL Network (Uplink) Interface Connector, Pin Functions
Pin Function
4 Ring – Line A
Line A {
5 Tip – Line A
3 Ring – Line B
Line B {
6 Tip – Line B
Note When the unit is configured to CPE Mode in DEF NETWORK, the unit automatically
detects whether 2 wires or 4 wires are connected to the uplink connector; no
configuration is needed for this parameter.
LA-110 Network Interfaces A-3

A.3 LAN Interface Connector

The LAN port has a 10/100BaseTX Ethernet station interface terminated in an
RJ-45 connector.
Connector pin functions are listed in Table A-5.
Table A-5. LAN Interface Connector, Pin Functions
Pin Designation Function

1 TxD+ Transmit Data input, + wire
2 TxD– Transmit Data input, - wire
3 RxD+ Receive Data output, + wire
4, 5 – Not connected
6 RxD– Receive Data output, - wire
A.4 Data Port Connectors

The V.35 data port has a 34-pin female connector and the X.21 has a 15-pin
D-type female connector. Table A-6 details the connector pinouts.
Table A-6. Data Port Connector Pinouts
V.35 X.21
Signal
Circuit Description
Function Pin Circuit Pin
(Function)
Protective A Frame 101 1 ---- Chassis Ground. It may be isolated from

Ground (Shield) Signal Ground.
Signal B Signal 102 8 ---- Common signal and DC power supply

Ground GND (GND) ground.
Transmitted P TD(A) 103 2 T(A) Serial digital data from DTE. In sync
Data applications, the data translations must
S TD(B) 103 9 T(B)
occur on the rising edge of the transmit
(Transmit)
clock.
Received R RD(A) 104 4 R(A) Serial output from the modem receiver. In
Data sync applications, the data translations
T RD(B) 104 11 R(B)
occur on the rising edge of the clock.
(Receive)
Request to C RTS 105 3 C(A) A positive level to LA-110 when data
Send transmission is desired.
10 C(B)
(Control)
A-4 Data Port Connectors

Table A-6. Data Port Connector Pinouts (Cont.)
V.35 X.21
Signal
Circuit Description
Function Pin Circuit Pin
(Function)
Clear to Send D CTS 106 A positive level from LA-110 with delay,
after receipt of Request to Send, and when
LA-110 is ready to transmit.
Data Set E DSR 107 A positive level from LA-110 when power is
Ready on, and LA-110 is (a) not in DIGITAL LOOP
mode, or (b) has not received a REMOTE
LOOPBACK signal from the remote unit.
Data H DTR 108 Not used
Terminal
Ready
Carrier F DCD 109 5 I(A) A positive level from LA-110, except when
Detect a loss of the received signal is detected or
12 I(B)
when Data Set Ready is negative.
(Indication)
External U SCTE(A) 113 7 (A) A serial data rate clock input from the data
Transmit source. Positive clock translations must
W SCTE(B) 113 14 (B)
Clock correspond to data transmissions.
Transmit Y SCT(A) 114 6 S(A) A transmit data rate clock for use by an
Clock SCT(B) 114 1 external data source. Positive clock
a S(B)
3 translations correspond to data translations.
(Signal Timing)
Receive V SCR(A) 115 A receive data rate clock output used by an
Clock SCR(B) 115 external data sink. Positive clock
X
translations correspond to data translations.
Local Analog L and j A control signal input, which, when on, sets
Loop LA-110 into Local Analog Loopback (V.54
Loop 3).
Remote N and h A control signal input which, when on,
Digital Loop commands LA-110 to send a remote
Loopback command (V.54 Loop 2) to the
remote LA-110.
Test n and k A Control Signal output from LA-110;
Indicator positive during any test mode.
Data Port Connectors A-5

A.5 ISDN “S” Interface Connectors
ISDN “S” Port Connector Pin Functions

The ISDN “S” interfaces are terminated in RJ-45 connectors. Connector pin
functions are listed in Table A-7.
Table A-7. ISDN “S” Interface Connector, Pin Functions
Pin Function
1, 2 Not connected
3 Transmit Data output, + wire
4 Receive Data input, - wire
5 Receive Data input, + wire
6 Transmit Data output, - wire
7, 8 Not connected
Adapter Cable for ISDN TE Interfaces

The interface connector of an ISDN NT port is wired to enable direct connection
to user’s equipment.
For ISDN TE ports, the user’s equipment must be connected through a cross-over
cable wired in accordance with Figure A-2.
Pin 1
Not Connected 1 1
Not Connected 2 2
Transmit Wire + 3 3
Receive Wire + 4 4
Receive Wire - 5 5
Transmit Wire - 6 6
Not Connected 7 7
Not Connected 8 8
Module User's Equipment

Side Side
Figure A-2. Cable for Connection of User’s Equipment to ISDN TE Interfaces
A-6 ISDN “S” Interface Connectors

A.6 FXS Interface Connectors

The FXS interfaces are terminated in RJ-11 connectors. Connector pin functions
are listed in Table A-8.
Table A-8. FXS Interface Connector, Pin Functions
Pin Function
1, 2 Not connected
3 2-wire voice input/output – ring
4 2-wire voice input/output – tip
5, 6 Not connected
A.7 E1 Interface Connectors
Balanced Connector
The E1 and T1 interfaces of LA-110 terminate in 8-pin RJ-45 connector, wired in
accordance with Table A-9.
Table A-9. E1/T1 Port Connector Pinout
Pin Designation Function
1 TD (R) Transmit data (ring)
2 TD (T) Transmit data (tip)
3, 6 – FGND
4 RD (R) Receive data (ring)
5 RD (T) Receive data (tip)
Balanced-to-Unbalanced Adapter Cable

When LA-110 is ordered with unbalanced E1 interface, it is necessary to convert
the RJ-45 connector to the standard pair of BNC female connectors used by
unbalanced E1 interfaces. For that purpose, RAD offers a 150-mm long adapter
cable, CBL-RJ45/2BNC/E1 (see Figure A-3).
E1 Interface Connectors A-7

Receive
(Green)
BNC
Female
RJ-45 Transmit
(Red)
RX Ring 1
RX Tip 2 .. Receive
. (Green BNC)
NC 3
TX Ring 4
TX Tip 5 . Transmit
..
(Red BNC)
NC 6
NC 7
NC 8
Shielded
RJ-45
Figure A-3. E1 Adapter Cable, CBL-RJ45/2BNC/E1, Wiring Diagram
A.8 Power Supply Connector

LA-110 units with FXS, ISDN BRI and PRI interfaces receive power from the
external power supply. Figure A-4 identifies the LA-110 power connector pins.
The pin assignment is listed in Table A-10.
4 5 6
1 2 3
Figure A-4. Power Supply Cable Connector
Table A-10. Power Supply Cable Connector, Pin Assignment
Pin Function
1 -48V output
2 +3.3V output
3, 4 Ground
5 +5V output
6 “Power Good” indication output
A-8 Power Supply Connector

Appendix B
Alarm Messages
B.1 Alarm Messages
Table B-1 lists the alarm messages generated by the LA-110 in ascending order of
their code numbers and explains their interpretation. The alarm messages are
listed in ascending order of their codes.
Table B-1. LA-110 Alarm Messages
Code Alarm Syntax Description Corrective Actions
1 CONFIG DATABASE The database currently stored in the Reload the default configuration and
CHECKSUM ERROR non-volatile memory of the LA-110 is then configure the LA-110 again (for
corrupted example, use the INIT DB
command).
If problem recurs, contact RAD
2, 3 Reserved for future use N/A N/A
4 ALARM BUFFER More than 200 alarm messages have Informative message – no action
OVERFLOW been written in the alarm buffer required.
since the last clear command. The It is recommended to read the
new alarms are overwriting the oldest alarms, and then clear the buffer
alarms (the first alarms written in the using the CLR ALM command.
buffer)
5 Reserved for future use N/A N/A
6 USER E1 LINK SIGNAL Signal loss of the user E1 interface. Check the equipment serving the
LOSS This alarm is relevant only for LA-110 user E1 link, and its
unframed user E1 interface. connections.
8 USER E1 LOCAL Local loss of multiframe alignment of Check the equipment serving the
MULTIFRAME ALARM the user E1 interface LA-110 user E1 link, and its
connections.
If problem recurs, contact RAD
10 USER E1 REMOTE The remote unit connected to the Informative message – no action
MULTIFRAME ALARM user E1 interface reports loss of required.
multiframe alignment If condition persists, check the link to
the remote equipment connected to
the user E1 interface of the LA-110,
and the equipment itself.
If problem persists, contact RAD
Alarm Messages B-1

Appendix B Alarm Messages LA-110 Installation and Operation Manual
Table B-1. LA-110 Alarm Messages (Cont.)

12 USER E1 LINK FRAME A frame slip occurred at the user E1 Informative message – no action
SLIP interface required.
This usually indicates timing If condition persists, check the
problems (incorrect selection of configuration of clock sources on the
timing reference) on the user E1 link equipment serving the link to the
user E1 interface of LA-110, and the
equipment itself.
14 USER E1 BPV ERROR A bipolar violation error has been Informative message – no action
detected at the user E1 interface required.
If condition persists, check the
equipment serving the link to the
remote equipment connected to the
user E1 interface of LA-110, and the
equipment itself.
16 USER E1 EXCESSIVE Excessive number of bipolar violation This may indicate defective
BPV errors detected by the user E1 connections, defective
interface communication link or hardware
problems.
Check the equipment serving the
LA-110 user E1 link, and its
connections.
18 USER E1 CRC-4 ERROR A frame with CRC-4 error has been No action required.
detected at the user E1 interface
If condition persists, check the link to
the E1 interface of the LA-110, and
the equipment itself.
B-2 Alarm Messages

LA-110 Installation and Operation Manual Appendix B Alarm Messages

20 USER E1 EXCESSIVE The error rate detected at the user E1 This may indicate defective
ERROR RATIO interface on the frame connections, defective
synchronization bits is high, as communication link or hardware
defined by ITU-T Rec. G.732 problems.
connections.
22 USER E1 REMOTE The remote unit connected to user Informative message – no action
SYNC LOSS the user E1 interface reports loss of required.
frame alignment
If condition persists, check the link to
the user E1 interface of the LA-110,
and the equipment itself.
24 USER E1 LOCAL SYNC Local loss of frame alignment failure This may indicate defective
LOSS of the user E1 interface connections, defective
communication link or hardware
problems.
connections.
26 USER E1 AIS SYNC Local loss of frame alignment caused AIS indicates a problem at the
LOSS by the reception of AIS by the user equipment connected to the remote
E1 interface end of the user E1 link.
Informative message – no local
action required.
28 USER E1 AIS AIS being received by the user E1 AIS indicates a problem at the
interface equipment connected to the remote
end of the user E1 link.
Informative message – no local
action required.
29 to Reserved for future use N/A N/A
38
Alarm Messages B-3


39 ATM TX BANDWIDTH The total data rate of the connections Reduce the number of connections
EXCEEDS MAXIMUM already defined on the uplink defined on the LA-110.
ALLOWED exceeds the maximum available
bandwidth
40 ATM LOSS OF CELL ATM layer detects an out-of-cell Make sure that the remote
DELINEATION delineation (OCD) state on the equipment connected to the uplink
FAILURE uplink is operating properly.
41 ALARM BUFFER CLEAR Alarm buffer has been cleared Informative message – no action
required.
44 FRAME-RELAY DATA The serial user data port, configured Check correct configuration of the
PORT LINK DOWN for Frame Relay operation, cannot local and far end equipment. In
establish a link to the far end particular, check that both are
configured to use the same Frame
Relay management protocol.
Check for proper operation of the
local LA-110 and the remote Frame
Relay equipment.
46 RESET OCCURRED This message appears after LA-110 Informative message – no action
has been reset, either by an explicit required.
command or as a result of automatic
If automatic resetting often recurs,
resetting.
inform Technical Support.
47 LAN PORT LINK The LAN port cannot establish Check proper connection of the
DOWN connection to a LAN LA-110 LAN port to an active LAN
(cables, hub power when applicable,
at least one active station on the
LAN, etc.). Replace cable if in doubt.
Check that the LAN port
configuration parameters are
compatible with those of the LAN
(auto-negotiation, rate and mode,
etc.) and correct as necessary.
48 DATA OAM LA-110 initiated an OAM loopback. Informative message – no local
LOOPBACK action required.
The alarm is followed by the relevant
VP/VC number.
50 LAN LOOPBACK LA-110 initiated an OAM loopback. Informative message – no action
required.
VP/VC number. Deactivate loopback when no longer
needed.
B-4 Alarm Messages


51 NETWORK REMOTE A remote loopback has been Informative message – no action
LOOP activated on the local uplink required.
interface
Deactivate loopback when no longer
needed.
53 USER SIDE REMOTE A remote loopback has been Informative message – no action
LOOP activated on the local user port required.
needed.
54 USER SIDE LOCAL A local loopback has been activated Informative message – no action
LOOP on the user port required.
needed.
57 DATA LOCAL LOOP A local loopback has been activated Informative message – no action
on the local data port required.
needed.
58 DATA REMOTE LOOP A remote loopback has been Informative message – no action
activated on the local data port required.
needed.
59 to Reserved for future use N/A N/A
62
63 SHDSL EOC A remote loopback has been Informative message – no action
LOOPBACK activated on the embedded required.
TOWARDS NETWORK operations channel of the SHDSL
link
needed.
64 PARAMETER CHANGES After a software upgrade, some of Check and reconfigure as necessary
IN DB DUE TO the parameters are assigned new the LA-110
UPGRADE PROCESS values
66 USER E1 EXCESSIVE The number of frame slips detected Check the configuration of clock
FRAME SLIP at the user E1 interface during the sources on the equipment serving the
last minute exceeds 10. link to the user E1 interface of
LA-110, and the equipment itself.
This usually indicates timing
problems (incorrect selection of If problem persists, contact RAD
timing reference) on the user E1 link Technical Support Department.
Alarm Messages B-5


68 USER E1 EXCESSIVE The error rate detected on the This may indicate defective
CRC-4 ERROR CRC-4 bits at the user E1 interface is connections, defective
high communication link or hardware
problems.
LA-110 user E1 interface, and its
connections.
70 USER E1 EXCESSIVE The number of local loss of Check the equipment serving the
LOCAL MULTIFRAME multiframe alignment events LA-110 user E1 link, and its
ALARM detected at the user E1 interface connections.
during the last minute exceeds 10
72 USER E1 EXCESSIVE The number of loss of multiframe Check the link to the remote
REMOTE MULTIFRAME alignment events reported by the equipment connected to the user E1
ALARM remote unit connected to the user E1 interface of the LA-110, and the
interface during the last minute equipment itself.
exceeds 10
74 USER E1 EXCESSIVE The number of remote loss of Check the link to the remote
REMOTE SYNC LOSS synchronization alarms reported by equipment connected to the user E1
the user E1 interface during the last interface of the LA-110, and the
minute exceeds 10 equipment itself
76 USER E1 EXCESSIVE The number of loss of local This may indicate defective
LOCAL SYNC LOSS synchronization alarms reported by connections, defective
the user E1 interface during the last communication link or hardware
minute exceeds 10 problems.
connections.
B-6 Alarm Messages


77 DEVICE The main link synchronized at a rate Check configuration parameters of
SYNCHRONIZED ON lower than expected. main link at both equipment units
LESS THAN connected in a link.
CONFIGURED
Check whether it is possible to
BANDWIDTH
resynchronize on a higher bandwidth
by disconnecting the link and
allowing to restart the link setup
process.
If not, change the configuration
parameters to take into account the
available bandwidth
78 JITTER BUFFER An underrun event occurred in the Informative message – no action
UNDERRUN TX TO E1 jitter buffer serving the required.
transmit-to-user direction of the user
If alarm recurs, check the uplink
E1 interface
configuration and transmission
performance.
79 JITTER BUFFER An underrun event occurred in the Informative message – no action
UNDERRUN TX TO jitter buffer serving the required.
DATA transmit-to-user direction of the user
If alarm recurs, check the uplink
data interface
configuration and transmission
performance.
80 JITTER BUFFER An overrun event occurred in the Informative message – no action
OVERRUN TX TO E1 jitter buffer serving the required.
transmit-to-user direction of the user
If alarm recurs, check the E1 link to
E1 interface
the user equipment and its
transmission performance.
81 JITTER BUFFER An overrun event occurred in the Informative message – no action
OVERRUN TX TO jitter buffer serving the required.
DATA transmit-to-user direction of the user
If alarm recurs, check the data link to
data interface
the user equipment and its
transmission performance.
82 NO BUFFER TO The maximum number of buffers Check configuration and correct as
NETWORK available in the LA-110 has already necessary
been allocated
84–87 Reserved for future use N/A N/A
88 RECEIVING OAM LA-110 started receiving OAM cells Informative message – no action
VC-AIS CELLS START of the VC-AIS type from the ATM required
network. T
he alarm is followed by the relevant
VP/VC number.
Alarm Messages B-7


89 RECEIVING OAM LA-110 stopped receiving OAM cells Informative message – no action
VC-AIS CELLS STOP of the VC-AIS type from the ATM required
network.
VP/VC number.
90 RECEIVING OAM LA-110 started receiving OAM cells Informative message – no action
VC-RDI CELLS START of the VC-RDI type from the ATM required
network.
VP/VC number.
91 RECEIVING OAM LA-110 stopped receiving OAM cells Informative message – no action
VC-RDI CELLS STOP of the VC-RDI type from the ATM required
network.
VP/VC number.
92 VC CONT LOSS START Continuity loss is detected. LA-110 May indicate a problem at the
stopped receiving user or OAM cells equipment connected to the remote
from the uplink. This alarm appears end of the uplink.
only when the continuity check is
Informative message – no action
initiated.
required
VP/VC number.
93 VC CONT LOSS STOP Continuity is restored. LA-110 started Informative message – no action
receiving user or OAM cells from the required
uplink. This alarm appears only when
the continuity check is initiated.
VP/VC number.
94 USER OAM LA-110 initiated an OAM loopback. Informative message – no action
LOOPBACK required
VP/VC number.
95 SHDSL INTERFACE SW A mismatch between software driver Upgrade LA-110 software
VERSION and LA-110 hardware was detected
INCAOMPATIBLE
WITH HW
96 OAM LOOPBACK A number of non-received periodic • Disable alarm generation if you
FAILURE START loopback responses over specified do not want to receive this alarm.
connection exceeded threshold.
• Check the problematic
connection.
97 OAM LOOPBACK A response was received from the Informative message – no action
FAILURE STOP periodic loopback over specified required
connection.
B-8 Alarm Messages

Appendix C
Supervision Language
C.1 Introduction
This appendix provides a detailed description of the LA-110 supervision language.
The information appearing in this appendix assumes that the user is familiar with the
LA-110 system and with its configuration parameters.
If necessary, review Appendix F for a description of the LA-110 operating
environment, Chapter 3 for a general description of the LA-110 supervision language
syntax, and Chapter 1 for a functional description of the LA-110 system.
Note Unless otherwise specified, all the parameter values appearing in the following
screens are given for illustration purposes only and do not reflect recommended
values.
The commands include:
• ACTIVATE BRIDGE INTERFACE
• ACTIVATE CONN DATA
• ACTIVATE CONN USER
• ACTIVATE ELCP
• ACTIVATE IP INTERFACE
• ACTIVATE TFTP
• ADD BRIDGE INTERFACE
• ADD BP
• ADD BUNDLE
• ADD CONN DATA
• ADD CONN USER – General Procedure
• ADD CONN USER – FXS Ports over AAL1
• ADD CONN USER – FXS Ports over AAL2
• ADD CONN USER – ISDN Ports over AAL2
• ADD CONN USER – E1 Port over AAL1
• ADD CONN USER – E1 Port over AAL2
• ADD DHCP
• ADD FW
• ADD IP INTERFACE
• ADD NAT
Introduction C-1
Appendix C Supervision Language LA-110 Installation and Operation Manual
• ADD NMS
• ADD PAT
• ADD PRI
• ADD STATIC MAC ADDR
• ADD STATIC ROUTING
• ADD VLAN MEMBER
• CLR ALM
• CLR FW LOG
• CLR LOOP
• CLR PM
• CLR SYSERR
• DEF ADDR ATM
• DEF CLOCK
• DEF COMMUNITY
• DEF DATA
• DEF DATE
• DEF DEFAULT GATEWAY
• DEF ID
• DEF LAN
• DEF NAME
• DEF NETWORK
• DEF PASSWORD
• DEF PSTN
• DEF SP PORT
• DEF SYSPARAMS
• DEF TERM RESET
• DEF TERM SET
• DEF TIME
• DEF USER
• DEL BP
• DEL BRIDGE INTERFACE
• DEL BUNDLE
• DEL CONN DATA
• DEL CONN USER
• DEL DHCP
• DEL FW
• DEL IP INTERFACE
• DEL NAT
• DEL NMS
C-2 Introduction
LA-110 Installation and Operation Manual Appendix C Supervision Language
• DEL PAT
• DEL PRI
• DEL STATIC MAC ADDR
• DEL STATIC ROUTING
• DEL VLAN MEMBER
• DSP ADDR ATM
• DSP ALM
• DSP ARP TABLE
• DSP BP
• DSP BRIDGE INTERFACE
• DSP BUNDLE
• DSP COMMUNITY
• DSP CONN DATA
• DSP CONN USER
• DSP DATA
• DSP DEFAULT GATEWAY
• DSP DHCP
• DSP FW
• DSP FW LOG
• DSP IP INTERFACE
• DSP LAN
• DSP MAC ADDR
• DSP NAT
• DSP NETWORK
• DSP NMS
• DSP PAT
• DSP PM AAL2
• DSP PM ADDR ATM
• DSP PM ATM
• DSP PM BRIDGE INTERFACE
• DSP PM OAM ADDR ATM
• DSP PM OAM BRIDGE IF
• DSP PM OAM IP IF
• DSP PM CONN AAL2
• DSP PM CONN DATA
• DSP PM CONN OAM DATA
• DSP PM CONN OAM USER
• DSP PM CONN USER
• DSP PM DATA
Introduction C-3
• DSP PM IP
• DSP PM IP INTERFACE
• DSP PM LAN
• DSP PM NETWORK
• DSP PM OAM
• DSP PM OAM STATUS
• DSP PM USER
• DSP PRI
• DSP PSTN
• DSP ROUTING TABLE
• DSP SP PORT
• DSP STATIC MAC ADDR
• DSP STATIC ROUTING
• DSP SYS
• DSP SYSERR
• DSP SYSPARAMS
• DSP USER
• DSP VLAN MEMBER
• EXIT
• HELP
• INIT DB
• LOOP
• MOD BP
• MOD BRIDGE INTERFACE
• MOD CONN DATA
• MOD CONN USER
• MOD FIREWALL
• MOD IP INTERFACE
• MOD NMS
• MOD VLAN MEMBER
• PING
• RESET
• SEND ALM LOG
• SEND FW LOG
• SEND LOOPBACK BRIDGE INTERFACE
• SEND LOOPBACK DATA
• SEND LOOPBACK IP INTERFACE
• SEND LOOPBACK USER
C-4 Introduction
C.2 Command Set Description

This section describes the LA-110 commands. The description includes command
format, use, and options. The commands are listed in alphabetical order. The
following notational conventions are used throughout this appendix (and in the
whole manual):
[ ] Square brackets enclose an optional entry/parameter
{ } Parentheses enclose a list of entries/parameters from which one must
be selected
<Enter> Indicates the pressing of the carriage return key
<Tab> Indicates the pressing of the tab key
<SP> Indicates the pressing of the space bar
B Indicates the number of a timeslot bundle
C Indicates the index number of a connection
T Indicates the number of a timeslot.
ACTIVATE BRIDGE INTERFACE
Purpose
Toggle the activation status for an existing ATM WAN interface of the bridge serving
the LA-110 LAN port.
Note • An active (ON) interface is an interface that can carry traffic.
• You can also change the activation status by means of the MOD BRIDGE
INTERFACE command.
You may use the DSP BRIDGE INTERFACE command to display the list of existing
bridge interfaces, and find the index number of the desired interface.
This command is accepted only when the LA-110 LAN port is configured, by means of
the DEF LAN command, to use the bridge mode.
Syntax
ACTIVATE BRIDGE INTERFACE or ACTIVATE BRIDGE IF
Use
1. To change the current activation state of a bridge interface, type:
ACTIVATE BRIDGE INTERFACE<Enter>
or ACTIVATE BRIDGE IF<Enter>
You are prompted to enter the interface index number.
2. Enter the desired interface index number, in the range of 1 to 16, press <Enter>.
You will see a message which displays the new status of the specified
connection, e.g.:
Connection 3 on the LAN port was changed from ON to OFF
Figure C-1. ACTIVATE BRIDGE INTERFACE
Command Set Description C-5

ACTIVATE CONN DATA
Purpose
Toggle the activation status for an existing ATM network connection defined for
the data port.
This command is accepted only if the LA-110 has a data port.
• In the Frmae Relay operation mode you can also change the activation status by
means of the MOD CONN DATA command.
You can use the DSP CONN DATA command to display the list of existing data
port connections, and find the number (index) of the desired connection.
Syntax
ACTIVATE CONN DATA
Use
1. To change the current state of a data port connection, type:
ACTIVATE CONN DATA<Enter>
You are prompted to enter the connection index number.
Note If the data port uses the AAL1 Stream mode, the only index number that may be
used is 1. This applies irrespective of the mode (structured or unstructured) under
which the connection has been defined.
2. Enter the desired connection index number and then press <Enter>.
The new connection status is displayed.
Index : 1
Connection 1 on the USER side was changed from ON to OFF.
Figure C-2. ACTIVATE CONN DATA
ACTIVATE CONN USER
Purpose
Toggle the activation status for an existing connection defined on the user port
installed in the LA-110. The LA-110 may be equipped either with one E1
interface, or four FXS interfaces, or four ISDN “S” interfaces.
You can use the DSP CONN USER command to display the list of existing
connections, and find the number (index) of the desired connection.
Syntax
ACTIVATE CONN USER
C-6 Command Set Description

Use
1. To change the current state of a connection, type:
ACTIVATE CONN USER<Enter>
2. The steps needed to indicate the desired connection depend on the user port
interface type, as explained below:
For an E1 port, enter the desired connection index number and then press
<Enter>.
For a voice port (FXS or ISDN), the appropriate connection is automatically
selected when you select the port number that uses the desired connection.
Select the port number, 1 to 4, by pressing the F or B key, and then confirm
by pressing <Enter>.
You will see a message that displays the new status of the specified
connection, for example:
Connection 3 on the user side was changed from ON to OFF
or
Adaptation Layer: AAL 2
Port Index in the Interface : 1
Port 1 on the USER side was changed from ON to OFF (D Channel).

Port 1 on the USER side was changed from ON to OFF (B1 Channel).
Port 1 on the USER side was changed from ON to OFF (B2 Channel).
Figure C-3. ACTIVATE CONN USER
ACTIVATE ELCP
Purpose
Control the collection (“printing”) of diagnostic data related to the ELCP protocol.
This function is relevant only when using AAL2, and the current application mode
uses the ELCP protocol (selected by means of the application identifier – see DEF
SYSPARAMS command for details).
This command is intended for use by technical support personnel.
When data collection is enabled, you can display the following types of data:
• ELCP port status – displays general information related to the ports handled by
the ELCP protocol (fractional E1, FXS or ISDN), and additional parameters
related to the communication with the remote ELCP port.
• ELCP status parameters for the ISDN ports, useful for troubleshooting problems
related to the setting up of connections using the ISDN ports.
• ELCP statistics – displays performance and utilization statistics for the various
ELCP functions.
• LAPV5 statistics – displays statistics data for the various types of messages
exchanged by the ELCP protocol. This protocol uses the data link (DL) sublayer
of LAPV5 (Link Access Protocol for V5 Interface) for this purpose.

Syntax
ACTIVATE ELCP
Use
To enable the collection of ELCP diagnostic data:
1. Type:
ACTIVATE ELCP<Enter>
LA-110 displays the screen used to select the ELCP functionality, with the
Enable Printing option as default. A typical screen is shown below.
ELCP Functionality : Enable Printing
Figure C-4. ACTIVATE ELCP
2. Press <Enter> to confirm the selection. This ends the command.

To display collected data:
1. After selecting Enable Printing, you can select a specific type of data by
repeating the command:
2. LA-110 displays the screen used to select the ELCP functionality. Now press F
or B to select the desired type of collected data. The options relevant for the
display of collected data are as follows:
ELCP port status
LAPV5 statistics
ISDN status
ELCP statistics
LAPV5 statistics.
3. Press <Enter> to confirm the selection. The data collected since Enable
Printing has been selected is displayed on one or more screens. After the last
screen, you will see the LA-110 prompt.
To stop the collection of ELCP diagnostic data:
• Type:
LA-110 displays the screen used to select the ELCP functionality. Press F to
display Disable Printing, and then press <Enter> to confirm the
selection. This ends the command.
Note After selecting Disable Printing, the collected data is discarded.

ACTIVATE IP INTERFACE
Purpose
Toggle the activation status for an existing IP interface of the router serving the
LA-110 LAN port.
• For IP interfaces defined on the WAN port you can also change the activation
status by means of the MOD IP INTERFACE command.
This command is accepted only when the LA-110 LAN port is configured, by means of
the DEF LAN command, to use the router mode.
You may use the DSP IP INTERFACE command to display the list of existing IP
interfaces of the LAN port router, and find the index number of the desired interface.
Syntax
ACTIVATE IP INTERFACE or ACTIVATE IP IF
Use
1. To change the current activation status of an IP interface, type:
ACTIVATE IP INTERFACE<Enter> or ACTIVATE IP IF<Enter>
You are prompted to enter the IP interface index number.
2. Enter the desired interface index number, in the range of 1 to 11, and then
press <Enter>.
You will see a message which displays the new status of the specified IP
interface, e.g.:
Index: 1
Interface 1 on port was changed from ON to OFF
Figure C-5. ACTIVATE IP INTERFACE
ACTIVATE TFTP
Purpose
Perform a file transfer using TFTP. See detailed instructions in Appendix D.
Syntax
ACTIVATE TFTP
Use
1. Type:
ACTIVATE TFTP<Enter>
You will see the first line of the screen used to control the TFTP transfer.
This line is used to select the desired activity, using the F or B keys.

The available options are as follows:

Download SW Download new application software to the LA-110.
Download Download a selected configuration parameters file to the
Configuration LA-110.
Upload Upload the LA-110 configuration parameters as a file to
Configuration the specified IP host.
2. Press <Enter> to continue.
You are prompted to set the TFTP conenction timeout (in seconds).
You are prompted to set the number of connection retries.
You are prompted to enter the IP address of the TFTP server, and then
enter the desired file name.
After the transfer is started, LA-110 displays its progress. After the transfer is
completed, its result is also shown. A typical screen is shown below. After
displaying the results, the LA-110 prompt appears again.
Command Timeout (sec) Number of retries
------- ------------- -----------------
Download SW 15 3
Server IP: 1.1.1.1
File : SHDSL.ROM
Please wait…
TFTP STATUS TRANSFERRING DATA…
[…]
TFTP STATUS ENDED OK
Figure C-6. ACTIVATE TFTP
ADD BRIDGE INTERFACE
Purpose
Define the parameters needed to set up an ATM WAN interface for the bridge
serving the LA-110 LAN port. The interface defines a connection through the ATM
network.
Up to 16 different bridge interfaces can be set up: if the total number is exceeded,
you must delete an existing interface, using the DEL BRIDGE INTERFACE
command, before a new one can be added.
Each bridge interface is automatically assigned an index number in the range of 1
to 16: this number is then used for all the commands which refer to a specific
bridge interface. You can use the DSP BRIDGE INTERFACE command to display
information on the existing bridge interfaces.

The ADD BRIDGE INTERFACE command is accepted only when the LAN port is
configured, by means of the DEF LAN command, to operate in the Ethernet bridge
mode.
Syntax
ADD BRIDGE INTERFACE or ADD BRIDGE IF
Use
1. To define a new bridge interface, type:
ADD BRIDGE INTERFACE<Enter> or ADD BRIDGE IF<Enter>
You will see a message that indicates the index number assigned to the
new bridge interface (this is always the first free index), followed by the first
section of the bridge interface configuration form. This section is used to
define the ATM network connection parameters.
Refer to Table C-1 for a description of the parameters appearing in this section.
Adding interface number 1 to Bridge:

PCR
10867
off N/A N/A
Figure C-7. ADD BRIDGE INTERFACE
2. After selecting the desired values, press <Enter>.

Depending on the selected Bit-rate, an additional section is displayed, to
select the traffic contract parameters. The available selections for each traffic
service category are explained in Table C-3.
3. Select the desired values and then press <Enter> to confirm.
4. Enable or disable periodic loopback activation, its fail threshold and indication.
5. Press <Enter> to end the command. The command is ended, and its result is
displayed: either The interface was added successfully, or a message that
explains the reason for rejecting your command.

Table C-1. ADD BRIDGE INTERFACE Command Parameters
Parameter Function Values

VPI Specifies the ATM Virtual Path Identifier 0 to 31
to be used by the new connection
Default: 0
VCI Specifies the ATM Virtual Circuit Identifier 0 to 255
to be used by the new connection
Default: 0
Note: In general, the pair VPI.VCI uniquely
identifies an ATM connection, therefore
you cannot specify a VPI.VCI pair already
used by another connection, even if the
other connection is on another LA-110
port. The VPI.VCI pair 0.0 is reserved.
Bit Rate Specifies the ATM service category to be UBR Unspecified bit rate service, intended
used to handle the traffic transferred for non-real-time applications which do
through this new bridge interface not require tightly constrained delay
and delay variation, e.g., data
communications applications such as
file transfer or e-mail.
UBR+ Same as UBR, except that it enables the
user to specify a minimum desired cell
rate.
VBR Variable bit rate service, intended for
applications that require constraints on
the maximum cell transfer delay and
delay variation, such as video or voice.
CBR Constant bit rate service, intended for
real-time applications that require
constant bandwidth and tightly
constrained delay and delay variation,
for example, synchronous data streams.
Default: UBR
Cont Check Specifies the method to be used for the The available selections are described in
new bridge interface to perform continuity Table C-2.
checks on the ATM network interface
Default: OFF TWO-WAY
Active Selects the initial state of the new bridge ON The new bridge interface is active and
interface (ATM network connection). can carry traffic.
At any time, you can use the ACTIVATE OFF The new bridge interface cannot carry
BRIDGE INTERFACE command to change traffic, but its configuration parameters
the status are stored in the LA-110 database.
Default: ON

Table C-1. ADD BRIDGE INTERFACE Command Parameters (Cont.)

LB Operation Controls activation of the periodic ON Periodic loopback activation is enabled.
loopbacks on the current interface
OFF Periodic loopback activation is disabled.
connection. These loopbacks are initiated
every 5 seconds. LA-110 keeps statistics Default: OFF
for the Round-Trip Delay (RTD)
Notes: Periodic loopbacks can be activated
measurements and generates alarms upon
together with continuity checks.
loopback failures, according to the
user-selectable threshold.
LB Fail Selects the number of non-received 1–16
Threshold loopback responses, which trigger alarm
activation.
LB Fail Controls alarm generation if the number ON Alarm is generated.
Indication of non-received loopback responses
OFF Alarm is not generated.
exceeds threshold. The alarm is OAM
LOOPBACK FAILURE START. Default: OFF
Table C-2. Continuity Check Options
Option Description
OFF TWO-WAY The continuity check function is disabled, i.e., LA-110 will not transmit, nor expect to
receive, CC cells from the ATM network through the corresponding connection
ON-SOURCE When there is no payload traffic for transmission on this connection, LA-110 will
transmit CC cells toward the ATM network.
This enables the remote equipment to monitor the continuity of the transmit path from
the LA-110 to the network, on the new connection.
ON-SINK LA-110 expects to receive CC cells from the ATM network. If there is no payload traffic,
and no CC cells were received during the last three seconds, LA-110 will declare a
loss-of-continuity fault, and start transmitting RDI cells on the VCC used by this
connection.
This enables LA-110 to monitor the continuity of the receive-from-ATM network path.
ON TWO-WAY During periods without payload traffic, LA-110 transmits and expects to receive CC cells
from the ATM network. The response in case the connection does not carry payload
traffic, and no CC cells are received, is described above.
Table C-3 presents the traffic contract parameters for the various ATM service
categories.
See also the Considerations for Selection of Traffic Contract Parameters section on
page C-15.

Table C-3. Traffic Contract Parameters
ATM Service
Category
UBR PCR Specifies the peak cell rate The allowed range for ADSL and SHDSL
uplink interfaces is the following:
79 to 5452 cells per second (2-wire)
The maximum actual value depends on the
network port synchronization rate.
Default: 79
UBR+ MDCR Specifies the minimum desired 10 to 5453 cells per second
cell rate
Default: 200
PCR See explanation of PCR for UBR
above
VBR MBS Specifies the maximum burst size 1 to 999 cells
to be accepted
Default: 10
SCR Specifies the sustained cell rate 79 to 5452 cells per second (2-wire)
Default: 79
PCR See explanation of PCR for UBR
above
CBR PCR Specifies the peak cell rate. The allowed range for ADSL and SHDSL
uplink interfaces is 10 to 5453 cells per
The peak cell rate must be equal
second. The maximum actual value depends
to the rate needed to support the
on the network port synchronization rate.
nominal data rate of the
connection using CBR. See the Default: 10
Considerations for Selection of
Traffic Contract Parameters
section below for details on the
conversion of data rate to the
equivalent cell rate.
Note If for the VBR ATM service category the selected sustained cell rate exceeds the
maximum allowed value, LA-110 aborts bridge interface addition and displays the
following warning: There is not enough free bandwidth to add this Interface.
Use DEL BRIDGE INTERFACE commands to free bandwidth. The interface was
NOT added.
Likewise, no interface is added if the selected peak cell rate for the CBR ATM service
category exceeds the maximum allowed value.

Considerations for Selection of Traffic Contract Parameters

During the selection of parameters for a new connection, you must perform two
decisions:
• Select the ATM service category, in accordance with the category whose
description best matches the requirements of the application using the new
connection. The available selections are described in Table C-3.
• Select values for the parameters that control traffic handling (called traffic
contract parameters) for the selected ATM service category, for example, PCR,
and where applicable, SCR, MBS or MDCR.
The traffic contract parameters are given as cells per second. This is how to relate
the ATM traffic capacity, in cells per second, to the configured and available
bandwidth:
1. Determine the ATM payload carrying capacity (bandwidth) of the LA-110
uplink. This value is the lower of the following two values:
Configured rate
Actual rate, which is determined by the link synchronization rate.
In general, the maximum ATM payload carrying capacity (bandwidth) of the
LA-110 uplink depends on the interface type: for ADSL and SHDSL, this is
2312 kbps less 8 kHz of overhead, that is, 2304 kbps.
2. Convert the cell rate to the equivalent data rate, using the following
procedure:
An ATM cell includes 53 bytes or 424 bits.
Therefore, at the maximum payload rate supported by an ADSL or SHDSL
uplink (2312 kbps), the maximum ATM cell rate (taking into account the
nominal data rate and the ATM cell size of 53 bytes, or 424 bits) is limited
to 5453 cells per second.
In a basic ATM cell, a minimum of 5 bytes is inserted before every
48 payload bytes to carry the ATM cell header. Therefore, the payload
carrying capacity must be reduced by the ratio of payload bytes to total
number of bytes per cell, which is constant (53).
For example, the maximum payload data rate at a 2312 kbps line rate is
approximately 48/53 × 2312 = 2094 kbps. If the actual link
synchronization rate is lower, the rate is proportionally lower.
Note More complex cell structures may have lower payload carrying capacity, for
example, 47 or 46 bytes. Padding bytes may also be intentionally inserted to reduce
the assembly delay, and this may further decrease the net payload rate.
The values to be assigned to the traffic contract parameters must be selected so as
to meet the requirements of the application that will use the new connection,
while also considering the bandwidth requirements for all the connections serving
other ports.

The reason for this is that all the connections share the same transmission link, that
is, LA-110 uplink. Correct allocation of bandwidth is therefore critical to ensure
good quality of service for all the users. The following approach is recommended:
1. Start by reserving bandwidth to all the AAL1 and AAL2 applications, and to
any AAL5 applications that need CBR. For the LA-110, the applications that
need CBR are those using the user port(s), that is, the E1, FXS or ISDN ports as
installed on your unit.
2. Assign bandwidth to applications needing VBR, in accordance with the
expected traffic statistics.
3. Any other applications may use only UBR+ or UBR.
ATM traffic, as well as the traffic generated by many applications, is bursty (its rate
changes abruptly). To enable efficient utilization of the available uplink bandwidth,
it is necessary to smooth out the traffic: for this purpose, first-in, first out buffers
(FIFO) must be allocated to each connection to temporarily store traffic before it is
sent out to the uplink, at a rate constrained by the user-selected traffic contract
parameters of each connection. Since the total number of buffers available in the
LA-110 is limited, make sure to allocate efficiently the available buffers.
As long as the average data rate of all the connections does not exceed the
available uplink bandwidth, few cells are lost. Note however that cells may be
intentionally discarded to meet the traffic contract parameters; they may also be
lost in the ATM network as a result of congestion.
The combined actions described above are called traffic shaping. An important
characteristic of the LA-110 is its advanced traffic shaping capabilities.
ADD BP
Purpose
Create a port on the LA-110 internal bridge, configure its parameters, assign up to
three VCs to the port and define VLAN priorities to be handled by the VCs.
The ADD BP command is accepted only when the LAN port is configured to
operate in the VLAN-aware mode.
Syntax
ADD BP
Use
1. To add a new bridge port, type:
ADD BP<Enter>
You will see the first section of the data form used to define the new bridge
port. This section includes the index number of the new port, type of the
frames to be handled by the port operating in the ingress filtering mode.
2. Select the desired values as follows:
Press <Tab> to move to the next field.
Change the field status by pressing F or B.

3. When all the parameters in the first row have been configured, press <Enter>
to continue to the next section.
4. Enable VC assignment to the bridge port (up to three VCs can be assigned),
and press <Enter> to continue to the next section.
Note
VCs can be assigned to the ATM-side ports (1–16).
5. Select the first VC to be assigned to the bridge port, and press <Tab> to move
to the next field.
6. Define VLAN priorities that will be handled by the assigned VC, and press
<Enter> to assign another VC to the bridge port.
7. If you intend to assign another VC to the current bridge port, select Y for the
Bind another Bridge IF, and repeat steps 4 to 6 to configure the new VC.
8. If you do not intend to assign another VC to the current bridge port, select N
for the Bind another Bridge IF.
A typical data form for a bridge port configuration is shown below.
Bridge port: 1
- - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - -
1 Admit all Enable

VLAN Priority
IF Index 0 1 2 3 4 5 6 7
-------- ---------------
1 Y Y Y N N N N Y
Bind another Bridge IF (Y/N)? Y
VLAN Priority
IF Index 0 1 2 3 4 5 6 7
-------- ---------------
2 N N N Y N Y N N
Figure C-8. ADD BP

Table C-4 lists the bridge port parameters.
Table C-4. ADD BP Mode Parameters

Bridge port Adds a new bridge port. Up to 17 ports can 1 to 16, LAN
be added: one for the LAN and 16 for the
Default: LAN
ATM side.
Note: LA-110 masks indexes that are already
assigned bridge ports.
PVID Port VID. Defines a VID that is added to an 1 to 4094
untagged or priority-tagged frames received
Default: 1
at this port.
Accept frame Defines the mode of the accept filter. Admit all – All frames (tagged and untagged)
type are accepted. Untagged frames receive a
PVID of the port that they came from.
Tagged only – Only tagged frames are
accepted. Priority-tagged frames (frames
with null VID), as well as untagged frames
are discarded.
Default: Admit all
Ingress filtering Defines filtering according to the VID of the Disable – The bridge does not perform
incoming frames. filtering according to incoming VID.
Enable – The bridge port accepts only
frames that have the VID of one of the
VLANs assigned to the port.
Default: Disable
Bind Bridge IF Enable or disable VC (bridge interface) No – A VC is not assigned to the bridge
assignment to the bridge port. Up to three port.
VCs can be assigned to a bridge port.
Yes – A VC is assigned to the bridge port.
Default: No
IF Index Selects a VC to be assigned to the bridge port. 1–16
VCs, their shaping and QoS parameters are Default: The first unassigned VC
created as bridge interfaces by ADD BRIDGE
INTERFACE command.

Table C-4 ADD BP Mode Parameters (Cont.)

VLAN Priority Defines VLAN priorities to be handled by the Y – This priority is handled by the current
current VC. VC.
Priority tags are used to determine the frame N – This priority is not handled by the
priority in the transmission. They are derived current VC.
from the VLAN tag. The VCs assigned to the
Note: One priority cannot be handled by
bridge port can handle priority-tagged frames
two different VCs. That is why, if you assign a
differently. When the first VC is assigned to
previously assigned VLAN priority to a
the port, it handles all port priorities. Up to
different VC, LA-110 automatically cancels
two additional VCs can be added to the port
the previous assignment and creates a new
to handle some of its priorities.
one.
When a frame is received, its priority value is For example, if priority 5, handled by VC 1,
recorded. Then the frames is sent only to the is reassigned to VC 2, LA-110 displays the
VC this priority is assigned to. If the priority is following message: One or more priorities
not assigned to any of the outgoing VCs, it is are already set. Executing this command
dropped. If the last VC is deleted from the will unset these priorities, cancels priority
bridge port, the port is deleted as well. assignment to VC 1 and assigns this priority
to VC 2.
For application example, see Priority Mapping
Application below. It is also possible to leave priority unassigned
by setting its value to N for all VCs.
Bind another Add another VC to the current bridge port Y – Another VC will be added
Bridge IF
N – Another VC will not be added
Priority Mapping Application

This section describes how to set up a bridge to forward frames according to their
priority tags. For example, the LA-110 internal bridge includes two ports:
• LAN port (Ethernet side)
• Port 1 (ATM side).
Bridge port 1 includes three VCs that terminate in the same device, but each of
them has different shaping and QoS parameters in order to achieve traffic
prioritization. The Ethernet frames are forwarded to one of the VCs according to
priority tags:
• Frames with priority from 0 to 2 are transmitted on VC 1
• Frames with priority 3 are transmitted on VC 2
• Frames with priority from 4 to 7 are transmitted on VC 3.
VC 1 (priority 0-2)
Bridge VC 2 (priority 3)
LAN Internal Bridge
Port 1
VC 3 (priority 4-7)
Figure C-9. Priority Mapping Application

To configure the VLAN priority:

1. Assign VC 1, VC 2 and VC 3 to the bridge port 1.
2. Assign priority 3 to VC 2.
3. Assign priorities 4 to 7 to VC 3.
ADD BUNDLE
Purpose
Create a timeslot bundle on the LA-110 E1 user port. This command is accepted
only when the LA-110 has an E1 user port.
A bundle is a group of user-selected timeslots: this group is then handled as a
single entity with respect to transmission to the ATM network, that is, you must
define a separate connection for each bundle.
The bundle configuration parameters depend on the AAL type. For AAL2, they
also depend on the application identifier (both are selected by means of the DEF
SYSPARAMS command):
• When using AAL1 in any supported application mode (CES, DB-CES or
transparent):
Minimum number of timeslots in a bundle: 1
Maximum number of timeslots in a bundle when the E1 port uses G732N
framing: 31
Maximum number of timeslots in a bundle when the E1 port uses G732S
framing: 30 (in this framing mode, timeslot 16 cannot be included in any
bundle).
It is not possible to define bundles when the E1 port is in unframed or UNI
mode.
• When using AAL2, bundles can be defined only when using CAS (the
corresponding application identifier is identified in the DEF SYSPARAMS
command as CAS for POTS and DSS1 for ISDN (without ELCP)). With AAL2,
a bundle can have a single timeslot.
Each bundle is automatically assigned the next free bundle index number. To see
the bundles already defined and their properties, use the DSP BUNDLE
command.
Note
For the LA-110 units with the E1 network interface maximum number of timeslots
assigned to all opened bundles cannot exceed 26.
Syntax
ADD BUNDLE

Use
1. To add a new bundle, type:
ADD BUNDLE<Enter>
You will see the first section of the data form used to define the new
bundle. This section includes the index number of the new bundle, which
is automatically assigned and displayed in the first row of the data form,
and the first row of timeslots.
The status of each timeslot is indicated as follows:
For LA-110 without echo canceller, the available selections are as follows:
n/a The timeslot is not available for inclusion in the new bundle
(this includes timeslots used for signaling or for internal
bundles).
No Free timeslot, may be included in the new bundle.
Yes Timeslot already included by you in the new bundle.
For LA-110 with echo canceller, the available timeslot status selections are
as follows:
n/a The timeslot is not available for inclusion in the new bundle
(this includes timeslots used for signaling or for internal
bundles).
No Free timeslot, may be included in the new bundle.
2. Select the desired timeslots (for AAL2, only one timeslot can be selected) as
follows:
Press <Tab> to move to each desired timeslot.
Change the timeslot status as required by pressing F or B. You cannot
change the status of a timeslot identified as n/a.
3. When all the timeslots in the first row have been selected, press <Enter> to
move to the next row.
4. Repeat Step 3 above until all the required timeslots have been configured, and
then press <Enter> to confirm the selections and end the command. Make
sure that the number of timeslots with echo canceling (yes) does not exceed
the maximum supported by your LA-110 unit.
A typical data form for an LA-110 with echo canceller equipped with an E1
user port, as seen after all the selections have been made, is shown below.

Adding bundle number 2:

Echo Canceller: Yes
Transmit and Receive Timeslots

1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 10 11 12 13 14 15
yes yes yes yes yes yes yes yes yes yes yes yes yes yes yes
16 17 18 19 20 21 22 23 24 25 26 27 28 29 30 31
yes yes yes yes yes yes yes yes yes yes no no no no no no
Figure C-10. ADD BUNDLE
ADD CONN DATA
Purpose
Define the ATM network connection parameters for the data port. This command
is accepted only if the LA-110 has a data port.
The number of connections and the connection parameters depend on the data
port application mode: Frame Relay or AAL1 Stream. The application mode is
selected by means of the DEF DATA command.
• AAL1 Stream: this application mode is used to transport the bit stream
received by the data port, transparently, over the ATM network. Therefore, in
this mode only a single connection can be set up for the data port, and any
attempt to add another connection is rejected with a No more VCCs for new
connections message.
• Frame Relay: in this application mode, up to 16 different connections can be
set up. Therefore, in this mode, the data port can support up to 16 Frame
Relay connections (each with its own DLCI). If the total number of different
connections is exceeded, you must delete an existing connection, using the
DEL CONN DATA command, before a new one can be added.
Each connection is automatically assigned an index number in the range of 1
connection. You can use the DSP CONN DATA command to display
information on the existing connections.
The Frame Relay application mode supports two interworking functions:
Service interworking in accordance with FRF.8
Network interworking in accordance with FRF.5.
Different parameters can be defined in each mode.
The following sections explain the connection parameters for each data port
application mode. Make sure to review also the Considerations for Selection of
Traffic Contract Parameters section on page C-15.
Syntax
ADD CONN DATA

Use – General Procedure

1. To add a new connection to the LA-110 data port, type:
ADD CONN DATA<Enter>
new connection (this is always the first free index), followed by the first
section of the connection configuration form.
2. Select the appropriate parameters in accordance with the information given
below, and then press <Enter> to continue to the next section.
3. Repeat the procedure as necessary until <Enter> is pressed for the last line.
The command is ended, and its result is displayed: either The connection
was added successfully, or a message that explains the reason for
rejecting your command.
The following sections explain the parameters to be defined, in accordance with
the data port application mode.
Use – Procedure for AAL1 Stream Application Mode

A typical data form for a data port connection, when the data port is configured
for the AAL1 Stream mode, is shown below.
=======================

- - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - -
0. 11 47 47 Off two-way Structured

- - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - -
off N/A N/A
Pointer
Parity Active
- - - - - - -
On On
Figure C-11. ADD CONN DATA – AAL1 Stream Mode
Table C-5 lists the connection parameters for the AAL1 Stream mode.

Table C-5. ADD CONN DATA – AAL1 Stream Application Mode Parameters

VPI Specifies the ATM Virtual Path Identifier to be 0 to 31
used by the new connection
Default: 0
VCI Specifies the ATM Virtual Circuit Identifier to 0 to 255
be used by the new connection.
Default: 0
Notes:
• The pair VPI.VCI uniquely identifies an
ATM connection, therefore you cannot
specify a VPI.VCI pair already used by
another connection, even if that
connection is defined on another LA-110
port.
• The VPI.VCI 0.0 is reserved. Your
configuration will be rejected if you leave
the default values unchanged, or the
selected values are already in use
Rx Bytes Per Cell Specifies the number of payload bytes to be 10 to 47 bytes
expected in the cells received by the new Default: 47
connection.
Remaining bytes are assumed to be padding
bytes and therefore are discarded
Tx Bytes Per Cell Specifies the number of payload bytes to be 10 to 47 bytes
inserted in a cell before transmitting it. Default: 47
After the specified number of payload is
collected, the remaining bytes in the cell are
filled with padding and the cell is
immediately transmitted toward the network.
This parameter enables the user to reduce the
delay caused by cell filling in applications that
cannot tolerate long delays
Cont Check Specifies the method to be used for the new The available selections are described in
connection to perform continuity checks on Table C-2.
the ATM network interface

Table C-5. ADD CONN DATA – AAL1 Stream Application Mode Parameters (Cont.)

Connection Selects the connection type. For the 64 kbps rate:
Type The available selections depend on the data STRUCTURED WITH POINTER – Use of the
rate selected by means of the DEF DATA structured service as defined in ATMF
command AF-VTOA-0078.000.
STRUCTURED WITHOUT POINTER – Same
as above, but without using a pointer (the
resulting cell structure is similar to that of the
unstructured service cells).
Default: STRUCTURED WITH POINTER
For other rates:
STRUCTURED – Use of structured service as
defined in ATMF AF-VTOA-0078.000.
STRUCTURED (SIGNAL TRANSPORT) –
Structured header bits that use proprietary
method to relay information on the current
state of the I-signal (DCD) and C-signal (RTS) of
the remote RAD’s unit and change the status
on the local control signal accordingly. Also
refer to the DEF DATA command for details on
effect of the control signal transfer modes.
This connection type is enforced as long as the
I-signal is set to Obey Remote Signal mode.
Note: This mode must be enabled, when
running Remote Remote Data loopback.
UNSTRUCTURED – Use of unstructured
service as defined in ATMF document
AF-VTOA-0078.000.
Default: UNSTRUCTURED
LB Operation Controls activation of the periodic loopbacks ON Periodic loopback activation is enabled.
on the current interface connection. These OFF Periodic loopback activation is disabled.
loopbacks are initiated every 5 seconds.
LA-110 keeps statistics for the Round-Trip Default: OFF
Delay (RTD) measurements and generates Notes: Periodic loopbacks can be activated
alarms upon loopback failures, according to together with continuity checks.
the user-selectable threshold.
LB Fail Selects the number of non-received loopback 1–16
Threshold responses, which trigger alarm activation.
LB Fail Controls alarm generation if the number of ON Alarm is generated.
Indication non-received loopback responses exceeds OFF Alarm is not generated.
threshold. The alarm is OAM LOOPBACK
FAILURE START. Default: OFF

Table C-5. ADD CONN DATA – AAL1 Stream Application Mode Parameters (Cont.)

Pointer Parity Controls the use of pointer parity when using ON Pointer parity bit generation at the
the STRUCTURED or STRUCTURED WITH transmit side, and checking of parity bit
POINTER connection type for error detection at the receiving side
enabled. Supported only for
STRUCTURED or STRUCTURED WITH
POINTER service.
OFF Pointer parity generation and checking
disabled. Supported only for
STRUCTURED or STRUCTURED WITH
POINTER service.
N/A Not applicable. This is the only option
when selecting UNSTRUCTURED or
STRUCTURED WITHOUT POINTER.
Default: ON for STRUCTURED
N/A for UNSTRUCTURED
Active Selects the initial state of the new connection. ON The new connection is active and can
carry traffic.
At any time, you can use the ACTIVATE
CONN DATA or MOD CONN DATA OFF The new connection cannot carry
command to change the status traffic, but its configuration parameters
are stored in the LA-110 database.
Default: ON
Use – General Parameters for Frame Relay Application Mode

A typical general parameters section of the connection data form, for a data port
configured for the Frame Relay application mode, is shown below.
Table C-6 lists the connection parameters for this mode. For the parameters
appearing in the following sections, see Table C-7 or Table C-8.
- - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - -
0 0.0 SERVICE ON
Figure C-12. ADD CONN DATA – Frame Relay Application Mode
Table C-6. ADD CONN DATA – General Connection Parameters for Frame Relay Application Mode

DLCI Specifies the Frame Relay user’s DLCI for 16 to 991 (DLCIs 0 to 15 and 992 to 1024
which the new connection will be used. are reserved)
Note: Since only one connection may be set Default: 0
up for each DLCI, do not specify a DLCI
currently used by another connection
Default: 0

(Cont.)

Default: 0
Notes:
• In general, the VPI.VCI pair uniquely
identifies an ATM connection, therefore you
cannot specify a VPI.VCI pair already used
by another connection, even if that
port. This also applies to a connection using
the SERVICE interworking mode.
However, when the connection uses the

NETWORK interworking mode, it is possible
to define a many-to-one connection by
entering the same VPI.VCI pair for more
than one network connection on the data
port. In this case, the traffic contract
parameters of the new connection are
automatically adopted from those defined
for the first connection using the same
VPI.VCI pair.
• The VPI.VCI pair 0.0 is reserved. Your
the default values unchanged
Interworking Specifies the Frame Relay interworking SERVICE LA-110 operates in the service
function performed by the LA-110 interworking mode, as defined
in FRF.8. In this mode, LA-110
enables Frame Relay
equipment to communicate
with ATM equipment. For a
description of the specific
parameters available in this
mode, see Table C-7.
NETWORK LA-110 operates in the
network interworking mode
defined in FRF.5. In this mode,
LA-110 enables Frame Relay
equipment to communicate
with other Frame Relay
equipment over an ATM
network. For a description of
the specific parameters
available in this mode, see
Table C-8.
Default: Service

(Cont.)

Active Selects the initial state of the new connection. ON The new connection is active and
can carry traffic.
At any time, you can use the ACTIVATE CONN
DATA or MOD CONN DATA command to OFF The new connection cannot carry
change the status traffic, but its configuration
parameters are stored in the LA-110
database.
Default: ON
Use – Frame Relay Application Mode with Service Interworking

A typical connection data form, for a data port configured for the Frame Relay
application mode with SERVICE interworking, is shown below.
FECN Mode DE<->CLP
Convert Transparent Convert
Cont Check Bit-rate
Off-two way VBR
Figure C-13. ADD CONN DATA – Service Interworking
The parameters appearing in this section are listed in Table C-7.
Table C-7. ADD CONN DATA – Parameters for Frame Relay Application Mode with Service Interworking

FECN Specifies the method used to convert EFCI=0 Ignore the FECN bit received from the
the forward explicit congestion Frame Relay equipment connected to
notification (FECN) information to the the data port, and always set the EFCI
congestion indication (CI) bit, or the bit to 0.
explicit forward congestion indication CONVERT In the receive path, the EFCI/CI bit is
(EFCI) bit, to be inserted in the ATM derived from the received FECN bit.
cells
Default: CONVERT
Mode Specifies the protocol handling method TRANSLATION LA-110 converts the encapsulation
header from the format required
by RFC2427, which replaces
RFC 1490 (Frame Relay) to the
format of RFC2684, which
replaces RFC1483 (ATM).
TRANSPARENT LA-110 transparently transfers the
encapsulation header.
Default: TRANSPARENT

Table C-7. ADD CONN DATA – Parameters for Frame Relay Application Mode with Service
Interworking (Cont.)

DE<->CLP Specifies the method used to derive the 0 Always set the CLP and DE bits to 0.
discard eligibility (DE) bit for the Frame 1 Always set the CLP and DE bits to 1.
Relay equipment connected to the CONVERT In the receive path, the DE bit is
LA-110 data port, and the cell loss derived from the CLP bit received
priority (CLP) bit for the ATM network from the ATM network (if one of the
cells carries CLP = 1, the DE will be
set to 1). In the transmit path, the CLP
bit is derived from the DE bit received
from the Frame Relay equipment
Default: CONVERT
Cont Check Specifies the method to be used for the The available selections are listed in Table C-2.
new connection to perform continuity
Bit Rate Specifies the ATM service category to UBR Unspecified bit rate service, intended for
be used to handle the traffic transferred non-real-time applications which do not
through this new bridge interface require tightly constrained delay and delay
variation, e.g., data communications
applications such as file transfer or e-mail.
user to specify a minimum desired cell rate.
applications that require constraints on the
maximum cell transfer delay and delay
variation, such as video or voice.
CBR Constant bit rate service, intended for real-
time applications that require constant
bandwidth and tightly constrained delay
and delay variation, for example,
synchronous data streams.
Default: UBR
Use – Frame Relay Application Mode with NETWORK Interworking

A typical connection data form, for a data port configured for the Frame Relay
application mode with NETWORK interworking, is shown below.
FR-SSCS-DLCI DE->CLP CLP->DE
Value Convert Conv-DE & CLP
Figure C-14. ADD CONN DATA – Network Interworking
The parameters appearing in this section are listed in Table C-8.

Table C-8. ADD CONN DATA – Parameters for Frame Relay Application Mode with Network
Interworking

FR-SSCS-DLCI Specifies the value of the DLCI to be 16 to 991 (DLCIs 0 to 15 and 992 to 1024 are
used at the far end of the link, to reserved).
complete the connection Default: Same as the user’s DLCI
DE->CLP Specifies the method used to derive CLP=0 The CLP bit is always set to 0.
the cell loss priority (CLP) bit to be sent
CLP=1 The CLP bit is always set to 1.
in the ATM network cells, from the DE
bit of Frame Relay frames CONVERT The CLP bit is derived from the
DE bit received from the Frame
Note: The original DE bit is also
Relay equipment connected to
mapped to the DE-FR-SSCS bit in the
LA-110.
Frame Relay service-specific
convergence sublayer (SSCS) protocol Default: CONVERT
data units (PDUs) sent through the
ATM network
CLP->DE Specifies the method used to derive CONV-DE-ONLY Only the DE-FR-SSCS bit
the discard eligibility (DE) bit sent to received from the remote end
the frame relay equipment connected in the Frame Relay SSCS PDUs
to LA-110, using the CLP bit carried by determines the DE bit.
the ATM cells, and the DE-FR-SSCS bit
CONV-DE & CLP The DE bit is derived from both
received in Frame Relay SSCS PDUs
the CLP and the DE-FR-SSCS
bits.
Default: CONV-DE & CLP
The next lines in the NETWORK section data form are used to specify the ATM
continuity check (CC) functionality, the ATM service category and the traffic
contract parameters.
However, in the NETWORK interworking mode it is possible to define many-to-
one connections. For many-to-one connections, the traffic contract parameters of
the additional connections are defined during the definition of the first connection
using the same VCCI (VPI.VCI pair). Therefore, any selections made in the traffic
contract parameters section of all the additional connections added to the original
connection are ignored, and the many-to-one connection uses the traffic contract
parameters defined for the first connection using the given VPI.VCI pair:
• One-to-one connection: a typical display for the UBR service category is
shown below.
Cont Check Bit-Rate
- - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - -
Off two-way UBR
Figure C-15. Network Interworking Mode – One-to-one Connection
These lines are identical to the lines displayed when the SERVICE interworking
mode is selected.
• Many-to-one connection: in this case, you can only see the parameter values
defined for the first connection using the corresponding VPI.VCI pair. A typical
display for the UBR service category is shown below.

NOTE: The continuity check and traffic parameters

for this many-to-one VCC are:
Cont Check Bit-Rate SCR PCR MBS
- - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - -
Off two-way UBR - - - - - -
Figure C-16. Network Interworking Mode – Many-to-one Connection
ADD CONN USER

Purpose
Define the ATM network connection parameters for the user port(s) of the LA-110.
The parameters defined by this command depend on the following factors:
• The type of user port(s) installed in the LA-110 unit (this depends on the
ordered configuration). The available options are:
4 analog voice ports with FXS interfaces
4 ISDN “S” BRI ports with NT or TE interfaces
One E1 port.
• The ATM Adaptation Layer (AAL1 or AAL2) configured by the user. The AAL,
and when AAL2 is selected – the application identifier, are configured by
means of the DEF SYSPARAMS command.
The ADD CONN USER command is accepted only if the LA-110 has a user port,
and presents only the parameters applicable to the current LA-110 configuration.
Syntax
ADD CONN USER
Use
1. To add a new connection to the user port, type:
ADD CONN USER<Enter>
You will see a message that indicates the ATM adaptation layer currently
configured, following by a message that depends on the user port interface:
When the user port has FXS and ISDN interfaces, you are prompted to
enter the number of the port within the interface. Type the desired
number, 1 to 4, and then press <Enter>.
Note If a connection has already been defined for the port number entered by you, the
command is aborted and you see a message that explains the reason.
If you entered the wrong port number, start the command again; however, if the
port number is correct but a connection has already been defined, first delete the
existing connection using the DEL CONN USER command.
When the user port has an E1 interface, LA-110 automatically assigns an
index number to the new connection (this is always the first free index).
This number must then be used by all the commands that refer to this
user port connection.
At this stage, you will see the first section of the connection configuration
form.


The command is ended, and its result is displayed: either The connection
The following sections provide configuration procedures for the various types of
user ports and configurations.
ADD CONN USER – FXS Ports over AAL1

When configuring a connection for an FXS port over AAL1, the configuration
procedure depends on the connection type selected by the user:
• CES. In this mode, each FXS port has its own ATM connection. The payload is
transported using the ATM Circuit Emulation Service (CES) Version 2.0 defined
in AF-VTOA-0078.000. The transmission uses the structured CES mode: in this
mode, the port payload is transported as an independent 64 kbps stream using
the cell structure corresponding to the framing mode selected by the user (E1,
T1 using SF framing or T1 using ESF framing).
• DB-CES. This mode is a variation of CES defined in ATMF specification
AF-VTOA-0085.000. DB-CES enables better utilization of available uplink
bandwidth by using the voice channel activity information carried by the
signaling bits of the port to request uplink bandwidth when the channel is
active (off-hook), and release the bandwidth when the channel is idle
(on-hook). The cell structure depends on the framing mode selected by the
user (E1, T1 using SF framing or T1 using ESF framing).
• Transparent. This mode uses the unstructured CES mode defined in ATMF
specification AF-VTOA-0078.000. In this mode, the LA-110 handles the port
payload as a single 64 kbps bit stream which is transparently transported over
the ATM connection, without any assumptions regarding the framing.
Transparent mode is available for E1 framing only.

Use – Connections for FXS Ports Using CES

A typical data form for an FXS port connection over AAL1 using CES is shown
below. Table C-9 lists the corresponding connection parameters.
FXS Interface
- - - - - - -
Framing Mode : E1
RX Bytes Tx Bytes
- - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - -
0 .12 47 47 off-two way On
Pointer: Enable
Pointer Parity: On

- - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - -
off N/A N/A
Figure C-17. ADD CONN USER – FXS Ports Using CES
Table C-9. ADD CONN USER – Command Parameters for FXS Ports Using CES

Adaptation Displays the AAL currently configured on the AAL1 (to change, use the DEF SYSPARAMS
Layer LA-110 command)
Port Index in the Specifies the port for which the new 1 to 4
Interface connection will be created
Scroll using the F and B keys to display the
desired port
Connection Specifies the type of the new connection CES, DB-CES
Type
Default: CES
Framing Mode Specifies the framing mode used for building For LA-110, it is recommended to select E1.
the cells carrying the new connection
Default: E1
Default: 0

Table C-9. ADD CONN USER – Command Parameters for FXS Ports Using CES (Cont.)

Default: 0
Notes:
• The pair VPI.VCI uniquely identifies an
ATM connection, therefore you cannot
another connection, even if that
port.
• The VPI.VCI 0.0 is reserved. Your
the default values unchanged, or the
selected values are already in use
Rx Bytes Per Specifies the number of payload bytes to be 10 to 47 bytes
Cell expected in the cells received by the new
Default: 47
connection.
Remaining bytes are assumed to be padding
bytes and therefore are discarded
Tx Bytes Per Cell Specifies the number of payload bytes to be 10 to 47 bytes
inserted in a cell before transmitting it.
Default: 47
After the specified number of payload is
collected, the remaining bytes in the cell are
filled with padding and the cell is
immediately transmitted toward the network.
This parameter enables the user to reduce the
delay caused by cell filling in applications that
cannot tolerate long delays
Cont Check Specifies the method to be used for the new The available selections are described in
connection to perform continuity checks on Table C-2.
the ATM network interface
Active Selects the initial state of the new connection. ON The new connection is active and
can carry traffic.
At any time, you can use the ACTIVATE
CONN USER command to change the status OFF The new connection cannot carry
traffic, but its configuration
parameters are stored in the LA-110
database.
Default: ON
Pointer Enables or disables use of the structure ENABLE Structure pointer is enabled
pointer, indicating the start of a new AAL1
DISABLE Structure pointer is disabled
structure. This option is available only for the
bundles with a single timeslot. In the bundles,
which contain more than one timeslot, the
Default: ENABLE
pointer is always enabled and is not displayed
in the configuration menu.

Table C-9. ADD CONN USER – Command Parameters for FXS Ports Using CES (Cont.)

Pointer Parity Controls the use of pointer parity ON Pointer parity bit generation at the
transmit side, and checking of parity
bit for error detection at the receiving
side enabled.
OFF Pointer parity generation and
checking disabled.
Default: ON
LB Operation Controls activation of the periodic loopbacks ON Periodic loopback activation is
on the current interface connection. These enabled.
OFF Periodic loopback activation is
LA-110 keeps statistics for the Round-Trip
disabled.
Delay (RTD) measurements and generates
alarms upon loopback failures, according to Default: OFF
LB Fail Selects the number of non-received loopback 1–16
Threshold responses, which trigger alarm activation.
LB Fail Controls alarm generation if the number of ON Alarm is generated.
Indication non-received loopback responses exceeds
Use – Connections for FXS Ports Using DB-CES

A typical data form for an FXS port connection over AAL1 using DB-CES is shown
below. Table C-10 lists the corresponding connection parameters.
FXS Interface
- - - - - - -
Connection Type : DB-CES
Framing Mode : E1
RX Bytes Tx Bytes
- - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - -
Idle Signaling Bits
Tx Rx Pointer Pointer Parity
- - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - -
0 x x 1 – FXS Loop Start Disable On
- - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - -
off N/A N/A
Figure C-18. ADD CONN USER – FXS Ports Using DB-CES

Table C-10. ADD CONN USER – Command Parameters for FXS Ports Using DB-CES

Adaptation Layer See Table C-9
Port Index in the See Table C-9
Interface
Connection Type Specifies the type of the new connection Select DB-CES.
Framing Mode See Table C-9
VPI See Table C-9
VCI See Table C-9
Rx Bytes Per Cell See Table C-9
Tx Bytes Per Cell See Table C-9
Cont Check See Table C-2
Active See Table C-9
Idle Signaling Bits Specify the combinations of A and B signaling Select the values described by FXS Loop
bits that are used to identify the idle channel Start.
state, separately for the transmit (Tx) and the
If your application requires different
receive (Rx) direction.
settings, select Other
The LA-110 is preconfigured with the
standard signaling bit combinations
Pointer See Table C-9
Pointer Parity See Table C-9
LB Operation See Table C-9
LB Fail Threshold See Table C-9
LB Fail Indication See Table C-9
To select custom idle signaling bit values:

If you selected Other for the Idle Signaling Bits parameter, then after selecting the
desired Pointer Parity value, pressing <Enter> displays the custom idle signaling
configuration data form.
Tx Idle Rx Idle
Signaling Mask Signaling Mask
- - - - - - - - - - - - - - - -
00 01 00 01
Figure C-19. Custom Idle Signaling
1. Move the cursor to the desired field and then use the F and B keys to select
the desired value for each direction:
Signaling – select the pair of bits that are recognized as idle state
Mask – select the bit combination to be ignored when determining
whether the channel is idle or not.
2. When done, press <Enter> to end the command.

ADD CONN USER – FXS Ports over AAL2

LA-110 supports LES over AAL2 as defined in ATMF AF-VMOA-0145.000,
including support for ELCP.
When configuring a connection for an FXS port over AAL2, make sure to select an
application identifier that supports POTS interfaces.
When using AAL2, several FXS ports can share the same ATM connection: the
multiplexing is performed by means of the channel identifier (CID):
• When using an application identifier which supports ELCP, the LA-110 assigns
default CID values of 0; the actual CIDs are automatically configured by the
voice gateway as soon as an ATM connection over the selected PVC is
established.
• For other application identifiers, you can define the desired CID. The default
CID allocation is as follows:
FXS port 1: 16
FXS port 2: 17
FXS port 3: 18
FXS port 4: 19
This default allocation is in accordance with the ATMF standard, and therefore
if the voice gateway uses the same assignment, voice service can start as soon
as the ATM connection is established.
Use – Connections for FXS Ports over AAL2

A typical data form for an FXS port connection over AAL2 is shown below.
Table C-11 lists the available values of the parameters for the FXS ports.
FXS INTERFACE
- - - - - - -

CID : 0
VPI.VCI Cont Check Active

- - - - - - - - - - - - - -
0. 38 off two-way On
Figure C-20. ADD CONN USER – FXS Ports over AAL2

Table C-11. ADD CONN USER – Command Parameters for FXS Ports over AAL2

Adaptation Layer Displays the AAL currently configured on the AAL2 (to change, use the DEF
LA-110 SYSPARAMS command)
Port Index in the Specifies the port for which the new 1 to 4
Interface connection will be created Scroll using the F and B keys to display the
desired port
CID Channel identifier for the LES protocol. 0 to 255
This parameter is displayed only when using an Default: 0
application identifier without support for ELCP,
for example, LES using CAS for POTS & DSS1
for BRI (without ELCP) or LES using PSTN for
POTS & DSS1 for BRI (without ELCP) – see
the DEF SYSPARAMS command
VPI See Table C-9
VCI See Table C-9
ADD CONN USER – ISDN Ports over AAL2

LA-110 supports LES over AAL2 as defined in ATMF AF-VTOA-0145.000,
When configuring a connection for an ISDN port over AAL2, make sure to select
an application identifier that supports ISDN BRI interfaces.
When using AAL2, several ports can share the same ATM connection: the
multiplexing is performed by means of the channel identifier (CID):
• When using an application identifier which supports ELCP, the LA-110 assigns
default CID values of 0; the actual CIDs are automatically configured by the
voice gateway as soon as an ATM connection over the selected PVC is
established.
• For other application identifiers, you can define the desired CID. The default
CID allocation is given in Table C-12.
Table C-12. Default (Plug-&-Play) CID Assignment for ISDN Ports
ISDN Port CID for ISDN CID for ISDN CID for ISDN
B Channel 1 B Channel 2 D Channel
Port 1 128 160 161
Port 2 129 162 163
Port 3 130 164 165
Port 4 131 166 167
This default allocation is in accordance with the ATMF standard, and therefore
if the voice gateway uses the same assignment, ISDN service can start as soon
as the ATM connection is established.

Use – Connections for ISDN Ports over AAL2

A typical data form for an ISDN port connection over AAL2 is shown below.
Table C-13 lists the available values of the parameters for the ISDN ports.
ISDN INTERFACE
Adaptation Layer: AAL2
Port Index in the Interface: 1
0.0 off two-way On
ISDN CHANNELS
D Channel:
CID: 0
B1 Channel:
CID: 0
B2 Channel:
CID: 0
Figure C-21. ADD CONN USER for ISDN Ports over AAL2
After the configuration is successfully completed, you will see a confirmation

screen that details each of the channels carried by the selected port.
D Channel :
B1 Channel :
B2 Channel :
Figure C-22. ADD CONN USER for ISDN Ports over AAL2 – Successful
Table C-13. ADD CONN USER – Command Parameters for ISDN Ports over AAL2

Adaptation Layer Displays the AAL currently configured on the AAL2 (to change, use the DEF SYSPARAMS
LA-110 command)
Port Index in the Specifies the ISDN port for which the new The allowed range is 1 to 4. Scroll using the
Interface connection will be created. F and B keys to display the desired port
Your selection actually creates three separate
connections, one for each of the three
channels (B1, B2 and D) carried by the
selected port. Each connection uses a
different CID
VPI See Table C-9

Table C-13. ADD CONN USER – Command Parameters for ISDN Ports over AAL2 (Cont.)

VCI See Table C-9
D Channel CID D channel identifier for the LES protocol. 0 to 235
This parameter is displayed only when using an Default: 0
application identifier without support for ELCP,
for example, LES using CAS for POTS & DSS1
for BRI (without ELCP) or LES using PSTN for
POTS & DSS1 for BRI (without ELCP) – see
the DEF SYSPARAMS command
B1 Channel CID Same as above for the B1 channel
B2 Channel CID Same as above for the B2 channel
ADD CONN USER – E1 Port over AAL1
Overview
When using AAL1, the E1 port can be operated in three framing modes (selected
by means of the DEF USER command):
• Unframed: this mode is used to transport the 2048 kbps bit stream received
by the E1 port, transparently, over the ATM network. Therefore, in this mode
only a single connection can be set up for the E1 port, and any attempt to add
another connection is rejected with a No more VCCs for new connections
message.
• G732S framing: this mode is used for applications using channel-associated
signaling. In this mode, each timeslot carries an independent voice channel,
and the signaling information of all the channels is multiplexed in timeslot 16
(see details in Appendix F). When using G732S framing, the connections are
actually defined for timeslot bundles (see the ADD BUNDLE command for
details).
The configuration procedure depends on the connection type selected by the
user:
CES. In this mode, each timeslot bundle has its own ATM connection. The
payload is transported using the ATM Circuit Emulation Service (CES)
Version 2.0 defined in AF-VTOA-0078.000. The transmission is made in
the structured CES mode: in this mode, each bundle is transported as an
independent n×64 kbps stream (where n is the number of timeslots in the
bundle), together with its signaling information. However, the user can also
disable the transport of the signaling information of the bundle, for
example, when the bundle actually carries a data stream in a fractional E1
application.

DB-CES. This mode is a variation of CES relevant for voice channels that
has been defined in ATMF specification AF-VTOA-0085.000. DB-CES
enables better utilization of available uplink bandwidth by using the voice
channel activity information carried by the four signaling bits (A, B, C, D) of
the individual timeslots in each bundle to request uplink bandwidth when
the channel carried by a timeslot is active (off-hook), and release the
bandwidth when the channel is idle (on-hook). The cell structure depends
on the framing mode selected by the user (E1, T1 using SF framing or T1
using ESF framing).
Transparent. This mode uses the unstructured CES mode defined in ATMF
specification AF-VTOA-0078.000. In this mode, the LA-110 handles each
bundle as a n×64 kbps bit stream which is transparently transported over an
ATM connection.
• G732N framing: this mode is used for applications that do not use channel-
associated signaling. However, the configuration options are similar to those
for the G732S framing.
The following sections describe the connection configuration options available for
the unframed and framed (G732S and G732N) modes when using AAL1.
Use – Connections for E1 Port in Unframed Mode

A typical data form for an E1 port connection, when the port is configured for the
unframed mode, is shown below. The index number assigned to the connection,
displayed at the top of the data form, is always 1.
Table C-14 lists the connection parameters for the E1 port in the unframed mode.
Adding connection number 1 to the USER side :

------- -------- -------- ---------- ----------
0 25 47 47 off-two way Unstructured
Pointer
Parity Active
------- -------
N/A on

- - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - -
off N/A N/A
Figure C-23. ADD CONN USER for E1 Port in Unframed Mode
Table C-14. ADD CONN USER – Command Parameters for E1 Port in Unframed Mode

VPI See Table C-9
VCI See Table C-9

Table C-14. ADD CONN USER – Command Parameters for E1 Port in Unframed Mode (Cont.)

Connection Type Read-only UNSTRUCTURED – Use of unstructured
service as defined in ATMF document
AF-VTOA-0078.000.
Pointer Parity When using the UNSTRUCTURED
connection type, this field displays N/A and
cannot be changed
LB Operation Controls activation of the periodic loopbacks ON Periodic loopback activation is
on the current interface connection. These enabled.
LA-110 keeps statistics for the Round-Trip
disabled.
Delay (RTD) measurements and generates
alarms upon loopback failures, according to Default: OFF
LB Fail Threshold Selects the number of non-received loopback 1–16
responses, which trigger alarm activation.
LB Fail Indication Controls alarm generation if the number of ON Alarm is generated.
non-received loopback responses exceeds
Use – Connections for E1 Port in Framed Mode Using CES

A typical data form for an E1 port connection over AAL1 using CES, when the port
is configured for a framed mode (G732S or G732N), is shown below.
Table C-15 lists the connection parameters for the E1 port in the framed mode
using CES.


- - – - - - - - - - - - -
Bundle Index : 1
Rx Bytes Tx Bytes
- - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - -
Pointer : Enable
Pointer Parity : On
Signaling : No

- - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - -
off N/A N/A
Figure C-24. ADD CONN USER for E1 Port in Framed Mode Using CES
Table C-15. ADD CONN USER – Command Parameters for E1 Port in Framed Mode Using CES

Adaptation Layer Displays the AAL currently configured on the AAL1 (to change, use the DEF SYSPARAMS
LA-110 command)
Bundle Index Select the desired bundle. The allowed range is 1 to 31, however you
The bundle number also serves as the can select only existing bundles.
connection index number Use the DSP BUNDLE command to find
the index numbers of the currently defined
bundles.
Default: 1
Connection Type Specifies the type of the new connection Select CES
Default: CES
VPI See Table C-9 Default: 1
VCI See Table C-9 Default: 32
Rx Bytes Per Cell See Table C-9 Default: 47
Tx Bytes Per Cell See Table C-9 Default: 47
Cont Check See Table C-2 Default: off-two way
Active See Table C-9 Default: On
Pointer See Table C-9 Default: Enable
Pointer Parity Controls the use of parity for the AAL1 ON Use of parity enabled
structure pointer. OFF Use of parity disabled, for
Parity is used to detect errors in the AAL1 cell compatibility with equipment that
pointer does not support pointer parity
checking
Default: ON

Table C-15. ADD CONN USER – Command Parameters for E1 Port in Framed Mode Using CES (Cont.)

Signaling Controls the transport of the signaling Yes Signaling information transported
information associated with the timeslots of together with the timeslot payload.
the selected bundle No Signaling information ignored.
Default: No
Use – Connections for E1 Port in Framed Mode Using DB-CES

A typical data form for an E1 port connection over AAL1 using DB-CES, when the
port is configured for a framed mode (G732S or G732N), is shown below.
using DB-CES.
- - - - - - - - - - - - -
Bundle Index : 1
Connection Type : DB-CES
Rx Bytes Tx Bytes
- - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - -
Idle Signaling Bits
Tx Rx Pointer Parity
- - - - - - - - - - - - -
0 x x 1 – FXS Loop Start On

- - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - -
off N/A N/A
Figure C-25. ADD CONN USER for E1 Port in Framed Mode Using DB-CES
Table C-16. ADD CONN USER – Command Parameters for E1 Port in Framed Mode Using DB-CES

Adaptation Layer Displays the AAL currently configured on AAL1 (to change, use the DEF
Bundle Index See Table C-15
Connection Type Specifies the type of the new connection Select DB-CES
VPI See Table C-9

Table C-16. ADD CONN USER – Command Parameters for E1 Port in Framed Mode Using DB-CES
(Cont.)

VCI See Table C-9
Idle Signaling Bits Specify the combinations of the signaling bits LA-110 is preconfigured with the
(A and B) that are used to identify the idle following signaling bit combinations:
channel state, separately for the transmit (Tx) Tx Rx Application
and the receive (Rx) direction
0x 0x E&M interface, PLAR
x1 0x FXO interface, loop start
0x x1 FXS interface, loop start
1x 01 FXO interface, ground start
01 1x FXS interface, ground start
10 10 R2 signaling protocol
If your application requires different
settings, select Other and refer to the
following procedure.
Default: E&M/PLAR
Pointer Parity See Table C-15
To select custom idle signaling bit values:

If you selected Other for the Idle Signaling Bits parameter, then after selecting the
desired Pointer Parity value, pressing <Enter> displays the custom idle signaling
configuration data form.
Tx Idle Rx Idle
Signaling Mask Signaling Mask
- - - - - - - - - - - - - - - -
00 01 00 01
Figure C-26. Idle Signaling
1. Move the cursor to the desired field and then use the F and B keys to select
the desired value for each direction:
Signaling – select the pair of bits that are recognized as idle state
Mask – select the bit combination to be ignored when determining
whether the channel is idle or not.

Use – Connections for E1 Port in Framed Mode Using the

Transparent Mode
A typical data form for an E1 port connection over AAL1 using the Transparent
mode, when the port is configured for a framed mode (G732S or G732N), is
shown below.
using the TRANSPARENT mode.
- - - - - - - - - - - - -
Bundle Index : 1
Connection Type : TRANSPARENT
RX Bytes Tx Bytes
- - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - -

- - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - -
off N/A N/A
Figure C-27. ADD CONN USER for E1 Port in Framed Mode Using Transparent Mode
Table C-17. ADD CONN USER – Command Parameters for E1 Port in Framed Mode Using the
Transparent Mode

Adaptation Layer Displays the AAL currently configured on the AAL1 (to change, use the DEF
Connection Type Specifies the type of the new connection Select TRANSPARENT
VPI See Table C-9
VCI See Table C-9

ADD CONN USER – E1 Port over AAL2

LA-110 supports LES over AAL2 as defined in ATMF AF-VTOA-0145.000,
When configuring a connection for an E1 port over AAL2, it is necessary to select
the application identifier LES using CAS for POTS & DSS1 for BRI (without
ELCP). Note that in this case, the E1 port framing mode must be configured (by
means of the DEF USER command) to use the G732S framing mode.
The connections are actually defined for timeslot bundles (see the ADD BUNDLE
command for details), however when using AAL2 each bundle consists of a single
timeslot.
When using AAL2, several bundles can share the same ATM connection: the
multiplexing is performed by means of the channel identifier (CID).
Use – Connections for E1 Port over AAL2

A typical data form for an E1 port connection over AAL1 using the TRANSPARENT
mode, when the port is configured for a framed mode (G732S or G732N), is
shown below.
Table C-18 lists the connection parameters for the E1 port over AAL2.
E1 INTERFACE – User Side
- - - - - - - - - - - - -
Bundle Index: 1
CID: 16
0.22 off two-way On
OnHook OffHook Mask
0101 1111 1111
Figure C-28. ADD CONN USER for E1 Port over AAL2
Table C-18. ADD CONN USER – Command Parameters for E1 Port over AAL2

Adaptation Layer Displays the AAL currently configured on LA-110 AAL2 (to change, use the DEF
SYSPARAMS command)
CID Channel identifier used by the LES protocol 16 to 235
Default: 0
VPI See Table C-9
VCI See Table C-9

Table C-18. ADD CONN USER – Command Parameters for E1 Port over AAL2 (Cont.)

OnHook Indicates the combination of ABCD signaling bits 0000 to 1111
used for indicating the on-hook state of the Default: 0101
subscriber’s equipment for the corresponding
bundle
OffHook Indicates the combination of ABCD signaling bits 0000 to 1111
used for indicating the off-hook state of the Default: 1111
subscriber’s equipment for the corresponding
bundle
Mask Used to indicate the bits to be considered when 0 indicates that the corresponding
evaluating a combination of ABCD signaling bits bit position is to be ignored.
1 indicates that the corresponding
bit position is to be taken into
consideration.
0000 to 1111
Default: 1111
ADD DHCP
Purpose
Add a DHCP address pool for the LA-110 IP router, when configured to serve as a
DHCP server.
One DHCP address pool can be set up. Use the DEL DHCP command before
adding a new one. Use the DSP DHCP command to display information on the
DHCP address pool.
Note The LA-110 router supports a single DHCP address pool on the LAN port.
Therefore, when two LAN interfaces are configured on the LAN port (by means of
the ADD IP INTERFACE command), and are defined in different IP nets, the DHCP
address pool must be defined in only one of the nets.
The ADD DHCP command is accepted only when the LAN port is configured, by
means of the DEF LAN command, to operate in the Ethernet router mode, and the
LA-110 is configured, by means of the DEF SYSPARAMS command, to operate as a
DHCP server.
Syntax
ADD DHCP
Use
1. To define a new DHCP address pool, type:
ADD DHCP<Enter>
new DHCP address pool (this is always the first free index), followed by the
first section of the address pool configuration form. This section is used to
define the range of IP addresses.

2. After entering the prescribed values for the parameters in the first section,
press <Enter> to continue to the next section.
3. Continue until all the necessary parameters have been defined. A complete
data form, as seen after all the parameters have been defined, is shown below.
Refer to Table C-19 for a description of the parameters appearing in this
section.
Adding DHCP Pool number 1
Lowest IP Highest IP Mask
198.168.255.1 198.168.254.254
Default Gateway
192.168.254.254
Primary DNS Secondary DNS
192.168.254.254 162.222.255.255
Lease Time (in minutes): 600
Figure C-29. Add DHCP
4. Press <Enter>.
The command is ended, and its result is displayed: either The DHCP pool
Table C-19. ADD DHCP Command Parameters

Lowest IP Specify the lowest IP address that can be assigned to Enter the desired IP address, in the
IP hosts connected to the LA-110 LAN port dotted-quad format.
Default: 0.0.0.0
Highest IP Specify the highest IP address that can be assigned Enter the desired IP address, in the
to IP hosts connected to the LA-110 LAN port. dotted-quad format.
Make sure the specified range is correct, that is, it is Default: 0.0.0.0
within the same subnet as the lowest IP address
Mask Specify the IP subnet mask address to be used to Enter the desired IP address, in the
identify addresses in the specified range. dotted-quad format.
Make sure the subnet mask is compatible with the Default: 0.0.0.0
specified IP address range, and that it consists of
consecutive “1”
Default Gateway Specify the IP address of the default gateway to be Enter the desired IP address, in the
used to reach IP addresses not within the subnet of dotted-quad format.
the LAN port.
Default: 0.0.0.0
Make sure that the gateway IP address has the same
IP net part as the IP addresses in the specified range

Table C-19. ADD DHCP Command Parameters (Cont.)

Primary DNS Specify the IP address of the primary DNS server. Enter the desired IP address, in the
dotted-quad format.
This field is optional
Default: 0.0.0.0
Secondary DNS Specify the IP address of the secondary DNS server. Enter the desired IP address, in the
dotted-quad format.
This field is optional
Default: 0.0.0.0
Lease Time Specify the lease time for the IP addresses assigned Up to 1000 minutes.
by the LA-110 DHCP server
Default: 600
ADD FW
Purpose
The user can set a firewall on each one of the router interfaces (WAN, LAN). Each
firewall holds its own rules and cache table. When activated, the firewall will block
all traffic coming from the public network into the private unless it is on the cache.
Use
1. To add a firewall, type:
ADD FW<Enter>
The firewall screen is displayed (see Figure C-30).
2. Add a firewall rule.
3. Continue with the rule configuration (see Table C-20).

LA110>add fw
Index : 1
IP Interface Direction FTP Option Printing Name

------------ --------- ---------- -------- ----
WAN Inbound Enable Disable USER_SPECIFIC
Add Rule? (Y/N) :y
Rule Index : 1
Source IP Destination IP
Low High Low High
--- ---- --- ----
1.1.1.1 255.255.255.255 2.2.2.2 255.255.255.255
IP Protocol : TCP
Source Port Destination Port

Low High Low High
--- ---- --- ----
55 65535 66 65535
Add Rule? (Y/N) :n
Do you want to save the Firewall? (Y/N) :y
Firewall entry was added successfully.
Figure C-30. ADD FW

Table C-20. ADD FIREWALL Parameters

Index Index of firewall 1 to 9 (read-only)
IP Interface 0 to 9 (LAN is for LAN1 AND LAN2) (only defined interfaces)
Default: LAN
Direction Inbound, Outbound
Default: Inbound
FTP Option Enable, Disable
Default: Enable
Printing Option Enable, Disable
Default: Enable
Name Up to 30 characters
Default: Null string
Rule Index 1 to 20
Default: 1
Source IP Low Port Values 0 to 65535
Default: 0
Source IP High Port Values 0 to 65535
Default: 65535
Destination IP Port Values 0 to 65535
Low
Default: 0
Destination IP Port Values 0 to 65535
High
Default: 65535
IP Protocol TCP, UDP, ICMP, Other
Default: TCP
Protocol Number Number of protocol, if 1–255 (excluding 1, 6, 17)
Other is selected for the Default: 255
IP Protocol
Source Port Low Port values, relevant only 0 to 65535
for TCP and UDP
Default: 0
Source Port High Port values, relevant only 0 to 65535
for TCP and UDP
Default: 65535
Destination Port Port values, relevant only 0 to 65535
Low for TCP and UDP
Default: 0
Destination Port Port values, relevant only 0 to 65535
High for TCP and UDP
Default: 65535

ADD IP INTERFACE
Purpose
Define a new IP interface for the LA-110 IP router. The ADD IP INTERFACE
command is accepted only when the LAN port is configured, by means of the DEF
LAN command, to operate in the Ethernet router mode.
Three types of IP interfaces can be defined:
• Host interface: the host interface is a numbered interface. A host interface
must always be defined when an unnumbered WAN interface has been
defined. However, a host interface can be defined even when all the WAN
interfaces are numbered.
The host interface is intended for management purposes and for the exchange
of RIP and ping messages through an unnumbered interface.
• LAN interface: one or two interfaces located on the physical LAN port. A LAN
interface is always a numbered interface (that is, it is always assigned an IP
address). The LAN interfaces must be defined in different IP subnets. Each LAN
interface can be independently configured, and therefore can be used for
different applications.
In addition, the user can select whether to enable Routing IP Protocols (RIP I,
RIP II or both) on each LAN interface separately
• WAN interface: up to 16 interfaces located on the ATM uplink, which serve as
logical WAN ports for the IP router. Each WAN interface has its own ATM
connection, and therefore its ATM connection parameters can be
independently configured. The user can select whether to enable Routing IP
Protocols (RIP I, RIP II or both) on each WAN interface separately.
A WAN interface can be either a numbered or unnumbered interface. If one
or more of the WAN interfaces are unnumbered, it is necessary to define a
host interface.
The total number of IP interfaces that can be set up is 11: if the total number is
exceeded, you must delete an existing interface, using the DEL IP INTERFACE
Each router interface is automatically assigned an index number in the range of 1
router interface. You can use the DSP IP INTERFACE command to display
information on the existing router interfaces.
Syntax
ADD IP INTERFACE or ADD IP IF

1. To define a new IP interface, type:
ADD IP INTERFACE<Enter> or ADD IP IF<Enter>
new IP interface (this is always the first free index), followed by the field
used to select the type of IP interface.

2. Use the F and B keys to select the type of interface, and then press <Enter>.
At this stage, you will see the first section of the IP interface configuration
form.
The command is ended, and its result is displayed: either The interface was
added successfully, or a message that explains the reason for rejecting your
command.
The following sections provide configuration procedures for each IP interface type.
Use – Host IP Interface

A typical configuration data form for the host IP interface is shown below. The
screen includes only two fields:
• IP – used to enter the desired IP address. Note that the subnet mask restricts
the last digits of the IP address to odd digits.
• Mask – displays the IP subnet mask used for the host IP address. This mask
cannot be changed, and is used for your information.
LA110>ADD IP IF
Attached : HOST
IP Mask
---- -------
192.168.254.253 255.255.255.252
Figure C-31. ADD IP IF – Host
Use – LAN IP Interface

A typical screen for an IP interface defined on the LA-110 LAN physical interface is
shown below. Refer to Table C-21 for a description of the command parameters
appearing in this screen.
Note
While working with PPPoA, there is a mode called Subnet Mask Negotiation. When
using this mode, the LAN IP interface can be configured without IP addresses. The
LAN address and mask are established from the remote server, using the PPP. The
LAN interface will not be activated until an IP address is allocated via the PPP.

LA110>ADD IP IF
Attached : LAN
IP Mask
---- ----
0.0.0.0 0.0.0.0

---------- ------- ---
5 min 1 sec None
DHCP Relay: Disable
Figure C-32. ADD IP INTERFACE for LAN Interfaces
Table C-21. ADD IP INTERFACE – Command Parameters for LAN Interfaces

Attached HOST, LAN
IP Specify the IP address of the new IP Enter the desired IP address, using the
interface dotted-quad format.
Default: 0.0.0.0.
Mask Specify the IP subnet mask Enter the desired IP subnet mask, using
the dotted-quad format.
Default: 0.0.0.0 (LAN),
255.255.255.252 (Host)
Aging Time Select the aging interval for learned routing The allowed range is 5 to 10080 minutes.
information. Default: 5 min
If the information for a given destination is
not refreshed before the selected interval
expires, that information is deleted from the
routing table
Timeout Select the time-out interval of the Address The allowed range is 1 to 10 sec.
Resolution Protocol (ARP) Default: 1 sec
RIP Select the routing protocol to be used by NONE No routing protocol is used;
the IP router toward this IP interface only static routing is used. If no
static routes are defined, no
routing is possible toward this
IP interface.
RIP1 Support for RIP1 protocol, in
addition to static routing.
RIP2 Support for RIP2 protocol, in
addition to static routing.
RIP 1&2 Support for both RIP1 and RIP2
protocols, in addition to static
routing.
Default: NONE

Table C-21. ADD IP INTERFACE – Command Parameters for LAN Interfaces (Cont.)

DHCP Relay Enables/disables the DHCP relay function ENABLE DHCP relay function enabled.
for this LAN interface In this case, any DHCP requests
received through this interface
are directed to the
user-specified DHCP server,
even if the LA-110 DHCP server
function (controlled by the DEF
SYSPARAMS command) is
enabled.
See below the procedure used
to define a user-specified DHCP
server.
DISABLE DHCP relay function enabled.
In this state, DHCP requests are
directed to the LA-110 DHCP
server (if enabled).
Default: DISABLE
To define the DHCP server for the LAN IP interface:

• If you selected ENABLE for the DHCP Relay parameter, then after pressing
<Enter> you will see the DHCP server configuration data form.
DHCP Server IP Address Max Hop Count

---------------------- -------------
2 .2 .2 .9 16
Figure C-33. DHCP server for the LAN IP Interface
Use the following procedure:

1. In the DHCP Server IP Address field, enter the prescribed IP address, using
2. In the Max Hop Count field, enter the maximum number of hops that a
DHCP request packet sent can traverse before being discarded.
The allowed range is 1 to 16. Assigning a value of 1 means that a packet can
reach only the specified next port.
Use – WAN IP Interface

Typical configuration data forms for WAN IP interfaces are shown below.
The screen fields depend on two factors: the encapsulation method and the ATM
service category:
• A typical screen, as seen when selecting encapsulation in accordance with
RFC1483 (now replaced by RFC2684), and the UBR ATM service category, is
shown below:

LA110>ADD IP IF
Attached : WAN
IP Mask RIP
---- ---- ---
3 .3 .4 .5 255.255.0 .0 None
Encapsulation : RFC 1483

------- -------- ---------- ------
PCR
10867

off N/A N/A
Figure C-34. DHCP Server for the WAN IP Interface
• A typical screen, as seen when selecting PPP encapsulation with VC

multiplexing in accordance with RFC2364, and the VBR ATM service category,
is shown below (the screen for PPP encapsulation with LLC multiplexing is
similar, except that PPP LLC MUXED appears in the Encapsulation field).

LA110>ADD IP IF
Attached : WAN
IP Mask RIP
---- ---- --
3 .4 .5 .7 255.255.0 .0 RIP 1&2
Encapsulation : PPP VC MUXED
Username : test
Password : ******
Confirm Password : ******

------- -------- ---------- ------
2 255 VBR off-two way on
MBS PCR SCR
1 5453 10

off N/A N/A
Figure C-35. PPP Encapsulation with VC Multiplexing

LA110> ADD IP IF
Attached : WAN
IP Mask RIP
---- ------- -----
0 .0 .0 .0 0 .0 .0 .0 None
Encapsulation : PPP LLC MUXED
Username : test
Password : ****
Confirm Password : ****
Subnet Mask Negotiation

--------------------------
Enable, linked to LAN 1

------- --------- -------------- -------
2 32 UBR+ off-two way on

------------ ----------------- -------------------
off N/A N/A
The interface was added successfully.
Figure C-36. ADD IP IF – WAN with PPP LLC MUXED
Refer to Table C-22 for a description of the command parameters appearing in the
screens.
Table C-22. ADD IP INTERFACE – Command Parameters for WAN Interfaces

IP Specify the IP address of the IP interface Enter the desired IP address, using the
dotted-quad format.
Default: 0.0.0.0.
Mask Specify the IP subnet mask Enter the desired IP subnet mask, using
Default: 0.0.0.0
RIP See Table C-21

Table C-22. Command Parameters for WAN Interfaces (Cont.)

Encapsulation Select the encapsulation method for the IP RFC-1483 – The traffic is encapsulated in
traffic transferred through this interface accordance with RFC1483.
PPP VC MUXED – The traffic is
transferred using PPP over AAL5 in
accordance with RFC2364, using VC
multiplexing.
PPP LLC MUXED – The traffic is
transferred using PPP over AAL5 in
accordance with RFC2364, using LLC
multiplexing.
Default: RFC-1483
User Name Define the user name to be used for PPP Enter the prescribed alphanumeric string
traffic. (up to 30 characters). Pay attention to
case.
This field is displayed only when using PPP
VC MUXED or PPP LLC MUXED Default: Empty string
encapsulation
Password Define the password to be used for PPP Enter the prescribed alphanumeric string
traffic. (up to 30 characters). Pay attention to
case.
VC MUXED or PPP LLC MUXED The typed characters are not displayed
encapsulation (an asterisk is displayed for each typed
character).
Default: Empty string
Confirm Password Used to confirm the password enter in the Enter again the alphanumeric string of the
Password field. password.
This field is displayed only when using PPP The typed characters are not displayed
VC MUXED or PPP LLC MUXED (an asterisk is displayed for each typed
encapsulation character).
Default: Empty string
Link Active Time Specify the maximum time, in seconds, the 2 to 900 seconds.
link with the PPP server is kept alive when
Default: 2
no traffic is detected.
VC MUXED or PPP LLC MUXED
encapsulation.
Subnet Mask Enable, Disable
Negotiation
VPI Specifies the ATM Virtual Path Identifier to 0 to 31
be used by the ATM connection used by
Default: 0
the new IP interface


VCI Specifies the ATM Virtual Circuit Identifier 0 to 255
to be used by the ATM connection used
Default: 0
by the new IP interface.
Note: In general, the pair VPI.VCI uniquely
identifies an ATM connection, therefore
you cannot specify a VPI.VCI pair already
used by another connection, even if the
other connection is on another LA-110
port. The VPI.VCI pair 0.0 is reserved.
Bit-rate Specifies the ATM service category to be UBR Unspecified bit rate service,
used to handle the traffic transferred intended for non-real-time
through this new bridge interface applications which do not require
tightly constrained delay and
delay variation, e.g., data
communications applications
such as file transfer or e-mail.
UBR+ Same as UBR, except that it
enables the user to specify a
minimum desired cell rate.
VBR Variable bit rate service, intended
for applications that require
constraints on the maximum cell
transfer delay and delay variation,
such as video or voice.
CBR Constant bit rate service,
intended for real-time
applications that require constant
bandwidth and tightly constrained
delay and delay variation, for
example, synchronous data
streams.
Default: UBR
new IP interface to perform continuity Table C-2.
Active Selects the initial state of the new IP ON The new IP interface is active and
interface (ATM network connection). can carry traffic.
At any time, you can use the ACTIVATE IP OFF The new IP interface cannot carry
INTERFACE command to change the traffic, but its configuration
status parameters are stored in the
LA-110 database.
Default: ON


LB Operation Controls activation of the periodic ON Periodic loopback activation is
loopbacks on the current interface enabled.
every 5 seconds. LA-110 keeps statistics
disabled.
for the Round-Trip Delay (RTD)
measurements and generates alarms upon Default: OFF
Notes: Periodic loopbacks can be
activated together with continuity checks.
LB Fail Threshold Selects the number of non-received 1–16
loopback responses, which trigger alarm
activation.
LB Fail Indication Controls alarm generation if the number ON Alarm is generated.
of non-received loopback responses
ADD NAT
Purpose
Add a new network address translation (NAT) definition for a LAN or WAN port of
the IP router (it is not possible to define NAT translations for the host port).
The ADD NAT command is accepted only when the LA-110 LAN port is
configured as router (see DEF LAN command), and no routing protocol is defined.
LA-110 can simultaneously perform translations for up to 60 hosts and up to 300
sessions.
You may define up to 20 NAT definitions. If this number is exceeded, you must
delete an existing NAT, using the DEL NAT command, before a new one can be
added.
Each NAT definition is automatically assigned an index number in the range of
1 to 20; this number is then used in all the commands which refer to a specific
NAT. You can use the DSP NAT command to see the parameters of the currently
defined NAT definitions.
Syntax
ADD NAT

1. To add a new network address translation, type:
ADD NAT<Enter>
You will see the first line of the NAT data form, used to select the NAT
type. Press F or B to display the desired type, and then press <Enter>.

2. The second line of the NAT data form is used to select the number of the
interface on which the new NAT will be defined. Press F or B to display the
desired type, and then press <Enter>.
3. After making these selections, you must enter the real and virtual IP addresses
and the associated IP subnet masks, in accordance with the NAT type selected
in Step 2 above.
4. After entering the required addresses, press <Enter> to end the command.
A typical screen, as seen after all the selections have been made, is shown below.
NAT Type : Dynamic
Interface : 3
Real IP ___ Real Mask______

172.172.20.100 255.255.255.240

10.1020.100 255.255.255.0
Figure C-37. ADD NAT
The command parameters are explained in Table C-23. Specific instructions for
each NAT type are given in the following sections.
Table C-23. ADD NAT Command Parameters

NAT Type Specify the NAT type DYNAMIC – Dynamic (temporary) translation
of virtual IP addresses to real IP addresses, in
accordance with the usage requirements
received from the hosts using virtual IP
addresses. This type is similar to the basic
traditional NAT, as described in RFC2663 and
RFC3022.
STATIC – Permanent translation of a specific
virtual IP address to a specific real IP address.
This is a form of bidirectional NAT, as
described in RFC2663.
TRANSPARENT – No translation: the real and
virtual IP addresses are identical. This is a form
of bidirectional NAT, as described in RFC2663.
SINGLE – Dynamic allocation of a single IP
address in accordance with usage requirements
received from the virtual IP addresses, using
transport identifiers (port numbers) for
multiplexing. This type is similar to NAPT, a
form of traditional NAT, as described in
RFC2663 and RFC3022.
Default: DYNAMIC

Table C-23. ADD NAT Command Parameters (Cont.)

INTERFACE Specify the number of the IP router 1 to 11
interface on which the new NAT is Do not select the number corresponding to the
defined. host port.
When the selected interface is defined Default: 1
on the LAN port:
• Real IP addresses are located on the
LAN side
• Virtual addresses are located on the
WAN side.
When the selected interface is defined
on the WAN port:
• Real IP addresses are located on the
WAN side
• Virtual addresses are located on the
LAN side.
REAL IP Specify the IP address(es) to which a Enter the desired IP address in the dotted-quad
virtual IP address will be translated. format.
The real IP address may be a single IP Default:
address or a group of addresses defined SINGLE NAT Type: 255.255.255.255
by means of the real IP subnet mask, in Other NAT types: 0.0.0.0
accordance with the NAT type (see
below)
REAL MASK Specify the IP subnet mask associated Enter the desired IP subnet mask, in the
with the real IP address(es) dotted-quad format.
Default: 0.0.0.0
VIRTUAL IP Specify the virtual IP address(es) to be Enter the desired IP address in the dotted-quad
translated. format.
The virtual IP address may be a single IP Default: 0.0.0.0
address or a group of addresses defined
by means of the virtual IP subnet mask,
in accordance with the NAT type (see
below)
VIRTUAL MASK Specify the IP subnet mask associated Enter the desired IP subnet mask in the
with the virtual IP address(es) dotted-quad format.
Default: 0.0.0.0
Use – DYNAMIC NAT Type

When using the DYNAMIC NAT type, any virtual IP address can be translated to
any real IP address. Any specific translation remains in force as long as the host
using the virtual IP address is engaged in a session.
Therefore, for the DYNAMIC NAT type, it is necessary to enter two pairs of IP
address and associated subnet: one pair specifies the allowed range of real IP
addresses and the other pair specifies the allowed range of virtual IP addresses.

Use – STATIC NAT Type

When using the STATIC NAT type, each virtual IP address in the specified virtual
range is translated to a real IP address in the specified real range. Any specific
translation remains in force as long as the host using the virtual IP address is
engaged in a session.
Therefore, for the STATIC NAT type, it is necessary to enter only three parameters:
• Real IP address and the associated subnet
• Virtual IP address. Since there must be a one-to-one correspondence between
real IP addresses and virtual IP addresses, the virtual subnet mask is
automatically set to the value entered for the real IP subnet, and cannot be
changed.
Use – SINGLE NAT Type

When using the SINGLE NAT type, each virtual IP address in the specified virtual
range is translated to the same real IP address (this is a many-to-one translation).
However, the different virtual addresses are assigned different transport identifiers
(port numbers). Any specific translation remains in force as long as the host using
the virtual IP address is engaged in a session.
Therefore, for the SINGLE NAT type, it is necessary to enter only three parameters:
• Virtual IP address and associated subnet, which defines the range of IP
addresses that may be translated.
• Real IP address. Since there is only one real IP address, the real subnet mask is
automatically set to 255.255.255.255 and cannot be changed.
Use – TRANSPARENT NAT Type

When using the TRANSPARENT NAT type, no translation is made: each IP address
in the specified virtual IP address range is always translated to same IP address on
the “real” side.
Therefore, for the TRANSPARENT NAT type, it is necessary to enter only two
parameters:
• Real and virtual IP address
• Real and virtual subnet mask.
A typical screen for the TRANSPARENT NAT type, as seen after all the selections
have been made, is shown below.
NAT Type : Transparent
Interface : LAN
Real and Virtual IP Real and Virtual Mask_

177.172.20.120 255.255.255.240
Figure C-38. Transparent NAT

ADD NMS
Purpose
Define the IP address of a new network management station (NMS), and the
enterprise-specific traps that will be sent to the new network management station.
The maximum number of network management stations is 10. If this number is
exceeded, you must delete an existing station, using the DEL NMS command,
before a new one can be added.
Each NMS is automatically assigned an index number in the range of 1 to 10: this
number is then used in all the commands which refer to a specific NMS. You can
use the DSP NMS command to see the parameters of the currently defined
network management stations.
When you allow sending general and alarm traps to a network manager, you can
mask or unmask each trap (general or interface-specific) via menu-driven interface
(see Masking Individual Alarms below). This feature is not available for the
command line interface.
Syntax
ADD NMS
Use
1. To add a new NMS, type:
ADD NMS<Enter>
new NMS (this is always the first free index), followed by the NMS
configuration form.
Refer to Table C-24 for a description of the command parameters.
Adding NMS number 1
IP Address Mask All Alarm Traps

- - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - -
10.12.14.16 unmask manual
Figure C-39. Add NMS
2. Select the desired values, and then press <Enter> to execute.

Table C-24. ADD NMS Command Parameters

IP Address Define the IP address of the new NMS Enter the desired IP address, in the
dotted-quad format.
Default: 0.0.0.0
Mask All Define whether to mask or unmask UNMASK The SNMP agent of LA-110
general and alarm traps sends general and alarm traps
to this NMS
MASK The SNMP agent of LA-110
does not send general and
alarm traps to this NMS
Default: UNMASK
Alarm Traps Select whether to send alarm traps to NONE MASKED The SNMP agent of
this NMS when an alarm condition LA-110 sends all alarm
occurs traps to this NMS
ALL MASKED The SNMP agent of
LA-110 does not send
alarm traps to this
NMS
MANUAL The SNMP agent of
LA-110 sends only
alarm traps, which
were unmasked by the
user to this NMS
Default: MANUAL
Masking Individual Alarms

Individual general and alarm traps can be masked only via the menu-driven
interface.
To mask individual general traps:
1. Start the menu-driven management session.
2. From the Manager List menu (Configuration > System > Management >
SNMP > Manager List), select Mask All and set it to Unmask.
Two additional lines (General Traps Mask and Alarm Traps Mask) appear in
the Manager List menu.
3. Select General Traps Mask.
The General Traps Mask menu is displayed (see Figure C-40).
4. From the General Traps Mask menu, select a trap, which you intend to mask
or unmask.
The parameter value toggles between Mask and Unmask.

LA-110
Configuration>System>Management>SNMP>Manager List>General Traps Mask
1. Cold Start (Unmask)

2. Agent Status Changed (Unmask)
3. TFTP Status Changed (Unmask)
4. Authentication Failure (Unmask)
5. Link Up/Down (Unmask)
>
ESC-prev.menu; !-main menu; &-exit; @-debug 1 user(s)
Figure C-40. General Traps Mask Menu
To mask individual interface-specific alarm traps:

1. Start the menu-driven management session.
2. From the Manager List menu (Configuration > System > Management >
SNMP > Manager List), select Mask All and set it to Unmask.
Two additional lines (General Traps Mask and Alarm Traps Mask) appear in
the Manager List menu.
3. Select Alarm Traps Mask and set it to Manual.
Additional line (Manual Alarm Traps Mask) appears in the Manager List
menu.
4. Select Manual Alarm Traps Mask.
The Manual Alarm Traps Mask menu is displayed.
5. From the Manual Alarm Traps Mask menu, select alarm group, to which the
alarm you intend to mask/unmask belongs:
System
ATM
SHDSL
Serial
E1.
6. From the appropriate alarm group menu, select a trap, which you intend to
mask or unmask (see Table C-25).
The parameter value toggles between Mask and Unmask.

Table C-25. Interface-Specific Alarm Traps
Group Alarms
System Jitter Buffer Underrun, Jitter Buffer Overrun, No Buffer to Network, Sync on Low Rate,
DB Checksum Error, Parameter Change During Upgrade, Alarm Buffer Overflow,
Alarm Buffer Clear
ATM Bandwidth Exceeds Allocation, Loss of Cell Delination (LCD)
VC: Continuity Loss, AIS Reception, RDI Reception, OAM Loopback Failure
SHDSL Driver Mismatch, EOC Loopback Towards Network
Serial Local Loop, Remote Loop
E1 AIS, BPV Error, CRC4 Error, Frame Slip, Local Multiframe Alarm, Remote Multiframe
Alarm, Local Sync Loss, Remote Sync Loss, AIS Sync Loss, User Side Remote Loop,
Network Remote Loop, User Side Local Loop, Signal Loss
Excessive: Bipolar Violations, CRC4 Error, Error Ratio, Frame Slip, Local Multiframe
Alarm, Remote Multiframe Alarm, Local Sync Loss, Remote Sync Loss
Note By default most of the interface-specific alarms are unmasked. LA-110 is delivered
with the following alarms masked: BPV Error, CRC4 Error, Frame Slip, Local
Multiframe Alarm, Remote Multiframe Alarm, Local Sync Loss, Remote Sync Loss.
ADD PAT
Purpose
Add a new port address translation (PAT) definition.
included in an existing SINGLE NAT definition. Therefore, the new PAT translation
will be accepted only if a matching SINGLE NAT entry exists (matching means that
a SINGLE NAT entry has the same real IP and virtual entries).
You may define up to 10 PAT definitions. If this number is exceeded, you must
delete an existing PAT, using the DEL PAT command, before a new one can be
added.
Each PAT definition is automatically assigned an index number in the range of 1 to
10: this number is then used in all the commands which refer to a specific PAT.
You can use the DSP PAT command to see the parameters of the currently defined
PAT definitions.
The ADD PAT command is accepted only when the LA-110 LAN port is
configured as router (see DEF LAN command).
Syntax
ADD PAT

Use
1. To define a new PAT, type
ADD PAT<Enter>
new PAT (this is always the first free index), followed by the PAT data form.
2. Enter the real and virtual IP addresses. The addresses entered in these fields
must match those appearing in an existing SINGLE NAT entry.
3. After entering the required addresses, select the corresponding protocol by
scrolling with the F and B keys until the desired selections are displayed. You
can select only protocols compatible with your port selection.
4. If you selected Other protocol, define desired protocol by specifying its
number in the range of 1 to 255, excluding 1, 6, 17.
5. After selecting protocol, select the port in accordance with the desired
application by scrolling with the F and B keys. You can also select User
Define, in which case you can specify any port, or range of ports, supported
by the TCP, UDP, or ICMP protocols.
6. If you select User Define for the Port, two additional lines are displayed, for
entering the numbers of the lowest and highest ports associated with the
virtual IP address that must be translated. To translate a single port, enter the
same port number in both fields.
7. After making all the required selections, press <Enter> to end the command.
Adding PAT number : 1
Real IP Virtual IP Protocol

---------------------------------------------
1 0 .0 .0 .0 0 .0 .0 .0 TCP
Port: User Define
Min Port User Define : 0

Max Port User Define : 0
Figure C-41. ADD PAT (TCP)

Adding PAT number : 1
Real IP Virtual IP Protocol

- - - - - - - - - - - - – - - - - - - - - -
177.172.20.120 125.205.255.040 Other
Protocol number: 2
Figure C-42. ADD PAT (Other Protocol)
The command parameters are explained in Table C-26.
Table C-26. ADD PAT Command Parameters

Real IP Specify the IP address to which a virtual Enter the desired IP address, in the
IP address will be translated. dotted-quad format.
Default: 0.0.0.0
Virtual IP Specify the virtual IP address to be Enter the desired IP address, in the
translated dotted-quad format.
Default: 0.0.0.0
Port Select the port, or range of ports, to be The available selections are Telnet (23), Web
accepted for translation (80), FTP (20,21), SNMP (161), TFTP (69),
DNS (53), SMTP (25), POP3 (110) and User
Define.
Default: User Define
Protocol Select the protocol needed by the port TCP, UDP, ICMP, Other
selected for translation.
Default: Depends on selected port.
For User Define: TCP
Protocol Number Select protocol number if Other is set for 1–255 (excluding 1, 6, 17)
the protocol
Default: 2
Min Port User Select the lowest port number in the 0 to 65535
Define user-defined range.
Default: 0
Displayed only when the Port is User
Define
Max Port User Select the highest port number in the 0 to 65535
Define user-defined range.
Default: 0
Displayed only when the Port is User
Define

ADD PRI
Purpose
Define timeslot utilization on the E1 user port, when operated in the ISDN PRI
mode (this mode is supported over AAL2).
The ADD PRI command is accepted when using one of the following application
identifiers:
• LES using DSS1 for remote access PRI (PRI only, with ELCP)
• LES using PSTN for POTS and DSS1 for BRI and PRI (with ELCP).
This command is needed only if the PRI timeslot utilization has not been defined
while changing the system parameters by means of the DEF SYSPARAMS
command (this option is offered when you select one of the application identifiers
listed above).
Syntax
ADD PRI
Use
1. Type:
ADD PRI<Enter>
You will see a message which indicates the total number of connections
supported by the PRI connection, followed by the first row of timeslots.
The state of each timeslot is indicated as follows:
For LA-110 without echo canceller, the available timeslot selections are as
follows:
n/a The timeslot is not available (for example, the timeslot used
for signaling).
No Free timeslot, available for allocation.
Yes Timeslot already allocated by you in the PRI connection.
For LA-110 with echo canceller, the available timeslot status selections are
made via ConfiguRAD menus only.
2. Select the desired timeslots as follows:
Press <Tab> to move to each desired timeslot.
Change the timeslot status as required by pressing F or B. You cannot
change the status of a timeslot identified as n/a.
3. When all the timeslots in the first row have been selected, press <Enter> to
move to the next row.
4. Repeat Step 3 above until all the required timeslots have been configured, and
then press <Enter> to confirm the selections and end the command. Make
sure that the number of timeslots does not exceed the maximum supported by
your LA-110 unit.
A typical data form for an LA-110, as seen after all the selections have been
made, is shown below.

Adding PRI
- - - - - -
There are 31 free connections for PRI
Transmit and Receive Timeslots

- - - - - - - - - - - - - - - -
1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 10 11 12 13 14 15
yes yes yes yes yes yes yes yes yes yes yes yes yes yes yes
16 17 18 19 20 21 22 23 24 25 26 27 28 29 30 31
n/a yes no no no no no no no no no no no no no no
Figure C-43. ADD PRI
ADD STATIC MAC ADDR
Purpose
Add a static MAC address to the bridging table of the LA-110 LAN port.
You may define up to 32 static MAC addresses. If this number is exceeded, you
must delete an existing MAC address, using the DEL STATIC MAC ADDR
Each static MAC address is automatically assigned an index number in the range of
1 to 32: this number is then used in all the commands which refer to a specific
static MAC address. You can use the DSP STATIC MAC ADDR command to see
the parameters of the currently defined addresses.
The ADD STATIC MAC ADDR command is accepted only when the LA-110 LAN
port is configured as bridge (see DEF LAN command). In the VLAN-aware mode,
you can also assign a MAC address t specific VLAN and bridge port.
Syntax
ADD STATIC MAC ADDR
Use
1. To add a new static MAC address, type:
ADD STATIC MAC ADDR<Enter>
new address (this is always the first free index), followed by the static MAC
address configuration form.
2. Type the prescribed MAC address (six pairs of two hexa digits).
3. Select the VLAN to which the MAC address belongs.

4. Select the bridge port through which the corresponding address is reached.
The available selections are as follows:
LAN – the LAN interface of the LA-110
1 to 16 – one of the already defined bridge WAN interfaces.
5. After making all the required selections, press <Enter> to end the command.
Adding static MAC addr number 2 to LAN interface:
MAC Address VLAN ID Bridge Port ID

---------------- ---------- ------------
aa.bb.cc.dd.ee.f1 1 LAN
Figure C-44. ADD STATIC MAC ADDR
ADD STATIC ROUTING
Purpose
Add a static route to the routing table of the LA-110 LAN port.
You may define up to 32 static routes. If this number is exceeded, you must delete
an existing static route, using the DEL STATIC ROUTING command, before a new
one can be added.
Each static route is automatically assigned an index number in the range of 1 to
32: this number is then used in all the commands which refer to a specific route.
You can use the DSP STATIC ROUTING command to see the parameters of the
currently defined routes.
The ADD STATIC ROUTING command is accepted only when the LA-110 LAN
port is configured as router (see DEF LAN command).
Syntax
ADD STATIC ROUTING
Use
1. To add a new static route, type:
ADD STATIC ROUTING<Enter>
new address (this is always the first free index), followed by the static route
configuration form.
2. Make the required selections in the first line, and then press <Enter>:
If the selected interface is located on the WAN, the command is ended.
If the selected interface is located on the LAN, you will see an additional
line, for entering the next hop IP address. After entering a valid IP address,
press <Enter> to end the command.

A typical screen for a static route defined on an interface located on the LAN port,
as seen after all the selections are completed, is shown below. The command
parameters are described in Table C-27.
Adding static routing addr number 1 to router:
Net IP Mask Metrica Interface
------------- --------–--- ------- ----------
2 .2 .2 .2 255.255.255.0 1 1
NextHop IP
-------------
2 .2 .2 .112
Figure C-45. ADD STATIC ROUTING
Table C-27. ADD STATIC ROUTING Command Parameters

Net IP Specify the destination IP address. Enter the desired IP address, in the
dotted-quad format.
This address must be a valid IP network or host
address Default: 0.0.0.0
Mask Specify the IP subnet mask associated with the Enter the desired IP subnet mask, in the
Net IP address(es) dotted-quad format.
Default: 0.0.0.0
Metrica Specify the maximum number of hops that an 1 to 15
IP packet sent through the new static route can
Assigning a value of 1 means that a
traverse before being discarded
packet can reach only the specified next
hop address.
Default: 1
Port Specify the IP router interface on which the 1 to 11
new route is defined
Do not select the number corresponding
to the host port.
Default: 000
Next Hop IP Specify the IP address to be used as the Enter the desired IP address, in the
destination for the first hop en route to the dotted-quad format.
specified destination.
Default: 0.0.0.0
The next hop address must be within the IP
subnet of the IP address of the selected
interface.
The next hop IP address is usually the address
of an IP router port.
This field is displayed only when the selected
interface is located on the LAN

ADD VLAN MEMBER

Assign a VLAN to the bridge port, configure egress filtering parameters and assign
name to the VLAN.
The ADD VLAN MEMBER command is accepted only when the LAN port is
configured to operate in the VLAN-aware mode.
Syntax
ADD VLAN MEMBER
1. To add a new VLAN, type:
ADD VLAN MEMBER<Enter>
2. You will be prompted to select the port number: LAN or 1–16.
Press F or B to select the desired option, and press <Tab> to proceed to the
next field.
3. Type in an ID of the VLAN that has to be assigned to the current bridge port,
and press <Enter> to proceed to the next line of parameters.
4. Select egress filtering mode (transparent or strip), and press <Tab> to proceed
to the next field.
5. Enter a VLAN name (up to eight characters), and press <Enter> to proceed to
the next line of parameters.
A typical screen for adding a VLAN is shown below. The command
parameters are described in Table C-28.
Bridge Port VLAN ID
----------- -------
1 1
Egress VLAN Name
------ ---------
Transparent My_VLAN
Figure C-46. ADD VLAN MEMBER
Table C-28. ADD VLAN MEMBER Command Parameters

Index Select a bridge port to which a new VLAN will be 1–16, LAN
assigned. Default: LAN
VLAN ID Specify a VLAN which will be assigned to the 1–4094
current bridge port. Default: 1
Up to 100 VLANs can be assigned to open bridge
ports. The maximum number of VLAN-bridge port
connections supported by LA-110 is also 100
(see Figure C-47).

Table C-28. ADD VLAN MEMBER Command Parameters (Cont.)

Egress Define the egress filtering mode. Transparent – All frames are transmitted
Egress filtering is performed according to the as they are (VLAN field is left intact).
combination of the destination port and VID Untagged and priority-tagged frames
values. This means, that all the frames that are retain PVID of the port that they come
destined to a specific port and have the same VID from.
are treated the same. Strip – Frames are transmitted untagged
(VLAN tag is removed).
Default: Strip for PVID,
Transparent otherwise
VLAN Specify the new VLAN name (up to eight Default: Blank
Name characters)
VLAN 1 VLAN 2 VLAN 100
1 2 3 100
Bridge Port 1 Bridge Port 2 Bridge Port 9
Figure C-47. VLAN-Bridge Port Connections
CLR ALM
Purpose
Clear the alarm history buffer.
Syntax
CLR ALM
Use
• Type:
CLR ALM<Enter>
CLR FW LOG
Purpose
Clear the firewall log.
Syntax
CLR FW LOG
Use
• Type:
CLR FW LOG<Enter>

CLR LOOP
Purpose
Deactivate the currently active user-initiated loopback.
Syntax
CLR LOOP
Use
• Type:
CLR LOOP<Enter>
CLR PM
Purpose
Reset all the performance monitoring counters to 0, and thus clear all the
performance monitoring data stored by LA-110.
Clearing all the performance monitoring statistic data simultaneously ensures that
the collection of new statistics is started simultaneously for all the counters, and
should be used to ensure that all the collected data is consistent.
Syntax
CLR PM
Use
• Type:
CLR PM<Enter>
CLR SYSERR
Purpose
Delete errors array.
Syntax
CLR SYSERR
Use
1. Type:
CLR SYSERR<Enter>
2. You will see a confirmation message.
Errors array was deleted.
Figure C-48. CLR SYSERR

DEF ADDR ATM
Purpose
Define the VPI.VCI and IP address to be used to communicate with the
management agent of LA-110 through the ATM uplink port, and control the state
of this connection (enabled or disabled).
This connection can be used to manage LA-110 using the SNMP and Telnet
protocols.
In addition, you should use the ADD NMS command to define the SNMP network
management stations that will receive traps from LA-110.
Syntax
DEF ADDR ATM
Use
1. Type:
DEF ADDR ATM<Enter>
You will see the ATM management parameters data form. A typical data
form is shown below.
MNGT
- - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - -
VPI.VCI Active IP Address DHCP Client

- - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - -
0. 32 enable 0.0.0.0 disable
Figure C-49. DEF ADDR ATM
Adding interface number 1
VPI.VCI Active IP Address DHCP Client Bit-rate Cont Check

0 32 enable UBR Disable off-two way on
PCR
10867
off N/A N/A
The ATM management parameters are described in Table C-29.

Table C-29. DEF ADDR ATM Command Parameters

VPI Specifies the ATM virtual path identifier to 0 to 31
be used for communication with the Default: 0
SNMP agent
VCI Specifies the ATM virtual circuit identifier 0 to 255
to be used for communication with the Default: 32
SNMP agent.
Note: The pair VPI.VCI uniquely identifies
an ATM connection, therefore you cannot
another connection, even if the other
connection is on another LA-110 port. The
VPI.VCI pair 0.0 is reserved.
Active Used to enable or disable the ENABLE – The communication through this
communication through this management connection is enabled.
connection DISABLE – The communication through this
connection is disabled.
Default: ENABLE
IP Address Specifies the IP address used to access the Enter the desired IP address, in the dotted-quad
LA-110 SNMP agent through the ATM format.
uplink Leaving the default address (0.0.0.0) enables
plug-&-play: LA-110 automatically adopts the IP
address contained in the destination IP address
field of the first IP packet received through this
ATM connection.
Default: 0.0.0.0

Table C-29. C-30. DEF ADDR ATM Command Parameters (Cont.)

DHCP Client Controls the use of automatic ENABLE – The use of automatic configuration
configuration (plug & play) using DHCP in (plug & play) using DHCP is enabled.
conjunction with TFTP DISABLE – The use of automatic configuration
(plug & play) using DHCP is disabled.
Default: DISABLE
Bit Rate Specifies the ATM service category to be UBR Unspecified bit rate service, intended for
used to handle the traffic transferred non-real-time applications which do not
through this new bridge interface require tightly constrained delay and
delay variation, e.g., data
communications applications such as file
transfer or e-mail.
user to specify a minimum desired cell
rate.
applications that require constraints on
the maximum cell transfer delay and
delay variation, such as video or voice.
CBR Constant bit rate service, intended for
real-time applications that require
constant bandwidth and tightly
constrained delay and delay variation,
for example, synchronous data streams.
Default: UBR
new bridge interface to perform continuity Table C-2.
LB Operation Controls activation of the periodic ON Periodic loopback activation is enabled.
loopbacks on the current interface OFF Periodic loopback activation is disabled.
every 5 seconds. LA-110 keeps statistics Default: OFF
for the Round-Trip Delay (RTD) Notes: Periodic loopbacks can be activated
measurements and generates alarms upon together with continuity checks.
LB Fail Selects the number of non-received 1–16
Threshold loopback responses, which trigger alarm
activation.
LB Fail Controls alarm generation if the number ON Alarm is generated.
Indication of non-received loopback responses OFF Alarm is not generated.

DEF CLOCK
Purpose
Define the reference timing source of the LA-110 system timing.
Note
When the reference timing source is changed, the LA-110 is automatically restarted.
Syntax
DEF CLOCK
1. To define the reference clock source, type:
DEF CLOCK<Enter>
You will see the first line of the reference clock selection data form, used to
select the reference timing. The available selections are as follows:
INTERNAL: LA-110 timing is determined by its internal clock oscillator. This
option should be used only when the LA-110 network port is configured as
CO side unit (see DEF NETWORK command).
ADAPTIVE CLOCK: LA-110 timing is locked to the average arrival rate of
the ATM cells carrying voice channels. This mode can be used to improve
voice transmission quality by decreasing the probability of buffer
underflow/overflow events for voice traffic, by ensuring that the internal
PCM bus clock rate is locked to the average rate of voice packets.
DERIVED FROM THE USER E1: LA-110 timing is locked to the clock signal
recovered from the E1 port receive signal (provided the LA-110 unit is
equipped with an E1 port). This mode locks the LA-110 timing to the timing
reference of the far end E1 equipment, which is usually accurate.
DERIVED FROM THE MAIN LINK (default): LA-110 timing is locked to the
clock signal recovered from the uplink receive signal. This is the
recommended mode, because it locks the LA-110 timing to the timing
reference of the ATM network (as received from the DSLAM to which it is
connected). The ATM network clock is usually highly accurate.
2. Press <Enter> and you are notified that the change will cause LA-110 to
restart, and required to confirm:
To confirm, type y
To abort, type n. In this case, nothing changes and the command is ended.
3. For all the selections except DERIVED FROM THE MAIN LINK, typing y ends
the command and initiates restarting.
When the DERIVED FROM THE MAIN LINK option is selected, LA-110 can
extract the NTR clock usually provided by the DSLAM and use it as its timing
reference. Therefore, after typing y an additional line is displayed to control
the use of the NTR:
NTR ENABLED – LA-110 locks its timing to the NTR clock extracted from
the uplink receive signal.
NTR DISABLED – LA-110 locks its timing to the clock signal recovered from
the uplink receive signal.

Note For the LA-110 units with the E1 UNI user interface the following clock modes are
available: Internal, Derived from the User E1 and Derived from the Main Link (NTR
Enabled). Selecting Adaptive or Main Link (NTR Disabled) timing mode
automatically configures LA-110 to the Internal clock.
4. Pressing <Enter> after selected the NTR utilization will cause the LA-110 to
restart.
System clock : Derived from the main link
If the Clock is changed the device will reboot.
Do you wish to continue ? (Y/N) y
NTR : NTR enabled
Figure C-50. DEF CLOCK
E1 Network Interface
For the LA-110 units with the E1 network port the clocking source for the network
and E1 user interfaces is defined in pairs:
Table C-31. DEF CLOCK Command (E1 Network Port)
Network User
LBT Derived from Network Default
Derived from User LBT
Internal Internal
DEF COMMUNITY
Purpose
Define the community names used for SNMP management. LA-110 supports the
following communities:
• Read-only community, from which LA-110 accepts only getRequest and
getNextRequest commands.
• Read-write community, from which LA-110 accepts getRequest,
getNextRequest, and setRequest commands.
• Trap community, to which LA-110 sends traps.
Community names are case-sensitive.
The SNMP communities cannot be changed during Telnet sessions.
Syntax
DEF COMMUNITY
Use
1. Type:
DEF COMMUNITY<Enter>
You will see the first line of the SNMP community data form.

2. To change a community name, type the new community name and then press
<Enter> to display the next community. Pay attention to case.
The data form includes three lines, which are displayed one by one by
pressing <Enter>. A typical display, as seen after all the lines are
displayed, is shown below.
SNMP read-only community: public
SNMP read-write community: private
SNMP trap community: public
Figure C-51. DEF COMMUNITY
DEF DATA
Purpose
Define the LA-110 data port physical layer characteristics and its operating mode.
Changes to the operating mode will automatically restart LA-110.
This command is accepted only when LA-110 includes a data port (ordering
option).
Syntax
DEF DATA

1. To configure the data port, type:
DEF DATA<Enter>
You will see the first line of the data configuration form, used to select the
physical interface.
2. Use the F and B keys to display the desired interface type and then press
<Enter>.
3. Select the physical interface.
You are prompted to select the application mode, AAL1 Stream or Frame
Relay.
4. Use the F and B keys to display the desired application mode, and then press
<Enter>.
5. Press <Enter>.
You are notified that the change will cause the LA-110 to restart, and
required to confirm:
To confirm, type y
To abort, type n. In this case, nothing changes and the command is ended.
6. After typing y, you will see the first line of the data port configuration form for
the selected application mode. Select the appropriate parameters in
accordance with the information given below, and then press <Enter> to
continue to the next line.

This will cause LA-110 to restart.
Use – Frame Relay Mode

A typical screen for the Frame Relay mode, as seen after all the selections have
been made, is shown below.
Application: Frame Relay
Protocol CRC
None 16 bit
Baud Inverted Clock

256 kbps Disable
CLLM
No
Figure C-52. DEF DATA – Frame Relay
Table C-32 lists the configuration parameters for the Frame Relay mode.
Table C-32. DEF DATA – Command Parameters for Frame Relay Application Mode

Physical Interface Select the physical interface V35 Select for connection to user’s equipment
emulated by the data port with V.35 interface.
V36 Select for connection to user’s equipment
with RS-530/V.11 and RS-449/V.36
interfaces.
X21 Select for connection to user’s equipment
with X.21 interface.
Default: V35
Application Select the data port application Select FRAME RELAY
mode

Table C-32. DEF DATA – Command Parameters for Frame Relay Application Mode (Cont.)

Protocol Specifies the Frame Relay link NONE No protocol.
control protocol to be used on the Q.933 network ITU-T Rec. Q.933, Annex A,
data port. network side.
Note: The protocol must match Q.933 user ITU-T Rec. Q.933, Annex A, user
the protocol used by the side.
equipment connected to the data Q.933 both ITU-T Rec. Q.933, Annex A, both
port network and user side.
T1.617 network ANSI T1.617, Annex D, network
side.
T1.617 user ANSI T1.617, Annex D, user side.
T1.617 both ANSI T1.617, Annex D, both
network and user side.
LMI network LMI specification, network side.
LMI user LMI specification, user side.
Protocol (cont.) LMI both LMI specification, both network
and user side.
Default: NONE
CRC Specifies the CRC polynomial to 16 bit Use of the CRC-16 polynomial.
be used for error detection by the
32 bit Use of the CRC-32 polynomial.
data port.
Default: 16 bit
The CRC polynomial must match
that used by the equipment
connected to the data port
Baud Specifies the nominal port data The available selections are the following multiples
rate of 64 kbps: 64, 128, 192, 256, 320, 384, 448, 512,
576, 640, 704, 768, 832, 896, 960, 1024, 1088,
1152, 1216, 1280, 1344,1108, 1472, 1536, 1600,
1664, 1728, 1792, 1856, 1920, 1984 and
2048 kbps.
Default: 64 kbps

Table C-32. DEF DATA – Command Parameters for Frame Relay Application Mode (Cont.)

Inverted Clock Selects the relative clock polarity, DISABLE Normal polarity: clock falling edge occurs
for compatibility with user’s in the middle of the bit interval
equipment interface
ENABLE Inverted polarity: clock rising edge occurs
characteristics
in the middle of the bit interval.
Default: DISABLE
CLLM Controls the use of the CLLM YES CLLM is used.
(Consolidated Link Layer
NO CLLM is not used.
Management) protocol.
Default: NO
The selection must match the
user’s equipment configuration.
This field is not displayed if the
selected Protocol is one of the
LMI options
Use – AAL1 Stream Mode

A typical screen for the AAL1 Stream application mode, as seen after all the
selections have been made, is shown below. Table C-33 lists the configuration
parameters for the AAL1 Stream mode.

- - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - -
Figure C-53. DEF DATA – AAL1 Stream
Table C-33. DEF DATA – Command Parameters for AAL1 Stream Mode

Physical Interface See Table C-32
Application Select the data port application mode Select AAL1 STREAM

Table C-33. DEF DATA – Command Parameters for AAL1 Stream Mode (Cont.)

Control Signal Controls the use of the port C = Obey, I = Obey Remote Signal
handshaking signals, for compatibility C = Obey, I = On
with user’s equipment interface
C = Obey, I = Off
characteristics.
C = Ignore, I = On
C = Ignore, I = Off
C = Ignore, I = Obey Remote Signal
C = Obey:
• When the C-signal (RTS) is off and Connection Type
is not set to Structured (Signal Transport) by ADD
CONN DATA command, LA-110 transmits no user
data or signaling to the remote unit.
• When the C-signal (RTS) is off and Connection Type
is set to Structured (Signal Transport),
LA-110 transmits data and C-off indication to the
remote unit.
• When the C-signal (RTS) is on and Connection Type
is not set to Structured (Signal Transport), LA-110
transmits only user data to the remote unit.
• When the C-signal (RTS) is on and Connection Type
is set to Structured (Signal Transport),
LA-110 transmits user data and C-on indication to
the remote unit.
C = Ignore:
• LA-110 ignores the state of the C-signal (RTS). Data
transfer on the LA-110-to-DTE link is always
enabled.
I = Obey Remote Signal:
• I-signal (DCD) always follows the state of the
C-signal (RTS) received from the remote unit.
I = On:
• I-signal (DCD) is always on.
I = Off:
• I-signal (DCD) is always off. No data is sent to the
DTE connected to the LA-110 data port.
Default: C = Obey, I = Obey Remote Signal
Note: When setting Control Signal value to I = Obey
Remote Signal, make sure that the Connection Type is
set to STRUCTURED (SIGNAL TRANPORT). See ADD
CONN DATA command.
Baud See Table C-32
Inverted Clock See Table C-32

DEF DATE
Purpose
Set the date for the LA-110 internal real-time clock.
Syntax
DEF DATE
Use
1. To set the internal real-time clock date, type:
DEF DATE<Enter>
You will see the date data form, showing the currently set date. A typical
data form is shown below.
Day Month Year
- - – – - - - - - - - - -
29 AUG 2004
Figure C-54. DEF DATE
• Move the cursor to the desired field, and then press the F or B key to display
the desired value.
• After the desired date is set, press <Enter> to confirm and change the date.
DEF DEFAULT GATEWAY
Purpose
Define the IP router interface that will serve as the default gateway. The new
selection automatically replaces the previously defined default gateway (you can
display information on the current default gateway by means of the DSP DEFAULT
GATEWAY command).
Router interfaces are identified by means of their index number, which is
automatically assigned (see ADD IP INTERFACE command). You may use the DSP IP
INTERFACE command to display information on the existing router interfaces.
You can select only LAN and WAN interfaces: it is not allowed to select a host
interface (see ADD IP INTERFACE command) as the default gateway of the LA-110
router.
The DEF DEFAULT GATEWAY command is accepted only when the LAN port is
configured, by means of the DEF LAN command, to operate in the Ethernet router
mode.
Syntax
DEF DEFAULT GATEWAY

Use
1. To define the default gateway, type:
DEF DEFAULT GATEWAY<Enter>
LA-110 displays the first section of the default gateway data entry form.
This section is used to select the desired interface, and its status (enabled
or disabled).
Press F or B to select the index number of the desired interface.
The default state of the default gateway is Enable. If the new default
gateway must not be yet enabled, press <Tab> to move the cursor to the
status field, and press <F> or <B> to select Disable.
2. Press <Enter>:
If a WAN interface has been selected, this ends the command.
For a LAN interface, you must enter the next hop IP address: enter the
desired address, in the dotted-quad format, and then press <Enter> to
confirm and end the command. Make sure to select an address in the IP
subnet of the corresponding IP interface.
A typical data form for a LAN interface, as seen after all the fields have been
completed, is shown below.
Interface Active
3 Enable
Next Hop IP
1 .2 .3 .5
Figure C-55. DEF DEFAULT GATEWAY
3. Press <Enter> to end the command.

Its result is displayed: either The default gateway was defined
successfully, or a message that explains the reason for rejecting your
command.
DEF ID
Purpose
Define logistic information for LA-110. You can define up to four items, each
containing up to 69 alphanumeric characters.
The information entered by means of this command is displayed in the User
Information section of the DSP SYS command.
Syntax
DEF ID

Use
1. To define user information, type:
DEF ID<Enter>
You will see Enter User Information, followed by the first line (identified
by 1). The cursor is already positioned in this line, waiting for your entry.
2. Type the desired string (up to 69 alphanumeric characters). Pressing <Enter>
ends the current entry and displays the next one.
3. Continue the process until all the desired text is entered. Pressing <Enter>
after the fourth item ends the command.
DEF LAN
Purpose
Configure the LA-110 LAN port physical layer characteristics, its operating mode.
The LAN port, which has a 10/100BaseT interface that supports autonegotiation,
has three operating modes:
• IP router.
• VLAN-aware Ethernet bridge
• VLAN-unaware Ethernet bridge.
Note
LA-110 performs automatic reset when the LAN operating mode is changed from
the VLAN-aware to VLAN-unaware mode.
To complete configuration of the VLAN-aware mode, you must perform the
following steps:
1. Add and configure an internal bridge port, see ADD BP.
2. Add VLAN member, see ADD VLAN MEMBER.
3. Assigning static MAC address to a VLAN (optional), see ADD STATIC MAC
ADDR.
For detailed description of the VLAN-aware operation, see VLAN-Aware Operation
in Chapter 1.
Syntax
DEF LAN
Use
1. To configure the LAN port, type:
DEF LAN<Enter>
You will see the first section of the LAN port data form, used to configure
the physical layer parameters.
2. Make the desired selections, and then press <Enter>.
After selecting the physical interface, you are prompted to select the
application mode: Ethernet Router, Ethernet Bridge, or VLAN aware.
3. Use the F and B keys to display the desired application mode.

4. When you press <Enter> after selecting Ethernet Router, the command is
ended.
When pressing <Enter> after selecting Ethernet Bridge or VLAN aware, you
will see the bridge parameters configuration form. Select the appropriate
parameters in accordance with the information given below, and then press
<Enter> to end the command.
A typical screen for the LAN port, as seen after selecting all the parameters, is
shown below. This screen includes the Ethernet bridge parameters. Table C-34 lists
the configuration parameters of the LAN port, including the Ethernet bridge
parameters.
LA110>def lan
ETHERNET Interface

- - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - -
Disable 100Base_T – full duplex mode 10Base_T – half duplex mode
Application: Ethernet Bridge
Bridge Mode Aging Time Encapsulation PPPoE

- - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - -
Figure C-56. DEF LAN – Ethernet Bridge (VLAN-unaware Mode)
LA110>def lan
ETHERNET Interface

- - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - -
Disable 100Base_T – full duplex mode 10Base_T – full duplex mode
Application: VLAN aware
Bridge Mode Aging Time Encapsulation PPPoE

- - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - -
Figure C-57. DEF LAN – VLAN aware
LA110>def lan
ETHERNET Interface
---------------- ------------------------- ------------
Disable 100BASE_T – full duplex mode 100BASE_T – half duplex mode

Please wait …..
Figure C-58. DEF LAN – Router

Table C-34. DEF LAN Command Parameters

Auto Negotiation Controls the use of autonegotiation. ENABLE Autonegotiation is
Autonegotiation is used to automatically select enabled.
the mode providing the highest possible traffic DISABLE Autonegotiation is
handling capability, by carrying out an automatic disabled.
handshaking procedure that coordinates the
Default: DISABLE
LAN port operation with that of the other
equipment connected to the LAN port
Max Capability Specifies the highest traffic handling capability to The available selections, listed in
Advertised be advertised during the autonegotiation ascending order of traffic handling
process. capabilities, are:
The operating mode selected as a result of 10BASE _T – half duplex mode: Half
autonegotiation cannot exceed the advertised duplex operation at 10 Mbps.
capability. 10BASE _T – full duplex mode: Full
duplex operation at 10 Mbps.
This parameter is relevant only when
autonegotiation is enabled: when 100BASE _T – half duplex mode:
autonegotiation is disabled, this parameter Half duplex operation at 100 Mbps.
cannot be changed and its value is ignored 100BASE _T – full duplex mode: Full
duplex operation at 100 Mbps.
Default: 100BASE _T – full duplex
mode
Default Type Select a specific operating mode and data rate. 10BASE _T – half duplex mode: Half
The selected values determine the LAN port duplex operation at 10 Mbps.
operating mode in the following circumstances: 10BASE _T – full duplex mode: Full
• When autonegotiation is disabled duplex operation at 10 Mbps.
• When autonegotiation is enabled, but the 100BASE _T – half duplex mode:
autonegotiation process cannot be carried Half duplex operation at 100 Mbps.
out, for example, because no operational 100BASE _T – full duplex mode: Full
equipment is connected to the LAN port duplex operation at 100 Mbps.
Default: 10BASE _T – half duplex
mode
Application Selects the processing of the LAN port traffic Select between ETHERNET ROUTER
and ETHERNET BRIDGE or VLAN
aware.
Default: ETHERNET BRIDGE

Table C-34. DEF LAN Command Parameters (Cont.)

Bridge Mode Select the processing of Ethernet port traffic. ACCESS ONLY – The traffic reaching
the LAN port is forwarded through
This parameter is displayed only when one of
the WAN ports.
the ETHERNET BRIDGE modes has been
selected ACCESS & SWITCHING – The
bridge forwards LAN traffic
addressed to WAN destinations that
can be reached only through the
WAN ports, and in addition enables
forwarding of traffic among the WAN
ports (regular bridging action).
Default: ACCESS ONLY
Aging Time Select the aging interval for learned forwarding The allowed range is 5 to 10080
information. minutes.
If the information for a given destination is not Default: 20
refreshed before the selected interval expires,
that information is deleted from the bridging
table.
selected
Encapsulation Read-only field. Displays the traffic BRIDGED ETHERNET WITHOUT
encapsulation type in accordance with RFC CRC – Encapsulation of bridged
1483. PDUs without CRC field.
selected
PPPoE Enable/disable support of PPP protocol over ENABLE – PPPoE supported
Ethernet.
DISABLE – PPPoE not supported.
Default: DISABLE
selected
DEF NAME
Purpose
Define the logical name of the LA-110 unit. The selected name is also displayed as
the working prompt.
Syntax
DEF NAME

Use
1. To define the system logical name, type:
DEF NAME<Enter>
You will see the name data form, with the current name as the default. A
typical data form showing the default name is shown below.
Name : LA110
Figure C-59. DEF NAME
2. Type the desired name (up to 17 alphanumeric characters), and then press
<Enter>.
The command is ended, and the new name appears as the working
prompt.
DEF NETWORK
Purpose
Configure the LA-110 network port.
The configuration parameters include two sections:
• ATM parameters section
• Physical layer parameters, which depend on the network interface installed on
the LA-110: ADSL, SHDSL, or E1.
Syntax
DEF NETWORK

1. Type:
DEF NETWORK<Enter>
You will see the first section of the network interface data form, which is
used to configure the ATM parameters. The type of network interface is
displayed in the screen header. Typical screens for an LA-110 with ADSL
network interface configured to comply with Annex A of ITU-T Rec.
G.992.1 and for an SHDSL interface are shown below.
ADSL ANNEX-A Interface
ATM Parameters:
Scramble Idle Cell CLP Shaping mode Traffic Shaping
-------- ------------- -------------------------------------------
Enable 1(ITU) HW Shaping, NCITS = 1 N/A
Figure C-60. DEF NETWORK – ADSL with Annex A and ITU-T Rec. G.992.1

SHDSL Interface
ATM Parameters:
-------- ------------- ------------- ----------------
Enable 1(ITU) HW Shaping, NCITS = 1 UBR
PCR
-----
10868
Figure C-61. DEF NETWORK – SHDSL Interface
2. Configure the required ATM parameters.

Table C-35 presents the ATM configuration parameters for the network
port.
3. Press <Enter>.
You will see the first line of the physical layer configuration data form. The
parameters appearing in this section depend on the network interface
type.
below, and then press <Enter> to continue to the next line.
Table C-35. DEF NETWORK Command Parameters – ATM Parameters Section

Scramble Controls the use of scrambling for DISABLE Scrambling disabled.
the traffic sent to the network ENABLE Scrambling enabled.
Default: ENABLE
Idle Cell CLP Controls the cell loss priority 1 (ITU) – The CLP of idle cells is set to 1 (in
(CLP) for idle cells sent to the accordance with ITU-T recommendations). In this
network case, idle cells may be discarded during periods of
congestion.
0 (ATM Forum) – The CLP of idle cells is set to 0
(in accordance with ATM Forums standards.
Default: 1 (ITU)
Shaping Mode HW Shaping, NCITS = 1
HW Shaping, NCITS = 2
SW Shaping
None
Default: HW Shaping, NCITS = 1

Table C-35. DEF NETWORK Command Parameters – ATM Parameters Section (Cont.)

Traffic Shaping Traffic shaping mode, when the UBR
E1 user interface is configured to
E1 UNI mode
PCR Specifies the peak cell rate, when The allowed range depends on the network
the E1 user interface is configured interface type:
to E1 UNI mode
The maximum actual value depends on the
network port synchronization rate.
Default: 5452 (2-wire) or 10868 (4-wire)
Use – ADSL Annex A Network Interface

A typical configuration data form for the physical layer parameters of an LA-110
with ADSL Annex A network interface is shown below.
Physical Layer :
Framing Type Trellis Coding
------------ --------------
Type 3 Trellis coding enabled
Transmission Mode Standard Compliance

----------------- -------------------
Frequency division G.dmt
Tx Frequency Bin Rx Frequency Bin
Maximum Bits per Bin Start End Start End
-------------------- --------------- ---------------
15 6 31 32 255
Tx Power attenuation Pilot tone request (PTR)

--------------------- ------------------------
0 db PTR enable
Figure C-62. DEF NETWORK – Physical Layer for ADSL with Annex A
Table C-36 explains the configuration parameters for the physical layer parameters
of the ADSL Annex A network interface. For additional details, refer to Appendix F.
Note All the physical layer parameters must match the parameters used by the
equipment that provides the access link to the ATM network.

Table C-36. DEF NETWORK Command – ADSL Annex A Physical Layer Parameters

Framing Type Selects the ADSL framing mode in TYPE 2 Reduced overhead framing
accordance with ITU-T Rec. G.992.1 with separate fast and sync
byte in the fast and interleaved
latency buffer respectively
(requires 64 kbps framing
overhead).
TYPE 3 Reduced overhead framing
with merged fast and sync byte,
using either the fast or the
interleaved latency buffer
(requires only 32 kbps framing
overhead).
Default: TYPE 3
Trellis Coding Controls the use of trellis coding, a method The available selections are TRELLIS
that improves ADSL line transmission CODING ENABLED and TRELLIS
performance CODING DISABLED.
Default: TRELLIS CODING ENABLED
Transmission Mode Selects the method used to enable full duplex EC Echo cancellation. This method
transmission over the line permits the frequency ranges of
the downstream and upstream
channels to partially overlap.
FDM Frequency division
multiplexing. This method is
used when it is necessary to
separate (i.e., prevent the
overlapping of) the transmit
and receive frequency ranges.
Default: FDM
Standard Selects the ADSL implementation version T1-413 – ANSI T1.413
Compliance G.DMT – ITU-T Rec. G.992.1
ALCATEL 1.4 – Alcatel V1.4 proprietary
implementation
ALCATEL – Alcatel proprietary
implementation
ADI – Analog Devices Inc. proprietary
implementation
MULTIMODE – Support for both ANSI
T1.413 and ITU-T Rec. G.992.1.
Default: G.DMT

Table C-36. DEF NETWORK Command – ADSL Annex A Physical Layer Parameters (Cont.)

Maximum Bits per Select the maximum number of data bits that 0 to 15
Bin may be modulated on each carrier
Default: 15
Tx Frequency Bin – Select the numbers of the start (lowest) and The allowed range for compliance with
Start and End end (highest) carriers that can be used for the Annex A of ITU-T Rec. G.992.1 is 6 to
transmit (uplink) direction 31; the allowed range for Annex B is 1
to 63.
The End number must be higher than
the Start number.
Default: Start: 6
End: 31
Rx Frequency Bin – Select the numbers of the start (lowest) and The allowed range for compliance with
Start and End end (highest) carriers that can be used for the Annex A of ITU-T Rec. G.992.1 is 32 to
receive (downlink) direction 266; the allowed range for Annex B is 1
to 255.
The End number must be higher than
the Start number. In addition, when
using FDM, the transmit and receive
frequency ranges cannot overlap,
therefore when using FDM for Annex A,
the receive frequency range is 32 to
255.
Default: Start: 32
End: 255
Tx Power Selects the reduction in the transmit level, 0 to 12 dB
Attenuation relative to the nominal transmit level
Default: 0
Pilot Tone Request Determines whether the LA-110 network PTR ENABLED, PTR DISABLED.
(PTR) interface can request the use of a pilot tone
Default: PTR ENABLED
during link set up
Use – SHDSL Network Interface

with 2W SHDSL network interface is shown below.
Table C-37 explains the configuration parameters for the physical layer parameters
of the SHDSL network interface. For additional details, refer to Appendix F.
Note All the physical layer parameters must match the parameters used by the
equipment that provides the access link to the ATM network.

Physical Layer :
Mode Physical Interface

---- -----------------
C0 2 Wire
Power Backoff Standard

------------- --------
Enable ANNEX B
Line Probe Enable Snext Margin Current Margin Asym.PSD

----------------- ------------ -------------- --------------------
Adaptive Rate Disable Margin 1 db Margin SHDSL Rate Asym R1 Disable
Min Rate Max Rate

-------- --------
200 2312
Table C-37. DEF NETWORK Command – SHDSL Physical Layer Parameters

Mode Determines the operating mode of the CPE LA-110 network interface operates
SHDSL network interface as STU-R (SHDSL terminal unit –
remote), which is the mode
suitable for use at the CPE side. In
this mode, the LA-110
synchronizes to the clock provided
by the equipment connected to the
other end of the SHDSL link,
usually a DSLAM.
CO LA-110 network interface operates
as STU-C (SHDSL terminal unit –
CO side). This mode is intended
for use during maintenance.
Default: CPE
Physical Interface Selects the physical interface type only when 2W 2-wire SHDSL interface.
the unit Mode is configured to CO.
4W 4-wire SHDSL interface.
Note: When the unit is configured to CPE
Default: 2W
Mode, the unit automatically detects whether
2 wires or 4 wires are connected to the uplink
connector; no configuration is needed for this
parameter.

Table C-37. DEF NETWORK Command – SHDSL Physical Layer Parameters (Cont.)

Power Backoff Controls the use of transmit power backoff. ENABLED – The use of power backoff is
enabled. In this case, the transmit power
Power backoff is used to reduce the
may be reduced below the nominal
interference caused by your signal to other
value allowed by the standards.
equipment using pairs in the same cable,
without degrading the link transmission DISABLED – The use of power backoff is
quality disabled. In this case, the nominal
transmit power is always used.
Default: ENABLED
Annex Selects the regional signal characteristics for ANNEX A – Compliance with Annex A of
the LA-110 SHDSL modem ITU-T Rec. G.991.2, required for
compatibility in North American
networks.
ANNEX B – Compliance with Annex B of
ITU-T Rec. G.991.2, required for
compatibility in European networks.
Default: ANNEX B
Line Probe Enable Controls the use of the line probe process ADAPTIVE RATE – The LA-110 SHDSL
(referred to as a power measurement modem participates in the line probe
modulation session in ITU-T Rec. G.991.2) process, used to determine the highest
line rate that can be supported on the
uplink, and other parameters that affect
performance. For this selection, you
must specify different Min Rate and Max
Rate parameters.
FIXED RATE – No line probing is
performed, because a fixed rate is
configured.
Default: ADAPTIVE RATE


Snext Margin Specifies the target margin for the When the FIXED RATE mode is selected,
signal-to-noise ratio measured relative to the this field displays N/A and cannot be
reference worst-case crosstalk noise expected changed.
in accordance with ITU-T Rec. G.991.2. The When the ADAPTIVE RATE mode is
specified value is used for rate negotiation selected, the allowed range is as follows:
during the line probe process, performed
when ADAPTIVE RATE is selected. • To use the signal-to-noise ratio
measured relative to crosstalk for rate
Alternatively, rate negotiation may be negotiation, select the desired value,
performed in accordance with the Current in the range of –10 to +10 dB.
Margin value Default: 0 dB
• To disable the signal-to-noise ratio
measured relative to crosstalk and
use the signal-to-noise ratio measured
relative to the current noise level,
select DISABLE MARGIN.
In this case, make sure to select a
numerical value for the Current
Margin parameter
Default: DISABLE MARGIN
Current Margin Specifies the target margin for the When the FIXED RATE mode is selected,
signal-to-noise ratio measured relative to the this field displays N/A and cannot be
current noise level, that is, the noise level changed.
measured during the line probe. The
When the ADAPTIVE RATE mode is
specified value is used for rate negotiation
selected, the allowed range is as follows:
during the line probe process, performed
when ADAPTIVE RATE is selected. • To use the signal-to-noise ratio
measured relative to current noise
Alternatively, rate negotiation may be
level for rate negotiation, select the
performed in accordance with the Current
desired value, in the range of –10 to
Margin value
+10 dB.
Default: 1 db Margin SHDSL
• To disable the signal-to-noise ratio
measured relative to current noise
level, select DISABLE MARGIN
In this case, make sure to select a
numerical value for the Snext Margin
parameter


Asym. PSD Controls the use of asymmetric power The values relevant when ANNEX A is
spectral density (PSD) specifications, for selected are as follows:
compatibility with special application
RATE ASYM. R1 DISABLE – No
conditions.
asymmetric PSD is used.
The asymmetric PSD specifications are given
RATE ASYM R1 ENABLE – Asymmetric
in ITU-T Rec. G.991.2
PSD for rates of 1536 and 1544 kbps.
RATE ASYM R2 DISABLE – No
The values relevant when ANNEX B is
selected are as follows:
RATE ASYM. R1 DISABLE – No
Default: RATE ASYM. R1 DISABLE
Min Rate Determines the minimum line rate that may 200–2312 kbps
be selected during the rate negotiation
Default: 200 kbps
performed as part of the line probing process.
LA-110 automatically rounds a minimum line
rate value entered by the user to the closest
number in the N × 64 + 8 kbps series. For
example, the 635 kbps line rate is
automatically rounded to 648 kbps.
Max Rate Determines the maximum line rate that may 200–2312 kbps
be selected during the rate negotiation Default: 2312 kbps
performed as part of the line probing process.
LA-110 automatically rounds a maximum line
rate value entered by the user to the closest
number in the N × 64 + 8 kbps series. For
example, the 635 kbps line rate is
automatically rounded to 648 kbps.

Use – E1 Network Interface

with E1 network interface is shown below.
Physical Layer :
ATM Parameters:
-------- ------------- ------------- ----------------
Enable 1(ITU) HW Shaping, NCITS = 1 N/A
Physical Layer :
------- --------- -------------------
Non-multi-frame (G.723N) HDB3 30 DB
--------------- --------- -----
FAST (1 sec) 7e off
Table C-38. DEF NETWORK Command – E1 Physical Layer Parameters

Framing Determines the framing mode of the E1 port MULTI-FRAME (G732S) – 256S
multiframe per ITU-T Rec. G.704
(16 frames per multiframe). Always select
this mode for CAS applications.
NOT MULTI-FRAME (G732N) – 256N
(2 frames per multiframe).
Default: NOT MULTI-FRAME (G723N)
Line Code Displays the E1 line code The line code required by ITU-T Rec.
G.703 is HDB3.
Default: HDB3
Receiver Sensitivity Determines the maximum attenuation of the 30 dB Up to 30 dB relative to the
receive signal that can be compensated for by nominal transmit level (0 dB).
the E1 interface receive path, to obtain the This is the value required for
BER performance required by the standards LTU interfaces.
12 dB Up to 12 dB relative to the
nominal transmit level (0 dB).
This is the value required for
DSU interfaces.
Default: 30 dB
Synchronization Used to change the frame synchronization CCITT – In accordance with ITU-T Rec.
algorithm, to reduce the time required for the G.706.
E1 port to return to normal operation after 62411 (10 SEC) – Similar to the
local loss of synchronization. requirements of AT&T TR-62411 (after
This field is not displayed when the 10 seconds).
UNFRAMED E1 (G.703) mode is selected FAST (1 SEC) – After 1 second.
Default: FAST (1 SEC)

Table C-38. DEF NETWORK Command – E1 Physical Layer Parameters (Cont.)

Idle Code Selects the code transmitted to fill idle 00 to FF (hexa).
(unused) timeslots in the frames transmitted Default: 7E
through this user port.
This field is not displayed when the
UNFRAMED E1 (G.703) mode is selected
CRC-4 Controls the use of the CRC-4 function, ON CRC-4 function enabled.
which enables the collection of performance OFF CRC-4 function disabled.
diagnostic data.
Default: OFF
DEF PASSWORD
Purpose
Define and/or change the various passwords to be used to control access to the
LA-110 management facility. To prevent unauthorized modification of the
operating parameters, LA-110 supports two access levels:
• Superuser – can perform all the activities supported by the LA-110
management facility.
• User – can only access the status and performance monitoring activities, but
cannot perform traffic-affecting activities (for example, in the user access mode
it is not possible to modify the LA-110 configuration and operating mode).
The password can include up to 20 characters and/or numbers. Its evaluation is
case-sensitive, therefore pay attention to the case used for each character.
Syntax
DEF PASSWORD
Use
1. To define a new password, type:
DEF PASSWORD<Enter>
2. You are prompted to select the password type: Superuser or User. Press F and
B as required, and then press <Enter>.
3. Enter the current password, to verify your authorization, and then press
<Enter>.
4. If your password is accepted, you are prompted to enter the new password.
Type the new password and then press <Enter>.
5. Type the new password a second time for confirmation. A typical screen as
seen after entering all the required information, is shown below.

User Type : Superuser

Old Password : ****
New Password : ******
Confirm New password : ******
Figure C-63. DEF PASSWORD
6. Press <Enter>. The terminal either displays New password was successfully
changed or a message that explains why your entry has been rejected.
DEF PSTN
Purpose
Define the FXS interface signaling characteristics to be used for connection to the
PSTN. These parameters are needed to access local exchanges using V5 interfaces,
and their utilization is specified in ETSI 300 324-1.
Note ETSI 300 324-1 uses types to select parameter values. Default types are
automatically configured when a national protocol is selected, however the user
can also select the desired parameter values for each type.
The parameters configured by means of this command enable adapting the
signaling parameters of the FXS ports, which are described below, to the national
PSTN protocol.
The parameters that can be configured include:
• National protocol
• General parameters:
Collision priority
Metering pulse frequency
Minimum recognized on-hook, off-hook and hook-flash times.
• Customized values for the following types:
Ring cadences: up to 10 different cadence ring types. For each type, you
can define up to 10 ringing and silence periods.
Durations: up to 63 different duration types for the on-hook, off-hook and
hook-flash signals
Rates: up to 128 different rate types (in case of enabled metering).
Attenuations: up to 128 different attenuation types.
Pulse durations: up to 32 pulse duration types, each consisting of up to
5 different periods (ON periods and OFF periods).
Digit parameters for decadic dialing (ON period and OFF period).
The DEF PSTN command is accepted only under the following conditions:
• The LA-110 includes FXS user ports and is configured to support connections
to the PSTN.
• The LA-110 is configured to support connections to the PSTN. Connections to
the PSTN are supported only when the LA-110 is configured to use AAL2 and
the application identifier supports PSTN, that is:

LES using PSTN for POTS & DSS1 for BRI (using ELCP)
LES using PSTN for POTS & DSS1 for PRI and BRI (using ELCP).
These parameters are selected by means of the DEF SYSPARAMS command.
Syntax
DEF PSTN
Use
1. To define the FXS interface signaling characteristics, type:
DEF PSTN<Enter>
2. You will see the first line of the PSTN parameters data form, used to select the
national protocol. Refer to Table C-39 for a description of the available
selections.
3. Display the desired value using the F and B keys, and then press <Enter> to
continue to the next line.
4. Repeat the procedure to configure the other general parameters.
5. After the general parameters, you are prompted to confirm or skip the
selection of customized values for the various parameter types:
To add a custom parameter type, type Y when you see its Add prompt, and
then select the corresponding parameters in accordance with the
information given in Table C-39.
To skip to the next parameter, type N when you see the Add prompt. In
this case, the current parameter is assigned the value specified as a default
for the currently selected national protocol.
6. Repeat the procedure as necessary until <Enter> is pressed for the last line
and the command is ended.
A typical data form as seen when you confirm the selection of customizable values
for all the parameters, is shown below. For clarity, the display is split into sections,
where each section is preceded by its Add prompt.
Table C-39 explains the parameters that can be configured for all the sections, and
their range of values.
National Profile : France
Collision Priority : Originating
Meter Pulse Frequency : 12kHZ
Off Hook min time (ms) : 65
On Hook min time (ms) : 480
Register Recall min time (ms): 270

Add Duration? (Y) :y

Index : 1
Duration type : 0
Signal : On Hook
Duration (ms) : 480
Status : Enable
Add Duration? (Y) :N
Add Rate Type? (Y) :y

Rate Type (Enable Metering IE) : 1
Pulse per hour : 60
Status : Enable
Add Rate Type? (Y) :N
Add Attenuation Type? (Y) :Y

Attenuation Type (Attenuation IE): 0
Attenuation Value (in Decibels) Tx: 0
Attenuation Value (in Decibels) Rx: -4
Status : Disable
Configure Pulse Duration? (Y) :y

Index : 1
Pulse Duration Type : 0
Pulse Type : Initial Ring
Period Parameters (ms) :
on off
500 500
Status : Disable
Configure Pulse Duration? (Y) :y
Index : 2
Pulse Duration Type : 1
Pulse Type : Reduce Battery
Period Parameters (ms) :
on off
500 500
Status : Disable
Configure Pulse Duration? (Y) :N

Configure Cadence Ring? (Y) :y

Cadence Ring Type & Status :
0 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9
Enable Enable Enable Disable Disable Disable Disable Disable Disable Disable
|Cadence Period1 Period2 Period3 Period4 Period5

|Type on off on off on off on off on off |
0
1650 3300 1000 1000 1000 1000 1000 1000 1000 1000
Number of periods in the type : 2

1
750 1500 1000 1000 1000 1000 1000 1000 1000 1000

2
1000 1000 1000 1000 1000 1000 1000 1000 1000 1000
Configure Digit parameters ? (Y) :y

Digit parameters (ms) : On Periods Off Periods
min max min max
- - - - - - - - - - - -
20 120 10 100
Inter digit time : 220
Figure C-64. DEF PSTN

Table C-39. DEF PSTN Command Parameters

National Profile Displays the national protocol The following predefined profiles are
implementation selected by means of the available: FRANCE, ITALY, BELGIUM,
DEF SYSPARAMS command. GERMANY, ENGLAND, SPAIN and
PORTUGAL, or OTHER.
The profile determines the default values of
the specific national parameters in
accordance with the values normally used in
the selected country
Collision Priority Determines the side having priority in case of ORIGINATING – the user connected to
colliding (simultaneous) call establish requests the local FXS LA-110 port has priority.
TERMINATING – the far end side has
priority.
Default: ORIGINATING
Meter Pulse Determines the frequency of the metering 12 kHz, 16 kHz.
Frequency pulses generated by the FXS port
Default: 12 kHz
Off Hook min time Specifies the minimum time the DC loop 10 to 1000 msec
(ms) must be closed, for this state to be recognized
Default: 65
as an off-hook state
On Hook min time Specifies the minimum time the DC loop 10 to 1000 msec
(ms) must be open, for this state to be recognized
Default: 480
as an on-hook state.
The value selected in this field must be
greater that the value selected in the Register
Recall min time (ms) field
Register Recall min Specifies the minimum time the DC loop 60 to 975 msec
time (ms) must be open, for this state to be recognized
Default: 270
as a register recall (hook flash) request.
The register recall function is enabled only
when the value selected for this field is
shorter than the value selected for the On
Hook min time (ms) field
Duration – Index Specifies the internal index number for the 1 to 10
corresponding duration type
Default: 1

Table C-39. DEF PSTN Command Parameters (Cont.)

Duration – Type Specifies the value received in the 0 to 63
RecognitionTimeIE field of the PSTN
Default: 0
protocol message that will result in the
activation of the duration being configured
Duration – Signal Specifies the type of signal for which this ON-HOOK – Duration can be used for
duration is applicable recognition of the on-hook state.
OFF-HOOK – Duration can be used for
recognition of the off-hook state.
HOOK FLASH – Duration can be used
for recognition of hook flash events.
Default: ON-HOOK
Duration – Specifies the duration time 50 to 5000 msec
Duration (ms)
Default: 480
Duration – Status Controls the saving of the new duration as ENABLE The configured duration is
part of the current configuration saved as part of the current
configuration, and therefore
becomes available for use.
DISABLE The configured duration is not
saved in the current
cannot be used.
Default: DISABLE
Rate Type (Enable Specifies the value received in the Enable 1 to 127
Metering IE) Metering IE field of the PSTN protocol
Default: 1
message that will result in the activation of
the rate type being configured
Rate Type – Pulse Specifies the rate at which the FXS port will 1 to 5000 pulses per hour
per hour generate metering pulses when the rate type
Default: 60
being configured is activated
Rate Type – Status Controls the saving of the new rate type as ENABLE The configured rate type is
part of the current configuration saved as part of the current
becomes available for use.
DISABLE The configured rate type is
not saved in the current
cannot be used.
Default: DISABLE


Attenuation Type Specifies the value received in the 0 to 127
(Attenuation IE) AttenuationIE field of the PSTN protocol
Default: 0
the attenuation type being configured
Attenuation Value Selects the attenuation value inserted in the -10, -8, -6, -4, -2, 0, 2, 4 and 5 dB
(in Decibels) Tx transmit path when the attenuation type
Default: 0
being configured is activated.
Positive values indicate gain.
Attenuation Value Selects the attenuation value inserted in the -10, -8, -6, -4, -2, 0, 2, 4, 5
(in Decibels) Rx receive path when the attenuation type being
Default: -4
configured is activated.
Positive values indicate gain.
Attenuation –Status Controls the saving of the new attenuation ENABLE The configured attenuation
type as part of the current configuration type is saved as part of the
current configuration, and
therefore becomes available
for use.
DISABLE The configured attenuation
type is not saved in the
therefore cannot be used.
Default: DISABLE
Pulse Duration Specifies the value received in the 0 to 31
Type PulsedSignalIE field of the PSTN protocol
Default: 0
the pulse duration (pattern) type being
configured
Pulse Duration – Specifies the type of event for which the INITIAL RING – First ring of a call.
Pulse Type pulse duration type being configured will be
METER PULSE – Metering pulses.
activated
REDUCE BATTERY – Low battery
voltage during the off-hook state.
Default: INITIAL RING
Pulse Duration – Specifies the number of ON/OFF periods 1 to 5
Number of Periods pairs in the pulse duration type being
Default: 1
configured
Pulse Duration – Specifies the duration of an ON period in the 10 to 5000 msec
Period Parameters pulse duration type being configured
Default: 500
(ms) On
Pulse Duration – Specifies the duration of an OFF period in the 10 to 5000 msec
Period Parameters pulse duration type being configured
Default: 500
(ms) Off


Pulse Duration – Controls the saving of the new pulse duration ENABLE The configured pulse duration
Status type as part of the current configuration type is saved as part of the
therefore becomes available
for use.
DISABLE The configured pulse duration
type is not saved in the
therefore cannot be used.
Default: DISABLE
Cadence Ring Type Specify the type of ringing generated to For each cadence ring type, select
& Status indicate the reception of a phone call. between:
Note: The Cadence Ring section enables ENABLE – The corresponding cadence
defining up to 10 different ringing types. Each type can be configured and will be saved
ringing type can include up to 5 different ring in the current configuration.
ON/ring OFF intervals
DISABLE – The corresponding cadence
type is not used, and cannot be
configured.
Default: Cadence ring type 0 and 1:
ENABLE
Cadence ring type 2 to 9:
DISABLE
Cadence Ring – Displays the number of the cadence type One table for each Cadence Type for
Cadence Type which ENABLE has been selected.
Cadence Ring – Number of ON/OFF periods to be configured 1 to 5
Number of Periods for the corresponding Cadence Type
Default: 5
in the Type
Cadence Ring – Specifies the duration of the corresponding 100 to 5000 msec
Cadence Type ON period
Default: 1000 or the value taken from
Period – On
the national PSTN profile
Cadence Ring – Specifies the duration of the corresponding 100 to 5000 msec
Cadence Type OFF period
Default: 1000 or the value taken from
Period – Off
the national PSTN profile
Digit Parameters – Specifies the minimum duration of the 10 to 200 msec
On Periods – Min on-hook state that is used during decadic
Default: 20
dialing for detecting the dialed digit


Digit Parameters – Specifies the maximum duration of the 10 to 200 msec
On Periods – Max on-hook state that is used during decadic
Default: 120
dialing for detecting the dialed digit.
The maximum duration selected here must
be longer than the value selected in the On
Period – Min field, but shorter than the value
selected in the Inter Digit Time field
Off Periods – Min off-hook state that is used during decadic
Default: 10
dialing for detecting the dialed digit
Off Periods – Max off-hook state that is used during decadic
Default: 110
dialing for detecting the dialed digit.
be longer than the value selected in the Off
Period – Min field
Digit Parameters – Determines the maximum allowed time 50 to 950 msec
Inter Digit Time between digits that if not exceeded indicates
Default: 240
that the current digit is part of a sequence of
digits.
be shorter than the value selected in the
Register Recall min time (ms) field
DEF SP PORT
Purpose
Define the LA-110 CONTROL port parameters. You can use the DSP SP PORT
command to display the current CONTROL port parameters.
Syntax
DEF SP PORT
Use
1. To define the CONTROL port parameters, type:
DEF SP PORT<Enter>
2. The CONTROL port parameters data form is displayed. A typical form is
shown below.
Baud Data Parity Log-off-time Pop-alarm
- - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - -
auto 8 none 10 yes
Figure C-65. DEF SP PORT

3. Change the parameter values as required, and press <Enter> once to end the
command.
4. Press <Enter> again to initialize the supervisory port with the new values.
The DEF SP PORT parameters are described in Table C-40.
Table C-40. DEF SP PORT Command Parameters

Baud Select the supervisory port data rate. AUTO, 300, 1200, 2400, 4800, 9600,
19200, 38400, 57600 and 115200 bps.
If AUTO is selected, LA-110 automatically
identifies the supervisory port data rate. To Default: AUTO
enable positive identification, the
transmission must start with three consecutive
carriage returns
Data Select the number of data bits in the word 7 and 8 data bits.
format
Default: 8
Parity Control the use of parity ODD Odd parity
EVEN Even parity
NONE Parity disabled
Default: NONE
Log-off-time Idle disconnect time. The session will 1 to 99 minutes
automatically be disconnected after the
Default: 10
specified number of minutes if no input data
is received by LA-110 supervisory port
Pop Alarm Enable/disable the automatic display of YES The terminal automatically displays
alarms on the terminal any new alarm, or change in the
state of an alarm.
NO The automatic display feature is
disabled.
Default: NO
DEF SYSPARAMS
Purpose
Select the global LA-110 system parameters.
The current values of the global system parameters can be displayed by means of
the DSP SYSPARAMS command.
Changes in the main system parameters, for example, coding law, AAL or
application identifier (when using AAL2) can take effect only after LA-110 is
restarted. Therefore, when such changes are made, you will be notified that
LA-110 will be restarted, and then requested to confirm:

• If you type Y, then after all the relevant parameters have been configured,
pressing <Enter> after the last command line causes LA-110 to restart. After
restarting, the changes take effect.
• If you type N, the command is aborted and any changes made up to this point
are lost. The changes made by you are also lost in case the command is
cancelled before completing the configuration of all the parameters. In both
these cases, LA-110 is not restarted.
Syntax
DEF SYSPARAMS

1. To configure the global LA-110 system parameters, type:
DEF SYSPARAMS<Enter>
You will see the first line of the system parameters.
3. Repeat the procedure as necessary until <Enter> is pressed for the last line,
and the command is ended. If the changes made by you require restarting the
LA-110, you will see Please Wait …, and then The LA-110 is rebooting.
4. After the LA-110 restarts, log in again.
the AAL selected by you.
Use – Configuration Procedure for AAL1

Typical screens for the DEF SYSPARAMS command when AAL1 is used are shown
below:
• The following screen is shown when the LAN port is configured as Ethernet
bridge:
Coding Law : A law
DNS Relay : Enable
Figure C-66. DEF SYSPARAMS – Bridge
• The following screen is shown when the LAN port is configured as IP router:

Coding Law : A law

DNS Relay : Enable
DHCP Server : Disable
Figure C-67. DEF SYSPARAMS – Router
Table C-41 explains the command parameters when using AAL1.
Table C-41. DEF SYSPARAMS – Command Parameters for AAL1

Coding Law Specifies the companding law to be used for A law A law in accordance with ITU-T
encoding the voice channels. Rec. G.711. This companding
law is used for E1 trunks, and
Changing the companding law will cause the
therefore is recommended when
LA-110 to restart
the LA-110 is equipped with an
E1 interface.
U law µ law in accordance with ITU-T
Rec. G.711. This companding
law is used for T1 trunks.
Default: A law
DNS Relay When Enabled, whenever LA-110 receives a ENABLE, DISABLE
DNS request from its host, it will forward it to
Default: ENABLE
the DNS server as if it were an LA-110
request. The reply from the DNS server is
forwarded by LA-110 to the host as if it was
answering the request.
DHCP Server Enable the LA-110 IP router to serve as a When Ethernet bridge, this field displays
DHCP server. N/A and cannot be changed.
Changing the state has the following effects: The following selections are available
when the LA-110 is configured as IP
• When the DHCP server function is
router:
enabled, you will see This action will
disable all the DHCP Relays on the DISABLE The DHCP server function is
device. Do you wish to enable the disabled. In this case, the IP
DHCP Server? (Y/N). Type Y to confirm router provides DHCP relay
and continue. services.
• When the DHCP server function is ENABLE The DHCP server function is
disabled, you will see This action will enabled. In this case, the IP
delete all the DHCP Server Pools on the router provides DHCP server
device. Do you wish to disable the services, providing IP
DHCP Server? (Y/N). Type Y to confirm addresses from the DHCP
and continue address pools defined by the
user.
Default: ENABLE

Table C-41. DEF SYSPARAMS – Command Parameters for AAL1 (Cont.)

Jitter Buffer Selects the jitter buffer size. 5 to 20 msec
The jitter buffer enables the LA-110 to Default: 10
tolerate the Cell Delay Variation (CDV)
occurring as the cells pass through the ATM
network
OAM Type Defines OAM type for F5 continuity check End-to-end LA-110 serves as an
cells. end-point, terminating
end-to-end F5 OAM flows.
Segment LA-110 serves as an
end-segment point,
terminating segment F5
OAM flows and passes
transparently end-to-end F5
OAM cells.
Default: Segment
OAM Fail Controls whether the AIS and RDI cells are ENABLE The AIS and RDI cells are sent
Indication sent from LA-110 or not. from LA-110.
DISABLE The AIS and RDI cells are not
sent from LA-110.
Default: ENABLE
Adaptation Layer Selects the AAL used by the user port (E1, Select AAL1.
FXS or ISDN) for the uplink connection.
Default: AAL2
Changing the AAL causes LA-110 to restart,
and in addition will delete all the currently
defined ATM connections
Use – Configuration Procedure for AAL2

Note All the following screens are for an LA-110 whose LAN port is configured as
Ethernet bridge. If the LAN port is configured as IP router, refer to Table C-41 for
descriptions.
Typical screens for the DEF SYSPARAMS command when AAL2 is used are shown
below. Table C-42 explains the command parameters when using AAL2.
• A typical screen for an LA-110 with E1 user interface configured with the LES
using CAS for POTS & DSS1 for BRI (without ELCP) application identifier is
shown below. This screen includes specific configuration options for the UK
national CAS protocol.

Coding Law : A law

DNS Relay : Enable
- - - - - - - - - - - -
1 32
- - - - - - - - - - - -
Nationality : OTHER
CAS Signaling
- - - - - - -
- - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - -
SSCS PARAMETERS:
- - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - -
------------------ -----------------
------------------ ------------------
CPS PARAMETERS
---------------
DSP Gains : 5 dB
Figure C-68. DEF SYSPARAMS – AAL2 – E1 LES using CAS for POTS & DSS1 for BRI (without ELCP)
• A typical screen for an LA-110 with FXS user interface configured with the LES
using CAS for POTS & DSS1 for BRI (without ELCP) application identifier,
which includes a ports map section, is shown below. This screen includes
specific configuration options for the UK national CAS protocol. The screen for
an LA-110 with ISDN user interface is similar.

Coding Law : A law

DNS Relay : Enable
- - - - - - - - - - - -
1 32
- - - - - - - - - - - -
Call Termination Mode : SIGNALING
Nationality : OTHER
PORT MAP
- - - - -
- - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - -
- - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - -
CAS Signaling
- - - - - - -
- - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - -
SSCS PARAMETERS:
----------------
------------------ ------------------
CPS PARAMETERS
--------------
DSP Gains : 5 dB
Figure C-69. DEF SYSPARAMS – AAL2– FXS LES using CAS for POTS & DSS1 for BRI (without ELCP)

A typical screen for an LA-110 with E1 user interface configured with the LES
using PSTN for POTS & DSS1 for BRI (with ELCP) application identifier is shown
below. Although this screen includes a reference to France national protocol, the
same options are available for all the other Nationality options.
Coding Law : A law
DSN Relay : Enable
--------------- : -------
1 32
---------------------- :
Nationality : OTHER

SSCS PARAMETERS:
---------------
------------------ ------------------
CPS PARAMETERS
---------------
DSP Gains : 5 dB
Figure C-70. DEF SYSPARAMS – AAL2– E1 LES using PSTN for POTS & DSS1 for BRI (with ELCP)
A typical screen for an LA-110 with FXS user interface configured with the LES
using PSTN for POTS & DSS1 for BRI (with ELCP) application identifier, which
includes a ports map section, is shown below. Although this screen includes a
reference to France national protocol, the same options are available for all the
other Nationality options. The screen for an LA-110 with ISDN user interface is
similar.

Coding Law : A law

DSN Relay : Enable
--------------- : -------
1 32
---------------------- :
PORT MAP
- - - - -
- - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - -
- - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - -

Nationality : OTHER
SSCS PARAMETERS:
----------------
------------------ ------------------
CPS PARAMETERS
------------------
DSP Gains : 5 dB
Figure C-71. DEF SYSPARAMS – AAL2 – FXS LES using PSTN for POTS & DSS1 for BRI (with ELCP)

Table C-42. DEF SYSPARAMS – Command Parameters for AAL2

Coding Law See Table C-41
DHCP Server See Table C-41
Jitter Buffer See Table C-41
Adaptation Layer Selects the AAL used by the user port installed Select AAL2.
on the LA-110 (E1, FXS or ISDN) for the uplink
Default: AAL2
connection.
Changing the AAL will cause the LA-110 to
restart, and in addition will delete all the
currently defined ATM connections
LES Default VCC Selects the default VCC used by connections The allowed range for VPI is 0 to 31.
established using Loop Emulation Service (LES).
The allowed range for VCI is 0 to
Unless other values are specifically selected by 255.
the user, all the connections will be created with
Default: 1.32
the VPI.VCI of the default VCC. This
characteristic enables plug & play configuration
(see Chapter 1 for details)
Application Selects the application identifier for the voice The following application identifiers
Identifier applications (including support for fax and can be selected:
voiceband modem).
• LES using CAS for POTS & DSS1
The application identifiers are described in for BRI (without ELCP)
ATMF AF-VMOA-0145.000. For your
• LES using PSTN for POTS &
convenience, the abbreviations indicating the
DSS1 for BRI (without ELCP)
signaling methods included in the application
identifier name are explained below: • LES using PSTN for POTS &
DSS1 for BRI (with ELCP)
CAS – Uses channel-associated signaling, used
with FXS user interfaces for providing POTS • LES using PSTN for POTS &
(plain old telephone service), and with E1 user DSS1 for PRI and BRI (with
interfaces when the framing mode is G.732S. ELCP)
PSTN – Uses common channel signaling for • LES using DSS1 for remote
access to the PSTN (public switched telephone access PRI (PRI only, with
network) using gateways with V5 interfaces. For ELCP): can be selected only for
E1 interfaces, CCS is supported with G.732N LA-110 with E1 user interface.
framing.
Default: LES using PSTN for POTS
DSS1 – Uses Digital Subscriber Signaling Scheme & DSS1 for BRI (with ELCP)
No. 1 for ISDN BRI access
Call Termination Defines method used by LA-110 for FXS call Signaling – Call is terminated, when
Mode termination LA-110 detects On-hook signal.
Data – Call is terminated, when
LA-110 detects that the DSLAM
stopped transmitting additional data,
such as call duration etc., to the FXS
subscriber.


Nationality Selects a national PSTN protocol When using the LES using CAS for
implementation. POTS & DSS1 for BRI (without
ELCP) application identifier, the only
The selected implementation determines the
selection is UK. This selection cannot
default PSTN signaling characteristics. For FXS
be changed.
user interfaces, the default values can be
changed using the DEF PSTN command. When using the other application
identifiers, the following predefined
national implementations are
available: FRANCE, ITALY,
BELGIUM, GERMANY, ENGLAND,
SPAIN and PORTUGAL. In addition,
you can also select OTHER.
Default: OTHER
Port Map Used to select the state of the user ports. For each of the 4 user ports, the
following selections are available:
The port map is displayed only when the LA-110
is equipped with FXS or ISDN “S” ports. UNBLOCK – Enables traffic flow
through the corresponding port.
The type of user interface is displayed before the
map itself. BLOCK – Blocks traffic flow through
the corresponding port.
If you block a port, all its connections are
deleted. Default: UNBLOCK
CAS Signaling Table used to select the signaling information To change the signaling information,
sent and accepted for the user ports. move the cursor to the corresponding
field, and then type F or B until the
The signaling information is specified by
desired combination appears. The
indicating the combination of A, B, C, D
hexadecimal value of the selected
signaling bits corresponding to the following
combination is displayed next to its
signaling states:
binary value
Normal – the default (idle port) state. In general, Default: 0101
this state should be indicated by the same
combination used for the on-hook state.
Ringing – indicates that ringing must be Default: 0000
connected to the corresponding port.
On-Hook – indicates that the corresponding port Default: 0101
is on-hook.
Off-Hook – indicates that the corresponding port Default: 1111
is off-hook.
Reversed Polarity – indicates that the polarity of Default: 0100
the feed voltage supplied by the corresponding
port must be inverted.


CAS Signaling The CAS Signaling table is displayed only when After selecting the prescribed
(Continued) the LA-110 is equipped with FXS or E1 ports, combinations, select the Status of the
and the selected application identifier is LES corresponding signaling state:
using CAS for POTS & DSS1 for BRI (without
ACTIVE – Enables traffic flow through
ELCP)
NOT ACTIVE – Blocks traffic flow
through the corresponding port.
Default: NOT ACTIVE for Reversed
Polarity.
ACTIVE for all the other
Encoding Selection Selects the method used to control the voice MASTER/SLAVE – The profile used by
encoding profile to be used by LA-110 LA-110 is determined by the gateway
(LA-110 serves as slave to the
gateway). The default profile is
selected by means of the Encoding
Profile parameter. This is the normal
operating mode.
INDEPENDENT – LA-110 uses the
profile selected by means of the
Encoding Profile parameter. This
mode is mainly intended for
maintenance.
Default: MASTER/SLAVE
LES Connection Selects amount of bandwidth for LES Set according to the service type
Bandwidth connection. Amount of bandwidth depends on
the encoding profile, number of timeslots
reserved for voice, fax and D-channel.
The following formulas can be used in order to
calculate required bandwidth:
• LES bandwidth = (X + 64 + 64) × 53/44
(encoding profile 10, with compression)
• LES bandwidth = (X + 64 ) × 53/44
(encoding profile 9, with compression)
where X is voice bandwidth
(No of voice timeslots - 1) × 32 for profile 10
(No of voice timeslots - 1) × 64 for profile 9
64 – bandwidth for one fax channel
64 – bandwidth for one D-channel
53/44 – ATM overhead
Note: Additional bandwidth should be added for
ELCP traffic.


Encoding Profile Selects the default profile for the LA-110. The numbers of the supported
profiles and the concise description
The numbers of the profiles are consistent with
listed below:
Annex A of ATMF AF-VMOA-0145.000, which is
based on the definitions given in ITU-T Rec. 7: PCM – 64, ADPCM 32, 44 octet
I.366.2 and I.366.1. packets, and silence.
The only profile supported by an LA-110 8: PCM – 64, 44 octet packets, and
without support for ADPCM is profile 9. silence.
Therefore, for such LA-110 versions, the
Encoding Profile field cannot be changed. 9: PCM – 64, 44 octet packets,
without silence.
For your convenience, the abbreviations
indicating the main profile characteristics are 10: PCM – 64, ADPCM 32,44 octet
explained below (see Annex A of ATMF packets, without silence.
AF-VMOA-0145.000 for complete 11: PCM – 64, ADPCM 32,40 octet
specifications): packets, without silence.
PCM-64: the profile supports 64 kbps PCM 12: PCM – 64, ADPCM 32,40 octet
encoding in accordance with ITU-T Rec. G.711 packets, with silence.
(the companding law is selected by the Coding
Law field). Default: 10
ADPCM-32: the profile supports 32 kbps

ADPCM encoding in accordance with ITU-T
Rec. G.726 (the companding law is selected by
the Coding Law field).
## Octet Packets: the ## indicates the number
of payload octets per AAL2 cell supported by the
corresponding profile.
With/without silence: indicates whether the
profile supports or not silence suppression.
CPS Optimization Displays the structure of CPS (Common Part This field always displays SINGLE
Sublayer) PDUs (Protocol Data Units) supported CPS, NO OVERLAP
by LA-110, in accordance with ITU-T Rec.
I.363.2
DSP Gains Controls volume gain of the LA-110 DSP to 0 – 6, 12
overcome voice quality deterioration caused by
Default: 5
a possible mismatch in the voice compression
standards of LA-110 and a voice gateway.


AAL2 Shaping Selects the AAL2 shaping mode CBR Shaping for CBR service (see
mode Table C-3 for details)
VBR3 Shaping for VBR3 service.
Default: CBR
ISDN Activation Controls the Layer 1 ISDN port activation mode PERMANENT – The ISDN ports are
Mode always activated.
NON PERMANENT – The ISDN ports
are activated only when it is
necessary to connect to the user’s
equipment.
Default: NON PERMANENT
Note
The last line of the screen asks if you want to reset LA-110.
DEF TERM RESET
Purpose
Reset to 0 the codes sent to the terminal connected to the LA-110 CONTROL port
to perform the following terminal control operations:
• Clear the screen
• Move the cursor to the right by one position
• Return the cursor to the screen home position.
Syntax
DEF TERM RESET
Use
• Type:
DEF TERM RESET<Enter>
The screen is cleared and the cursor moves to the screen home position.
DEF TERM SET

Purpose
Define the codes sent to the terminal connected to the LA-110 CONTROL port to
perform the following terminal control functions:
• Clear screen
• Move cursor to screen home position
• Move cursor to the right by one position.

The codes can be automatically defined by selecting a supported terminal type, or

you can define your own codes. The terminal types supported by this command
are: VT-52, VT-100, TV-920, FREEDOM-100, FREEDOM-110, FREEDOM-220, or
any terminal which is compatible with one of the terminals listed above. However,
you can also enter manually the required sequences, by selecting the Other
option. The default codes used by the supported terminals are listed in Table C-43.
Table C-43. Terminal Control Sequences
Terminal Type
Function Freedom-100
TV- 920 VT-52 VT-100 Freedom-220 Other
Freedom-110
Clear Screen 1B2A0000 N/A 1B5B324A 1B2A0000 1B5B324A 00000000
Cursor Home 1E000000 1B480000 1B5B4800 1E000000 1B5B4800 00000000
Cursor Right 0C000000 1B430000 1B5B3143 0C000000 1B5B0143 00000000
Syntax
DEF TERM SET
Use
1. To define the terminal codes, type:
DEF TERM SET<Enter>
2. You will see the list of supported terminals. Enter the number of the desired
terminal, or type 7 for free selection of the codes, and then press <Enter>.
If you selected a supported terminal, after pressing <Enter> the command
is ended.
If Other is selected, you will see the codes entry section. This section
includes three separate lines, displayed one after the other.
Enter the appropriate hexadecimal digits and press <Enter> to
proceed to the next line.
Repeat the procedure until all the necessary values are changed, and
then press <Enter> to execute.
A typical screen showing all the three lines is shown below.

The following terminals are available:

1. VT100
2. TV920
3. TV52
4. VT52
5. FREEDOM 100/110 func
6. FREEDOM 220 func
7. Other
Enter a terminal number: 7

Clear screen : 00000000
Cursor home : 00000000
Cursor right : 00000000
Figure C-72. DEF TERM SET
DEF TIME
Purpose
Set the time for LA-110 internal clock. The 24-hour format is used.
Syntax
DEF TIME
Use
1. To set the time, type:
DEF TIME<Enter>
2. You will see the time data form which includes three lines, displayed one after
the other. A typical data form showing all the three lines is shown below.
Hour : 11
Minute : 01
Second : 09
Figure C-73. DEF TIME
3. Bring the cursor to the first field to be changed.

4. To change the selected field, type F to increase and B to decrease the
displayed values. When done, press <Enter> to move to the next field.
5. Set the time about one minute beyond the current time, and then press
<Enter> at the correct instant.

DEF USER
Purpose
Configure the physical layer characteristics of the LA-110 user port(s). This
command is necessary to define the operating conditions of the ports.
The parameters defined by this command depend on the type of user port(s)
installed in the LA-110 unit (this depends on the ordered configuration):
4 analog voice ports with FXS interfaces
4 ISDN “S” BRI ports with NT or TE interfaces
One E1 port.
Syntax
DEF USER

1. To define the physical layer characteristics of the LA-110 user port, type:
DEF USER<Enter>
2. You will see the first section of the user port configuration form. The user port
type is indicated in the header.
The command is ended, and its result is displayed: either The interface was
added successfully, or a message that explains the reason for rejecting your
command.
The following sections provide configuration procedures for the various types of
user ports.
Use – FXS User Ports

A typical screen for an LA-110 with FXS interfaces is shown below.
FXS CONFIGURATION
Gains
Coding law Tx Rx
A Law 0 dBm -4 dBm
Figure C-74. DEF USER – FXS
Table C-44 lists the configuration parameters available for FXS ports.

Table C-44. DEF USER – Command Parameters for FXS User Ports

Coding Law Displays the companding law currently Default: A law
configured by means of the DEF SYSPARAMS
command
Gains – Tx Selects the nominal input level of the transmit -10, -8, -6, -4, -2, 0, 2, 4 and 5 dBm
path for each voice port.
Default: 0 dBm
The selected value must match the input level
expected from the user’s equipment
connected to the corresponding port (the
input level is determined by the user’s
equipment output level, less the attenuation
caused by the interconnecting cables)
Gains – Rx Determines the nominal output level of the -10, -8, -6, -4, -2, 0, 2, 4 and 5 dBm
receive (Rx) paths for each voice port.
Default: -4 dBm
The selected value must match the input level
expected by the user’s equipment connected
to the corresponding port
Use – ISDN User Ports

A typical screen for an LA-110 with ISDN “S” interfaces configured to operate in
the NT mode and equipped with echo canceller or ADPCM voice compression
(ordering option) is shown below.
ISDN CONFIGURATION
Port Index in the Interface:  1  2  3  4 
Channel :  B1 B2  B1 B2  B1 B2  B1 B2 
Echo canceling :  on on  on on  on on  on on 
Phantom :  Enable  Enable  Enable Enable 
Figure C-75. DEF USER – ISDN
The screen includes a table that displays all the four ports and the corresponding B
channels, and enables selecting the configuration parameters for each port and B
channel. Table C-45 lists the configuration parameters available for the ISDN
ports.

Table C-45. DEF USER – Command Parameters for ISDN User Ports

Echo Canceling Controls the use of echo canceling for the ON The echo canceller is enabled.
corresponding B channel.
OFF The echo canceller is disabled.
This field is displayed only when LA-110 is
Default: ON
equipped with the optional echo canceller, or
supports voice compression (ADPCM)
Phantom Controls the supply of feed power to the ENABLE The port provides feed power
user’s ISDN termination device connected to to the user’s equipment.
DISABLE The supply of feed power is
The appropriate selection depends on the disabled.
user’s ISDN termination device: always
Default: ENABLE
disable this option if feed power is not
needed.
This field is displayed only for the LA-110
ISDN ports configured as NT interfaces
Note After changing the Echo Canceling parameters, LA-110 must be restarted. You are
prompted to confirm the change: type Y to restart.
Use – E1 User Port

A typical screen for an LA-110 with E1 user interface is shown below. The user
interface type is shown in the header.
E1 Interface – USER side
-------------------------
Physical Layer :
------- --------- -------------------
Non-multi-frame (G.723N) HDB3 30 DB
--------------- --------- -----
FAST (1 sec) 7e off
----------------------
0.5 sec
Figure C-76. DEF USER – E1
Table C-46 lists the configuration parameters for the E1 port.

Table C-46. DEF USER – Command Parameters for E1 User Port

Framing Determines the framing mode of the E1 port MULTI-FRAME (G732S) – 256S
(16 frames per multiframe). Always select
this mode for CAS applications.
NOT MULTI-FRAME (G732N) – 256N
(2 frames per multiframe).
UNFRAMED E1 (G.703) – Unframed
operation: the user port handles the E1
signal as a bit stream. This option is
available only when AAL1 is configured
by means of the DEF SYSPARAMS
command.
E1 UNI (Not Multi-frame) – E1 UNI
transparent non-multiframe operation
E1 UNI (Multi-frame) – E1 UNI
transparent multiframe operation
Default: NOT MULTI-FRAME (G723N)
Line Code Displays the E1 line code HDB3
AMI
Default: HDB3
Receiver Sensitivity Determines the maximum attenuation of the 30 dB Up to 30 dB relative to the
receive signal that can be compensated for by nominal transmit level (0 dB).
the E1 interface receive path, to obtain the This is the value required for
BER performance required by the standards LTU interfaces.
12 dB Up to 12 dB relative to the
nominal transmit level (0 dB).
This is the value required for
DSU interfaces.
Default: 30 dB
Synchronization Used to change the frame synchronization CCITT – In accordance with ITU-T Rec.
algorithm, to reduce the time required for the G.706.
E1 port to return to normal operation after 62411 (10 SEC) – Similar to the
local loss of synchronization. requirements of AT&T TR-62411 (after
This field is not displayed when the 10 seconds).
UNFRAMED E1 (G.703) mode is selected FAST (1 SEC) – After 1 second.
Default: FAST (1 SEC)

Table C-47. DEF USER – Command Parameters for E1 User Port

Idle Code Selects the code transmitted to fill idle 00 to FF (hexa).
(unused) timeslots in the frames transmitted Default: 7E
through this user port.
CRC-4 Controls the use of the CRC-4 function, ON CRC-4 function enabled.
which enables the collection of performance OFF CRC-4 function disabled.
diagnostic data.
Default: OFF
Signaling Sample Selects the sampling time for the 100 msec, 200 msec, 0.5 sec, 1.0 sec,
Time channel-associated signaling information. 1.5 sec, 2.0 sec
This field is displayed when the MULTI- Default: 0.5 sec
FRAME (G732S) framing mode is selected
Note After changing between the UNFRAMED mode to one of the other framing modes,
LA-110 must be restarted. You are prompted to confirm the change: type Y to
restart.
DEL BP
Purpose
Delete the existing bridge port and its VLAN members. The bridge port is
identified by its index: LAN or 1–16.
The DEL BP command is accepted only when the LAN port is configured to
Syntax
DEL BP
Use
1. To delete an existing bridge port, type:
DEL BP<Enter>
2. You will be prompted to select the port index: LAN or 1–16.
Press F or B to select the desired option, and then press <Enter>.
3. If a bridge port with the specified number exists, LA-110 displays confirmation
message. A typical display is shown below.
Index: 1
Note: The Bridge Port and all its VLAN Members will be deleted. Do you want
to continue (Y/N)?
Figure C-77. DEL BP
4. Type Y and press <Enter> to confirm the bridge port deletion.

DEL BRIDGE INTERFACE
Purpose
Delete the parameters of a WAN interface (ATM connection) of the bridge serving
the LA-110 LAN port.
The bridge interface is identified by means of its index number, in the range of 1
to 16. You can use the DSP BRIDGE INTERFACE command to display information
on the existing bridge interfaces, and identify the desired interface.
The DEL BRIDGE INTERFACE command is accepted only when the LAN port is
configured to operate in the bridge mode.
Syntax
DEL BRIDGE INTERFACE or DEL BRIDGE IF
Use
1. To delete an existing bridge interface, type:
DEL BRIDGE INTERFACE<Enter> or DEL BRIDGE IF<Enter>
2. You will be prompted to enter the desired index number: type the appropriate
number, in the range of 1 to 16, and then press <Enter>.
3. If a bridge interface with the specified number exists, LA-110 displays its
parameters, followed by Please wait… A typical display is shown below.
Cont Bit Time-Since-
Index VPI.VCI Check Rate MDCR SCR PCR MBS Active Last-Change
- - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - -
1 0.111 off-two way VBR - - 10 5452 1 on 0:00:46
Figure C-78. DEL BRIDGE INTERFACE
4. After a short delay, you will see a message that confirms the specified bridge
interface has been deleted.
DEL BUNDLE
Purpose
Delete an existing timeslot bundle. This command is accepted only when LA-110
has an E1 user port.
Each bundle is identified by its index number. You can use the DSP BUNDLE
command in the All mode to display information on all the existing bundles, and
identify the desired one.
If the selected bundle is associated with a connection, deleting the bundle will also
automatically delete the connection defined for that bundle.
Syntax
DEL BUNDLE

Use
1. To delete an existing bundle, type:
DEL BUNDLE<Enter>
You will be prompted to enter the bundle index: type the corresponding
number and then press <Enter>.
If a bundle with the specified index number exists, you will see its
configuration. Refer to the ADD BUNDLE command for a description of
the displayed information.
After the data form describing the bundle configuration, if no connection is
defined for the selected bundle, you will see a message that confirms the
deletion of the selected bundle.
However, if a connection is defined for the bundle, you are requested to
confirm its deletion. A typical message is shown below.
A connection is using this bundle and will be deleted.
Do you wish to continue ? (Y/N)
Figure C-79. DEL BUNDLE
To abort, type N. This ends the command without deleting neither the
bundle, nor its connection.
To confirm, type Y. You will see a confirmation message for the deletion of
the bundle and its connection, for example:
Connection and bundle number 2 on the User side were deleted
Figure C-80. DEL BUNDLE – Confirmation
DEL CONN DATA
Purpose
Delete a selected connection defined on the LA-110 data port. This command is
accepted only if the LA-110 has a data port.
Each connection is identified by its index number. You can use the DSP CONN
DATA command to display the list of connections defined on the data port, and
find the index of the connection to be deleted.
Syntax
DEL CONN DATA
Use
1. To delete an existing connection defined on the LA-110 data port, type:
DEL CONN DATA<Enter>
You will be prompted to enter the connection index: type the
corresponding number and then press <Enter>.

If a connection with the specified index number exists, you will see its
configuration parameters (for a description of the displayed parameters,
refer to the ADD CONN DATA command).
After the configuration parameters screen, you will see a message that
confirms the deletion of the selected connection.
2. Type the desired connection number, and then press <Enter>.
LA-110 displays the parameters of the deleted connection followed by
confirmation message.
DEL CONN USER
Purpose
Delete a selected connection defined on the user port installed in the LA-110. The
LA-110 may be equipped either with one E1 interface, four FXS interfaces, or four
ISDN “S” interfaces.
Each connection is identified by its index number. You can use the DSP CONN
USER command to see the list of connections defined on the specified port, and
find the index of the connection to be deleted.
Syntax
DEL CONN USER
Use
1. To delete an existing connection defined on the LA-110 user port, type:
DEL CONN USER<Enter>
2. The steps needed to indicate the desired connection depend on the user port
interface type, as explained below:
For an E1 port, enter the desired connection index number and then press
<Enter>.
For a voice port (FXS or ISDN), the appropriate connection is automatically
selected when you select the port number that uses the desired connection.
Select the port number, 1 to 4, by pressing the F or B key, and then confirm
by pressing <Enter>.
After selecting the desired connection number, LA-110 displays the
parameters of the connection to be deleted, followed by Please wait….
and a deletion confirmation message. Typical screens are shown below.
Please wait …..
Connection 3 on the user side was deleted

or

Please wait …..

The connection on port 2 on the USER interface was deleted (D Channel)
Please wait …..

The connection on port 2 on the USER interface was deleted (B1 Channel)
Please wait …..

The connection on port 2 on the USER interface was deleted (B2 Channel)
or
Cont Time Since

Index VPI.VCI CID Check Active Canceling Port# Last Change
- - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - -
1 1. 0 1 off-two-way on Enable - - 0:00:35
Index On-Hook Off-Hook Mask

- - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - -
1 0101 1111 1111
Figure C-81. DEL CONN USER
DEL DHCP
Purpose
Delete DHCP address pools. You can select an individual pool, or delete all the
DHCP address pools currently defined on LA-110.
Each DHCP address pool is identified by means of its index number, in the range
of 1 to 10. You can use the DSP DHCP command to display information on
existing DHCP address pools.
The DEL DHCP command is accepted only when at least one DHCP address pool
is defined (see the ADD DHCP command for prerequisite conditions).
Syntax
DEL DHCP

Use
1. To delete one or more DHCP address pools, type:
DEL DHCP<Enter>
You will be prompted to select the delete mode: all or individual. Press F
or B to select the desired option, and then press <Enter>.
After selecting all and pressing <Enter>, LA-110 deletes all the DHCP
address pools currently defined on the LA-110, and then displays All
DHCP Pools were successfully deleted.
After selecting individual, type the desired index number, in the range
of 1 to 10, and then press <Enter>. If a DHCP address pool with the
specified number exists, LA-110 deletes it and displays a confirmation
message.
DEL FW
Purpose
Delete the firewall security.
Syntax
DEL FW
Use
1. To delete a firewall, type:
DEL FW<Enter>
LA110>del fw
The options are :

A. Delete the Firewall.
B. Delete all the Rules in the Firewall.
C. Delete a single Rule in the Firewall.
You choose (A/B/C): a
Are you sure ?(Y/N) y
Firewall was deleted successfully.
Figure C-82. DEL FW

LA110>del fw
The options are :

A. Delete the Firewall.
B. Delete all the Rules in the Firewall.
C. Delete a single Rule in the Firewall.
You choose (A/B/C): c
Rule Index : 1
Rule was deleted successfully.
Figure C-83. DEL FW – Delete Single Rule
DEL IP INTERFACE
Purpose
Delete the parameters of an IP interface.
IP router interfaces are identified by means of their index number, in the range of
1 to 11. You can use the DSP IP INTERFACE command to display information on
the existing router interfaces, and identify the desired interface.
Note that when one of the WAN interfaces is configured as an unnumbered
interface, you cannot delete the host interface (see also the ADD IP INTERFACE
command).
The DEL IP INTERFACE command is accepted only when the LAN port is
configured to operate in the router mode.
Syntax
DEL IP INTERFACE or DEL IP IF
Use
1. To delete an existing IP interface, type:
DEL IP INTERFACE<Enter> or DEL IP IF<Enter>
You will be prompted to enter the desired IP interface index number: type
the appropriate number, in the range of 1 to 11, and then press <Enter>.
2. If an IP interface with the specified number exists, LA-110 displays its
parameters, followed by Please wait…
After a short delay, you will see a message that confirms the specified IP
interface has been deleted.

DEL NAT
Purpose
Delete NAT entries. You can select an individual entry, or delete all the NAT
entries currently defined on the LA-110.
Each NAT entry is identified by means of its index number, in the range of 1 to 10.
You can use the DSP NAT command to display information on existing NAT entry.
The DEL NAT command is accepted only when at least one NAT entry is defined
(see ADD NAT for prerequisite conditions).
Note
When the NAT is disabled, LA-110 starts operating in the IPCP mode.
Syntax
DEL NAT
Use
1. To delete one or more NAT entries, type:
DEL NAT<Enter>
2. You will be prompted to select the delete mode: all or individual. Press F or
B to select the desired option, and then press <Enter>.
After selecting all and pressing <Enter>, LA-110 deletes all the NAT
entries currently defined on the LA-110, and then displays All NAT entries
were successfully deleted.
After selecting individual, type the desired index number, in the range of 1
to 10, and then press <Enter>. If a NAT entry with the specified number
exists, LA-110 deletes it and displays a confirmation message.
DEL NMS
Purpose
Delete a selected network management station.
You can use the DSP NMS command to find the index of the desired network
management station. The DEL NMS command is accepted only when at least one
NMS is defined (see ADD NMS for prerequisite conditions).
Syntax
DEL NMS
Use
1. Type:
DEL NMS<Enter>
2. You are prompted to enter the NMS index.
3. Type the desired NMS index number, in the range of 1 to 10, and then press
<Enter>. If an NMS with the specified number exists, LA-110 deletes it and
displays a confirmation message.

DEL PAT
Purpose
Delete PAT entries. You can select an individual entry, or delete all the PAT entries
currently defined on the LA-110.
Each PAT entry is identified by means of its index number, in the range of 1 to 10.
You can use the DSP PAT command to display information on existing PAT entry.
The DEL PAT command is accepted only when at least one PAT entry is defined.
Syntax
DEL PAT
Use
1. To delete one or more PAT entries, type:
DEL PAT<Enter>
2. You will be prompted to select the delete mode: all or individual. Press F or
After selecting all and pressing <Enter>, LA-110 deletes all the PAT entries
currently defined on the LA-110, and then displays All PAT entries were
successfully deleted.
to 10, and then press <Enter>. If a PAT entry with the specified number
exists, LA-110 deletes it and displays a confirmation message.
DEL PRI
Purpose
Delete the timeslot assignment for the E1 user port, when operating in the ISDN
PRI mode.
Syntax
DEL PRI
Use
• To delete the current PRI timeslot assignment, type:
DEL PRI<Enter>
DEL STATIC MAC ADDR

Purpose
Delete a selected static MAC address from the bridge forwarding table.
Each static MAC address is identified by means of its index number, in the range of
1 to 32. You can use the DSP STATIC MAC ADDR command to display
information on currently-defined static MAC addresses. This command is accepted
only when the LA-110 LAN port is configured as bridge (see DEF LAN command).

Syntax
DEL STATIC MAC ADDR
Use
1. To delete a selected static MAC address, type:
DEL STATIC MAC ADDR<Enter>
You are prompted to enter the desired static MAC address index.
2. Type the desired index number, in the range of 1 to 32, and then press
<Enter>. If a static MAC address with the specified number exists, LA-110
deletes it and displays a confirmation message.
DEL STATIC ROUTING
Purpose
Delete a selected static route from the IP router routing table.
Each static route is identified by means of its index number, in the range of 1 to
32. You can use the DSP STATIC ROUTING command to display information on
currently-defined static routes.
This command is accepted only when the LAN port is configured in the router
mode (see DEF LAN command).
Syntax
DEL STATIC ROUTING
Use
1. To delete a selected static route, type:
DEL STATIC ROUTING<Enter>
2. Enter the static route index number, in the range of 1 to 32, and then press
<Enter>.
If a static route with the specified number exists, LA-110 displays its
configuration parameters. A typical form is shown below.
Static Routing Address Table
Static
Index IP Mask Metric Port Nhop IP
-----------------------------------------------------------------
5 2.2.3.8 255.255.255.0 1 1 1. 2. 3. 5
Figure C-84. DEL STATIC ROUTING
3. After displaying the route details, the LA-110 deletes it and displays a
confirmation message.

DEL VLAN MEMBER
Purpose
Disconnect a VLAN from one of the bridge ports.
The DEL VLAN MEMBER command is accepted only when the LAN port is
Syntax
DEL VLAN MEMBER
Use
1. To disconnect a VLAN from the bridge port, type:
DEL VLAN MEMBER <Enter>
2. You will be prompted to select the port index (LAN or 1–16).
Press F or B to select the port index, and then press <Tab> to proceed to the
next field.
3. Enter the ID of the VLAN that you intend to delete (1–4094) and press
<Enter> to complete deletion. A typical display is shown below.
Bridge Port Number VLAN ID
------------------ -------
LAN 1
Figure C-85. DEL VLAN MEMBER
DSP ADDR ATM
Purpose
Display the VPI.VCI and IP address used to connect to the SNMP agent of LA-110
through the main link, and the state of the connection.
Syntax
DSP ADDR ATM
Use
• To display the ATM management information, type:
DSP ADDR ATM<Enter>
The corresponding data form will then be displayed. A typical form is
shown below.

MNGT: VPI.VCI - 0. 25
State - Not active
IP Address - 1. 2. 3. 4
DHCP Client - Disable
Cont Check - off-two way
Bit rate - UBR
PCR - 80
PLB status - Off
Figure C-86. DSP ADDR ATM
The display fields are similar to the fields in the DEF ADDR ATM command.
DSP ALM
Purpose
Display LA-110 alarm information. Two display options are available:
• Display of all the alarms stored in the alarm buffer. This buffer can contain up
to 200 alarms.
• Display only new alarms (alarms detected after the last time alarms have been
displayed).
Syntax
DSP ALM
Use
1. To display all the alarms stored in the alarm buffer, type:
DSP ALM<Enter>
2. To display only the new alarms, type:
DSP ALM F<Enter>
Display Syntax
The contents of the alarm buffer will be displayed as a table with five columns:
• Alarm number
• Alarm text string (description)
• Alarm status
• Date and time of occurrence.
Appendix B lists the alarm messages displayed by the terminal.

ALARM 44 FRAME-RELAY PORT CH1 LINK DOWN OFF 2001-04-5 T09:32:37

ALARM 44 FRAME-RELAY PORT CH1 LINK DOWN ON 2001-04-5 T09:29:52
ALARM 18 IO2 E1 PORT CRC-4 ERROR 2001-04-5 T08:51:25
Figure C-87. DSP ALM
DSP ARP TABLE

Display the ARP table of the LA-110 IP router.
This command is accepted only when the LA-110 LAN port is configured as router
(see DEF LAN command).
Syntax
DSP ARP TABLE
Use
1. To display the current contents of the ARP table, type:
DSP ARP TABLE<Enter>
You will see contents of the ARP table at the instant the LA-110 received
the command. A typical screen is shown below.
ARP TABLE
Index IP Address MAC Address
1 001.001.001.002 00.00.00.00.00.01
2 001.001.001.003 00.00.00.00.00.02
3 001.001.001.004 00.00.00.00.00.03
4 001.001.001.005 00.00.00.00.00.04
5 001.001.001.006 00.00.00.00.00.05
Figure C-88. DSP ARP TABLE
The screen displays the MAC address associated with each destination IP
address currently handled by the LA-110 IP router.
2. To refresh the display, send the command again.

DSP BP
Purpose
Display the currently defined bridge ports, their parameters, VCs and VLAN
priorities assigned to them.
The DSP BP command is accepted only when the LAN port is configured to
operate in the VLAN aware mode.
Syntax
DSP BP
• Type:
DSP BP<Enter>
You will be prompted to select the port index: LAN or 1–16.
LA-110 displays parameters of the selected bridge port. A typical display is
shown below.
Index: 1
PVID :1
Accept frame type :Tagged only
Ingress filtering : Enable
Bound Bridge IF:

0 1 2 3 4 5 6 7
-------- ----------------
1 Y Y N N N N N N
5 N N Y Y N N N N
Figure C-89. DSP BP
DSP BRIDGE INTERFACE
Purpose
Display the parameters of WAN interfaces (ATM connections) of the bridge serving
the LA-110 LAN port. You can display an individual interface, or all the currently
defined bridge interfaces.
Each bridge interface is identified by means of its index number, in the range of 1
to 16.
The DSP BRIDGE INTERFACE command is accepted only when the LAN port is
configured to operate in the bridge mode.

Syntax
DSP BRIDGE INTERFACE or DSP BRIDGE IF
Use
1. To display bridge interface parameters, type:
DSP BRIDGE INTERFACE<Enter> or DSP BRIDGE IF<Enter>
2. You will be prompted to select the display mode: all or individual. Press F or
ETHERNET Interface
- - - - - - - - - -
Display mode : all
Figure C-90. DSP BRIDGE INTERFACE
After selecting all, LA-110 displays a table listing the parameters of all the
existing bridge interfaces. A typical display is shown below.
- - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - -
1 0.111 off-two way VBR - - 10 5452 1 on 0:00:09
2 0.114 off-two way VBR - - 200 5452 1 on 0:00:09
Index LB Operation LB Threshold LB Indication

--------------------------------------------------
1 off N/A N/A
2 off N/A N/A
Figure C-91. DSP BRIDGE INTERFACE – Continued
to 16, and then press <Enter>. If a bridge interface with the specified
number exists, LA-110 displays its parameters.
DSP BUNDLE
Purpose
Display the currently defined bundles and the timeslots connected to each bundle.
This command is accepted only when LA-110 has an E1 user port, and the LA-110
configuration supports bundles (see prerequisites in the ADD BUNDLE command).
Syntax
DSP BUNDLE
Use
1. Type:
DSP BUNDLE<Enter>

You will be prompted to select the display mode: all or individual. Press F
After selecting all, LA-110 displays all the currently defined bundles. A
typical display is shown below.
Tx and Rx time slots
Index 1 31
----- -------------------------------
1 ...!!!............!..!.........
2 !.......!..!...................
3 .......................!!!.....
Figure C-92. DSP BUNDLE
For each bundle, the display graphically indicates the status of each timeslot
by means of the following symbols:
Timeslot not connected to the bundle: represented by a dot
Timeslot connected to the bundle: represented by an exclamation
mark.
to 31, and then press <Enter>. If a bundle with the specified number
exists, LA-110 displays its parameters.
DSP COMMUNITY
Purpose
Display the community strings used for SNMP management.
This command is not available during Telnet sessions.
Syntax
DSP COMMUNITY
Use
• Type:
DSP COMMUNITY<Enter>
The community names list is displayed. A typical display appearing on a
supervision terminal is shown below.
SNMP read-only community: public
SNMP read-write community: private
SNMP trap community: public
Figure C-93. DSP COMMUNITY

DSP CONN DATA

Purpose
Display the parameters of the connections defined on the LA-110 data port.
This command is accepted only when the LA-110 has a data port.
Syntax
DSP CONN DATA
Use
1. Type:
DSP CONN DATA<Enter>
You will see the current application mode of the data port: Frame Relay or
CBR data (AAL1 stream), followed by a prompt to select the display mode:
all or individual.
CBR Data Display

A typical screen for a data port configured for the AAL1 Stream mode is
shown below.
CBR DATA Interface
- - - - - - - - - -
Display mode : all
Figure C-94. DSP CONN DATA (CBR Data)
2. Press F or B to select the desired display option, and then press <Enter>.
existing data port connections. A typical display for a data port operating in
the AAL1 stream mode is shown below.
CBR DATA Interface
- - - - - - - - - -
Display mode: all
Rx Tx
bytes/ bytes/ Connection Pointer Cont
Index VPI.VCI cell cell Type Parity Check
1 12.0 47 47 Structured (signal transport) N/A on-two-way
Time Since
Index LB Operation LB Threshold LB Indication active Last Change
1 off N/A N/A on 0:00:05
Figure C-95. DSP CONN DATA (CBR Data, All) – Continued
After selecting individual, type the desired connection index number, in

the range of 1 to 16, and then press <Enter>. If a connection with the
specified number exists, LA-110 displays its parameters.
For details on the parameters displayed on the data form, refer to the ADD CONN
DATA command.

Frame Relay Display

Figure C-96 and Figure C-97 illustrate the data port connections for all or individual
Frame Relay connections defined on the data port. For details on the parameters
displayed on the data form, refer to the ADD CONN DATA command.
=====================
Display mode : all

-------------------------------------------------------------------------
1 16 0. 1 convert convert service --- off-two way
Bit Time-Since-
Index Mode FECN rate MDCR SCR PCR MBS Last-Change Active
-------------------------------------------------------------------------
1 transparent convert UBR ---- ---- 5452 ---- 0:00:14 on
Figure C-96. DSP CONN DATA (Frame Relay, All)


=====================
Display mode : individual
Index : 1

------------------------------------------------------------------------
Bit Time-Since-
Index Mode FECN rate MDCR SCR PCR MBS Last-Change Active
-------------------------------------------------------------------------

--------------------------------------------------
1 off N/A N/A
Figure C-97. DSP CONN DATA (Frame Relay, Individual)
DSP CONN USER
Purpose
Display the parameters of the connections defined on the user port installed on
LA-110.
The parameters displayed on the data form depend on the type of user port: FXS,
ISDN or E1, and on the port configuration.
Syntax
DSP CONN USER

1. To display the parameters of the connections defined on the user port installed
on the LA-110, type:
DSP CONN USER<Enter>

You will see the user port interface, followed by a prompt to select the
display mode: all or individual. A typical display for an LA-110 with E1
user port is shown below.
- - - - - - - - - -
Display mode : all
Figure C-98. DSP CONN USER – E1
2. Press F or B to select the desired option, and then press <Enter>.

existing user port connections. Typical displays for the various types of user
ports are shown below.
After selecting individual, type the desired port index number, in the range
supported by the corresponding type of user port, and then press <Enter>.
If connections for the specified number exist, LA-110 displays their
parameters.
For details on the parameters displayed on each data form, refer to the ADD
CONN USER command.
Use – ISDN Ports

A typical connection data form for all the connections defined on the ISDN ports is
shown below. Note that the information for each channel (B1, B2 and D) of each
port is presented in three separate lines.
ISDN Interface
Display mode : all
------------------------------------------------------------------------
1 0. 38 N/A off-two way on D Channel 1 0:01:25
2 0. 38 N/A off-two way on B1 Channel 1 0:01:25
Figure C-99. DSP CONN USER – ISDN – All Connections

A typical connection data form for a selected connection defined on an ISDN port
is shown below.
ISDN Interface

-------------------------------------------------------------------------
Figure C-100. DSP CONN USER – ISDN – Selected Connection
Use – FXS Ports

A typical connection data form for all the connections defined on the FXS ports is
shown below.
Cont Time Since
- - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - -
1 0 . 38 16 off-two way on 1 0:00:14
2 0 . 38 17 off-two way on 2 0:00:14
3 0 . 38 18 off-two way on 3 0:00:14
4 0 . 38 19 off-two way on 4 0:00:14
Figure C-101. DSP CONN USER – FXS – All Connections
Use – E1 User Port

A typical display for the E1 port, when using CES over AAL1, is shown below.


- - - - - - - - - - - -
Display mode: individual
Index: 1
bytes/ bytes/ Cont Conn Time Since
Index VPI.VCI CID cell cell Check Type Active Last Change
1 1. 0 -- 47 47 on-two-way CES on 0:00:12
Pntr Idle Sig (AB) Bits LB LB Fail LB Fail

Sig Pointer Parity Tx Rx Operation Threshold Indication
no Disable N/A --- --- off N/A N/A
1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 10 11 12 13 14 15
yes no no no no no no no no no no no no no no
16 17 18 19 20 21 22 23 24 25 26 27 28 29 30 31
2003-05-18T14:19:10
Figure C-102. DSP CONN USER – E1
DSP DATA
Purpose
Display the data port configuration.
This command is accepted only when the LA-110 has a data port.
Syntax
DSP DATA
Use
• To display information on the data port configuration, type:
DSP DATA<Enter>
You will see the current application mode of the data port: Frame Relay or
CBR data (AAL1 Stream), followed by the data port mode configuration
form. The information displayed depends on the data port application
mode.
A typical display for a data port using the AAL1 Stream mode is shown
below.

CBR DATA Interface

- - - - - - - - - - - - -
Physical Interface : V.35

Application : AAL1 Stream
Clock : DCE
Control Signal : C = Obey, I = Obey Remote Signal
Baud Rate : 64k
Inverted Clock : Enable
Figure C-103. DSP DATA – AAL1 Stream
A typical display for a data port using the Frame Relay mode is shown
below.
- - - - - - - - - - - - -
Physical Interface : V.35

Clock : DCE
Protocol : None
CRC : 16 bit
CLLM : no
Baud Rate : 64k
Figure C-104. DSP DATA – Frame Relay
For details on the parameters displayed on the data form, refer to the DEF DATA
command.
DSP DEFAULT GATEWAY
Purpose
Display the default gateway and its operational status.
This command is accepted only when the LA-110 LAN port is configured as IP
router.
Syntax
DSP DEFAULT GATEWAY
Use
1. To display information on the current default gateway, type:
DSP DEFAULT GATEWAY<Enter>

A typical display for a LAN port is shown below. For a WAN port, the Next
Hop IP field is not displayed.
Port : LAN
Active : Enable
Next Hop IP: 1 .2 .3 .202
Figure C-105. DSP DEFAULT GATEWAY – LAN
DSP DHCP
Purpose
Display information on the currently defined DHCP address pools, and/or the
utilization of each individual address pool.
The DSP DHCP command is accepted only when at least one DHCP address pool
is defined (see ADD DHCP for prerequisite conditions).
When a router interface operates in the DHCP relay mode with the DHCP server
disabled, the DSP DHCP command displays information on the remote DHCP
server IP address, its maximum hop count and a router interface, through which
LA-110 sends requests to the remote server (see Figure C-108).
Syntax
DSP DHCP
Use – Display of DHCP Address Pools

1. To display information on DHCP address pools, type:
DSP DHCP<Enter>
You will be prompted to select the type of information you want: Pools or
Allocation Tables. Pools is the default selection.
2. To continue, press <Enter>.
You will see the first page of the DHCP address pools information. For
each pool, two consecutive lines are displayed. If the display extends
beyond the first screen, press any key to continue to the next one.
A typical pools information display is shown below. For a description of the
parameters appearing in this section, refer to the ADD DHCP command.

Display DHCP Server : Pools
Index Lowest IP Highest IP Mask

-------------------------------------------------------
1 1. 1. 1. 1 1. 1. 1. 11 222.222.222. 0
2 2. 2. 2. 2 2. 2. 2. 22 225.222.222. 0
Index Default Gateway Primary DNS Secondary DNS Lease Time

-------------------------------------------------------------------------
1 ------- ------- ------- 600 min
2 ------- ------- ------- 600 min
Figure C-106. DSP DHCP (Pools)
Use – Display of DHCP Address Pool Utilization

1. To display information on the current utilization of a DHCP address pool,
press F or B in Step 2 above to select Allocation Tables, and then press
<Enter>.
2. After selecting Allocation Tables, you are prompted to enter the desired index
number, in the range of 1 to 10. Type the desired number, and then press
<Enter>.
3. If a DHCP address pool with the specified number exists, after pressing
<Enter> LA-110 displays the first information screen section. This section
displays the parameters of the corresponding pool, in a format similar to that
shown above. For a description of the parameters appearing in this section,
refer to the ADD DHCP command.
4. To continue to the utilization section, press any key. If the utilization display
extends beyond the first page, press any key to continue to the next one.
A typical pools utilization display is shown below. Table C-48 lists the
parameters appearing in the pool utilization section.

Display DHCP Server : Allocation Table
Index : 1
Index Lowest IP Highest IP Mask

- - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - -
1 3. 0. 0. 1 3. 0. 0. 5 255. 0. 0. 0
Index Default Gateway Primary DNS Secondary DNS Lease Time
- - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - -
1 3. 0. 0. 9 4. 0. 0. 1 - - - - 600 min
Hit any key to continue…
IP Address MAC Address Time Left Status

- - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - -
3. 0. 0. 1 11.22.33.30.40.aa 420 in use
3. 0. 0. 2 0. 0. 0. 0. 0. 0 0 free
3. 0. 0. 3 0. 0. 0. 0. 0. 0 0 free
3. 0. 0. 4 0. 0. 0. 0. 0. 0 0 free
3. 0. 0. 5 0. 0. 0. 0. 0. 0 0 free
3. 0. 0. 6 0. 0. 0. 0. 0. 0 0 free
Figure C-107. DSP DHCP– DHCP Address Pool Utilization
Table C-48. Utilization Parameters for DHCP Address Pool Allocation Table
Parameter Function
IP Address Displays the IP addresses in the selected pool, from the lowest to the highest address in
the pool
MAC Address For each currently assigned IP address, displays the MAC address of the IP host using
that address.
0.0.0.0.0.0 indicates that the corresponding IP address is not assigned
Time Left For each currently assigned IP address, displays the lease time left for the IP host using
that address.
0 indicates that the corresponding IP address is not assigned
Status For each IP address, displays the current address status:
• Free – can be offered to a new user
• Offered – already offered to a user, cannot be offered to another
• In Use – the address previously offered to a user is now in active use by that user
• Forbidden – address is reserved, and therefore cannot be offered to any user

Interface Dhcp Server IP Address Max Hop Count

--------------------------------------------------
1 7. 7. 7. 7 16
2 99. 9. 9. 9 16
Figure C-108. DSP DHCP– DHCP Relay Mode
DSP FW
Purpose
Display firewall parameters. You can display all existing firewalls (see Figure C-109)
or you can display individual firewalls with all rules (see Figure C-110) or with
individual rules (see Figure C-111).
Syntax
DSP FW
Use
1. Type:
DSP FW <Enter>
Typical screens are shown below.
Display Firewall : all
Index IPInterface Direction FTPOption Printing Name

-----------------------------------------------------------------------------
1 LAN Inbound Enable Enable fw1
2 WAN 1 Inbound Enable Enable fw2…
Figure C-109. DSP FIREWALL (All)

LA110>dsp fw
Display Firewall : individual
Firewall Index : 2

-----------------------------------------------------------------------------
2 WAN 1 Inbound Enable Enable fw2
Display Rule : all
Display Rule Index : 1

Low High Low High
-------------------------------------------------------------------------
0. 0. 0. 0 255.255.255.255 0. 0. 0. 0 255.255.255.255
IP Protocol : TCP

Low High Low High
----------------------------------------------------
0 65535 0 65535

Low High Low High
-------------------------------------------------------------------------
0. 0. 0. 0 255.255.255.255 0. 0. 0. 0 255.255.255.255
IP Protocol : OTHER
Protocol Number : 2
Figure C-110. DSP FW (Individual, All Rules)

LA110>dsp fw
Display Firewall : individual
Firewall Index : 2

-----------------------------------------------------------------------------
2 WAN 1 Inbound Enable Enable fw2
Display Rule : individual
Rule Index : 3
Low High Low High
-------------------------------------------------------------------------
0. 0. 0. 0 255.255.255.255 0. 0. 0. 0 255.255.255.255
IP Protocol : ICMP
Message Type : Echo Request

Figure C-111. DSP FW (Individual, Individual Rules)
DSP FW LOG
Purpose
Display the firewall log. The log summarizes all unauthorized attempts to access
the unit via LAN or WAN interfaces that were prevented by the firewall.
Syntax
DSP FW LOG
• Type:
DSP FW LOG<Enter>
The firewall log screen appears:

18-2-4 9:13:7 - Blocked Frame on Interface: LAN

Destination IP: 173.19.163.39, Source IP: 171.14.163.194
Protocol: 1, Additional Data: 0x00000008
Figure C-112. DSP FW LOG
The following parameters are presented in the firewall log:

• Date of the event
• Time of the event
• Interface, where the access attempt occurred (LAN, WAN1–16)
• Destination IP – IP of the LAN or WAN interface
• Source IP – IP address from where the access attempt originated
• Protocol – Protocol identification according to the header of IP frame (ICMP,
UDP etc)
• Additional Data – Specifies protocol dependent information:
For ICMP (1), the field contains the ICMP Message Type.
For TCP (6) or UDP (17), the field contains the Destination Port and the
Source Port (in the given order).
If the packet is an IP Fragment and the protocol information is not available
the field contains the IP identification field.
In any other case it is empty (0).
The firewall log can be sent to the TFTP server via SEND FW LOG command.
Alternatively, it can be forwarded to a management station using HTTP protocol,
when the ConfiguRAD management session is in progress.
DSP IP INTERFACE
Purpose
Display the parameters of an IP interface defined for the LAN port router and its
operational status.
You can display the parameters of an individual interface, or all the currently
defined IP interfaces. Each IP interface is identified by means of its index number,
in the range of 1 to 11.
The DSP IP INTERFACE command is accepted only when the LAN port is
Syntax
DSP IP INTERFACE or DSP IP IF
Use
1. Type:
DSP IP INTERFACE<Enter> or DSP IP IF<Enter>
You will be prompted to select the display mode: all or individual. Press F

Ethernet Interface
- - - - - - - - - -
Display mode : all
Figure C-113. DSP IP INTERFACE
After selecting all, LA-110 displays a table listing the parameters of all
the existing IP interfaces. A typical screen is shown below.
IP Interfaces
===============
Index IP Mask RIP Encapsulation Attached

-----------------------------------------------------------------------------
1 8. 8. 8. 8 255.255.255. 0 None Ethernet LAN 1
2 6. 6. 6. 6 255.255.255. 0 None Ethernet LAN 2
3 2. 2. 2. 2 255.255.255. 0 None RFC 1483 WAN 1
Figure C-114. DSP IP INTERFACE (All)
After selecting individual, type the desired index number, in the range of
1 to 11, and then press <Enter>. If an IP interface with the specified
number exists, LA-110 displays its parameters. Displays are different for
the different IP interface types: LAN (Figure C-115), WAN (Figure C-116)
or host (Figure C-117).
ETHERNET Interface
==================
Index : 1
IP Interfaces
===============

-----------------------------------------------------------------------------
1 8. 8. 8. 8 255.255.255.0 None Ethernet LAN 1
Aging DHCP
Time Relay Timeout
----------------------------
5 min Disable 1 sec
Figure C-115. DSP IP INTERFACE (Individual LAN Interface)

ETHERNET Interface
==================

Index : 3

--------------------------------------------------------------------------
3 23. 0 off-two way UBR ---- ---- 5452 ---- on 0:09:00
Min Link
Index IP Mask RIP Encaps Auth Act SMN
----------------------------------------------------------------------------
3 2. 2. 2. 2 255.255.255. 0 None RFC 1483 N/A N/A N/A

--------------------------------------------------
3 off N/A N/A
Figure C-116. DSP IP INTERFACE (Individual WAN Interface)
ETHERNET Interface
==================
Index : 1
IP Interfaces
===============

-----------------------------------------------------------------------------
1 1. 1. 1. 1 255.255.255.252 ------ ------ HOST
Figure C-117. DSP IP INTERFACE (Individual Host Interface)
Refer to the ADD IP INTERFACE command for parameter descriptions.

DSP LAN
Purpose
Display the operating parameters of the LAN port.
Syntax
DSP LAN
Use
• To display information on the LAN port, type:
DSP LAN<Enter>
You will see the LAN port data form. The displayed information depends
on the operating mode of the LAN port: Ethernet Bridge, VLAN aware or
Ethernet Router.
Ethernet Bridge or VLAN aware Mode. A typical data form showing the
operating parameters of a LAN port configured as bridge is shown
below.
ETHERNET Interface
==================
Application : Ethernet bridge

Auto Negotiation : Enable
MAX Capability : 100BASE_T - full duplex mode
Default Type : 10BASE_T - half duplex mode
Detected Rate : 10Mbps
Detected Mode : Half Duplex
Bridge-Mode : Access only
Encapsulation : Bridged Ethernet without CRC
Aging-Time : 5 Minutes
PPPoE : Disable
Figure C-118. DSP LAN (Bridge)
Ethernet Router Mode. A typical data form showing the operating

parameters of a LAN port configured as router is shown below

ETHERNET Interface
==================

Auto Negotiation : Enable
MAX Capability : 100BASE_T - full duplex mode
Default Type : 10BASE_T - half duplex mode
Detected Rate : 10Mbps
Detected Mode : Half Duplex
Figure C-119. DSP LAN (Router)
The data forms present the parameters configured by means of the DEF LAN
command, and in addition presents the following parameters:
Detected Rate Displays the detected operating rate of the LAN connected
to the LA-110 LAN port: 10 Mbps or 100 Mbps
Detected Mode Displays the detected operating mode of the LAN
connected to the LA-110 LAN port: half-duplex or
full-duplex
Refer to the DEF LAN command for a description of the other parameters.
DSP MAC ADDR
Purpose
Display the MAC address of the LAN port, and any additional MAC addresses
contained in the bridge address table.
This command is accepted only when the LAN port is configured as bridge (see
DEF LAN command).
Syntax
DSP MAC ADDR
Use
• To display information on MAC addresses port, type:
DSP MAC ADDR<Enter>
You will see the MAC address data form. A typical display is shown below.

MAC ADDRESS TABLE

=================
LAN Interface MAC Address : 00 20 D2 20 96 BC
Index Address Type Interface VPI.VCI

----------------------------------------------------------
1 AABBCCDDEEF1 Static LAN 3.1
2 AABBCCDDEEF3 Static WAN 4.5
Figure C-120. DSP MAC ADDR (Ethernet Bridge Mode)
MAC ADDRESS TABLE

=================
Index Address Type Bridge Port VID

----------------------------------------------------------
1 220000000000 Static LAN 1
2 440000000000 Learned LAN 1
Figure C-121. DSP MAC ADDR (VLAN-Aware Mode)
The information displayed in the data form is as follows:

• The first line of the data form presents the MAC address of the LAN port.
• If the MAC address table is empty, you will see MAC Address table empty.
Otherwise, the MAC address of the LAN port is followed by a table with the
following parameters:
Index Number of entry in MAC address table.
Address MAC address of corresponding entry
Type Type of MAC address:
• Static: permanent user-defined MAC address (by means
of the ADD STATIC MAC ADDR LAN)
• Dynamic: learned MAC address. Such addresses may
appear and disappear during operation, therefore the
information on dynamic addresses is correct at the
instant the command is received by the LA-110.
To refresh the information, enter the command again.
Interface The bridge port through which the corresponding MAC
address is reached: LAN or WAN.
VPI.VCI VPI and VCI of the MAC address
Bridge Port Port of the internal bridge, through which the
corresponding MAC address is reached (VLAN-aware mode)
VID A VID, with which the corresponding MAC address has
arrived (VLAN-aware mode)

DSP NAT
Purpose
Display information on the currently-defined NAT entries.
This command is accepted only when the LAN port is configured as router (see
DEF LAN command).
Syntax
DSP NAT
Use
• To display information on the currently-defined NAT entries, type:
DSP NAT<Enter>
If NAT entries are currently defined, you will see the NAT entries table. A
Index Interface NAT Type IP Mask
- - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - -
1 LAN Dynamic Real: 3.3.3.3 255.255.255.252
Virtual: 1.4.1.0 255.255.255.0
2 WAN Dynamic Real: 3.3.3.8 255.255.255.252

Virtual: 1.2.0.0 255.255.0.0
Figure C-122. DSP NAT
Refer to the ADD NAT command for a description of the parameters displayed in
the NAT table.
DSP NETWORK
Purpose
Display information about the LA-110 network port.
Syntax
DSP NETWORK
Use
1. Display information about the LA-110 network port, type:
DSP NETWORK<Enter>
You will see the network port data form. The information displayed
depends on the network interface installed on the LA-110 (the interface
type, SHDSL, ADSL or E1, appears in the header):
A typical display for an SHDSL interface is shown below. The display
includes the parameters configured by means of the DEF NETWORK
command, and information on the framer implementation.

SHDSL Interface
ATM Parameters
---------------
Scramble : Enable
Idle cell CLP : 1 (ITU)
Shaping mode : HW Shaping, NCITS = 1
Physical Layer
--------------
Scramble : Enable
Traffic Shaping : UBR
Mode : CPE
Framer Type : Utopia L2
Power Backoff : Enable
NTR : NTR disabled
Standard : ANNEX A
Startup Margin : 0 db MarginSHDSL
Asym. PSD : Rate Asym R1 Disable
Line Probe Enable: Adaptive Rate
Min Rate : 200
Max Rate : 2312
Figure C-123. DSP NETWORK – SHDSL
A typical display for an ADSL interface is shown below. The display

includes the parameters configured by means of the DEF NETWORK
command, and information on the firmware version of the ADSL
chipset implementation.

ADSL Interface
ATM Parameters
--------------
Scramble : Enable
Physical Layer
---------------
Framing type : type 3
NTR : Disable
Trellis Coding : Enable
Transmission Mode : Frequency division
Standard Compliance : G.dmt
Maximum bits per Bin : 15
Start Tx Frequency Bin : 0
End Tx Frequency Bin : 0
Start Rx Frequency Bin : 0
End Tx Frequency Bin : 0
Tx Power Attenuation : 0 db
Pilot Tone request(PTR) : PTR enable
FW Version :
Figure C-124. DSP NETWORK – ADSL
E1 Interface - NETWORK side

===========================
Physical Layer
---------------
Link type : E1
System clock : Internal
Synchronization : FAST (1 sec)
Line code : HDB3
Framing : multi-frame (G.732S)
Receiver sensitivity : 30 DB
CRC-4 mode : on
ATM Parameters
---------------
Scramble : Enable
Traffic Shaping : UBR
PCR : 4529
Figure C-125. DSP NETWORK – E1

Refer to the DEF NETWORK command for a description of the displayed parameters.

DSP NMS
Purpose
Display information on the currently defined network management stations.
You may also use this command to find the index of a desired network
management station.
Syntax
DSP NMS
Use
• Type:
DSP NMS<Enter>
You will see the first line which has one field, Index: the default selection is
All, that is, display information on all the currently defined network
management stations.
To accept the default, press <Enter>
To display information on a specific NMS, type its index number and
then press <Enter>.
You will see the requested NMS information data form. A typical data form
for a single NMS is shown below.
Index : 1
Index IP Address Mask All Alarm traps

----------------------------------------------------
1 10.195. 40. 26 unmask manual
Figure C-126. DSP NMS
Refer to the ADD NMS command for a description of the parameters displayed in
the data form.
DSP PAT
Purpose
Display information on existing PAT definitions.
This command is accepted only when the LAN port is configured as router (see
DEF LAN command).
Syntax
DSP PAT

Use
• To display information on the current PAT definitions, type:
DSP PAT<Enter>
If PAT entries are currently defined, you will see the PAT entries table. A
Index Real IP Virtual IP Protocol

-----------------------------------------------------------------------------
1 2 .2 .2 .2 3 .3 .3 .3 TCP
User Defined (1 , 2)
2 2 .2 .2 .2 3 .3 .3 .3 UDP
User Defined (6 , 9)
3 2 .2 .2 .2 3 .3 .3 .3 ICMP
Message Type: ECHO
4 2 .2 .2 .2 3 .3 .3 .3 OTHER
Protocol Number 23
Figure C-127. DSP PAT
Refer to the ADD PAT command for a description of the parameters displayed in
the PAT entries table.
DSP PM AAL2
Purpose
Display the global AAL2 performance monitoring statistics for the uplink (network)
port. The displayed parameters cover the CPCS (common part convergence
sublayer) performance.
The performance statistics are continuously accumulated while the LA-110
operates. They can be cleared (reset to 0) using the CLR PM command. The
statistics are also cleared when the LA-110 is reset or powered up.
This command is relevant only when the LA-110 has been configured to use AAL2
(by means of the DEF SYSPARAMS command), and at least one connection has
been defined for the user port.
Syntax
DSP PM AAL2
Use
1. To display AAL2 performance monitoring statistics, type:
DSP AAL2<Enter>
If connections have been defined over AAL2, you will see the AAL2
performance monitoring statistics. A typical screen is shown below.

AAL2 Statistics
----------------
Seconds : 6859
CPCS Tx : 0
CPCS Rx : 0
CPCS PDU with Par Error : 0
CPCS PDU with Seq Error : 0
CPCS PDU with Incor OSF : 0
CPCS HEC Errors : 0
CPCS UUI Errors : 0
CPCS CID Errors : 0
Figure C-128. DSP PM AAL2 – Connections
If no connections have been defined over AAL2, you will see No information
for AAL2 Statistics.
The displayed information is correct at the time the command has been received
by LA-110. To refresh the display, repeat the command.
Display Format
The AAL2 statistics display starts with information on the current date and time,
followed by the number of seconds in the current day (24-hour interval). The
displayed parameters are described in Table C-49.
Table C-49. DSP PM AAL2 Parameters
Parameter Function
CPCS Tx Total number of CPCS PDUs (protocol data units) that have been transmitted
CPCS Rx Total number of CPCS PDUs that have been received
CPCS PDU with Par Error Total number of received CPCS PDUs in which parity errors have been
detected
CPCS PDU with Seq Error Total number of received CPCS PDUs in which sequence numbering errors
have been detected
CPCS PDU with Incor OSF Total number of received CPCS PDUs in which an incorrect OSF (offset field)
value, that is, the OSF is 48 or greater, has been detected
CPCS HEC Errors Total number of received CPCS PDUs in which transmission errors have been
detected by means of the HEC (header error control) field
CPCS UUI Errors Total number of received CPCS PDUs in which the UUI (user-user indication)
field contains a reserved value
CPCS CID Errors Total number of received CPCS PDUs in which the CID (channel identifier)
field contains an unexpected value (either a reserved value, or a value
exceeding the maximum allowed number)

DSP PM ATM
Purpose
Display the performance monitoring statistics for the physical layer of the ATM
network interface. The performance data does not depend on the network
interface type (ADSL or SHDSL).
operates and stored for up to one week. The collected performance statistics can
be cleared (reset to 0) using the CLR PM command. The statistics are also cleared
when LA-110 is reset or powered up.
Syntax
DSP PM ATM
Use
1. To display performance monitoring statistics for the ATM network interface
physical layer, type:
DSP PM ATM<Enter>
You will see the ATM physical layer performance statistics. A typical display
is shown below.
NETWORK ATM LAYER STATISTICS

============================
Current date : NOV. 23. 2004
Seconds : 254
Intervals : 0
Free bandwidth : 5281 cell/sec
ATM Sync :No Sync
Tx Total Rx Total Rx CLPI=1 Rx Discarded Rx HEC

Cells Cells Cells Cells Cells
---------------------------------------------------------------
1 second : 0 0 0 0 0
15 minutes : 0 0 0 0 0
24 hours * : 0 0 0 0 0
Figure C-129. DSP PM ATM

Use – F Option
1. To display the full performance statistics for the ATM network interface
DSP PM ATM F<Enter>
You will see the ATM physical layer full performance statistics. A typical
display is shown below.
NETWORK ATM LAYER STATISTICS
----------------------------
Seconds : 68
Intervals : 4

---------------------------------------------------------------
1 second : 0 0 0 0 0
15 minutes : 0 0 0 0 0
24 hours * : 0 0 0 0 0
-----------------------------------------------------------------------------
Interval 1: 0 0 0 0 0
Interval 2: 0 0 0 0 0
Interval 3: 0 0 0 0 0
Interval 4: 0 0 0 0 0
Week Statistics
----------------
---------------------------------------------------------------
Day 1: 0 0 0 0 0
Figure C-130. DSP PM ATM – F

Note
For LA-110 with E1 UNI interface this display also contains ATM statistics for the
user port.
Display Format
The display starts with information on the current date and time, the number of
seconds in the current day (24-hour interval) and the number of 15-minute
intervals for which statistics are available.
When the F (full) option is used, the display also presents the collected data for
each 15-minute interval within the last 24 hours, and for each 24-hour interval
within the last week.
The displayed parameters are described in Table C-50.

Table C-50. DSP PM ATM Parameters
Parameter Function
Tx Total Cells Total number of ATM cells that have been transmitted
Rx Total Cells Total number of ATM cells that have been received
Rx CLPI=1 Cells Total number of cells received with cell-loss priority indicator set
to 1 (cells may be discarded during congestion)
Rx Discarded Cells Total number of received cells that have discarded from any
reason
Rx HEC Cells Total number of received cells with headers containing errors, as
detected using with Header Error Control field
The performance parameters are provided for the following intervals:

• 1 second – the statistics collected during the last second
• 15 minutes – the statistics collected during the current 15-minute interval
• 24 hours –the statistics collected during the current 24-hour period. An
asterisk * following the 24 hours label indicates that data has not yet been
collected for a full 24-hour period (in this case, the number of intervals
displayed in the Intervals field of the header is less than 96).
Each interval line in the section following the 24 hours line displays data for one of
the previous 15-minute intervals of the current 24-hour period, starting with the
most recent interval (interval 1 always shows the most recent complete 15-minute
interval).
Each day line in the Week Statistics section displays the total data collected for
one of the previous 24-hour periods, starting with the most recent period
(interval 1 always shows the most recent complete 24-hour period).
DSP PM ADDR ATM
Purpose
Display the performance monitoring statistics for a dedicated management VCC.
Syntax
DSP PM ADDR ATM
Use
• To display performance monitoring statistics for a dedicated management
VCC, type:
DSP PM ADDR ATM<Enter>

DEDICATED MANAGEMENT CONNECTION STATISTICS

------------------------------------------
Current date : APR. 28, 2004
Seconds : 4294935735
VPI.VCI – 0.241
AAL5 Statistics
---------------
Tx Total Rx Total Tx Discarded Rx Discarded CRC Error
Frames Frames Frames Frames Frames
------------------------------------------------------------
1 second : 0 0 0 0 0
From start : 0 0 0 0 0
Tx Total Rx Total Rx Discarded

Cells Cells Cells
----------------------------------
1 second : 0 0 0
From start : 0 0 0
Current status : OFF
Figure C-131. DSP PM ADDR ATM
Display Format
The statistics display starts with information on the current date and time, followed
by the number of seconds in the current day (24-hour interval). The displayed
AAL5 statistics parameters are described in Table C-51.
DSP PM BRIDGE INTERFACE

Purpose
Display the performance monitoring statistics for a selected LA-110 bridge WAN
interface, and the current status of the interface.
This command is accepted only when the LAN port is configured to operate in the
bridge mode.

Syntax
DSP PM BRIDGE INTERFACE or DSP PM BRIDGE IF
Use
• To display performance monitoring statistics for a selected LA-110 bridge
WAN interface, type:
DSP PM BRIDGE INTERFACE<Enter> or DSP PM BRIDGE IF<Enter>
You will be prompted to enter the desired bridge interface index number:
type the appropriate number, in the range of 1 to 16, and then press
<Enter>.
If a bridge interface with the specified number exists, LA-110 displays its
performance monitoring information. A typical display is shown below.
ETHERNET INTERFACE STATISTICS
------------------------------
Seconds : 11011
Interface 1 on port: VPI.VCI – 1.255
AAL5 Statistics
---------------
------------------------------------------------------------
1 second : 0 0 0 0 0

Cells Cells Cells
----------------------------------
1 second : 0 0 0
From start : 0 0 0
Figure C-132. DSP PM BRIDGE INTERFACE
by the LA-110. To refresh the display, repeat the command.

Display Format
The AAL5 statistics display starts with information on the current date and time,
followed by the number of seconds in the current day (24-hour interval).
The selected bridge interface number, and the VPI and VCI of the ATM
connection used by it are also displayed.
Table C-51. DSP PM BRIDGE INTERFACE – AAL5 Statistics Parameters
Parameter Function
Tx Total Frames Total number of frames transmitted through the corresponding WAN interface
Rx Total Frames Total number of frames received through the corresponding WAN interface
Tx Discarded Frames Total number of frames intended for transmission through the corresponding
WAN interface, but discarded before transmission for any reason (including
congestion and buffer overflows)
Rx Discarded Frames Total number of frames received through the corresponding WAN interface, but
discarded during processing for any reason (including errors and buffer overflows)
CRC Error Frames Total number of frames received through the corresponding WAN interface in
which transmission errors were detected using the CRC information
Tx Total Cells Total number of AAL5 cells transmitted through the ATM connection serving the
corresponding WAN interface
Rx Total Cells Total number of AAL5 cells received through the corresponding WAN interface
Rx Discarded Cells Total number of AAL5 cells received through the ATM connection serving the
corresponding WAN interface, but discarded during processing for any reason
Current Status Displays the current status of the ATM connection serving the corresponding
WAN interface

• From Start – the statistics collected since the connection has been activated,
or from the last time the counters have been reset using the CLR PM
command.
DSP PM CONN AAL2

Purpose
Display performance monitoring statistics for a specific AAL2 connection (VCC).
You can use the DSP CONN USER command to display the list of connections
defined on the user port, and find the ATM connection (VCC) used by the desired
connection. If more than one connection is defined on one VCC, the DSP PM
CONN AAL2 command displays all existing connections sequentially.
statistics are also cleared when LA-110 is reset or powered up.

Syntax
DSP PM CONN AAL2
Use
1. To display performance monitoring statistics for a specific AAL2 connection,
type:
DSP PM CONN AAL2<Enter>
You will be prompted to enter the desired VP and VC identifiers for the
desired ATM connection (this must be a connection used by the user port).
2. Type the appropriate numbers, in the range of 0 to 31 and 1 to 255,
respectively, and then press <Enter>.
If a connection using the specified VCC exists, LA-110 displays its
performance monitoring statistics screen. A typical display is shown below.
Enter VP: 1 Vc: 000
CONNECTION STATISTICS
=====================
Seconds : 48

========================
Conn 1, Port USER, VPI.VCI.CID 1.0.1

CBR Statistics - 0.5 sec .

------------------------
Tx Total Rx Total Rx Total Rx Total Rx Total Ptr Parity
Cells Cells Seq Errors Resync SNP Errors Error
---------------------------------------------------------------
1 second : 0 0 0 0 0 0
From start : 0 0 0 0 0 0
AAL2 STATISTICS
---------------------
1 second From start
------------------------
In packets: 0 0
Out packets: 0 0
Parity errors: 0 0
Sequence number errors: 0 0
OSF errors: 0 0
HEC errors: 0 0
UUI errors: 0 0
CID errors: 0 0

=====================
Seconds : 73

========================
Conn 2, Port USER, VPI.VCI.CID 1.0.2

CBR Statistics - 0.5 sec .

------------------------
---------------------------------------------------------------
1 second : 0 0 0 0 0 0
From start : 0 0 0 0 0 0
AAL2 STATISTICS
---------------------
1 second From start
------------------------
In packets: 0 0
Out packets: 0 0
Parity errors: 0 0
OSF errors: 0 0
HEC errors: 0 0
UUI errors: 0 0
CID errors: 0 0
Figure C-133. DSP PM CONN AAL2

Display Format
The connection statistics display starts with information on the current date and
time, followed by the number of seconds in the current day (24-hour interval).
The VPI and VCI of the selected ATM connection, the index of the user port
connection using the corresponding ATM connection and the CID currently
assigned to that connection are also displayed.
The data form comprises two sections:
• CBR statistics section, for the LES traffic. The parameters displayed in this
section are described in Table C-52.
• AAL2 statistics section, for the AAL2 cells. The parameters displayed in this
command.
Table C-52. DSP PM CONN AAL2 Parameters – CBR Statistics Section
Parameter Function
Tx Total Cells Total number of AAL2 cells that have been transmitted for the corresponding
connection
Rx Total Cells Total number of AAL2 cells that have been received for the corresponding
connection
Rx Total Seq Errors Total number of sequence numbering errors that have detected in the cells received
for the corresponding connection
Rx Total Resync Total number of resynchronization events that occurred for the corresponding
connection
Rx Total SNP Errors Total number of SNP errors that have detected for the cells received for the
corresponding connection
Ptr Parity Error Total number of pointer errors detected in the cells received for the corresponding
connection
Table C-53. DSP PM CONN AAL2 Parameters – AAL2 Statistics Section
Parameter Function
Out Packets Total number of CPCS PDUs (protocol data units) that have been transmitted for the
corresponding connection
In Packets Total number of CPCS PDUs that have been received for the corresponding
connection
Parity Error Total number of CPCS PDUs received for the corresponding connection in which
parity errors have been detected
Sequence Number Total number of CPCS PDUs received for the corresponding connection in which
Error sequence number errors have been detected

Table C-53. DSP PM CONN AAL2 Parameters – AAL2 Statistics Section (Cont.)
Parameter Function
OSF Errors Total number of CPCS PDUs received for the corresponding connection in which an
incorrect OSF (offset field) value, that is, the OSF is 48 or greater, has been detected
HEC Errors Total number of CPCS PDUs received for the corresponding connection in which
transmission errors have been detected by means of the HEC (header error control)
field
UUI Errors Total number of CPCS PDUs received for the corresponding connection in which the
UUI (user-user indication) field contains a reserved value
CID Errors Total number of CPCS PDUs received for the corresponding connection in which the
CID (channel identifier) field contains an unexpected value (either a reserved value,
or a value exceeding the maximum allowed number)
DSP PM CONN DATA
Purpose
Display the performance monitoring statistics for a selected data port connection.
The information displayed on the screen depends on the data port application
mode: Frame Relay or AAL1 stream. For the Frame Relay mode, you can also
display the status of the ATM and Frame Relay connections.
When using the Frame Relay mode, use the DSP CONN DATA command to
display the connections defined on the data port and find the index of the desired
connection.
Syntax
DSP PM CONN DATA
Use
• To display the performance monitoring statistics for a selected data port
connection, type:
DSP PM CONN DATA<Enter>
When the data port is configured to use the AAL1 Stream mode, you will
see the performance statistics screen.
When the data port is configured to use the Frame Relay mode, you are
prompted to enter the desired connection index. Pressing <Enter>
displays the performance statistics screen for the selected connection.
Display Format for AAL1 Stream Application Mode

A typical display for the performance statistics collected when the data port
application mode is AAL1 Stream is shown below.

Current date : MAR. 05, 2002

Seconds : 4116
Connection 1 on port 1: VPI.VCI – 1.123
CBR Statistics
Tx Total Rx Total Rx Total Rx Total

Cells Cells Seq Errors SNP Errors
1 second : 0 0 0 0
From start : 34 0 0 0
Figure C-134. DSP PM CONN DATA
The display includes a header and a data section. The header includes the
following information on the connection:
• The current date and time, retrieved from the LA-110 internal real-time clock.
• The number of the seconds since the connection has been defined, or since
the last time the performance data has been cleared by entering the CLR PM
command.
The header is followed by information on the main connection parameters: the
port number on which the connection is defined (always 1) and the ATM
connection parameters (VPI and VCI).
The performance monitoring parameters section contains the CBR statistics,
described in Table C-52.
command.
Display Format for Frame Relay Application Mode

application mode is Frame Relay is shown below.
The connection statistics display starts with information on the current date and
time, followed by the number of seconds in the current day (24-hour interval).
The VPI and VCI of the ATM connection, the index of the user port connection
using the corresponding ATM connection and the Frame Relay DLCI using that
connection are also displayed.

The data form comprises two sections:

• AAL5 statistics section, for the ATM connection side. The parameters displayed
in this section are described in Table C-51.
• Frame Relay statistics section, for the Frame Relay side. The parameters
displayed in this section are described in Table C-54.
The performance parameters are provided for the 1 second and From Start
intervals.
Index : 1
FR CONNECTION STATISTICS
------------------------
Seconds : 12
Connection 1 on port 1: VPI.VCI – 1.234, FR DLCI – 122

AAL5 Statistics
---------------
------------------------------------------------------------
1 second : 0 0 0 0 0

Cells Cells Cells
----------------------------------
1 second : 0 0 0
From start : 0 0 0
Current Status : OFF

FR Statistics
-------------
Tx Total Rx Total Tx Discarded Rx Discarded
---------------------------------------------
1 second : 0 0 0 0
From start : 0 0 0 0
Tx FECN Rx FECN Tx BECN Rx BECN Tx DE Rx DE

Frames Frames Frames Frames Frames Frames
------------------------------------------------------------
1 second : 0 0 0 0 0 0
From start : 0 0 0 0 0 0
Current Status : OFF
Figure C-135. DSP PM CONN DATA – Frame Relay

Table C-54. DSP PM CONN DATA Command – Frame Relay Statistics Parameters
Parameter Function
Tx Total Frames Total number of Frame Relay frames transmitted through the corresponding data
port connection
Rx Total Frames Total number of Frame Relay frames received through the corresponding data
port connection
Tx Discarded Frames Total number of Frame Relay frames intended for transmission through the
corresponding data port connection, but discarded before transmission for any
reason (including congestion and buffer overflows)
Rx Discarded Frames Total number of Frame Relay frames received through the corresponding data
port connection, but discarded during processing for any reason (including errors
and buffer overflows)
Tx FECN Frames Total number of Frame Relay frames with FECN bit set transmitted through the
corresponding data port connection
Rx FECN Frames Total number of Frame Relay frames with FECN bit set received through the
Tx BECN Frames Total number of Frame Relay frames with BECN bit set transmitted through the
Rx BECN Frames Total number of Frame Relay frames with BECN bit set received through the
Tx DE Frames Total number of Frame Relay frames with DE bit set transmitted through the
Rx DE Frames Total number of Frame Relay frames with DE bit set received through the
Current Status Displays the current status of the Frame Relay connection using the
DSP PM CONN OAM DATA
Purpose
Display the OAM performance monitoring statistics for a selected connection on
the data port.
When using the Frame Relay mode, use the DSP CONN DATA command to
display the connections defined on the data port and find the index of the desired
connection.
Since OAM cells are processed by the ATM layer, the OAM performance
monitoring statistics do not depend on the interface type, nor on the application
mode of the data port.

Syntax
DSP PM CONN OAM DATA
Use
1. To display the OAM performance monitoring statistics for a selected data port
connection, type:
DSP PM CONN OAM DATA<Enter>
When the data port is configured to use the AAL1 Stream mode, you will
see the OAM performance statistics screen.
When the data port is configured to use the Frame Relay mode, you are
prompted to enter the desired connection index. Pressing <Enter> after
entering the desired index displays the performance statistics screen for
that connection.
CONNECTION OAM STATISTICS
-------------------------
Seconds : 8808
Connection 1 on port 1: VPI.VCI – 1.1, FR DLCI – 16
Tx Total Rx Total Loss of Total Total

AIS Cells AIS Cells Continuity Successful Failed
(seconds) Loopbacks Loopbacks
--------------------------------------------------------
1 second : 1 1 0 0 0
From start : 796 795 0 0 0
Tx Total Rx Total Tx Total Rx Total Tx Total Rx Total

RDI Cells RDI Cells Loopback Loopback Loopback Loopback
Requests Requests Responses Responses
---------------------------------------------------------------
1 second : 1 1 0 0 0 0
From start : 796 796 0 0 0 0
Min LB delay (msec) Max LB delay (msec) Avg. LB Delay (msec)
0 0 0
Figure C-136. DSP PM CONN OAM DATA

Note
The Min LB delay, Max LB delay and Avg. LB Delay counters are displayed only if a
periodic loopback is active.

Index : 1
-------------------------
Current date : OCT. 23, 2002
Seconds : 8
Connection 1 on port 1: VPI.VCI – 2.0

--------------------------------------------------------
1 second : 0 0 0 0 0

---------------------------------------------------------------
1 second : 0 0 0 0 0 0
From start : 0 0 0 0 0 0
0 0 0
Figure C-137. DSP PM CONN OAM DATA – AAL1 Stream

Note
Display Format
• The number of the seconds since the connection has been activated, or since
command.

The header is followed by information on the main connection parameters:

• For the AAL1 stream mode, these parameters include the port number on
which the connection is defined (always 1) and the VPI and VCI of the ATM
connection
• For the Frame Relay application mode, the connection parameters include the
VPI and VCI of the ATM connection, the index of the user port connection
using the corresponding ATM connection and the Frame Relay DLCI using that
connection.
The OAM performance monitoring parameters are explained in Table C-55.
The OAM performance parameters are provided for the following intervals:
command.
Table C-55. DSP PM CONN OAM DATA Parameters
Parameter Function
Tx Total AIS Cells Total number of VC-AIS cells transmitted through this data port connection
Rx Total AIS Cells Total number of VC-AIS cells received through this data port connection
Loss of Continuity Total loss of ATM connection continuity seconds for this data port connection
Total Successful Total number of OAM cells looped back in response to a loopback command
Loopbacks transmitted through this port connection
Total Failed Total number of OAM cells which were not be looped back after a loopback command
Loopbacks transmitted through this data port connection
Tx Total RDI Cells Total number of RDI cells transmitted through this data port connection
Rx Total RDI Cells Total number of RDI cells received through this data port connection
Tx Total Loopback Total number of OAM loopback requests transmitted through this data port connection
Requests
Rx Total Loopback Total number of OAM loopback requests transmitted through this data port connection
Requests
Tx Total Loopback Total number of OAM loopback responses transmitted through this data port
Responses connection
Rx Total Loopback Total number of OAM loopback responses received through this data port connection
Responses
Min LB Delay (msec) Minimum Round-Trip Delay (RTD) registered for a periodic loopback
Max LB Delay Maximum RTD registered for a periodic loopback
(msec)
Avg. LB Delay Average RTD registered for a periodic loopback
(msec)

DSP PM CONN OAM USER
Purpose
Display the OAM performance monitoring statistics for a selected user port
connection.
To see the list of connections defined on the specified user port and find the index
of the desired connection, use the DSP CONN USER command.
Since the OAM cells are processed by the ATM layer, the parameters collected for
OAM performance monitoring do not depend on the interface type, nor on the
application mode, of the user port installed on the LA-110 (FXS, ISDN or E1). The
differences among the statistics screens are as follows:
• The way the screens identify the user port connection
• The user port interface type displayed on the screen
• For ISDN screens, after selecting a port, you will see three separate screens, for
each channel (B1, B2 and D) of the port.
The OAM performance monitoring parameters are listed in Table C-55.
Syntax
DSP PM CONN OAM USER
Use
1. To display the OAM performance monitoring statistics for a selected user port
connection, type:
DSP PM CONN OAM USER<Enter>
2. Select the desired connection using one of the following methods:
For ISDN and FXS ports: display the desired port index, 1 to 4, by pressing
the F or B keys.
For E1 ports: type the desired connection number.
When ready, press <Enter> to display the performance statistics.
If the specified connection exists, LA-110 displays its OAM performance
monitoring statistics screen. Typical displays are shown below.
Each statistics display starts with information on the current date and time,
The VPI and VCI of the selected ATM connection, the index of the user
port connection using the corresponding ATM connection and the CID
currently assigned to that connection are also displayed, and are followed
by the user port interface type.

Display Format – ISDN Ports

The first page of a typical display for the OAM performance statistics collected for
a selected ISDN port is shown below.
The first page presents the statistics for the B1 channel of the selected port. Press
any key to continue to the next channel (B2 and then D) of the selected port.
All the screens are similar, except that the CID numbers displayed on the screen
may be different (depending on the application identifier), in which case the
numbers are sequentially assigned.

Seconds : 387
Connection 1 on User : VPI.VCI.CID – 1.1.16
ISDN Interface –User Side

1 second : 0 1 0 0 0
From start : 0 388 0 0 0

1 second : 1 0 0 0 0 0
From start : 388 0 0 0 0 0
0 0 0
Figure C-138. DSP PM CONN OAM USER – ISDN

Note

Display Format – FXS Ports

A typical display for the OAM performance data collected for an FXS port is shown
below.

Seconds : 433
Connection 1 on User : VPI.VCI.CID – 3.3.20
FXS Interface – User Side

1 second : 0 0 0 0 0

1 second : 0 0 0 0 0 0
From start : 0 0 0 0 0 0
0 0 0
Figure C-139. DSP PM CONN OAM USER – FXS

Note
Display Format – E1 Ports

A typical display for the OAM performance data collected for an E1 port is shown
below.

Index: 1

Seconds : 12
Connection 1 on the IO2 port: VPI.VCI.CID – 2.2.20
E1 Interface – User Side

1 second : 0 0 0 0 0

1 second : 0 0 0 0 0 0
From start : 0 0 0 0 0 0
0 0 0
Figure C-140. DSP PM CONN OAM USER – E1

Note
DSP PM CONN USER
Purpose
Display performance monitoring statistics for a specified connection defined on an
LA-110 user port (E1, FXS or ISDN, in accordance with the installed interface).
To see the list of connections defined on the specified data port and find the index
of the desired connection, use the DSP CONN USER command.

Since the connections are processed by the ATM layer, the parameters collected
for connection performance monitoring do not depend on the interface type, nor
on the application mode, of the user port installed on the LA-110 (FXS, ISDN or
E1). The differences among the statistics screens are as follows:
• The way the screens identify the user port connection
• The user port interface type displayed on the screen
• For ISDN screens, after selecting a port, you will see three separate screens, for
each channel (D, B1 and B2) of the port.
Syntax
DSP PM CONN USER
Use
1. To display the performance monitoring statistics for a selected user port
connection, type:
DSP PM CONN USER<Enter>
the F or B keys.
3. When ready, press <Enter> to display the performance statistics.
If the specified connection exists, LA-110 displays its performance
monitoring statistics screen. Typical displays are shown below.

The first page of a typical display for the connection performance statistics
collected for a selected ISDN port is shown below.
The first page presents the statistics for the D channel of the selected port. Press
any key to continue to the next channel (B1 and then B2) of the selected port.
All the statistics screens are similar, except that the CID numbers displayed on the
screen may be different (depending on the application identifier), in which case
the numbers are sequentially assigned.

---------------------
Seconds : 19372
Port 1 on the USER port: VPI.VCI.CID – 0.38.0
Figure C-141. DSP PM CONN USER – ISDN
ISDN Interface
CBR Statistics – 1.0 sec .
------------------------
D Channel
----------------------------------------------------------------
1 second : 0 0 0 0 0 0
From start : 0 0 0 0 0 0
AAL2 STATISTICS
---------------------
1 second From start
------------------------
In packets: 0 0
Out packets: 0 0
Parity errors: 0 0
OSF errors: 0 0
HEC errors: 0 0
UUI errors: 0 0
CID errors: 0 0
Incoming call attempts: 0 0

Outgoing call attempts: 0 0
Figure C-142. DSP PM CONN USER – ISDN (Continued)

Each statistics display starts with information on the current date and time,
The VPI and VCI of the ATM connection, the index of the user port connection
using the corresponding ATM connection and the CID currently assigned to that
connection are also displayed, and are followed by the user port interface type.
The data form comprises three sections:
• CBR statistics section, for the LES traffic. The parameters displayed in this
• AAL2 statistics section, for the AAL2 cells. The parameters displayed in this
• Information on the number of incoming and outgoing call attempts.
command.


A typical display for the connection performance statistics collected for an FXS port
is shown below.
---------------------
Seconds : 23812
Port 2 on the USER port: VPI.VCI.CID – 0.38.0
FXS Interface
--------------
CBR Statistics – 1.0 sec .
------------------------
Tx Total Rx Total Rx Total Rx Total Rx Total Ptr
Parity
----------------------------------------------------------------
1 second : 0 0 0 0 0 0
From start : 0 0 0 0 0 0
AAL2 STATISTICS
---------------------
1 second From start
------------------------
In packets: 0 0
Out packets: 0 0
Parity errors: 0 0
OSF errors: 0 0
HEC errors: 0 0
UUI errors: 0 0
CID errors: 0 0
Incoming call attempts: 0 0

Outgoing call attempts: 0 0
Figure C-143. DSP PM CONN USER – FXS

Display Format – E1 Port

A typical display for the connection performance statistics collected for an E1 port
is shown below.
---------------------
Seconds : 13
Connection 1 on the USER port: VPI.VCI.CID – 0.232.17

-------------------------
CBR Statistics – 0.5 sec
------------------------
Tx Total Rx Total Rx Total Rx Total Rx Total Ptr
Parity
---------------------------------------------------------------
-
1 second : 0 0 0 0 0 0
From start : 0 0 0 0 0 0
Figure C-144. DSP PM CONN USER – E1
DSP PM DATA
Purpose
Display performance monitoring statistics for the LA-110 data port.
The information displayed on the screen depends on the data port application
mode: Frame Relay or AAL1 stream.
Syntax
DSP PM DATA [F]
Use
1. To display performance monitoring statistics for the LA-110 data port, type:
DSP PM DATA<Enter>

2. To display the full performance monitoring statistics, type:

DSP PM DATA F<Enter>
You will see the corresponding performance monitoring statistics for the
data port.
3. The displayed information is correct at the time the command has been
received by the LA-110. To refresh the display, repeat the command.
Display Format for AAL1 Stream Application Mode

====================
Seconds : 289
Intervals : 0
Tx Total Rx Total
K bytes K bytes
-------------------------
1 second : 0 0
15 minutes : 0 0
24 hours * : 0 0
Signal Status
=============
I-Circuit C-Circuit Loop

-------------------------------
Not Active Not Active Not Active
Figure C-145. DSP PM DATA
A typical display for the full performance statistics collected when the data port


--------------------
Seconds : 694
Intervals : 8
Tx Total Rx Total
K bytes K bytes
Tx Total Rx Total
------------------------- --------- --------- ----
15 minutes : 0 0
24 hours * : 0 0
-------------------------------
Interval 1: 0 0
Interval 2: 0 0
Interval 3: 0 0
Interval 4: 0 0
Interval 5: 0 0
Interval 6: 0 0
Interval 7: 0 0
Week Statistics
---------------
Tx Total Rx Total
K bytes K Bytes
-----------------------
Day 1: 0 0
Figure C-146. DSP PM DATA – F

The following performance parameters are collected:

• Tx Total K bytes – the total amount of payload transmitted by the data port,
expressed in kilobytes
• Rx Total K bytes – the total amount of payload received by the data port,
expressed in kilobytes.
• I-Circuit – state of the RTS signal received from the ATM network and sent to
the local DTE.
• I-Circuit – state of the DCD signal received from the local DTE and sent to the
ATM network.
• Loop – data loopback state.
When the F (full) option is used, an additional section follows the 24 hours line:
• Each Interval line in the section following the 24 hours line displays data for
one of the previous 15-minute intervals of the current 24-hour period, starting
with the most recent interval (interval 1 always shows the most recent
complete 15-minute interval).
• Each Day line in the Week Statistics section displays the total data collected
for one of the previous 24-hour periods, starting with the most recent period
Display Format for Frame Relay Application Mode

---------------------
Seconds : 456
Intervals : 6
Tx Total Rx Total Tx Congestion Rx Congestion Rx Discarded

--------------------------------------------------------------------
1 second : 0 0 0 0 0
15 minutes : 46 0 0 0 0
24 hours * : 539 0 0 0 0
Figure C-147. DSP PM DATA – Frame Relay

A typical display for the full performance statistics collected when the data port
---------------------
Seconds : 51
Intervals : 2

--------------------------------------------------------------------
1 second : 0 0 0 0 0
15 minutes : 0 0 0 0 0
24 hours * : 0 0 0 0 0
-----------------------------------------------------------------------------
Interval 1: 0 0 0 0 0
Interval 2: 0 0 0 0 0
Week Statistics
----------------
--------------------------------------------------------------------
Day 1: 0 0 0 0 0
Figure C-148. DSP PM DATA – Frame Relay – F
The Frame Relay performance parameters are explained in Table C-56.
Table C-56. DSP PM DATA Command – Frame Relay Statistics Parameters
Parameter Function
Tx Total Frames Total number of Frame Relay frames transmitted through the data port
Rx Total Frames Total number of Frame Relay frames received through the data port
Tx Congestion Frames Total number of Frame Relay frames intended for transmission through the data
port, but discarded before transmission because of congestion
Rx Congestion Frames Total number of Frame Relay frames received through the data port, but
discarded because of congestion
Rx Discarded Frames Total number of Frame Relay frames received through the data port, but
discarded during processing for any reason (including congestion)

DSP PM IP
Purpose
Display IP routing performance monitoring statistics for the LA-110 IP router.
To display performance statistics for a specific IP router WAN interface, use the
DSP PM IP INTERFACE command.
statistics are also cleared when the LA-110 is reset or powered up. The DSP PM IP
command is accepted only when the LAN port is configured to operate in the IP
router mode.
Syntax
DSP PM IP
Use
• To display general IP router performance monitoring statistics, type:
DSP PM IP<Enter>
You will see the IP router performance statistics display. A typical display is
shown below.
IP PM
Total Rx frames : 0
Rx Errored header frames : 0
Rx Errored addr frames : 0
Out frames with no routing : 0
Forwarded frames : 0
Rx discarded frames : 0
Output discarded frames : 0
Figure C-149. DSP PM IP
The information appearing on the screen is correct for the instant the command
has been received by the LA-110. To refresh the display, send the command
again.

Table C-57. DSP PM IP Parameters
Parameter Description
Total Rx Frames Total number of IP packets received by the IP router
Rx Errored Header Frames Total number of IP packets with errors in their header received by the IP
router
Rx Errored Addr Frames Total number of IP packets with IP address errors received by the IP router
Out Frames with no Routing Total number of IP packets without routing information sent by the IP
router
Forwarded Frames Total number of IP packets forwarded by the IP router
Rx Discarded Frames Total number of IP valid packets discarded by the IP router receive path
Output Discarded Frames Total number of IP valid packets discarded by the IP router transmit path
DSP PM IP INTERFACE
Purpose
Display the performance monitoring statistics for a specified WAN interface of the
IP router, and the current status of the interface.
The IP router interface is identified by means of its index number, in the range of 1
to 11. You can use the DSP IP INTERFACE command to display information on the
existing router interfaces, and identify the desired interface.
The DSP PM IP INTERFACE command is accepted only when the LAN port is
configured to operate in the IP router mode.
Syntax
DSP PM IP INTERFACE or DSP PM IP IF
Use
1. To display performance monitoring statistics for a selected LA-110 IP router
WAN interface, type:
DSP PM IP INTERFACE<Enter> or DSP PM IP IF<Enter>
You will be prompted to enter the desired interface index number.
2. Type the appropriate number, in the range of 1 to 11, and then press
<Enter>.
If a WAN interface with the specified number exists, LA-110 displays its
performance monitoring information. A typical display is shown below.

ETHERNET INTERFACE STATISTICS

-----------------------------
Seconds : 4294935735
Interface 2 on port: VPI.VCI – 1.123
AAL5 Statistics
---------------
------------------------------------------------------------
1 second : 0 0 0 0 0

Cells Cells Cells
----------------------------------
1 second : 0 0 0
From start : 0 0 0
Figure C-150. DSP PM IP INTERFACE
Display Format
The statistics display starts with information on the current date and time, followed
by the number of seconds in the current day (24-hour interval).
The selected IP interface number, and the VPI and VCI of the ATM connection
used by it, are also displayed.
The displayed AAL5 statistics parameters are described in Table C-51.
DSP PM LAN
Purpose
Display the performance monitoring statistics for the physical layer of the LA-110
LAN port. The displayed information does not depend on the application mode of
the LAN port.

Syntax
DSP PM LAN [F]
Use
1. To display performance monitoring statistics for the physical layer of the LAN
port, type:
DSP PM LAN<Enter>
You will see the statistics display.
2. If the display extends beyond the number of lines that can be displayed on the
terminal screen, press any key to display the next screen.
LAN PORT STATISTICS
-------------------
Current date : MAY. 06, 2003
Seconds : 202
Intervals : 2

- - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - -
1 second : 0 0 0 0
15 minutes : 0 0 0 0
24 hours * : 0 0 0 0
Figure C-151. DSP PM LAN
Use – F Option
1. To display the full performance monitoring statistics for the physical layer of
the LAN port, type:
DSP PM LAN F<Enter>
You will see the statistics display.

LAN PORT STATISTICS

-------------------
Current date : MAY. 28, 2002
Seconds : 6
Intervals : 96

------------------------------------------------------
1 second : 0 17 17 0
15 minutes : 0 126 126 0
24 hours : 17 14875 14858 0
-------------------------------------------------------------------
Interval 1: 0 100 10 0
Interval 2: 0 205 20 5
Interval 3: 0 100 10 0
Interval 4: 1 185 18 4
Interval 5: 0 326 32 6
Interval 6: 0 186 18 6
Interval 7: 0 100 100
Interval 8: 0 188 18 8
Interval 9: 0 100 10 0
Interval 10: 1 193 19 2
. . .
Interval 96: 0 207 207
Figure C-152. DSP PM LAN – F
Display Format
The display starts with header, followed by information on the current date and
time, the number of seconds in the current day (24-hour interval) and the number
of 15-minute intervals for which statistics are available.
When the F (full) option is used, the display presents the collected data for each
15-minutes interval within the last 24 hours.

The displayed parameters are described in Table C-58. Each parameter is

displayed for three intervals:
• 1 second – the statistics collected during the last second.
• 15 minutes – the statistics collected during the current 15-minute interval.
• 24 hours – the statistics collected during the current 24-hour period. An
The information is correct for the instant the command has been received by the
LA-110. To refresh the display, send the command again.
Table C-58. DSP PM LAN Parameters
Tx Total Frames Total number of transmitted frames
Rx Total Frames Total number of received frames
Rx Discarded Frames Total number of frames discarded during processing by the receive path
Tx Discarded Frames Total number of frames discarded during processing by the transmit path
DSP PM NETWORK
Purpose
Display the performance monitoring statistics for the physical layer of the ATM
network interface, and status information for the network interface. The displayed
information depends on the network interface: SHDSL or ADSL.
The performance statistics are continuously collected while the LA-110 operates.
They can be cleared (reset to 0) using the CLR PM command. The statistics are also
cleared when the LA-110 is reset or powered up.
Syntax
DSP PM NETWORK
Use
1. To display performance statistics and status information for the ATM network
DSP PM NETWORK<Enter>
2. To display the full ATM network physical layer performance statistics, type:
DSP PM NETWORK F<Enter>
The corresponding screen is displayed. Typical displays are shown below. If
the display extends beyond the number of lines that can be displayed on
the terminal screen, press any key to display the next screen.

Display Format for SHDSL Network Interface

A typical display for the SHDSL network interface is shown below.
SHDSL PM
---------
Seconds : 839
Intervals : 3

--------------------------------------------------------------------------
current : 0 0 0 0 0
15min : 0 0 0 0 0
24 hours : 0 0 0 0 0
***************************************************************************
Figure C-153. DSP PM NETWORK – SHDSL
A typical display for the full performance statistics collected for SHDSL network
interface is shown below.
SHDSL PM
---------
Seconds : 854
Intervals : 3

--------------------------------------------------------------------------
current : 0 0 0 0 0
15min : 0 0 0 0 0
24 hours : 0 0 0 0 0
***************************************************************************
Interval 1: 0 0 0 0 0
Interval 2: 0 0 0 0 0
Interval 3: 0 0 0 0 0
Figure C-154. DSP PM NETWORK – SHDSL – F

The display starts with a header that indicates the interface type, followed by
information on the current date and time, the number of seconds in the current
day (24-hour interval) and the number of 15-minute intervals for which statistics
are available.
The displayed status information and performance statistics parameters are
described in Table C-59. Each statistic parameter is displayed for three intervals:
• 1 second – the statistics collected during the last second.
• 15 min – the statistics collected during the current 15-minute interval.
• 24 hours – the statistics collected during the current 24-hour period. An
When the F (full) option is used, an additional section follows the 24 hours line.
Each Interval line in this section displays data for one of the previous 15-minute
intervals of the current 24-hour period, starting with the most recent interval
(interval 1 always shows the most recent complete 15-minute interval).
Table C-59 explains the information displayed on the screen.
Table C-59. DSP PM NETWORK – Command Parameters for SHDSL Network Interface
Parameter Function
Framer Sync Displays the synchronization status of the SHDSL framer at the instant the command has
Status been received by LA-110
Op State Displays the operational status of the SHDSL link at the instant the command has been
received by the LA-110
DSP Version Displays the version of the DSP processing the signals transmitted and received by the
SHDSL network interface
Globespan Displays the software version controlling the operation of the SHDSL network interface
Software Version
Bit Rate Displays the data rate at which the SHDSL interface synchronized
SNR Displays the signal/noise margin, in dB, measured at the instant the command has been
received by the LA-110
Loop Attenuation Displays the loop attenuation threshold, in dB, measured at the instant the command has
been received by the LA-110
Transmit Power Displays the transmit power, in dBm, used at the instant the command has been received
by the LA-110
CRC Displays the number of CRC error events
Err Sec Displays the number of errored seconds (an errored second is a second in which one or
more CRC (Cyclic Redundancy Check) error events have been detected
Severely Err Sec Displays the number of severely errored seconds accumulated for each link (a severely
errored second is a second in which 832 or more CRC error events occurred)
LOSW Err Displays the number of seconds with loss of sync word events accumulated for each link
Unavailable Sec Displays the number of unavailable seconds (an unavailable second is a second in which
a failed signal condition occurred)

Display Format for ADSL Network Interface

A typical display for the ADSL network interface is shown below.
ADSL ANNEX-A PM
---------------
Seconds : 148
Intervals : 1
Op State: HANDSHAKE
Bit rate Latency

------------------------------------------------------------

-----------------------------------------------------------------------------
1 Sec 0 0 0 0
15 min 0 0 0 0
From start 0 0 0 0
***************************************************************************
Figure C-155. DSP PM NETWORK – ADSL
A typical display for the full performance statistics collected for ADSL network
interface is shown below.

ADSL ANNEX-A PM
Seconds : 257
Intervals : 3
Op State: HANDSHAKE
Bit rate Latency

-------------------------------------------------------------

-----------------------------------------------------------------------------
1 Sec 0 0 0 0
15 min 0 0 0 0
From start 0 0 0 0
***************************************************************************
Interleave Fast Lof LOS ESS
Interval ERR SEC ERR SEC ERR SEC ERR SEC
-----------------------------------------------------------------------------
1 : 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0
2 : 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0
Figure C-156. DSP PM NETWORK – ADSL – F
The display format is similar to that for the SHDSL network interface.
Table C-60 explains the information displayed on the screen.

Table C-60. DSP PM NETWORK – Command Parameters for ADSL Network Interface
Parameter Function
Op State Displays the operational status of the ADSL link at the instant the command has
been received by LA-110
Bit Rate – Downstream Displays the data rate at which the downstream path of the ADSL interface
synchronized
Bit Rate – Upstream Displays the data rate at which the upstream path of the ADSL interface
synchronized
Latency – Downstream Displays the latency mode (interleaved or fast) of the downstream path of the
ADSL interface
Latency – Upstream Displays the latency mode (interleaved or fast) of the upstream path of the ADSL
interface
Interleave Displays the total number of frames handled in the interleaved mode
Fast Displays the total number of frames handled in the fast (non-interleaved) mode
Errored Frames Displays the total number of errored frames
Loss of Signal Defects Displays the total number of loss of receive signal events
DSP PM OAM
Purpose
Display the OAM performance monitoring statistics on the LA-110 ATM network
port.
To display details on the OAM cells processed by a specific connection defined on
an LA-110 port, use the DSP PM CONN OAM command. The performance
statistics are continuously collected while LA-110 operates. They can be cleared
(reset to 0) using the CLR PM command. The statistics are also cleared when the
LA-110 is reset or powered up.
Syntax
DSP PM OAM [F]
Use
1. To display the OAM performance monitoring statistics for the ATM network
port, type:
DSP PM OAM<Enter>
2. To display the full performance data, including interval data collected during
the last 24 hours, type:
DSP PM OAM F<Enter>
The corresponding OAM performance data is displayed.

Display Format
A typical OAM performance monitoring statistics display is shown below.
OAM STATISTICS
--------------
Seconds : 24245
Intervals : 18
Tx Total OAM cells Rx Total OAM cells

----------------------------------------
1 second : 0 0
15 minutes : 0 0
24 hours * : 0 0
Figure C-157. DSP PM OAM
A typical full OAM performance monitoring statistics display is shown below.

OAM STATISTICS
--------------
Seconds : 24245
Intervals : 18
----------------------------------------
1 second : 0 0
15 minutes : 0 0
24 hours * : 0 0
----------------------------------------
Interval 1: 0 0
Interval 2: 0 0
Interval 3: 0 0
Interval 4: 0 0
Interval 5: 0 0
Interval 6: 0 0
Interval 7: 0 0
. . .
Interval 18: 0 0
Week Statistics
---------------
----------------------------------------
Day 0: 0 0
Figure C-158. DSP PM OAM – F

Two performance parameters are collected:
• Tx Total OAM cells – the total number of OAM cells that have been
transmitted by the ATM network port
• Rx Total OAM cells – the total number of OAM cells that have been received
by the ATM network port.
When the F (full) option is used, an additional section follows the 24 hours line:
• Each Interval line in the section following the 24 hours line displays data for
• Each Day line in the Week Statistics section displays the total data collected
DSP PM OAM ADDR ATM
Purpose
Display the OAM performance monitoring statistics for a dedicated management
VCC.
Syntax
DSP PM OAM ADDR ATM
Use
• To display the OAM performance monitoring statistics for a dedicated
management VCC, type:
DSP PM OAM ADDR ATM<Enter>
A typical display for the performance statistics collected is shown below.


=========================
Seconds : 622
VPI.VCI - 0.241

--------------------------------------------------------
1 second : 1 1 0 0 0
From start : 796 795 0 0 0

---------------------------------------------------------------
1 second : 1 1 0 0 0 0
From start : 796 796 0 0 0 0
0 0 0
Figure C-159. DSP PM OAM ADDR ATM

Note
Display Format
command.
• The header is followed by information on the VPI and VCI of the ATM
connection.
command.

Table C-61. DSP PM OAM ADDR ATM Parameters
Parameter Function
Tx Total AIS Cells Total number of VC-AIS cells transmitted through this connection
Rx Total AIS Cells Total number of VC-AIS cells received through this connection
Loss of Continuity Total loss of ATM connection continuity seconds for this connection
Total Successful Total number of OAM cells looped back in response to a loopback command
Loopbacks transmitted through this connection
Total Failed Total number of OAM cells which were not be looped back after a loopback command
Loopbacks transmitted through this connection
Tx Total RDI Cells Total number of RDI cells transmitted through this connection
Rx Total RDI Cells Total number of RDI cells received through this connection
Tx Total Loopback Total number of OAM loopback requests transmitted through this connection
Requests
Rx Total Loopback Total number of OAM loopback requests transmitted through this connection
Requests
Tx Total Loopback Total number of OAM loopback responses transmitted through this connection
Responses
Rx Total Loopback Total number of OAM loopback responses received through this connection
Responses
Min LB Delay (msec) Minimum Round-Trip Delay (RTD) registered for periodic loopback
Max LB Delay Maximum RTD registered for periodic loopback
(msec)
Avg. LB Delay Average RTD registered for periodic loopback
(msec)
DSP PM OAM BRIDGE IF
Purpose
Display the OAM performance monitoring statistics for a bridge interface.
Syntax
DSP PM OAM BRIDGE IF
Use
• To display the OAM performance monitoring statistics for a bridge port
interface, type:
DSP PM OAM BRIDGE IF <Enter>


=========================
Seconds : 622
Interface 1 on port: VPI.VCI - 8.35

--------------------------------------------------------
1 second : 1 1 0 0 0
From start : 796 795 0 0 0

---------------------------------------------------------------
1 second : 1 1 0 0 0 0
From start : 796 796 0 0 0 0

0 0 0
Figure C-160. DSP PM OAM BRIDGE IF

Note
Display Format
command.
• Bridge interface number on which the connection is defined
• VPI and VCI of the ATM connection.
command.

DSP PM OAM IP IF
Purpose
Display the OAM performance monitoring statistics for an IP interface.
statistics are also cleared when LA-110 is reset or powered up.
Syntax
DSP PM OAM IP IF
Use
• To display the OAM performance monitoring statistics for an IP interface,
type:
DSP PM OAM IP IF <Enter>
=========================
Seconds : 622
Interface 1 on port: VPI.VCI - 8.35
Tx Total Rx Total
Loss of Total Total
AIS Cells AIS Cells
Continuity Successful Failed
--------------------------------------------------------
1 second : 1 1 0 0 0
From start : 796 795 0 0 0

---------------------------------------------------------------
1 second : 1 1 0 0 0 0
From start : 796 796 0 0 0 0

0 0 0
Figure C-161. DSP PM OAM IP IF

Note

Display Format
command.
• IP interface number on which the connection is defined
• VPI and VCI of the ATM connection.
command.
DSP PM OAM STATUS
Purpose
Display the ATM connections that report OAM problems, and the type of OAM
indications being transmitted and received.
Syntax
DSP PM OAM STATUS
Use
1. To display information on the ATM connections that currently report OAM
problems, type:
DSP PM OAM STATUS<Enter>
If no ATM connection carries OAM traffic, you will see No connections
currently have OAM traffic and the command is ended.
If at least one ATM connection carries OAM traffic, you will see the OAM
information. A typical display is shown below.
Port AIS RDI
Index No. VPI.VCI Tx Rx Tx Rx LOC
1 LAN port 0 .51 -- on on -- 0:00:00
Figure C-162. DSP PM OAM STATUS

Display Format
Table C-62 explains the information displayed for each ATM connection carrying
OAM traffic.
Table C-62. DSP PM OAM STATUS Parameters
Parameter Function
Port Index Displays the index of the port carrying OAM traffic
Port No. Displays a description of the carrying OAM traffic
VPI.VCI Identifies the VCC used by the corresponding ATM connection
AIS TX Displays ON when AIS is transmitted by the LA-110 on the corresponding ATM
connection
AIS RX Displays ON when AIS cells are received by the corresponding ATM connection
RDI TX Displays ON when RDI cells are transmitted by the corresponding ATM
connection
RDI RX Displays ON when RDI cells are received by the LA-110 on the corresponding
ATM connection
LOC Displays the accumulated time (hours:minutes:seconds)
DSP PM USER
Purpose
Display performance monitoring parameters for the physical layer of the user port
installed in the LA-110 (ISDN, FXS or E1).
The information is continuously collected while the LA-110 operates. The
information can be cleared using the CLR PM command. The information is also
cleared when the LA-110 is reset or powered up.
Syntax
DSP PM USER

1. To display user port performance monitoring parameters and status
information, type:
DSP PM USER<Enter>
2. To display full port performance parameters for an E1 user port, type:
DSP PM USER F<Enter>
3. For ISDN and FXS ports, you must also select the desired user port index, 1 to
4, by pressing the F or B key and then pressing <Enter>.
4. The displayed information is correct at the time the command has been
received by LA-110. To refresh the display, repeat the command.


A typical display for a selected ISDN port is shown below. The port index appears
in the header.
The display includes several sections, including an optional error history section.
Press any key to continue from section to section. The displayed information is
described in Table C-63.
ISDN Status and Statistics
CID L1 Status
D-Ch :16 B1-Ch :17 B2-Ch :18 SEND INFO 2 0x0B
PCM Channel Status HDLC(D-Ch)

D-Ch B1-Ch B2-Ch Frames Errors
Tx :open close close 0 0
Rx :open close close 0 0

Ssted Statistics
Packet CRC-Error LenErrors Errors
Tx :0 0 0 0
Rx :0 0 0 0

AAL2 Statistics
D-Ch B1-Ch B2-Ch
Cells Errors Cells Errors Cells Errors
Tx :0 0 0 0 0 0
Rx :0 0 0 0 0 0
Do you want to display Errors History ? (Y/N)Y
Errors History
HDLC
Index Error Time CID
No errors found .
Figure C-163. DSP PM USER

AAL2
No errors found .
Ssted
No errors found
Figure C-164. DSP PM USER (Continued)
Table C-63. DSP PM USER – Command Parameters for ISDN Ports
Section Parameter Description

D-Ch Displays the CID assigned to the D channel of the selected port
CID B1-Ch Displays the CID assigned to the B1 channel of the selected port
B2-Ch Displays the CID assigned to the B2 channel of the selected port
L1 Status Displays the current state of Layer 1 of the ISDN port
D-Ch Displays the state of the D channel of the selected port
PCM
Channel B1-Ch Displays the state of the B1 channel of the selected port
Status
B2-Ch Displays the state of the B2 channel of the selected port
Frames Displays the total number of HDLC frames received by the D channel
of the selected port
HDLC
(D-Ch) Errors Displays the total number of HDLC frames received by the D channel
of the selected port in which errors have been detected
Packet Displays the total number of packets handled by the SSTED (Service
Specific Transmission Error Detection) sublayer, used to carry the LES
embedded operations channel (eoc) serving the connections of the
selected port
Ssted CRC-Error Displays the total number of LES eoc packets rejected because of CRC
Statistics errors detected at the SSTED sublayer
LenErrors Displays the total number of LES eoc packets rejected because of
length errors detected at the SSTED sublayer
Errors Displays the total number of LES eoc packets rejected because of other
types of errors detected at the SSTED sublayer

Table C-63. DSP PM USER – Command Parameters for ISDN Ports (Cont.)
Section Parameter Description

D-Ch Tx Cells Displays the total number of AAL2 cells transmitted by the specified
B1-Ch Tx Cells channel of the selected port
B2-Ch Tx Cells
D-Ch Tx Errors Displays the total number of AAL2 cells transmitted by the specified
B1-Ch Tx Errors channel of the selected port in which errors occurred
AAL2 B2-Ch Tx Errors
Statistics D-Ch Rx Cells Displays the total number of AAL2 cells received through the specified
B1-Ch Rx Cells channel of the selected port
B2-Ch x Cells
D-Ch Rx Errors Displays the total number of AAL2 cells with errors received through
B1-Ch Rx Errors the specified channel of the selected port
B2-Ch Rx Errors
Errors Displays information on the HDLC protocol errors detected for the
History HDLC specified port: the error, the time it occurred and the CID (which
identified the channel)
Errors Displays information on the AAL2 protocol errors detected for the
History AAL2 specified port: the error, the time it occurred and the CID (which
Errors Displays information on the SSTED sublayer errors detected for the
History Ssted specified port: the error, the time it occurred and the CID (which

A typical display for the FXS ports is shown below. The information displayed for
each port is described in Table C-64.
FXS Status and Statistics
--------------------------
|Monitoring | Port 1 | Port 2 | Port 3 | Port 4 |
---------------------------------------------------------------------------
|Status |ON HOOK |ON HOOK |ON HOOK |ON HOOK |
---------------------------------------------------------------------------
|ELCP Status |BLOCK |----- |----- |----- |
---------------------------------------------------------------------------
|Tx Cells |0 |0 |0 |0 |
---------------------------------------------------------------------------
|Rx Cells |0 |0 |0 |0 |
---------------------------------------------------------------------------
Figure C-165. DSP PM USER – FXS

Table C-64. DSP PM USER – Command Parameters for FXS Ports
Status Displays the corresponding port (on-hook or off-hook)
ELCP Status Displays the ELCP status of the corresponding port: Block or Unblock
Tx Cells Displays the total number of ATM cells transmitted through the connection serving the
corresponding port
Rx Cells Displays the total number of ATM cells received through the connection serving the
corresponding port
Display Format – E1 Ports

A typical display for the E1 port performance monitoring statistics is shown below.

---------------------------------------------
Seconds : 465
Intervals : 0

-------------------------------------------
1 second : 0 1 1 0 0 0
15 minutes : 1 456 466 0 1 32
24 hours * : ***** **** **** **** **** ****
Figure C-166. DSP PM USER – E1
Table C-65 explains the physical layer statistic parameters displayed on the screen.

Table C-65. DSP PM USER – Command Parameters for E1 Ports
Intervals The number of intervals (up 96 intervals) for which performance monitoring information
can be displayed
Current Time The elapsed time (in seconds) since the beginning of the current interval, in seconds. The
range is 1 to 900 seconds
ES Displays the number of errored seconds (ES) in the corresponding 15-minute interval.
An errored second is any second containing one or more CRC error events, or one or more
OOF events, or one or more controlled slip events
UAS Displays the number of unavailable seconds (UAS) in the corresponding 15-minute interval.
An unavailable second is any second in which a failed signal state exists. A failed signal state
is declared when 10 consecutive severely errored seconds (SES) occur, and is cleared after
10 consecutive seconds of data are processed without a SES
SES Displays the number of severely errored seconds (SES) in the corresponding 15-minute
interval.
A SES is a second with 320 or more CRC error events, or one or more OOF events.
BES Displays the number of bursty errored seconds (BES) in the corresponding 15-minute
interval.
A BES is a second with 2 to 319 CRC error events.
LOFC Displays the count of loss-of-frame events (LOFC) in the corresponding 15-minute interval.
CSS Displays the number of controlled slip seconds (CSS) in the corresponding 15-minute
interval.
A CSS is a second with one or more controlled slip events.
The statistic parameters are provided for the following intervals:

A typical display for the full E1 port performance statistics is shown below. In
addition to the data displayed on the regular display, the full performance statistics
display presents the data collected for each 15-minute interval within the last 24
hours, and for each 24-hour interval within the last week:
• Each interval line in the section following the 24 hours line displays data for
• Each day line in the Week Statistics section displays the total data collected


---------------------------------------------
Current date : NOV. 06, 2002
Seconds : 488
Intervals : 13
-------------------------------------------
1 second : 0 1 1 0 0 0
15 minutes : 0 479 489 0 0 4
24 hours * : 8 9999 9999 0 1 255
-------------------------------------------
Interval 1: 0 890 900 0 0 6
Interval 2: 0 890 900 0 0 7
Interval 3: 0 890 900 0 0 5
Interval 4: 0 890 900 0 0 5
Interval 5: 0 890 900 0 0 4
Interval 6: 0 890 900 0 0 0
Interval 7: 0 890 900 0 0 4
Interval 8: 0 890 900 0 0 11
Figure C-167. DSP PM USER – 24 Hours
DSP PRI
Purpose
Display the utilization of the E1 user port, when configured to operate in the ISDN
PRI mode.
This command is accepted only when PRI connections have been defined (see
prerequisites in the ADD PRI command).
Syntax
DSP PRI
Use
• To display the utilization of the E1 user port, type:
DSP PRI<Enter>
You will see the PRI connections supported by the E1 port. A typical screen
is shown below.


1 0. 38 N/A off-two way on B1 Channel -- 0:00:36
5 0. 38 N/A off-two way on D Channel -- 0:00:36
Note For your orientation, the ADD PRI screen used to define the PRI connections is
shown below:

-------------------------------
1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 10 11 12 13 14 15
yes yes yes no no no no no no no no no no no no
16 17 18 19 20 21 22 23 24 25 26 27 28 29 30 31
n/a yes no no no no no no no no no no no no no no
The fields displayed in the DSP PRI screen are explained in Table C-66.
Table C-66. DSP PRI Parameters
Index The index number of the corresponding PRI connection
VPI.VCI The ATM connection carrying the corresponding PRI connection. The screen shows the
default LES VCC
CID The CID assigned to the corresponding PRI connection, or N/A when no CID is assigned
Cont Check The type of continuity check selected for the PRI connection (see details in Table C-2)
Active The current state of the PRI connection
Channel Type The channel carried by the corresponding PRI connection:
• B1 to B31 indicate payload channels (the number indicates the timeslot in which the
channel is carried)
• D indicates the CCS channel (carried in timeslot 16)
Port The port using the corresponding channel
Time Since Last The time since the last state change for the corresponding PRI connection
Change

DSP PSTN
Purpose
Display currently selected FXS interface signaling characteristics used for
connection to the PSTN.
This command is accepted only when LA-110 includes FXS user ports and is
configured to support connections to the PSTN (see prerequisites in the DEF PSTN
command).
Syntax
DSP PSTN
Use
• To display the PSTN signaling characteristics, type:
DSP PSTN<Enter>
You will see the first section of the PSTN parameters data form. A typical
display is shown below. Refer to Table C-39 for a description of the
displayed parameters.

Collision Priority : Originating

Meter Pulse Frequency : 12kHZ
Off Hook min time (ms) : 65
On Hook min time (ms) : 480
Register Recall min time (ms): 270
Display duration type parameters ? (Y)

Display rate type parameters ? (Y)
Display attenuation type parameters ? (Y)
Display pulse duration parameters ? (Y)
Display mode : all
2 0 Meter Pulse 200 450 Enable
3 0 Reduce Battery 120 200 Enable
NO more pulse duration types .
Display cadence ring parameters ? (Y)

--------------------------------------
|Cadence Period1 Period2 Period3 Period4 Period5 |
|Type on off on off on off on off on off|
----------------------------------------------------------------------------
0 1650 3300 1000 1000 1000 1000 1000 1000 1000 1000

-----------------------------------------------------------------------------
----------------------------------------------------------------------------
1 750 1500 1000 1000 1000 1000 1000 1000 1000 1000
Figure C-168. DSP PSTN

----------------------------------------------------------------------------
----------------------------------------------------------------------------
2 1000 1000 1000 1000 1000 1000 1000 1000 1000 1000
NO more cadence ring type .
Display digit parameters ? (Y)

----------------------------------------------------------------------------
| Min | Max |
----------------------------------------------------------------------------
On Period (ms) | 20 120
Off Period (ms) | 10 100
Inter digit time : 220 ms
Figure C-169. DSP PSTN (Continued)
DSP ROUTING TABLE
Purpose
Display the routing table of the IP router.
This command is accepted only when the LA-110 LAN port is configured as router
(see DEF LAN command).
Syntax
DSP ROUTING TABLE
Use
• To display the current contents of the IP routing table, type:
DSP ROUTING TABLE<Enter>
A typical display is shown below.
The display is correct for the instant the command has been received by the
LA-110. To refresh the display, send the command again.
ROUTING TABLE
Index Net Address Net Mask Next Hop Age Type Metric
1 177.177.177.001 255.255.255.0 177.177.177.001 3 L 6
2 177.177.177.002 255.255.255.0 - - - - - - - - 1 L 10
Figure C-170. DSP ROUTING TABLE

Table C-67 explains the information appearing for each routing table entry.
Table C-67. DSP ROUTING TABLE Parameters
Net Address Displays the destination IP address for the corresponding entry
Mask Displays the IP subnet mask associated with the Net Address
Next Hop When the corresponding route passes through the LAN, displays the
IP address used as the destination for the first hop, en route to the
specified destination
Age Displays the age, in minutes, of the corresponding entry
Type Displays the type of the corresponding entry:
• L – local device interface
• S – static routing entry, configured by means of the ADD
STATIC ROUTING LAN command
• D – dynamic entry, learned by means of the routing protocol
Metric Displays the number of hops passed en route to the destination of
the corresponding entry
DSP SP PORT
Purpose
Display the current CONTROL port parameters.
Syntax
DSP SP PORT
Use
• To display the current CONTROL port parameters, type:
DSP SP PORT<Enter>
You will see the CONTROL port data form. A typical display is shown
below.
For an explanation of the displayed parameters, refer to DEF SP PORT command.
Baud rate : Auto
Data : 8
Parity : none
Log-off-time : 10
Pop-alarm : yes
Figure C-171. DSP SP PORT

DSP STATIC MAC ADDR
Purpose
Display the currently defined static MAC addresses.
Note These addresses also appear in the data form displayed by means of DSP MAC
ADDR command.
This command is relevant only when static MAC addresses are currently defined
(see prerequisites in the ADD STATIC MAC ADDR command).
Syntax
DSP STATIC MAC ADDR
Use
• To display the static MAC addresses, type:
DSP STATIC MAC ADDR<Enter>
You will see the static MAC addresses table. A typical display is shown
below.
STATIC MAC ADDRESS TABLE
========================
Index Address Interface VPI.VCI

----------------------------------------------------------
1 AABBCCDDEEF1 LAN 3.1
2 AABBCCDDEEF3 WAN 4.5
Figure C-172. DSP STATIC MAC ADDR (Ethernet Bridge Mode)
STATIC MAC ADDRESS TABLE

========================
Index Address Bridge Port VID

-------------------------------------------------------
1 220000000000 LAN 1
2 440000000000 LAN 1
Figure C-173. DSP STATIC MAC ADDR (VLAN-Aware Mode)

The information displayed in the data form is as follows:
Index Number of entry in MAC address table.

Address MAC address of corresponding entry
Interface The bridge port through which the corresponding MAC
address is reached: LAN or WAN.
VPI.VCI VPI and VCI of the MAC address
Bridge Port Port of the internal bridge, through which the
corresponding MAC address is reached (VLAN-aware mode)
VID A VID, with which the corresponding MAC address has
arrived (VLAN-aware mode)
Figure C-174. DSP STATIC MAC ADDR
DSP STATIC ROUTING
Purpose
Display the currently defined static routes in the IP router table.
Note These routes also appear in the data form displayed by means of DSP ROUTING
TABLE command.
This command is accepted only when static routes are currently defined (see
prerequisites in the ADD STATIC ROUTING command).
Syntax
DSP STATIC ROUTING
Use
• To display the currently-defined static routes, type:
DSP STATIC ROUTING<Enter>
You will see the static routes table. A typical display is shown below.
STATIC ROUTING ADDRESS TABLE
----------------------------
Index IP Mask Metric Port Nhop IP
----------------------------------------------------------------------------
1 2. 2. 2. 2 255.255.255. 0 1 LAN 1. 2. 3. 12
2 2. 2. 2. 2 255.255.255. 0 1 WAN - - - - - - -
Figure C-175. DSP STATIC ROUTING
Table C-68 explains the information appearing for each static route entry.

Table C-68. DSP STATIC ROUTING Parameters
Index Number of entry. This is the index to be used in commands operating on static routes
IP Displays the destination IP address for the corresponding static entry
Mask Displays the IP subnet mask associated with the destination IP address
Metric Displays the maximum number of hops that may be passed en route to the destination, before
the packets are discarded
Port The IP router port through which the corresponding destination is reached: LAN or WAN
Next Hop When the corresponding route passes through the LAN, displays the IP address used as the
destination for the first hop, en route to the specified destination
DSP SYS
Purpose
Displays general system information on LA-110.
Syntax
DSP SYS
Use
• To display general system information, type:
DSP SYS<Enter>
You will see the system status information form. A typical system status
information display is shown below. The fields are described in Table C-69.
Table C-69. DSP SYS Parameters
Device A concise description of the device type and its manufacturer LA-110
Name The system name assigned to LA-110 using the DEF NAME command
Date The date retrieved from the real-time clock of LA-110
Time The time retrieved from the real-time clock of LA-110
ATM port interface The physical ATM network interface type: SHDSL or ADSL Annex A
System Clock The source of the system clock. See DEF CLOCK command
Ntr Status of the NTR clock. See DEF CLOCK command
Board revision The LA-110 hardware version
Loopback The state of LA-110 loopbacks. See details in LOOP command
Software version The LA-110 operating system version
Option Designation of the LA-110 option
Globespan SW Version of the SHDSL or ADSL firmware
version
Interfaces table The interface types installed for each LA-110 port
User information The logistic information defined by means of the DEF ID command

Device: LA-110, RAD Data Communication, Ltd.
Name : LA110
Date : AUG. 15, 2004
Time : 13:46:07
ATM port interface : SHDSL

System clock : Derived from the main link
Ntr : NTR disabled
Board revision : B2.32
Loopback : none
Boot version : 2.31.0.0

Software version : 2.8 SHDSL
Options : N/A
Globespan SW version : R2.3.1
Interfaces Table
---------------------------------------------------------------------------
| | NETWORK | USER | LAN | DATA |
----------------------------------------------------------------------------
| Interface | Type :SHDSL | Type :E1 | Type :Ethr | Type : V.35 |
---------------------------------------------------------------------------
User Information
----------------
There is no User Information.
Figure C-176. DSP SYS
DSP SYSERR
Purpose
Display system internal errors (for use by technical support personnel).
Syntax
DSP SYSERR
Use
• Type:
DSP SYSERR<Enter>

DSP SYSPARAMS
Purpose
Display the current values of the global LA-110 system parameters.
Syntax
DSP SYSPARAMS
Use
• To display the current system parameters, type
DSP SYSPARAMS<Enter>
A typical display is shown below.
Refer to the DEF SYSPARAMS command for descriptions of the various parameters
that may appear on the screen.
Global Profile
----------------
Coding Law : A law
Jitter Buffer (in ms): 20
Global Profile
----------------
Coding Law : A law
Jitter Buffer (in ms): 5
Default VCC : 0 : 38
Application ID : LES using PSTN for POTS & DSS1 for BRI (with ELCP)
Nationality : France
SSCS Parameters
----------------
Encoding Profile : 9 - PCM - 64,44 octet packets, without silence
Encoding Selection : Master/Slave
Transport of CAS bits: 0
Transport of DTMF : 0
Frame Mode Data : 0
Fax : 0
CPS PARAMETERS
--------------
CPS Optimization: Single CPS no overlap
ISDN Activation Mode : Non Permanent
Figure C-177. DSP SYSPARAMS

DSP USER
Purpose
Display information on the user ports.
The parameters displayed depend on the installed user port type (E1, FXS or
ISDN).
Syntax
DSP USER
Use
• To display information on the user ports, type:
DSP USER<Enter>
You will see the user port information for the installed interface.
Refer to the DEF USER command for details on the parameters displayed on the
screen.
A typical display for ISDN ports is shown below.
ISDN Interface
Port Index in the Interface: 1 | 2 | 3 | 4 |

Channel : B1 B2 | B1 B2 | B1 B2 | B1 B2|
----------------------------------------------------------------------
Echo canceling : on on on on on on on on
Phantom : Enable Enable Enable Enable
----------------------------------------------------------------------
Figure C-178. DSP USER – ISDN
A typical display for E1 ports is shown below.

Link type : E1
System clock : Adaptive Clock
Synchronization : FAST (1 sec)
Line code : HDB3
Framing : not multi-frame (G732N)
Receiver sensitivity : 30 DB
CRC-4 mode : on
Idle code : 7e
Signaling sample time : 100 msec
Figure C-179. DSP USER – E1

A typical display for FXS ports is shown below.

FXS Interface
Coding law : A law

Polarity : Disable
Gain Tx : 0
Gain Rx : -10
Figure C-180. DSP USER – FXS
DSP VLAN MEMBER
Purpose
Display VLAN information. You can display information on all VLANs connected to
a specific bridge port or information on all bridge ports assigned to a specific
VLAN.
The DSP VLAN MEMBER command is accepted only when the LAN port is
Syntax
DSP VLAN MEMBER
1. Type:
DSP VLAN MEMBER<Enter>
2. Press F or B to select the VLAN display method:
Display all VLAN members on bridge port (see Figure C-181).
Display all bridge ports on VLAN (see Figure C-182).
3. Press <Enter> to move to the field.
4. Choose the bridge port or VLAN ID, depending on the VLAN display method
selected in step 2.
5. Press <Enter> to finish.
Display: All VLAN members on Bridge Port
Index: 1
VLAN ID Egress VLAN Name
------- ------ ---------
3 Transparent My_VLAN
Figure C-181. DSP VLAN MEMBER (according to Bridge Port)

Display: All Bridge Ports on a VLAN

VLAN ID: 1
VLAN Name: My_VLAN (read only)
Bridge Port Egress VLAN Name

----------- ------ ---------
3 Transparent My_VLAN
Figure C-182. DSP VLAN MEMBER (according to VLAN)
EXIT
Purpose
End the current control session.
Syntax
EXIT
Use
• To end the current control session, type:
EXIT<Enter>
If the password option is activated, the PASSWORD> prompt is displayed.
Otherwise, the LA-110 working prompt is displayed.
HELP
Purpose
Display an index of the supervisory port commands and the options available for
each command. The index is organized in three columns:
• Configuration commands
• Display commands
• Control commands.
The index ends with a list of the special key functions.
Syntax
H or HELP
Use
1. To enter the help system, type:
H<Enter> or HELP<Enter>
You will see the first HELP page.
2. Press any key to display the next page.

INIT DB
Purpose
Load the default parameter values into the database instead of the user
configuration. During the process, the connections list defined by the user is also
deleted and LA-110 is restarted.
This command is not available during Telnet sessions.
Syntax
INIT DB
Use
1. To reload the default parameters, type:
INIT DB<Enter>
2. You are prompted to confirm the command. Type Y to execute, or N to
cancel.
3. Wait until the LA-110 reboots before continuing.
LOOP
Purpose
Activate a user-controlled loopback.
Only one loopback can be activated at a time. Therefore, for your convenience
the activation of a new loopback automatically deactivates any previous
user-controlled loopback.
Syntax
LOOP
Use
1. To display the loopback control screen, type:
LOOP<Enter>
The loopback selection screen is displayed. A typical screen is shown
below.
Loopback: none
Figure C-183. LOOP
2. Display the desired state by typing F or B:

NONE
REMOTE NETWORK
LOCAL DATA (Loop 3, X.21 interface)
REMOTE DATA (Loop 2, X.21 interface)

LOCAL USER (Loop 3, E1 interface)

REMOTE USER (Loop 2, E1 interface)
REMOTE REMOTE DATA (Loop 2 - X.21 interface)
3. After the desired state is selected, press <Enter>.
MOD BP
Purpose
Modify the parameters of an existing bridge port.
The bridge port is identified by its index: LAN or 1–16. You can use the DSP BP
command to display information on the existing bridge ports, and identify the
desired port.
The MOD BP command is accepted only when the LAN port is configured to
Syntax
MOD BP
1. To modify the parameters of an existing bridge port, type:
MOD BP<Enter> or MOD BRIDGE PORT<Enter>
If a bridge port with the specified number exists, LA-110 displays a data
form showing the parameters that may be modified, and the current
parameter values (see ADD BP command). A typical display is shown
below.
3. Make the desired changes and then press <Enter>.
Index: 1
- - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - -
1 Admit all Enable

0 1 2 3 4 5 6 7
-------- ---------------
1 Y Y N N N Y Y N
Bind another Bridge IF (Y/N)? Y

0 1 2 3 4 5 6 7
-------- ---------------
2 N N Y Y Y N N N
Figure C-184. MOD BP

MOD BRIDGE INTERFACE
Purpose
Modify the parameters of an existing WAN interface (ATM connection) of the
bridge serving the LA-110 LAN port.
The MOD BRIDGE INTERFACE command is accepted only when the LAN port is
configured to operate in the bridge mode, and LA-110 is configured to use AAL2.
Syntax
MOD BRIDGE INTERFACE or MOD BRIDGE IF
Use
1. To modify the parameters of an existing bridge interface, type:
MOD BRIDGE INTERFACE<Enter> or MOD BRIDGE IF<Enter>
You will be prompted to enter the desired index number.
2. Type the appropriate number, in the range of 1 to 16, and then press
<Enter>.
If a bridge interface with the specified number exists, LA-110 displays a
data form showing the parameters that may be modified, and the current
parameter values (see ADD BRIDGE INTERFACE command). A typical
display is shown below.
Index : 1
Modifying interface number 1 on Bridge
VPI.VCI : 0.222
Bit-rate Cont Check Active

UBR off-two way on
Figure C-185. MOD BRIDGE INTERFACE
MOD CONN DATA
Purpose
Modify the parameters of an existing Frame Relay connection on the LA-110 data
port. The command cannot be used to change the connection parameters for the
AAL1 Stream mode.

Syntax
MOD CONN DATA
Use
1. To modify the parameters of an existing Frame Relay connection, type:
MOD CONN DATA<Enter>
2. Enter the desired connection number and then press <Enter>.
You will see a data form similar to that used to define a Frame Relay
connection on the data port.
3. Change the desired parameters (see ADD CONN DATA command). You
cannot change the DLCI and the VPI.VCI of the connection.
MOD CONN USER
Purpose
Modify the service parameters of an existing connection defined on the E1 user
port installed on the LA-110.
This command can be used to change the connection parameters only when the
LA-110 is configured to use AAL2, and the E1 port is configured to use the
application identifier LES using CAS for POTS & DSS1 for BRI (without ELCP).
Syntax
MOD CONN USER
Use
1. To modify the parameters of an existing user port connection, type:
MOD CONN USER<Enter>
You will see a data form similar to that used to add a new connection for
the E1 user port interface (see ADD CONN USER command).
3. Change the desired parameters and then press <Enter>.
MOD FIREWALL
Purpose
Modify the parameters of a firewall.
Syntax
MOD FW

Use
• To modify the parameters of a firewall, type:
MOD FW<Enter>
LA110>mod fw
Index : 1
IP Interface Direction FTP Option Printing Name

------------ --------- ---------- -------- ----
WAN 1 Inbound Enable Disable USER_SPECIFIC
Mod Rule? (Y/N) :y
Rule Index : 1
Rule Index : 1
Low High Low High
--- ---- --- ----
0.0.0.0 255.255.255.255 0.0.0.0 255.255.255.255
IP Protocol : TCP

Low High Low High
--- ---- --- ----
0 65535 0 65535
Mod Rule? (Y/N) :n
Firewall was modified successfully.
Figure C-186. MOD FW

MOD IP INTERFACE
Purpose
Modify the parameters of a selected IP interface for the LA-110 LAN port, when
You can use the DSP IP INTERFACE command to find the index of the desired IP
interface.
This command can be used to change the IP interface parameters only when the
LA-110 is configured to use AAL2.
Syntax
MOD IP INTERFACE or MOD IP IF
Use
1. To modify the parameters of a selected IP interface, type:
MOD IP INTERFACE<Enter> or MOD IP IF<Enter>
You will see a data form similar to that used to define an IP interface.
3. Change the desired parameters (see ADD IP INTERFACE command).
4. Change the desired parameters and then press <Enter>.
MOD NMS
Purpose
Modify the list of traps sent to one of the currently defined network management
station (NMS).
You can use the DSP NMS command to find the index of the desired network
management station.
Syntax
MOD NMS
Use
1. To modify the list of traps sent to one of the currently defined network
management stations, type:
MOD NMS<Enter>
2. Type the index number of the desired network management station and then
press <Enter>.
You will see corresponding data form. A typical data form is shown below.

Index : 001
Modifying NMS number 1
Link-Up & Link-Down Alarm Trap Leds-Status-Change

unmask unmask unmask
Figure C-187. MOD NMS
3. Modify the desired parameters (see ADD NMS command) and then press
<Enter>.
MOD VLAN MEMBER
Purpose
Modify parameters of an existing VLAN.
The VLAN is identified by the bridge port index and VLAN ID. You can use the
DSP VLAN MEMBER command to display information on the existing bridge ports
and their VLANs.
The MOD VLAN MEMBER command is accepted only when the LAN port is
Syntax
MOD VLAN MEMBER
1. To modify the parameters of an existing VLAN, type:
MOD VLAN MEMBER<Enter>
You will be prompted to enter the desired port index number.
Press F or B to select the bridge, and press <Tab> to proceed to the next
field.
3. Select a VLAN ID which you intend to modify, and press <Enter>.
4. Select a new VLAN Name value, and press <Tab> to proceed to the next
field.
5. Select Egress filtering mode (Transparent or Split), and press <Enter> to
complete your modifications. A typical display is shown below.
Bridge Port Number VLAN ID
------------------ -------
1 3
VLAN name Egress

-------- ---------------
My_VLAN Transparent
Figure C-188. MOD VLAN MEMBER

PING
Purpose
Ping an IP host to check its IP connectivity.
This command is accepted only when the LAN port is configured as router.
Syntax
PING
Use
1. To ping an IP host, type:
PING<Enter>
You will see the ping configuration data form. A typical display is shown
below.
Destination IP Number Time out(sec)
- - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - -
172.102.20 .15 100 1
Figure C-189. PING
2. Define the ping parameters:

Enter the destination IP address in the Destination IP field
Enter the total number of pings to be sent in the Number field
Specify the maximum time, in seconds, allocated to sending the specified
number of pings in the Time out field.
3. Press <Enter> to start sending pings and collect the results.
A typical results display, as seen after all the pings have been sent, is shown
below.
Ping nr. 100
Sent = 100 Received = 99 Success = 99% (99/100)
Time : min/av/max = 1 / 5 / 12 ms
Figure C-190. PING (Continued)
The results display presents the following information:

Ping nr. – shows the number of pings sent. The number advances until all
the pings are sent, or until the specified time-out interval expires.
Sent – displays the total number of pings sent.
Received – displays the number of ping responses received before the
time-out interval expires.

Success – displays the percentage of successfully received ping responses,

relative to the total number sent.
Time min/av/max – displays the minimum measured time between the
transmission and reception of a ping, the average time calculated for all the
successfully received ping responses and the maximum measured time
between the transmission and reception of a ping. The results are given in
milliseconds.
RESET
Purpose
Reset the LA-110.
Syntax
RESET
Use
1. To reset the LA-110, type:
RESET<Enter>
You are prompted to confirm the command.
2. Press Y to execute the reset command.
or
Press N to cancel the command.
3. Wait until the LA-110 reboots before continuing.
SEND ALM LOG
Purpose
Send the LA-110 alarm log, via TFTP, to a designated host, for example, to a
management station. The alarms, which are retrieved from the LA-110 alarms
buffer, are sent as a file formatted like the screen displayed by the DSP ALM
command.
The alarm file can be sent periodically at the intervals selected by user, or
whenever the specified number of alarms accumulates. The user can also initiate
immediate sending of the whole alarm log file.
To use TFTP, the LA-110 LAN port must be configured as IP router. The
destination must meet the requirements presented in Appendix D. Appendix D also
presents additional information related to TFTP file transfers.
Syntax
SEND ALM LOG

Use – Immediate Sending

1. To send the alarm log file to a selected destination, type:
SEND ALM LOG<Enter>
You will see the first line of the screen used to control the sending of the
alarm log file. This line is used to select the desired activity. The available
options are as follows:
Now Send now the alarm file.
Recurrence Configure the parameters needed to periodically send
the file.
2. To send now, display Now using the F or B keys and then press <Enter> to
continue. You are prompted to enter the IP address of the TFTP server, and
then you may enter the desired file name (the default file name is
alarm_log_file).
3. Press <Enter> to continue. After the transfer is started, LA-110 displays its
progress. After the transfer is completed, its result is also shown. A typical
screen is shown below.
Command : Now
Server IP : 1 .8 .9 .9
File : alarm_log_file
LA110>TFTP STATUS CONNECTING ...

[... ]
TFTP STATUS COMPLETE
Figure C-191. SEND ALM LOG – Immediate Sending
Use – Periodical Sending

1. To configure the periodical sending parameters, type:
SEND ALM LOG<Enter>
2. In the first line of the screen displayed in response to this command, use the F
or B keys to display Recurrence and then press <Enter> to continue.
3. You are prompted to enter the IP address of the TFTP server, and then you
may enter the desired file name (the default file name is alarm_log_file).
4. Select the parameters appearing under the Recur every header; these
parameters control the intervals at which the alarm log file is sent. The
available options are as follows:

No. of Days Select a number in the range of 1 to 31.

No. of Alarms Select one of the following options:
N/A The file is sent at the intervals selected by
the No. of Days parameter
FULL BUFFER The file is sent when the buffer is full, to
prevent new alarms from overwriting the
oldest alarms.
10 to 180 The file is sent when the specified
number of alarms accumulate in the
buffer.
5. Press <Enter> to end the command. A typical screen is shown below.
Command : Recurrence
Server IP: 1.1.1.1
File : alarm_log_file
Recur every:
- - - - - - -
No. of Days No. of Alarms
- - - - - - - – - - - - -
01 N/A
Figure C-192. SEND ALM LOG – Periodical Sending
SEND FW LOG
Purpose
Send the LA-110 firewall log, via TFTP, to a designated host, for example, to a
management station. The firewall log is sent as a file formatted like the screen
displayed by the DSP FW LOG command.
The firewall log file can be sent periodically at the intervals selected by user, or
whenever the specified number of events accumulates. The user can also initiate
immediate sending of the whole firewall log file.
To use TFTP, the LA-110 LAN port must be configured as IP router. The
destination must meet the requirements presented in Appendix D. Appendix D also
presents additional information related to TFTP file transfers.
Syntax
SEND FW LOG
Use – Immediate Sending

1. To send the firewall log file to a selected destination, type:
SEND FW LOG<Enter>
You will see the first line of the screen used to control the sending of the
firewall log file. This line is used to select the desired activity. The available
options are as follows:

Now Send now the firewall file.

Recurrence Configure the parameters needed to periodically send
the file.
2. To send now, display Now using the F or B keys and then press <Enter> to
continue. You are prompted to enter the IP address of the TFTP server, and
then you may enter the desired file name (the default file name is
firewall_log_file).
3. Press <Enter> to continue. After the transfer is started, LA-110 displays its
progress. After the transfer is completed, its result is also shown. A typical
screen is shown below.
Command : Now
Server IP : 1 .8 .9 .9
File : firewall_log_file
LA110>TFTP STATUS CONNECTING ...

[... ]
TFTP STATUS COMPLETE
Figure C-193. SEND FW LOG – Immediate Sending
Use – Periodical Sending

1. To configure the periodical sending parameters, type:
SEND FW LOG<Enter>
2. In the first line of the screen displayed in response to this command, use the F
or B keys to display Recurrence and then press <Enter> to continue.
3. You are prompted to enter the IP address of the TFTP server, and then you
may enter the desired file name (the default file name is firewall_log_file).
4. Select the parameters appearing under the Recur every header; these
parameters control the intervals at which the alarm log file is sent. The
available options are as follows:
No. of Days Select a number in the range of 1 to 30.
No. of Alarms Select one of the following options:
N/A The file is sent at the intervals selected by
the No. of Days parameter.
FULL BUFFER The file is sent when the buffer is full, to
prevent new events from overwriting the
oldest events.
20 to 80 The file is sent when the specified
number of events accumulate in the
buffer.

5. Press <Enter> to end the command. A typical screen is shown below.

Command : Recurrence
Server IP: 1.1.1.1
File : firewall_log_file
Recur every:
- - - - - - -
No. of Days No. of log entries
- - - - - - - – - - - - -
01 N/A
Figure C-194. SEND ALM LOG – Periodical Sending
SEND LOOPBACK BRIDGE INTERFACE

Purpose
Send OAM loopback cells over a selected WAN interface of the LAN port bridge.
This command is accepted only when the LAN port is configured to operate as a
bridge.
Syntax
SEND LOOPBACK BRIDGE INTERFACE or SEND LOOPBACK BRIDGE IF
Use
1. Type:
SEND LOOPBACK BRIDGE INTERFACE<Enter> or
SEND LOOPBACK BRIDGE IF<Enter>
2. Select the desired bridge interface index number, in the range of 1 to 16, and
then press <Enter>.
You will see a Please wait … message, followed by the results of your
command.
SEND LOOPBACK DATA
Purpose
Send OAM loopback cells over a selected connection defined on the LA-110 data
port.
You can use the DSP CONN DATA command to display information on the
existing data port connections, and identify the desired interface.
Syntax
SEND LOOPBACK DATA

Use
1. Type:
SEND LOOPBACK DATA<Enter>
2. Select the desired connection index number and then press <Enter>.
command.
SEND LOOPBACK IP INTERFACE

Purpose
Send OAM loopback cells for a selected WAN interface of the LAN port router.
The IP interface is identified by means of its index number, in the range of 1 to 11.
You can use the DSP IP INTERFACE command to display information on the
existing router interfaces, and identify the desired interface.
This command is accepted only when the LAN port is configured to operate as a
router.
Syntax
SEND LOOPBACK IP INTERFACE or SEND LOOPBACK IP IF
Use
1. Type:
SEND LOOPBACK IP INTERFACE<Enter> or
SEND LOOPBACK IP IF<Enter>
2. Select the desired IP interface index number and then press <Enter>.
command.
SEND LOOPBACK USER

Purpose
Send OAM loopback cells over a selected connection of the user port installed in
the LA-110 (E1, FXS or ISDN).
You can use the DSP CONN USER command to display information on the
existing user port connections, and identify the desired interface.
Syntax
SEND LOOPBACK USER
Use
1. Type:
SEND LOOPBACK USER<Enter>


the F or B keys.
3. When ready, press <Enter>.
command.
C.3 Supervision Language Commands and Menu Paths

Table C-70 provides menu paths that correspond to the supervision commands.
Table C-70. Command Index
Command Menu Path
ACTIVATE BRIDGE –
INTERFACE
ACTIVATE BRIDGE IF
ACTIVATE CONN DATA –
ACTIVATE CONN USER –
ACTIVATE ELCP –
ACTIVATE IP INTERFACE –
ACTIVATE IP IF
ACTIVATE TFTP Main Menu > S/W & File Transfer > File Transfer via TFTP
ADD BP Main menu > Configuration > Logical Layer > LAN > VLAN Configuration > VLAN
Member
ADD BRIDGE INTERFACE Main menu > Configuration > Logical Layer > LAN > IF Configuration > Interface
ADD BRIDGE IF
ADD BUNDLE Main menu > Configuration > Logical Layer > User > Bundle
ADD CONN DATA Main menu > Configuration > Logical level > Serial > Connections
ADD CONN USER Main menu > Configuration > Logical Layer > User > Connection
ADD DHCP Main menu > Configuration > Logical Layer > LAN > IF Configuration > DHCP
ADD FIREWALL Main menu > Configuration > Logical Layer > LAN > IF Configuration > Firewall
ADD IP INTERFACE Main menu > Configuration > Logical Layer > LAN > IF Configuration > Interface
ADD IP IF
ADD NAT Main menu > Configuration > Logical Layer > LAN > IF Configuration > NAT
ADD NMS Main menu > Configuration > System > Management >SNMP > Manager List
ADD PAT Main menu > Configuration > Logical Layer > LAN > IF Configuration > PAT
ADD PRI Main menu > Configuration > Logical Layer > User > PRI
ADD STATIC MAC ADDR Main menu > Configuration > Logical Layer > LAN > IF Configuration > MAC Address
C-256 Supervision Language Commands and Menu Paths

Table C-70. Command Index (Cont.)
Command Menu Path
ADD STATIC ROUTING Main menu > Configuration > Logical Layer > LAN > IF Configuration > Static routing
ADD VLAN MEMBER Main menu > Configuration > Logical Layer > LAN > VLAN Configuration > VLAN
Member
CLR ALM LOG Main menu > Monitoring > System
CLR FM LOG Main menu > Monitoring > System
CLR LOOP Main menu > Diagnostic
CLR PM Main menu > Monitoring > System
CLR SYSERR Main menu > Monitoring > System
DEF ADDR ATM Main menu > Configuration > System > Management > Inband Management > ATM
Address
DEF CLOCK Main menu > Configuration > System > Clock
DEF COMMUNITY Main menu > Configuration > System > Management > SNMP > Community
DEF DATA Main menu > Configuration > Physical Layer > Serial
Main menu > Configuration > Logical Layer > Serial > Application
DEF DATE Main menu > Configuration > System > Date & Time
DEF DEFAULT GATEWAY Main menu > Configuration > Logical Layer > LAN > IF Configuration > Default
Gateway
DEF ID Main menu > Configuration > System > Management > Device Information >
Description
DEF LAN Main menu > Configuration > Physical Layer > LAN
Main menu > Configuration > Logical Layer > LAN > Port Application
DEF NAME Main menu > Configuration > System > Management > Device Information
DEF NETWORK Main menu > Configuration > Physical Layer > ATM
Main menu > Configuration > Logical Layer > ATM
DEF PASSWORD Main menu > Configuration > System > Control Port > Change Password
DEF PSTN –
DEF SP PORT Main menu > Configuration > System > Control Port
DEF SYSPARAMS Main menu > Configuration > System > General Parameters
DEF TERM RESET –
DEF TERM SET –
DEF TIME Main menu > Configuration > System > Date & Time
DEF USER Main menu > Configuration > Physical Layer > E1
DEL BRIDGE INTERFACE Main menu > Configuration > Logical Layer > LAN > IF Configuration > Interface
DEL BRIDGE IF
DEL BUNDLE Main menu > Configuration > Logical Layer > User > Bundle
Supervision Language Commands and Menu Paths C-257

Command Menu Path
DEL CONN DATA Main menu > Configuration > Logical level > Serial > Connections
DEL CONN USER Main menu > Configuration > Logical Layer > User > Connection
DEL BP Main menu > Configuration > Logical Layer > LAN > VLAN Configuration > VLAN
Member
DEL DHCP Main menu > Configuration > Logical Layer > LAN > IF Configuration > DHCP
DEL FW Main menu > Configuration > Logical Layer > LAN > IF Configuration > Firewall
DEL IP INTERFACE Main menu > Configuration > Logical Layer > LAN > IF Configuration > Interface
DEL IP IF
DEL NAT Main menu > Configuration > Logical Layer > LAN > IF Configuration > NAT
DEL NMS Main menu > Configuration > System > Management >SNMP > Manager List
DEL PAT –
DEL PRI Main menu > Configuration > Logical Layer > User > PRI
DEL STATIC MAC ADDR Main menu > Configuration > Logical Layer > LAN > IF Configuration > MAC Address
DEL STATIC ROUTING Main menu > Configuration > Logical Layer > LAN > IF Configuration > Static routing
DEL VLAN MEMBER Main menu > Configuration > Logical Layer > LAN > VLAN Configuration > VLAN
Member
DSP ADDR ATM Main menu > Configuration > System > Management > Inband Management > ATM
Address
DSP ALM Main menu >Monitoring > System
DSP ALM F Main menu > Monitoring > System
DSP ARP TABLE –
DSP BP Main menu > Configuration > Logical Layer > LAN > VLAN Configuration > VLAN
Member
DSP BUNDLE Main menu > Configuration > Logical Layer > User > Bundle
DSP COMMUNITY Main Menu > Configuration > System > Management > SNMP > Community
DSP CONN DATA Main menu > Configuration > Logical level > Serial > Connections
DSP CONN USER Main menu > Configuration > Logical Layer > User > Connection
DSP DATA Main menu > Configuration > Physical Layer > Serial
Main menu > Configuration > Logical Layer > Serial > Application
DSP DEFAULT GATEWAY Main menu > Configuration > Logical Layer > LAN > IF Configuration > Default
Gateway
DSP DHCP Main menu > Configuration > Logical Layer > LAN > IF Configuration > DHCP
DSP FW Main menu > Configuration > Logical Layer > LAN > IF Configuration > Firewall
DSP FW LOG Main menu > Monitoring > System

Command Menu Path
DSP IP INTERFACE Main menu > Configuration > Logical Layer > LAN > IF Configuration > Interface
DSP IP IF
DSP LAN Main menu > Configuration > Physical Layer > LAN
Main menu > Configuration > Logical Layer > LAN > Port Application
DSP MAC ADDR Main menu > Configuration > Physical Layer > LAN > MAC Address or Main menu >
Home
DSP NAT Main menu > Configuration > Logical Layer > LAN > IF Configuration > NAT
DSP NETWORK Main menu > Configuration > Physical Layer > ATM
Main menu > Configuration > Logical Layer > ATM
DSP NMS Main menu > Configuration > System > Management >SNMP > Manager List
DSP PAT Main menu > Configuration > Logical Layer > LAN > IF Configuration > PAT
DSP PM AAL2 –
DSP PM ATM [F] Main menu > Monitoring > Logical Layer > ATM > Network > Current
DSP PM BRIDGE Main menu > Monitoring > Logical Layer > LAN
INTERFACE
DSP PM BRIDGE IF
DSP PM CONN AAL2 –
DSP PM CONN DATA Main menu > Monitoring > Logical Layer > Data Fr
DSP PM CONN OAM Main menu > Monitoring > Logical Layer > ATM > OAM > Data Fr
DATA
DSP PM CONN USER Main menu > Monitoring > Logical Layer > User E1
DSP PM DATA [F] Main menu > Monitoring > Physical Layer > Data Fr > Current
DSP PM IP Main menu > Monitoring > Logical Layer > LAN > IP
DSP PM IP INTERFACE Main menu > Monitoring > Logical Layer > LAN > IP Interface
DSP PM IP IF
DSP PM LAN [F] Main menu > Monitoring > Physical Layer > LAN
DSP PM NETWORK [F] Main menu > Monitoring > Physical Layer>Network
DSP PM OAM [F] Main menu > Monitoring > Logical Layer > ATM > OAM > Total
DSP PM OAM STATUS Main menu > Monitoring > Logical Layer > ATM > OAM > Status
DSP PM USER [F] Main menu > Monitoring > Logical Layer > ATM > OAM > User E1
DSP PRI Main menu > Configuration > Logical Layer > User > PRI
DSP PSTN –
DSP ROUTING TABLE Main menu > Configuration > Logical Layer > LAN > IF Configuration > Static routing
DSP SP PORT Main menu > Configuration > System > Control Port
DSP STATIC MAC ADDR Main menu > Configuration > Logical Layer > LAN > IF Configuration > MAC Address
Supervision Language Commands and Menu Paths C-259

Command Menu Path
DSP STATIC ROUTING Main menu > Configuration > Logical Layer > LAN > IF Configuration > Static routing
DSP SYS Main menu > Inventory > System Parameters
Main menu > Inventory > Physical Configuration
DSP SYSERR Main menu > Monitoring > System
DSP SYSPARAMS Main menu > Configuration > System > General Parameters
DSP VLAN MEMBER Main menu > Configuration > Logical Layer > LAN > VLAN Configuration > VLAN
Member
EXIT –
H –
HELP
INIT DB Main menu > Configuration >System > Factory Default
LOOP Main menu > Diagnostic
MOD BP Main menu > Configuration > Logical Layer > LAN > VLAN Configuration > VLAN
Member
MOD BRIDGE INTERFACE Main menu > Configuration > Logical Layer > LAN > IF Configuration > Interface
MOD BRIDGE IF
MOD CONN DATA Main menu > Configuration > Logical level > Serial > Connections
MOD CONN USER Main menu > Configuration > Logical Layer > User > Connection
MOD FW Main menu > Configuration > Logical Layer > LAN > IF Configuration > Firewall
MOD IP INTERFACE Main menu > Configuration > Logical Layer > LAN > IF Configuration > Interface
MOD IP IF
MOD NMS Main menu > Configuration > System > Management >SNMP > Manager List
MOD VLAN MEMBER –
PING Main menu > Diagnostic
RESET Main menu > Configuration >System > Reboot
SEND ALM LOG Main Menu > SW & File Transfer > Transfer via TFTP
SEND FW LOG Main Menu > SW & File Transfer > Transfer via TFTP
SEND LOOPBACK BRIDGE Main Menu > > Diagnostic > Loopback
INTERFACE
SEND LOOPBACK BRIDGE
IF
SEND LOOPBACK DATA Main Menu > Diagnostic > Loopback
SEND LOOPBACK IP Main Menu > Diagnostic > Loopback
INTERFACE
SEND LOOPBACK IP IF
SEND LOOPBACK USER Main Menu > Diagnostic > Loopback

Appendix D
Transferring Software and
Configuration Files
This appendix presents procedures for using the TFTP or HTTP protocol to
perform the following activities:
• Download (install) software
• Upload and/or download LA-110 configuration files.
Network administrators can use these procedures to distribute new software
releases and verified configuration files to all the managed LA-110 units in the
network from a central location.
To further expedite the configuration process, it is also possible to upload the
configuration data stored by LA-110 to a TFTP server as a standard disk file, and
then distribute this file to other units which use similar configuration. The same
procedure can be used to backup the configuration data of the managed units on
the management station or Telnet host: this enables the support personnel to
rapidly restore service in case of maintenance or replacement of user’s LA-110.
In addition, this appendix explains how to download new software releases via
Boot Manager.
D.1 Preparations for Using TFTP

The following conditions must be fulfilled before TFTP can be used:
1. The required suite of protocols (which includes as minimum the TCP/IP stack
and the TFTP server and client software) must be installed on the other
computer (the computer used to download files and/or accept uploaded files).
2. The TFTP protocol runs over IP, therefore it is necessary to ensure IP
connectivity between LA-110 and the other computer. For example, LA-110
and the other computer must be attached to the same LAN.
Note
IP connectivity can be checked using standard tools such as ping.
3. LA-110 must be operated in the router mode, and must be assigned an IP
address and the associated subnet mask. These parameters are configured by
means of the DEF LAN command (see Appendix C for detailed instructions).
4. You must obtain the IP address of the other computer.
5. If you intend to initiate TFTP transfer using a supervisory terminal connected to
the LA-110 CONTROL connector, make sure the LA-110 supervisory port is
properly configured. This is performed by means of the DEF SP PORT
command (see Appendix C for detailed instructions).
Alternatively, you may use a Telnet host that can communicate with LA-110
through its LAN port.
Preparations for Using TFTP D-1

Appendix D Transferring Software and Configuration Files LA-110 Installation and Operation Manual
D.2 Transferring Files via TFTP

Before starting:
1. Obtain the list of distribution files to be downloaded, and check that the
required distribution files are stored on the TFTP server.
2. Make sure that the TFTP server can communicate with the LA-110, for
example, by sending pings to the IP address assigned to the LA-110.
Downloading Software Files
Downloading Software Files (Terminal)
1. Start the TFTP process by entering the following command at the PC or Telnet
host:
2. You will see the first line of the data form used to perform the TFTP transfer.
This line is used to select the desired activity: use the F or B keys to select
Download SW and then press <Enter> to continue.
3. You will see the second line, Server IP, used to enter the IP address of the
server that will download the software distribution file. Enter the desired IP
address in the doted quad format, and then <Enter> to continue.
4. You will see the third line, File, used to enter the name of the desired software
distribution file (make sure to include the path, when necessary). When done,
press <Enter> to continue.
Note If an error occurs, for example, the server IP address is not correct or the specified
file is not found, the command is immediately terminated
5. If no errors are detected, the downloading process starts, and the screen
displays its relative progress in the Status field. A typical screen, as seen while
downloading is progressing normally, is shown below.
Command : Download SW
Server IP : 192.20.50.72
File : ADSL.ROM
Status : [ ……… ]
6. After the transfer is successfully completed, the LA-110 is automatically reset.

After the resetting is successfully completed, the LA-110 prompt is shown
again.
Note If downloading failed, repeat the whole procedure.
Downloading Software Files (ConfiguRAD)

Path: Main > S/W and File Transfer > File Transfer via TFTP.
1. Follow the path above to display the File Transfer via TFTP menu
(see Figure D-1).
D-2 Transferring Files via TFTP

LA-110 Installation and Operation Manual Appendix D Transferring Software and Configuration Files
2. From the File Transfer via TFTP menu, select the following:
Command – Download SW
Server IP (IP address of the TFTP server): 0.0.0.0 to 255.255.255.255
Retry Timeout (intervals between connection retries in seconds): 1–60
Number of Retries (number of retry attempts): 1–5
File Name (name of the software release file).
3. Click Execute Command to start the software file transfer.

The software file transfer begins. The download progress is displayed in the
Trace pane at the bottom of the ConfiguRAD screen.
Figure D-1. File Transfer via TFTP Menu, Software Download
Transferring Files via TFTP D-3

Downgrading LA-110 Software

LA-110 allows rolling back to the previous software releases. When downgrading
the LA-110 software, you must reset its database via Boot Manager.
To downgrade the LA-110 software:
1. Download the necessary software file via TFTP as explained above (via
terminal or ConfiguRAD).
2. Connect an ASCII terminal to the CONTROL port of LA-110.
3. Configure the terminal application as explained in Chapter 3.
4. Reset LA-110 by powering it off and on.
5. Press <Enter> several times immediately after powering on LA-110.
The Boot Manager menu is displayed (see Figure D-2).
RAD LA110 Boot Version 2.33 (July 21 2004)
RAD Boot Manager Version 4.81 (July 21 2004)
0 - Exit Boot-Manager
1 - Show partitions information
2 - Set the Active Application
3 - Erase a partition
4 - Download an Application by XMODEM
5 - Select an Application to run temporarily
6 - Erase all partitions
7 - Show basic hardware information
7 - Perform Reset to the board
8 - System Configuration.
9 - Download an Application by TFTP
a - Reset Data-base
Press the ESC key to go back to the Main Menu.
Select:
Figure D-2. Boot Manager Menu
6. From the From the Boot Manager menu, select Reset database.
LA-110 displays confirmation message.
7. Confirm database reset by typing y.
The database is reset, and LA-110 starts operating with default values.
Transferring Configuration Files
Downloading Configuration Files (Terminal)

The downloading of configuration files is similar to the downloading of software
file.
D-4 Transferring Files via TFTP

To download a configuration file to LA-110:

1. Start the TFTP process by entering the following command at the PC or Telnet
host:
2. You will see the first line of the data form used to perform the TFTP transfer.
This line is used to select the desired activity: use the F or B keys to select
Download configuration and then press <Enter> to continue.
3. Enter the IP address of the TFTP server and the file name. After pressing
<Enter>, the downloading process starts, and the screen displays its relative
progress in the Status field. A typical screen, as seen while downloading is
progressing normally, is shown below.
Command : Download configuration

Server IP : 192.20.50.72
File : ADSL1.cnf
Status : [ ……… ]
4. After the transfer is successfully completed, the LA-110 prompt is automatically

reset again.
Notes • If downloading failed, repeat the whole procedure.
• The downloaded file is stored in RAM, therefore it is lost if the LA-110 is
powered down before the new configuration is activated. In this case, repeat the
downloading procedure.
5. After the resetting is successfully completed, the new configuration is activated,
and the LA-110 prompt is shown again, and it starts using the new
configuration.
Downloading Configuration Files (ConfiguRAD)

Path: Main > S/W and File Transfer > File Transfer via TFTP.
1. Follow the path above to display the File Transfer via TFTP menu
(see Figure D-3).
2. From the File Transfer via TFTP menu, select the following:
Command – Download configuration
Server IP (IP address of the TFTP server): 0.0.0.0 to 255.255.255.255
Retry Timeout (intervals between connection retries in seconds): 1–60
Number of Retries (number of retry attempts): 1–5
File Name (name of the configuration file).
3. Click Execute Command to start the configuration file transfer.

The configuration file transfer begins. The download progress is displayed
in the Trace pane at the bottom of the ConfiguRAD screen.
Transferring Files via TFTP D-5

Figure D-3. File Transfer via TFTP Menu, Configuration File Download
Uploading a Configuration Files

The uploading of configuration files is similar to the downloading of configuration
files described above, except for the following:
1. Select Upload configuration in Step 2 (both terminal and ConfiguRAD
procedures).
2. The file name entered by you determines the name of the file on the target
computer.
D.3 Transferring Files via HTTP

Software and configuration files can also be transferred using HTTP, when a
ConfiguRAD session is in progress.
Path: Main > S/W & File Transfer > File Transfer via HTTP > File Transfer via
HTTP > Download using HTTP.
Downloading Software File via HTTP

1. Follow the path above to display the Download using HTTP menu
(see Figure D-4).
D-6 Transferring Files via HTTP

2. From the Download Using HTTP menu, select Download SW from the
Command drop-down box.
3. Select a software file to download to LA-110 by clicking Browse and
navigating to the file location.
4. Click Submit to start downloading.
LA-110 starts downloading and displays the following message: The file
transferring procedure might take few minutes, at the end, the device will
reboot.
When download is completed, LA-110 displays the following message: File
successfully stored in the device.
LA-110 performs reboot.
Figure D-4. Download Using HTTP Menu, Software File Download
Transferring Configuration Files

Configuration files can be downloaded to LA-110 or uploaded from it to the
management station.
To download configuration file:
1. From the Download Using HTTP menu, select Download Configuration from
the Command drop-down box.
Transferring Files via HTTP D-7

2. Select configuration file to download to LA-110 by clicking Browse and

navigating to the file location.
3. Click Submit to start downloading.
To upload configuration file:
1. From the File Transfer menu, select Upload.
2. Click Submit to start uploading.
3. Save configuration file to the management station.
Figure D-5. Upload Using HTTP Menu, Upload Configuration
D-8 Transferring Files via HTTP

D.4 Working with Boot Manager

LA-110 boots up automatically. After powering up, no user intervention is
required, except when the user wants to access the file system to update the
LA-110 software.
The Boot Manager allows the user to perform basic file transfer operations. These
operations are all optional.
To access the Boot Manager menu:
• Press <Enter> several times immediately after powering up the LA-110.
The Boot Manager menu is displayed (see Figure D-6).
a - Reset Data-base
Select:
Figure D-6. Boot Manager Menu
From the Boot Manager menu, you can:

• List all files stored in the flash memory
• Exchange the operating and backup files
• Delete the operating file; the backup file becomes the operating file
• Download a new operating file (via XMODEM or TFTP); the previous
operating file is saved as the backup file
• Delete all software and configuration files
• Display the basic hardware information (RAM, ROM size etc)
• Reset the LA-110 database (see Appendix E).
If you choose to exchange or delete a file, you are prompted for confirmation.
Working with Boot Manager D-9

Downloading Application Files via XMODEM

Downloading application files using the XMODEM protocol is performed from the
Boot Manager menu.
To download application file via XMODEM:
1. Configure your ASCII terminal or terminal emulation utility running on your PC
to the 115.2 kbps data rate.
2. Access the Boot Manager menu.
The Boot Manager menu appears (see Figure D-6).
3. From the Boot Manager menu, select Show partitions information to identify
an available partition (status – Free).
4. If no free partitions are available, select Erase a Partition to erase a specific
partition or select Erase all Partitions to erase all partitions.
5. From the Boot Manager menu, select Download an Application by
XMODEM.
6. Select the partition, to which you intend to download the application software
by typing its number, 0 or 1.
LA-110 responds with the following string:
Please start the XMODEM download.
7. Send the software release file to LA-110 using the XMODEM utility of your
terminal application.
Once the download has been completed, LA-110 displays the following
message: Finished XMODEM download and performs automatic reset.
Downloading Application Files via TFTP

You can download application software to LA-110 via Boot Manager using TFTP.
To download application file via TFTP:
1. Connect LA-110 to 10 Mbps LAN via the LAN port of the unit.
2. Access the Boot Manager.
3. From the Boot Manager menu, select System Configuration.
4. Configure the IP parameters of LA-110 (IP address, IP mask and default
gateway). These parameters are valid only for the TFTP file transfer via the
Boot Manager.
5. Reset LA-110 by powering the unit down and powering it up.
6. Access the Boot Manager.
7. From the Boot Manager menu, select Download an Application by TFTP.
8. Enter the target file name, IP address of the TFTP server, and a number of
partition, to which you intend to download the application software (0 or 1).
LA-110 starts TFTP download. The unit performs automatic reset, when
the application software download has been completed.
D-10 Working with Boot Manager

Appendix E
Database Initialization
E.1 Introduction
This appendix provides instructions for initializing the LA-110 database (that is,
reload the factory-default parameter values) during the reboot process.
This operation can usually be performed by using a supervisory terminal or Telnet
host to send an INIT DB command. However, if the default password has been
changed but the configured password is not known, it is not possible to establish
management communication using a supervisory terminal or Telnet host.
Therefore, first it is necessary to force the reloading of the factory-default
parameters by means of a supervisory terminal directly connected to the LA-110,
before management communication can be established.
Caution To avoid unrecoverable changes to the LA-110 software, carefully follow the
instructions given below.
E.2 Database Initialization Procedure
Preparations
To prepare for initializing the database:
1. Connect the serial RS-232 communication port of a supervision terminal (any
PC running a terminal emulation program, for example, the HyperTerminal
utility available with most Microsoft Inc. Windows™ releases) to the LA-110
CONTROL connector. It is recommended to use the CBL-RJ45/D9/F/STR
cable, offered by RAD, or equivalent (see cable wiring data in the CONTROL
Connector section in Appendix A).
2. Configure the communication parameters of the selected serial port for
asynchronous communication at 115.2 kbps, no parity, one start bit, eight data
bits and one stop bit.
3. If LA-110 is operating, disconnect the power.
Initialization Procedure
To initialize the LA-110 database:
1. Start the terminal emulation program in accordance with the configuration
parameters described above.
Database Initialization Procedure E-1

Appendix E Database Initialization LA-110 Installation and Operation Manual
2. When ready, connect the power to the LA-110, and immediately start pressing
the <Enter> key many times in sequence until you see the boot manager
screen. A typical screen is shown below (the exact version and date displayed
by your LA-110 may be different).
a - Reset Data-base
Select:
Note If you miss the timing, LA-110 will perform a regular reboot process, which starts
with BB0 Booting and ends with a Running message.
3. Select Reset Data-base. At the Are you sure (Y/N)? prompt, type Y.
4. You will the normal reboot sequence:
Loading ...
Decompressing to RAM.
Processing archive: FLASH

Extracting SHDSL-RO.BIN
........................................................
................................................... CRC OK
Running ...
5. At this stage, press the <Enter> key several times to obtain the PASSWORD>
prompt.
6. Type the default password, 1234 and then press <Enter>. You will see the
SUPERUSER MODE message, followed by the LA110> working prompt.
LA-110 now uses the factory-default parameters. You may now perform
the desired configuration activities.
E-2 Database Initialization Procedure

Appendix F
Operating Environment
This appendix describes the operating environment of the LA-110, to provide the
background information required for understanding the LA-110 configuration
parameters and its performance monitoring capabilities.
The information presented in this appendix covers the following issues:
• E1 environment – Section F.1.
• Digital subscriber line (DSL) transmission methods – Section F.2
• ATM environment – Section F.3.
• IP environment – Section F.4.
• Frame relay support over ATM – Section F.5.
• Ethernet support over ATM – Section F.6.
• Circuit emulation over ATM – Section F.7.
• SNMP environment – Section F.8.
F.1 E1 Environment
E1 Line Signal
The E1 line signal is coded using the High-Density Bipolar 3 (HDB3) coding rules.
The HDB3 coding format is an improvement of the alternate mark inversion (AMI)
code.
In the AMI format, “ones” are alternately transmitted as positive and negative
pulses, whereas “zeros” are transmitted as a zero voltage level. The AMI format
cannot transmit long strings of “zeros”, because such strings do not carry timing
information.
The HDB3 coding rules restrict the maximum length of a “zero” string to 3 pulse
intervals. Longer strings are encoded at the transmit end to introduce non-zero
pulses. To allow the receiving end to detect these artificially-introduced pulses and
to enable their removal to restore the original data string, the encoding introduces
intentional bipolar violations in the data sequence.
The receiving end detects these violations and when they appear to be part of an
encoded “zero” suppression string – it removes them.
Bipolar violations which are not part of the HDB3 zero-suppression string are
assumed to be caused by line errors, and are counted separately to obtain
information on the link transmission quality when the CRC-4 function is not used.
E1 Environment F-1
Appendix F Operating Environment LA-110 Installation and Operation Manual
E1 Signal Structure
The E1 line operates at a nominal rate of 2.048 Mbps. The data transferred over
the E1 line is organized in frames. The E1 frame format is shown in Figure F-1.
Time Slot 0 Time Slot 16 Time Slots 1-15, 17-31
a. Even Frames (0,2,4-14) a. Frame 0

8 Bits per
Time Slot 1 0 0 1 1 0 1 1 0 0 0 0 X Y X X
FAS MAS
Channel Data
b. Odd Frames (1,3,5-15) b. Frames 1-15
I 1 A N N N N N A B C D A B C D 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8
TS TS TS TS TS TS TS TS TS TS TS TS TS TS TS TS TS TS TS TS TS TS TS TS TS TS TS TS TS TS TS TS
32 Time Slots/Frame 0 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 10 11 12 13 14 15 16 17 18 19 20 21 22 23 24 25 26 27 28 29 30 31
FR FR FR FR FR FR FR FR FR FR FR FR FR FR FR FR
16 Frames/Multiframe 0 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 10 11 12 13 14 15
Notes
I International Bit ABCD ABCD Signaling Bits
N National Bits (Sa4 through Sa8) X Extra Bit
A Alarm Indication Signal (Loss of Frame Alignment - Red Alarm) Y Loss of Multiframe Alignment
FAS Frame Alignment Signal, occupies alternate MAS Multiframe Alignment Signal
(but not necessarily even) frames
Figure F-1. E1 Frame Format
Each E1 frame includes 256 bits. The 256 bits are arranged in 32 timeslots of eight
bits each that carry the data payload. The frame repetition rate is 8,000 per
second, and therefore the data rate supported by each timeslot is 64 kbps. The
number of timeslots available for user data is maximum 31, because timeslot 0 is
always reserved.
Timeslot 0
Timeslot 0 is used for two main purposes:
• Delineation of frame boundaries. For this purpose, in every second frame
timeslot 0 carries a fixed pattern, called frame alignment signal (FAS). Frames
carrying the FAS are defined as even frames, as they are assigned the numbers
0, 2, 4, etc. when larger structures (multiframes) are used.
The receiving equipment searches for this fixed pattern in the data stream
using a special algorithm, a process called frame synchronization. Once this
process is successfully completed, the equipment can identify each bit in the
received frames.
• Transmission of housekeeping information. In every frame without FAS (odd
frames), timeslot 0 carries housekeeping information. This information
includes:
Bit 1 - this bit is called the international (I) bit. Its main use is for error
detection using the optional CRC-4 function.
Bit 2 is always set to 1, a fact used by the frame alignment algorithm.
F-2 E1 Environment
LA-110 Installation and Operation Manual Appendix F Operating Environment
Bit 3 is used as a remote alarm indication (RAI), to notify the equipment at

the other end that the local equipment lost frame alignment, or does not
receive an input signal.
The other bits, identified as Sa4 through Sa8, are designated national bits,
and are actually available to the users, provided agreement is reached as to
their use.
Multiframes
To increase the information carrying capacity without wasting bandwidth, the
frames are organized in larger structures, called multiframes. Two types of
multiframes are generally used:
• 256N, which consists of 2 frames (one odd frame and one even frame). The
256N multiframe is generally used when timeslot 16 is to carry user’s payload.
In this mode, the maximum number of timeslots available for payload is 31
(maximum payload data rate of 1984 kbps). For systems which use the
common-channel signaling (CCS) method, the CCS information is often
transmitted in timeslot 16.
• 256S, which consists of 16 frames. The 256S multiframe is generally used
when timeslot 16 serves for the transmission of end-to-end signaling using
channel-associated signaling (CAS). CAS is typically used on links that transfer
voice channels. In this mode, the maximum number of timeslots available for
payload is 30 (maximum data rate of 1920 kbps).
Payload Encoding
Data Payload
Each payload timeslot in an E1 frame is transparent, that is, it does not modify the
user’s data in any way. Therefore, each timeslot can carry data at a rate of
64 kbps.
To carry data at higher rates, a service called fractional E1 can be used to distribute
the original data stream among several specified timeslots (such a group of
timeslots is called a bundle). At the other end of the link, the data is collected from
the specified timeslots and the original data stream is restored. This enables
transparent transfer of data at rates which are multiples of 64 kbps.
Analog Payload
Analog signals, for example, voice, are digitized, to convert them to data streams
that can be transferred over the link. The standardized approach is to digitize each
analog channel using pulse code modulation (PCM) at a sampling rate of 8 kHz,
with each sample represented by an 8-bit word. This yields a data rate of 64 kbps,
which means that each voice channel can be carried in one timeslot.
To achieve the best possible voice quality over the widest practical range of analog
signal amplitudes while using only 8 bits per sample, the signal is compressed at
the transmitting end and expanded at the receiving end, to restore its original
amplitude (this is called companding). The non-linear companding law
standardized in ITU-T Rec. G.713 for use in E1 frames is called A-law.
E1 Environment F-3
The voice quality obtained using 64 kbps PCM encoding is quite good; it can even
support data transmission using voiceband modems (including fax) at relatively
high data rates.
To decrease the required rate needed to transport an analog channel, another
encoding method, adaptive differentially-encoded PCM (ADPCM) has been
standardized in ITU-T Rec. G.726. ADPCM compresses the data rate needed to
carry one channel to only 32 kbps, thereby doubling the number of channels that
can be carried at a given payload rate at the expense of a small degradation in
quality.
E1 Line Statistics Using CRC-4 Error Detection

The CRC-4 function specified in ITU-T Rec. G.704 allows evaluating the quality of
transmission over E1 links.
When the CRC-4 option is enabled, frames are arbitrarily grouped in groups of 16
(these groups are called CRC-4 multiframes, and do not bear any relationship to
the 16-frame multiframe structures used with the 256S multiframe explained
above). A CRC-4 multiframe always starts with a frame that carries the frame
alignment signal. The CRC-4 multiframe structure is identified by a six-bit CRC-4
multiframe alignment signal, which is multiplexed into bit 1 of timeslot 0 of each
odd-numbered (1, 3, 5, etc.) frame of the CRC-4 multiframe, up to frame 11 of
the multiframe. Each CRC-4 multiframe is divided into two submultiframes of 8
frames (2048 bits) each. The detection of errors is achieved by calculating a
four-bit checksum on each 2048-bit block (submultiframe). The four checksum bits
calculated on a given submultiframe are multiplexed, bit by bit, in bit 1 of timeslot
0 of each even-numbered frame of the next submultiframe.
At the receiving end, the checksum is calculated again on each submultiframe and
then compared against the original checksum (sent by the transmitting end in the
next submultiframe). The results are reported by two bits multiplexed in bit 1 of
timeslot 0 in frames 13, 15 of the CRC-4 multiframe, respectively. Errors are
counted and used to prepare statistic data on transmission performance.
E1 Line Alarm Conditions

• Excessive bit error rate. The bit error rate is measured on the frame alignment
signal. The alarm threshold is an error rate higher than 10-3 that persists for 4
to 5 seconds. The alarm condition is canceled when the error rate decreases
below 10-4 for 4 to 5 consecutive seconds.
• Loss of frame alignment (also called loss of synchronization). This condition is
declared when too many errors are detected in the frame alignment signal
(FAS), e.g., when 3 or 4 FAS errors are detected in the last 5 frames. Loss of
frame alignment is cleared after no FAS errors are detected in two consecutive
frames. The loss of frame alignment is reported by means of the A bit
(see Figure F-1).
Note For ATM equipment, the A bit is also used to indicate loss of ATM cell delineation.
F-4 E1 Environment
• Loss of multiframe alignment (applicable only when 256S multiframes are

used). This condition is declared when too many errors are detected in the
multiframe alignment signal (MAS), as for loss of frame alignment. The loss of
multiframe alignment is reported by means of the Y bit (see figure C-1).
• Alarm indication signal (AIS). The AIS signal is an unframed “all-ones” signal,
and is used to maintain line signal synchronization in case of loss of input
signal, e.g., because an alarm condition occurred in the equipment that
supplies the line signal. Note that the equipment receiving an AIS signal loses
frame synchronization.
F.2 Digital Subscriber Line (DSL) Transmission Methods
Overview
Many DSL technologies have been developed in the recent years. Their purpose it
to enable using the wide installed base of copper (twisted pair) cables laid by the
telephone companies to provide the ubiquitous phone service (plain old telephone
service – POTS) for high-speed digital transmission.
The main DSL methods supported by LA-110 include:
• Single-pair high-speed digital subscriber line (SHDSL) technology, supports
symmetrical transmission rates of up to 2.312 Mbps. SHDSL has been
standardized in ITU-T Rec. G.991.2.
• Asymmetrical digital subscriber line (ADSL), supports up to 8 Mbps in the
downlink direction and up to 1 Mbps in the uplink direction. The line code
used by ADSL interfaces is the Discrete Multitone (DMT) code. ADSL has been
standardized in ITU-T Rec. G.992.1.
The various DSL interfaces are used to provide the uplink to the ATM network,
and cover ranges up to a few km over typical unloaded twisted pairs.
SHDSL Transmission Methods

SHDSL Transmission System Versions
SHDSL standards describe two types of transmission systems:
• 2-wire (2W) SHDSL system – uses a single unloaded twisted pair.
• 4-wire (4W) SHDSL system – uses two unloaded twisted pairs, and distributes
the payload among the two pairs using the same modulation methods as the
2W system. The 4W system has longer range, because it operates at lower line
rates.
This section presents only the 2W system, however the information is also
applicable to 4W systems.
SHDSL Transmission Subsystem Structure
The basic SHDSL transmission subsystem includes two units interconnected by a
single pair of wires, usually a regular unloaded twisted pair. The pair is used for
duplex transmission.
Digital Subscriber Line (DSL) Transmission Methods F-5

Two different types of SHDSL units are defined by ITU-T Rec. G.991.2:
• SHDSL central unit (STU-C), usually located at the network side, at the central
office (CO), which controls the operation of the whole subsystem, supervises
the link setup process and provides the timing reference.
• SHDSL remote unit (STU-R), which terminates the line at the user’s side, on
the customer’s premises (CPE).
SHDSL Modulation Method

SHDSL uses multi-level pulse-amplitude modulation (PAM) together with trellis
coding. Using advanced digital signal processing (DSP) techniques enables
symmetric data transmission at rates in the range of 192 to 2304 kbps
(corresponding to lines rates of 200 to 2312 kbps).
The modulation method is spectrally compatible with other transmission
technologies deployed in the access network, including other DSL technologies.
The LA-110 SHDSL subsystem can be configured to ensure compatibility with
regional standards, as specified in Annex A (North America) and Annex B (Europe)
of ITU-T Rec. G.991.2 (this includes both operational differences and performance
requirements).
SHDSL Signal Structure

The SHDSL line signal is organized in frames. The line signal structure enables the
transmission of both payload and overhead data. The main types of overhead data
are:
• Synchronization word, for frame alignment.
• Error detection and correction data also used for performance monitoring
data.
• Embedded operations channel (eoc) - enables supervision and management of
the whole SHDSL transmission subsystem (STU-C and STU-R), and initiation of
diagnostic loopbacks and tests.
The transmit SHDSL data stream is generated by a framer, which also
demultiplexes the received data stream. The framer used in the LA-110 can be
configured to generate two types of data streams: n×64 kbps data stream or serial
ATM data stream:
• When operating two LA-110 units in a link, either framing method can be
used
• When operating an LA-110 unit in a link with other equipment, select the
framing mode matching the mode used by the other unit.
SHDSL Line Transmission Process

The SHDSL line transmission process includes two stages: start-up and data
transmission.
To enable link establishment under various conditions, the SHDSL subsystem
operates in a master-slave mode, where the STU-C unit serves as the master, and
the STU-R unit is the slave.
F-6 Digital Subscriber Line (DSL) Transmission Methods

The STU-C unit performs the following functions:

• Controls the link start-up procedure.
• Provides the timing reference for SHDSL transmission.
• Manages the communication on the eoc channel.
The start-up process is automatically initiated by the STU-C upon power-up, and
uses advanced digital signal processing techniques together with a special link
activation process. It includes the following sequence of operations:
• Data rate negotiation, which attempts to set up the link at the highest rate
possible (the maximum allowed rate is selected by the user, as part of the link
configuration parameters). This process has three main steps:
Analysis of line transmission characteristics (line probing) whenever a link
must be setup between two SHDSL modems.
Exchange of transmission parameters (handshaking) between the two
modems.
Transmission of special signals that enable training of echo cancellers and
equalizers, and the synchronization of SHDSL receivers to transmitters in
both directions of transmission.
• Automatic detection and compensation of tip/ring polarity reversal on the line.
After start-up, the SHDSL links support transmission of payload, as well as an eoc.
Data transmission is automatically started after start-up is successfully completed.
The total overhead carried by an SHDSL signal is always 8 kbps. For example:
• When the payload data rate is 192 kbps (3 × 64 kbps), the line rate is
200 kbps
• When the payload data rate is 2304 kbps (36 × 64 kbps), the line rate is
2312 kbps.
SHDSL Transmission Parameters

The user must specify the following set of SHDSL transmission parameters:
• Maximum link rate: this is the rate at which the SHDSL modems will attempt
to set up the link. A lower rate increases the maximum range, therefore when
the link cannot be set up at the requested rate, the SHDSL modems
automatically negotiate to select the highest possible rate.
• Transmission mode. ITU-T Rec. G.991.2 specifies three sets of regional signal
characteristics for SHDSL modems, however only two of the sets are currently
offered for the LA-110:
The set of characteristics specified in Annex A is required for compatibility
in North American networks
The set of characteristics specified in Annex B is required for compatibility
in European networks.
• Power backoff. When the estimated power loss on the link between the two
SHDSL modems is low, it may be desirable to use less than the maximum
allowed signal power. You can enable this option, called power backoff, to
reduce the interference caused by your signal to other equipment using pairs
in the same cable without degrading the link transmission quality.

ADSL Transmission Methods
ADSL Modulation Method

The characteristics of the ADSL signals are defined in the ITU-T Rec. G.992.1
standard. The ADSL line code is the Discrete Multitone (DMT) code.
The DMT line code is designed to provide a good match for the twisted-wire pair
channel. One of the main characteristics of the twisted-wire pair channel is the
extreme variation in its transmission function versus frequency within the range of
interest. For example, for operation over POTS infrastructure, the range is from
25 kHz, which is the lowest frequency that can be used without significant
interference from the phone signals carried by the line, up to approx. 1.1 MHz.
To overcome this variation, discrete Fourier transform (DFT) techniques are used
to decompose the modulated signal into many mutually orthogonal signals, located
at a spacing of 4.3125 kHz (in accordance with the ITU-T Rec. G.992.1 standard,
the downstream signal is decomposed into 256 discrete subcarriers, and the
upstream signal – into 32 subcarriers).
Each subcarrier carries a certain fraction of the payload. The subcarrier modulation
method is a special form of quadrature amplitude modulation (QAM). Due to the
relatively high bandwidth efficiency of QAM, each subcarrier essentially uses its
own frequency band. Since this band is relatively narrow, it is possible to process
each subcarrier independently of the other subcarriers, so as to compensate in a
nearly optimal way for attenuation, group delay, and intersymbol interference (ISI).
Figure F-2 shows a typical allocation of DMT subcarriers, which is suitable for ADSL
transmission systems operating over a POTS infrastructure. The recommended
operating parameters over POTS infrastructure are defined in Annex A of the
ITU-T Rec. G.992.1 standard.
As seen in Figure F-2, the frequency ranges of the downstream and upstream
channels overlap partially. This capability is obtained by using echo cancellers.
Another approach for duplex transmission over one pair is frequency division
multiplexing (FDM). The FDM method is used when it is necessary to separate
(i.e., prevent the overlapping of) the frequency ranges used to transmit and
receive. For example, the frequency range required for ISDN signal transmission is
up to 95 kHz.
To support this frequency range, it is necessary to configure the ADSL transmission
subsystem for operation in the FDM mode. Figure F-3 shows a typical range of
subcarriers for each direction for operation over ISDN infrastructure. The reduced
number of subcarriers decreases the maximum range by approximately 10%,
relative to the range over POTS infrastructure. The recommended operating
parameters using FDM over ISDN infrastructure are defined in Annex B of the
ITU-T Rec. G.992.1 standard.

POTS Range ADSL Bandpass Filter
6 7 255
4.3125 kHz ( 1104 kHz (

256
0.3 kHz 3.4 kHz 25.875 kHz 1099.6875 kHz
A. Downstream Subcarriers
POTS Range ADSL Bandpass Filter
7 8 9 34
0.3 kHz 3.4 kHz 30.1875 kHz 146.625 kHz
B. Upstream Subcarriers
Figure F-2. Typical Allocation of DMT Subcarriers (POTS Infrastructure)
ISDN Range ADSL Bandpass Filter
74 75 255
0.3 kHz 95 kHz 319.125 kHz 1099.6875 kHz
A. Downstream Subcarriers
ISDN Range ADSL Bandpass Filter
37 57
0.3 kHz 95 kHz 159.5625 kHz 245.8125 kHz
B. Upstream Subcarriers
Figure F-3. Typical Allocation of DMT Subcarriers (ISDN Infrastructure)

ADSL Payload Channels

The ADSL signal is formatted in frames and superframes, which include various
types of overhead and payload transport channels. The frame structures depend
on the type of payload, and therefore this section covers the characteristics
relevant to the transport of ATM signals.
The ADSL transmission subsystem supports the transmission of the following main
types of payload channels:
• Downstream channel, designated AS0: simplex high-speed channel, used to
transmit data from the ATU-C to the ATU-R. ADSL systems support all the
downstream data rates specified in the ITU-T Rec. G.992.1 standard, as well as
other data rates which are multiples of 32 kbps. The maximum downstream
data rate for ATM signals is 6.144 Mbps.
• Upstream channel, designated LS0: simplex high-speed channel, used to
transmit data from the ATU-R to the ATU-C. ADSL systems support all the
downstream data rates specified in the ITU-T Rec. G.992.1 standard, as well as
other data rates which are multiples of 32 kbps. The maximum upstream data
rate for ATM signals is 640 kbps.
The data rates of the payload channels are usually not synchronized to the ADSL
line data rate. This is achieved by inserting padding bits and idle ATM cells in the
data stream, but in this case it is necessary to use a synchronization mechanism
that restores the original data rate at the other end of the link.
An alternative approach is to lock the payload channels rates to the ADSL line rate:
in this case, the channel rates are determined by the line rate, minus a fixed rate of
overhead data.
ADSL Subsystem Overhead

The ADSL subsystem overhead includes the following main types of data, used for
synchronization and ADSL link management:
• Synchronization word
• ADSL overhead channel (aoc), which enables the ATU-C and ATU-R units to
exchange status data.
For example, during the ADSL link start-up process the aoc is used to send the
system configuration parameters, evaluate the transmission capabilities of the
interconnecting line, select the optimum data rate (necessary when using the
rate-adaptive mode), and perform the handshaking required to start service.
Other aoc functions include:
Transmission of performance statistics from the ATU-R to the ATU-C.
Activation of test loopbacks, and bit error rate (BER) measurement.
Checking of ATU-R software version, and automatic updating by
downloading the ATU-C software to the ATU-R when versions differ.
Handshaking with the remote unit.
• Embedded operations channel, eoc, used for communication between the
ATU-C and ATU-R. The eoc is used for in-service and out-of-service
maintenance, and for the retrieval of ATU-R status information and ADSL
performance monitoring parameters.

The communication through the eoc is always initiated by the ATU-C. The
ATU-C serves as the master of the eoc link, and sends commands to the
ATU-R. The ATU-R serves as slave on the eoc link, and it only responds to the
commands. The only exception is for the "dying gasp" message: this message is
sent by the ATU-R when an imminent power failure is detected and is inserted
in the upstream link as soon as appropriate bytes are available, irrespective of
the commands sent by the ATU-C.
• CRC check bytes for error detection.
• Fixed indicator bits for OAM.
• FEC redundancy bytes for error correction.
ADSL Framing Modes

The channels and overhead described above are inserted in frame structures
defined by ITU-T Rec. G.992.1. Two types of framing are used on the ADSL link:
full overhead and reduced overhead. Furthermore, two versions of full overhead
and two versions of reduced overhead are defined.
The four resulting framing modes, referred to as framing modes 0, 1, 2 and 3, are
defined in Table F-1.
An ATU-C configured for ATM transport must support the framing structures 0 and
1; support of reduced overhead framing structures 2 and 3 is optional.
Table F-1. ADSL Framing Modes
Framing Structure Description
0 Full overhead framing with asynchronous bit-to-modem timing. This requires the
synchronization control mechanism to be enabled.
1 Full overhead framing with synchronous bit-to-modem timing. In this case, the
synchronization control mechanism is disabled.
2 Reduced overhead framing with separate fast and sync byte in the fast and
interleaved latency buffer respectively (requires 64 kbp framing overhead)
3 Reduced overhead framing with merged fast and sync byte, using either the fast or
the interleaved latency buffer (requires only 32 kbps framing overhead)
The ATU-C indicates during link initialization the highest framing structure number
it supports. If the ATU-R indicates a lower framing structure number during
initialization, the ATU-C selects the framing structure number indicated by the
ATU-R.
ADSL Coding Methods

To ensure reliable transmission, ADSL transmission include several functions:
• Modulation/demodulation, using DFT.
• Evaluation of the transmission function of the channel

• Distribution of payload among the various subcarriers. This algorithm analyzes

the signal-to-noise (SNR) for each subcarrier, and assigns the optimal amount
of payload information to be carried by each subcarrier. As a result, each
subcarrier carries 2 to 15 bits per symbol, resulting in a payload of up to
60 kbps per subcarrier. Since the error events for each subcarrier are
essentially independent, this method achieves a coding gain near the
maximum theoretical gain.
• Error detection and correction algorithm. The algorithm applies forward error
correction coding to overcome random errors and impulse noise error events,
that are common to the residential twisted-wire pairs. The coding methods
include concatenated trellis and Reed-Solomon block coding, and interleaving:
The ADSL systems use a variable rate Reed-Solomon code. The code
provides a redundancy in the range of 2 to 24 bytes at block lengths of up
to 255 symbols (bytes). The amount of redundancy can be configured by
means of the configuration files. This gives the operator the flexibility to
adjust the error protection to the typical requirements of the installation, to
provide the customers extra protection where loop conditions call for.
The trellis code, specified in the ANSI DS1.413-1995 standard, is used as
the inner code in the concatenated coding scheme of ADSL systems, with
the Reed-Solomon code serving as the outer code. The trellis code operates
on the data spread on the various subcarriers, and thus does not add extra
latency. The trellis code improves the noise margin measured for stationary
added noise (such as white noise and typical NEXT and FEXT noise) without
requiring additional bandwidth.
Protection against impulse noise is obtained by using interleaving.
Interleaving can be independently enabled/disabled by the user for each
channel and transmission direction. The interleaving parameters require a
trade-off between protection and latency.
Adaptation to a Changing Environment
Due to the advanced coding techniques described above, ADSL systems can
transport the required payload in very noisy environments.
To evaluate its operating environment, the system measures the noise environment
during start-up and selects accordingly optimized operational parameters.
Moreover, the system uses a special adaptation algorithm to select automatically
the highest rate that can be supported by the line; for this purpose, the user can
specify a minimum acceptable data rate and the adaptation algorithm uses this
value in case the line quality is not sufficient to support the nominal data rate of
the intended application.
To ensure continued protection during normal operation, the system continues to
monitor on-line the noise environment, and to adapt itself to slow changes in the
environment. This function, called bit swapping, is automatically performed by
exchanging messages through the aoc channel. For example, the addition or
deletion of a narrow band noise will immediately be detected and the ADSL
systems will use the handshaking protocols defined in the standard to make the
arrangements required to optimally protect the data at all times. These changes are
performed without disrupting the service and without any resynchronization and
training procedures.

When operating in the rate-adaptive mode, the rate adaptation algorithm will not
only perform bit swapping, but at start-up will also select automatically the highest
data rate that can be supported while maintaining a user-specified noise margin.
Network Timing Reference (NTR)
Some services, for example, Voice and Telephony over ATM (VToA), require that a
reference clock be available for the higher layers of the protocol stack, that is,
above the physical layer. This reference click is used to guarantee end-to-end
synchronization of transmit and receive sides.
To support the distribution of a timing reference over the network, the ADSL
system may transport to the ATU-R an 8 kHz timing marker, designated NTR,
which supplied to the ATU-C.
The enables the ATU-C to provide timing information, which then becomes
available to the equipment connected to the ATU-R. This reference timing has an
accuracy corresponding to the accuracy of the clock provided to the ATU-C. The
maximum frequency variation of the NTR is ±32 ppm.
F.3 ATM Environment
Characteristics of ATM Service

ATM is a public high-performance cell-switched service. Its main characteristic is
the use of very short packets, called “cells”, and intelligent switching nodes ("ATM
switches"). The handling and routing of these cells, based on information carried in
each cell header, is very simple and efficient, therefore high-speed transmission
can be achieved.
Moreover, the use of short cells minimizes delay variation problems inherent in
other packet transmission technologies, e.g., Frame Relay, etc., and simplifies cell
handling.
ATM networks provide customers with individual access over various facilities, i.e.,
each individual subscriber has a dedicated physical access path, however the
switching and transmission facilities are shared by the subscribers, in a way similar
to the sharing of LAN and WAN resources.
ATM Network Structure
ATM service is usually provided by ASPs (ATM Service Providers) as well as data
carrier service providers, and in general consists of several ATM switches
interconnected by high-speed point-to-point transmission links.
Each transmission link interconnects two ATM switches. Time-division multiplexing
on each transmission link is obtained by distributing the traffic generated by the
subscribers over virtual paths (VPs). In accordance with the UNI specification, each
link can have up to 256 VPs. Each VP is further subdivided into virtual channels
(VCs). Each VP can support up to 65536 VCs.
The subscriber is connected by means of an access link to one of the network
switches, and defines its communication requirements, e.g., average data rate,
quality of service, etc., at subscription time. The connection point between the
ATM network and the subscriber’s equipment is designated the User-Network
Interface (UNI).
ATM Environment F-13

ATM Cell Structure

Figure F-4 shows the structure of the ATM cell. Each cell has a 5-byte header that
carries the control data, and a 48-byte information field, for a total of 53 bytes.
The header includes the following information fields:
• General flow control (GFC). The four GFC bits are always set to 0 when
transmitted through the UNI, but can be used for local flow control purposes.
• Virtual path identifier (VPI). The VPI includes eight bits. When not all the bits
are in use, the VPI is inserted in the least significant bit positions.
• Virtual circuit identifier (VCI). The VCI includes sixteen bits. When not all the
bits are in use, the VCI is inserted in the least significant bit positions.
Note An ATM circuit is defined by a unique VPI.VCI pair (VCIs can be reused on a
different VPs).
• Payload type (PT). The payload type, encoded by means of three bits, is used
to discriminate between cells carrying user’s payload, and the various types of
cells used for ATM operations and maintenance (OAM). The OAM cells can be
used for transfer of ATM signaling information, in-service testing (e.g.,
loopbacks) and performance monitoring, as well as to fill in idle intervals
between cells carrying user’s payload.
• Cell loss priority (CLP) indicator. This bit is used to indicate the priority set by
the user for this cell: 0 for high cell priority, and 1 for low priority.
• Header error control (HEC). This field is designed for correction of single-bit,
and detection of multiple-bit address errors.
GFC (4 bits) VPI (4 bits)
VPI (4 bits) VCI (4 bits)

Header VCI (8 bits)
VCI (4 bits) PT (3 bits) CLP
HEC
Cell Payload (Byte 1)
.
Payload .
.
Figure F-4. ATM Cell Structure
F-14 ATM Environment

ATM Network Operation

Basically, ATM is a connection-oriented technology. ATM cells are transported
over the network by setting up virtual channel connections (VCCs) between the
UNIs of two subscribers wishing to communicate.
Note that the VCI in the ATM cell header is assigned per link, and therefore it may
change across the network within the same VCC. Similarly, a VP groups VCs
carried between two ATM entities, and therefore the VPI may also change along a
given VCC.
Each ATM switch handles the VCs associated with a given VP as a block: such VCs
are globally switched, without unbundling or processing the individual VCs in any
way, and without changing their VCI numbers. This method ensures that the cell
sequence of each VC is always preserved.
ATM network capacity design is based on traffic statistics, because the traffic
handled by the ATM switches and the interconnecting links consists of large
numbers of cells, generated by many independent sources. Statistically, the traffic
generated by any specific set of users (e.g., users in a branch office) has a relatively
constant rate, but its instantaneous rate varies rapidly.
FIFO buffers are used to temporarily store traffic peaks, and release data at a
controlled rate. Therefore, the delay incurred by a cell in its passage through the
network changes, because it depends on several factors:
• Link transmission delays. These delays decrease when the link data rates
increase.
• Processing delays within the network and users equipment. These delays are
relatively constant.
• Time spent by cells waiting in buffers. These delays vary with the traffic load.
Due to the bursty nature of the traffic, at times the instantaneous traffic offered by
the network users may exceed the available ATM network resources (these
resources include link bandwidth, buffer capacities, and the processing power of
elements used to route the traffic).
Congestion occurs when the instantaneous traffic offered by the users exceeds the
available network resources. When congestion occurs, some of the cells are lost
(either because they are intentionally discarded within the ATM network, or
because they are not accepted by the network).
Users must therefore agree with the network operators, at subscription time, on
the amount of traffic that the network must transfer reliably. In principle, this traffic
contract specifies the maximum traffic load that the network will accept from that
particular user; as long as the user does not generate traffic in excess of the
agreed-upon amount, the ATM network guarantees proper transfer.
Since the traffic generated by each user affects the service to other users, any ATM
network, and each element connected to an ATM network (including the LA-110)
must be able to perform traffic policing, to ensure that the traffic accepted from
each user does not exceed the amount specified in its traffic contract (any excess
traffic will be discarded).
Thus, the ATM network can be designed to offer to users a committed information
rate, and may be able to support, when resources are available, higher peak rates.

Priorities in Traffic Handling

To enable a user to optimally utilize the ATM transmission capabilities subscribed
for, it is necessary to allow each user to specify the relative importance (priority) of
the traffic generated by its applications.
Two different types of priority can be implemented:
• Priority with respect to intentional discarding of cells in case of congestion.
This priority is indicated by means of the CLP bit appearing in each cell
header: lower-priority cells (cells with CLP = 1) are discarded preferentially in
case of network congestion.
Note The CLP bit in the cell header indicates the loss priority, therefore traffic which is
more important to the user must be assigned low cell loss priority (CLP = 0).
Note that if after discarding all the low priority cells, the offered traffic still
exceeds the available network resources, the network will also discard priority
cells (cells with CLP = 0), starting with the priority cells arriving from users that
exceed their subscribed traffic rates.
• Priority with respect to the emission of cells toward the network. This priority is
an internal priority mechanism whose purpose is to prevent the delaying of
traffic with higher priority (as determined by user’s preferences), when the
equipment is already engaged in the transmission of lower-priority traffic. This
is particularly important in equipment with multiple ports, e.g., LA-110.
ATM Network Service Categories

As explained above, ATM network performance depends on traffic load versus
network resources, therefore it is not constant. Users nevertheless need a
predictable quality of service (QoS).
The required QoS depends on the application using the ATM connection, and
therefore it must be clearly defined (this is done at subscription time, by means of
the traffic contract, which is the collection of traffic parameters agreed upon
between the user and the ATM network operator). For example:
• An ATM connection used for video or voice transmission generates traffic at a
constant rate, and requires that the transmission delay through the network be
also relatively constant (to a certain degree, buffers can be used to smooth out
variations). On the other hand, the occasional loss of a few cells could be
tolerable, because of the subjective interpretation of video and audio
information.
• An ATM connection used for file transmission, LAN interconnection, or data
communications, is not very sensitive to delay: such connections can tolerate
any delay up to the delay that causes time-out of higher-level protocols, but is
very sensitive to the loss of cells (any cell lost, or received with errors, requires
retransmission of the whole message).

For standardization, the ATM Forum standards specify several types of service
categories:
CBR Constant bit rate service, intended for real-time applications that
require a constant bandwidth, and tightly constrained delay and
delay variation. The required bandwidth must be available as
long as the connection is active.
A typical application for CBR service is circuit emulation.
VBR Variable bit rate service, intended for applications that require
constraints on the maximum delay and delay variation, e.g.,
video, voice, etc. Two types of VBR service are defined:
• RT-VBR – real-time VBR, which requires tight control on
delay and delay variation.
• NRT-VBR – non-real-time VBR, with more relaxed
requirements).
UBR Unspecified bit rate service, intended for non-real-time
applications which do not require tightly constrained delay and
delay variation, e.g., data communications applications such as
file transfer, e-mail, etc.
UBR+ Same as UBR, except that it enables the user to specify a
minimum desired cell rate.
ABR Available bit rate service. This service is similar to UBR, except
that it is capable of adaptation to changes in ATM transfer
capabilities without inducing excessive cell loss.
ATM Network Transmission Parameters

To enable consistent definition of transmission requirements, a standard set of
traffic parameters has been defined in the ATM Forum traffic handling
specifications. The traffic parameters include:
Peak Cell Rate Maximum rate of cells accepted from the user.
(PCR) Generally, cells received at rates exceeding the PCR are
discarded.
PCR values generally specify the maximum rate for all
the cells (CLP=0+1), however sometimes separate PCR
values may be specified for cells with CLP=0 (high
priority) and CLP=0+1 (all cells).
Maximum Cell Maximum time allowed for the transfer of a cell to its
Transfer Delay destination. Cells spending a longer time in transit are
(maxCTD) considered useless to the user’s application.
Peak-to-Peak Cell The maximum tolerable variation in the cell transit time
Delay Variation through the network.
(CDV)
Sustainable Cell The long-term average cell rate provided by the user.
Rate (SCR)

Maximum Burst The maximum number of cells allowed in a single burst.

Size (MBS) Longer bursts may be discarded.
Cell Loss Ratio The maximum ratio of cells that may get lost in the
(CLR) network when the offered user’s traffic conforms to the
traffic contract.
Minimum Desired The minimum desired rate of cells for the UBR+ mode.
Cell RAte (MDCR)
A traffic contract includes the parameters listed above (or at least the mandatory
parameters, e.g., PCR). The UNI function is to enforce the traffic contract on the
traffic arriving from the user, to ensure that it does not exceed the agreed-upon
limits (any non-conforming traffic is selectively discarded in accordance with the
principles listed above, to ensure that users exceeding their limits do not degrade
the service to conforming users).
ATM Protocol Stack

The ATM transmission method uses very short cells, whereas most applications use
much longer service data units (SDUs): for example, Ethernet frames have lengths
up to approximately 1500 bytes, Frame Relay frames can be more than 9000 bytes
long, etc.
Therefore, it is necessary to define a set of procedures (stack of protocols) that will
enable inserting and removing application data from ATM cells, and convert the
address information to enable routing to the desired destination.
Figure F-5 shows the general structure of the ATM protocol stack.
Service Data Units (SDU)
Service-Specific Convergence Sublayer

(SSCS)
Common-Part Convergence Sublayer

(CPCS)
ATM Adaptation
Layer (AAL)
Segmentation and Reassembly (SAR)
ATM Layer
UNI Physical Layer
ATM Cells
Figure F-5. ATM Protocol Stack
The general structure of the ATM protocol stack is as follows:

• The top layer is the service-specific convergence sublayer (SSCS), which
converts the service data units received from the users application to the CPCS
format. The SSCS depends on the users application type.

• The insertion of payload data into the 48-byte information field of an ATM cell
is accomplished by the third layer, the ATM Adaptation Layer (AAL). The
function of the AAL is to map the protocol data units (PDUs) of higher layers
into the ATM layer. AAL functions are specified in ITU-T Rec. I.363.
Using an AAL gives ATM the flexibility to carry entirely different types of
service within the same transmission format, because the AAL is not an ATM
network process, but instead is performed by the network terminating
equipment, e.g., the LA-110.
Thus, after data is processed by an AAL type that can appropriately handle the
users application characteristics, the only task an ATM network must perform is
to route cells from point to point, in accordance with the information in the
cell headers.
The AAL layer consists of two sublayers:
The top sublayer is the Common Part Convergence Sublayer (CPCS), which
provides the service access point (SAP) to the ATM service.
The second sublayer is the segmentation and reassembly (SAR) sublayer,
which splits the CPCS PDUs into 48-byte units, that are then passed to the
ATM layer for insertion in ATM cells.
• The next layer, located atop the UNI physical layer, is the ATM layer.
• The lowest layer in the ATM protocol stack is the UNI physical layer. For the
LA-110, this is the layer responsible for the transfer of ATM cells by the uplink
port. For example, for an uplink port with E1 interface, the functions of the
physical layer are:
Generation of the E1 frame and multiframe structure, and the
corresponding F-bit patterns.
Insertion of ATM cells in the E1 frame timeslots. Only 30 timeslots are used
(timeslots 0 and 16 are not used for ATM cell transmission). ATM cells are
byte-aligned to the timeslot boundaries (each payload byte of an ATM cell
is inserted in one timeslot).
Transmission and reception of E1 signal.
AAL Types Supported by LA-110

Several AAL types have been standardized, to provide optimal support for various
types of payload data.
The LA-110 supports the following AAL types:
• AAL1, which is intended for constant bit rate (CBR) applications. In CBR
applications, e.g., circuit emulation service (CES) for E1 signal transport, etc., it
is necessary to emulate the transmission characteristics of regular data
transmission circuits, and in particular fixed delay and preservation of timing
accuracy.
For example, the data transferred through an E1 user port is handled by AAL1.
Analog voice, which is supported by I/O modules with FXS ports, can also be
transmitted over AAL1.

• AAL2, which is intended for variable bit rate (VBR) applications that require
maintaining the timing relationship between the source and the destination,
but the bit rate may vary. For example, digitized voice can be supported by
AAL2, using the Loop Emulation Service (LES). In particular, AAL2 must be
used to support Emulated Loop Control Protocol (ELCP).
• AAL5, which is intended for connectionless and connection-oriented variable
bit rate (VBR) services. AAL5 is primarily designed to meet the communication
requirements of LANs and other similar applications. The data transferred
through the synchronous data port of the LA-110 is handled by AAL5.
Operations and Maintenance

The ATM standards specify the methods to be used for operations and
maintenance (OAM) in ATM networks. The OAM functions to be made available
in ATM networks include:
• Performance monitoring – enables monitoring the normal operation of
equipment and links, and detection of defects and failures.
• Detection of defects and failures – made by identification of abnormal
performance.
• System protection – enables correction of defect and failure effects by
selection of alternate facilities.
• Collection of failure and performance information – enables management
stations to obtain information on system state.
• Support for fault localization – enables use of internal or external test functions
to detect faults whose location is not obvious from the failure and performance
information normally generated by the system.
OAM Flows
The applicable standards, e.g., ITU-T Rec. I.610, define five OAM flows. An OAM
flow is a bidirectional exchange of OAM information (generally performed by
means of a special type of cells, called OAM cells) between peer entities. The five
OAM flows are designated F1 through F5, where the flows F1, F2, and F3 cover
the physical layer, and the flows F4 and F5 cover the ATM layer.
The physical layer OAM flows, used to detect physical layer failures and enable the
management system to monitor transmission performance, are as follows:
F1 Lowest-level OAM flow, covers a portion (called regenerator section) of
an ATM system located between two entities directly connected by a
physical link.
F2 Covers a digital section of an ATM system. A digital section is located
between two end points, interconnected by one or more physical links.
F3 Covers a transmission path in an ATM system. The transmission path is
delineated by end points that can assemble/disassemble cells, and
process the information carried in the cells, e.g., can detect cell
boundaries, analyze headers, and perform OAM functions. A
transmission path consists of one or more digital sections.

The ATM layer OAM flows, used to monitor the operation and performance of the
ATM layer, are as follows:
F4 VP-level OAM flow, covers a VP connection. A VP connection is
terminated at end points that can terminate virtual path connections.
The virtual path connection consists of one or more transmission paths.
F5 Highest-level OAM flow, at the VC connection level. A VC connection
is terminated at end points that can terminate virtual channel
connections. The virtual channel consists of one or more virtual path
connections.
The F5 flow is used for end-to-end fault management, for
maintenance, and for performance management over a virtual channel
connection.
The LA-110 supports the F1, F2, F3, and F5 OAM flows in accordance with ITU-T
Rec. I.610.
Main Types of OAM Cells

The OAM cells are special cells that are transmitted in idle intervals, during which
no payload waits to be transmitted (usually, forced insertion is used if no idle
interval is available within a group of 65535 cells). The cell type and function is
identified by one byte, sent immediately after the 5-byte ATM cell header; the
remaining bytes may carry additional information to support the cell function.
Fault management uses the following types of OAM cells:
CC Cells CC (continuity check) cells are periodically transmitted
downstream (nominally once per second) by a VC end point
when no user cells are received for three consecutive seconds,
and stops after one valid user cell is received.
AIS Cells AIS (alarm indication signal) cells are periodically transmitted
downstream (nominally once per second) by a VC end point
which detects a VC failure (unavailability). The transmission of
AIS cells at the VC level starts when neither user cells, nor
continuity check cells are received for three consecutive seconds,
and stops after one valid user or continuity check cell is received.
The AIS cell may include information on the type and location of
the failure.
FERF Cells FERF (far-end report failure) cells are periodically transmitted
upstream (nominally once per second) by a VC end point which
started transmitting AIS cells, or detected a VC failure
(unavailability).
The FERF cell may include information on the type and location
of the failure.

When an LA-110 port is configured for Frame Relay operation, the corresponding
Note
Frame Relay OAM functions (link integrity verification, and the AIS and RDI (remote
defect indication) conditions) are mapped from the Frame Relay side to the ATM
side in accordance with the applicable Frame Relay Forum documents:
• Document FRF.5 for ports configured for the network interworking mode.
• Document FRF.8 for ports configured for the service interworking mode.
The payload field of performance monitoring cells carry data which enables error
detection. The main fields are as follows:
• PM cell sequence number (0 to 256), followed by the total number of user
cells sent since the last performance monitoring cell has been transmitted (0 to
65535 cells).
• Block error detection code, carries a checksum that enables detection of errors
in the payload fields of the users cells preceding the performance monitoring
cell.
Maintenance cells carry commands:
• PM activate/deactivate command: starts/stops the transmission and evaluation
of performance monitoring cells.
• Continuity check activate/deactivate command. The command instructs the
receiving equipment whether to transmit and/or receive (evaluate) CC cells.
• Loopback activate/deactivate command (this function can also be controlled
by commands from the LA-110 supervision terminal, Telnet host, or
management station). The loopback controlled by this command is performed
at the ATM layer on OAM cells, and is used to instruct its destination (one or
both of the VCC end points, or any other equipment that can evaluate OAM
cells) to return OAM cells toward the command source (the equipment that
sent the loopback command).
The LA-110 executes loopback activate/deactivate command, but cannot
initiate these commands.
The LA-110 supports the OAM cells, and can provide ATM layer performance
monitoring data.
F-22 IP Environment
F.4 IP Environment
This section describes the IP environment.
The information presented in this section refers to Version 4 of the IP protocol
(IP4), currently the most widely used protocol version. IP4 is the only protocol
version supported by LA-110 units and RADview stations.
Introduction to IP
IP means “Internet Protocol”. The term IP protocol is often used to indicate a
standardized set of rules and procedures that enable data exchange through a
packet-switched network.
Accordingly, the term Internet indicates the set of networks that use the IP
protocol and are interconnected in a way that, at least in principle, permits any
entity on one network to communicate with any entity on another network.
Note The term “suite of IP protocols” is also often used, in recognition of the fact that the
operation of the Internet is actually defined by many related protocols.
IP Networks, IP Hosts and IP Ports

Any entity that can communicate using the IP protocol is called an IP host.
The connection point between an IP host and an IP network is called IP port.
An IP network forms when a number of IP ports can communicate directly (peer
to peer) using the IP protocol, without any intermediaries.
An IP host can have any number of IP ports. Moreover, the ports may be located
on different IP networks.
IP Addresses
To enable IP communication between two IP hosts, it is necessary to find a route
between their IP ports. For this purpose, each IP port is assigned an IP address.
An IP address is a number selected in accordance with the IP protocol. The only
purpose of an IP address is to permit unambiguous identification of an IP port.
Therefore, each IP port must be assigned a distinct and unique IP address.
The IP protocol does not require the IP port to be related in an unambiguous way
to a physical (communication) port. This has two main implications:
• Since the IP port is actually a connection to an IP network, any number of IP
ports can share a given physical port.
• An IP port may be reached through several physical ports.
Note By convention, the scope of IP addresses has been extended in two ways:
• To permit identification of IP networks
• To permit simultaneous addressing of all the ports connected to a IP network
(this operation is called broadcasting).
IP Environment F-23
IP Packet Structure
The information exchanged through IP networks is organized in packets. The
structure of an IP packet, as specified by IP protocol Version 4, is as follows (the
numbers are byte numbers):
0 4 8 12 16 20 24 28 31
IP Version IP Header IP Type of Service Total IP Packet Length

(4) Length (IP TOS) (total number of octets in header + payload)
Fragment Identification Flags Fragment Offset

(16 bits) (3 bits) (13 bits)
(These fields are used for IP packet fragmentation)
Time to Live Number of IP Header Checksum

(Range: 0 to 255; Upper-Layer Protocol
when 0, packet is Carried in Payload
discarded) (IGMP = 2)
(UDP = 17)
Source IP Address
Destination IP Address
Options (when used) Padding (as required)
Payload (maximum bytes: 65535 – “header length”)

.
.
.
IP Address Structure
An IP address is a 32-bit number, represented as four 8-bit bytes. Each byte
represents a decimal number in the range of 0 through 255.
The address is written in decimal format, with the bytes separated by decimal
points, e.g., 164.90.70.47. This format is called dotted quad notation.
An IP address is logically divided into two main portions:
• Network portion
• Host portion.
Network Portion
In general, the network portion is assigned by the Internet Assigned Numbers
Authority (IANA), and its main purpose is to identify a specific IP network. For
exceptions, see the Global vs. Private IP Addresses section below.
There are five IP address classes: A, B, C, D, and E. However, only the A, B and C
classes are used for IP addressing. Consult your network manager with respect to
the class of IP addresses used on your network.
The network portion of an IP address can be one, two, or three bytes long, in
accordance with the IP address class. This arrangement is illustrated below:
F-24 IP Environment
IP Address
Byte 1 Byte 2 Byte 3 Byte 4
Class A Network Portion Host Portion
Class B Network Portion Host Portion
Class C Network Portion Host Portion
The class of each IP address can be determined from its leftmost byte, in
accordance with the following chart:
Address Class First Byte Address Range

Class A 0 through 127 0.H.H.H through 127.H.H.H
Class B 128 through 191 128.N.H.H through 191.N.H.H
Class C 192 through 223 192.N.N.H through 223.N.N.H
where:
N - indicates bytes that are part of the network portion
H - indicates bytes that are part of the host portion.
Host Portion
In general, the host portion is used to identify an individual host connected to an
IP network. For exceptions, see Subnetting section below.
After obtaining an IP network address, the using organization is free to assign host
identifiers in accordance with its specific needs.
Note The following host identifiers have special meanings, and must not be assigned to
an actual host:
• The “all-zeros“ host identifier is interpreted as a network identifier.
• The “all-ones“ host identifier is interpreted as a broadcast address. Therefore, a
message with an “all-ones“ host identifier is accepted by all the hosts in the
network.
Global vs. Private IP Addresses

Given the current number of users already having access to the Internet, and the
rapid increase in this number, the 32-bit IP space address available in Version 4 of
the IP protocol is rather limited.
On the other hand, an IP address must permit unambiguous identification of any
host in the Internet.
That is the reason the allocation of IP addresses to networks is globally controlled
by a universally-accepted IP registry organization (IANA).
IP Environment F-25
Although any address used on the Internet must be unique, there are many IP
networks, called private networks, which are not connected to the Internet. A
private network is also created when the access of hosts to the Internet is
controlled by protocols and procedures that do not permit an outsider to find and
use directly the actual address of the hosts connected to that network. A typical
example of a private network is the internal IP network of an enterprise (such
networks are often called intranets).
In recognition of this fact, IANA permits using two types of addresses:
• Global addresses, i.e., addresses that and are unique in the whole Internet
• Private addresses, i.e., addresses allocated for internal use only and therefore
cannot be used on the Internet.
Although no restrictions need to be imposed on private addresses except for
conforming to the structure specified in the Network Portion section above,
the following address spaces have been specifically put aside by IANA for use
as private addresses:
The Class A addresses in the range of 10.0.0.0 to 10.255.255.255 (this
group of addresses is formally referred to as 10/8). This address space is
actually one Class A network number.
The Class B addresses in the range of 172.16.0.0 to 172.31.255.255 (this
group of addresses is formally referred to as 172.16/12). This address space
defines 16 contiguous Class B network numbers.
The Class C addresses in the range of 192.168.0.0 to 192.168.255.255 (this
group of addresses is formally referred to as 192.168/16). This address
space defines 256 contiguous Class C network numbers.
Note Three techniques, all supported by the LA-110, are available to improve the
utilization of scarce global address space:
• Dynamic Host Configuration Protocol (DHCP).
• Network Address Translation (NAT) and Network Address/Port Translation
(NAPT).
• Port Address Translation (PAT).
See the Dynamic Allocation of IP Addresses section below.
Subnetting
Given the scarcity of IP network addresses, for organizations operating several
relatively small, physically separated, IP networks, e.g., several departmental
networks, it is advantageous to enable several physical networks to share a
common IP network address. Small in this context means that the number of IP
ports connected to each of these networks is small relative to the host address
space for the corresponding IP address class.
The approach taken to enable the sharing of an IP network address by two or
more networks is called subnetting, which means use of subnets. The subnetting
is relevant only within the using organization, and therefore can be freely selected
to meet its specific needs.
To enable subnetting, the meaning of the bits in the host portion of the IP address
is further sub-divided into two portions:
F-26 IP Environment
• Subnet number. For example, subnet numbers can be used to identify

departmental subnets. The subnet number follows the network identifier.
• Host number - the last bits of the IP address.
This subdivision is illustrated below:
Net Number Subnet Number Host Number
For example, when the subnet includes 16 IP hosts, only the last four bits need to
be reserved for the host number. For an organization which obtained one global
Class C network address, this means that four bits are available to identify subnets.
Therefore, this organization can implement 16 IP subnets, each comprising up to
16 hosts (except for two subnets that are limited to 15 hosts).
Subnet Masks
Subnet masks are used to indicate the division of the IP address bits between the
net and subnet portion and the host portion.
The mask is a 32-bit word that includes “ones” in the positions used for net and
subnet identification, followed by “zeros” up to the end of the IP address.
For example, the default subnet mask for any Class C address (i.e., all the eight bits
in the host address space are used for hosts in the same net) is 255.255.255.000.
However, if the same address is used in a subnet comprising up to 16 hosts and for
which the host numbers range is 00 to 15, the subnet mask changes as follows:
IP Address 192 70 55 13
(Dotted-Quad)
IP Address 1011 1111 0100 0110 0011 0111 0000 0111
(Binary)
Subnet Mask 1111 1111 1111 1111 1111 1111 1111 0000
(Binary)
Subnet Mask 255 255 255 240
(Dotted-Quad)
In most applications, the binary subnet mask is built as a contiguous string of

“ones”, followed by a number of “zeros” (the number of “zeros” is selected as
needed, to complete the number of subnet mask bits to 32). Therefore, when this
conventional approach is used, the subnet mask can also be specified simply by
stating the number of “ones” in the mask. For example, the subnet mask shown
above is specified by stating that it comprises 28 bits.
Dynamic Allocation of IP Addresses

To improve the utilization of the IP address space, several protocols have been
developed. When operating as a router, LA-110 supports the following protocols:
• Use of the Dynamic Host Configuration Protocol (DHCP), used to provide
configuration parameters to IP hosts, including assignment of an IP address and
subnet mask.
IP Environment F-27
• Network Address Translation (NAT) and Network Address/Port Translation

((NAT/NAPT), enables converting a large number of private IP addresses to a
smaller number of global IP addresses.
• Use of Port Address Translation (PAT). PAT complements the NAT by allowing
outside access to certain users on the network using private addresses.
DHCP Services
Two types of services DHCP can be provided by the LA-110 IP router:
• DHCP relay services: in this mode, the IP router relays DHCP requests to a
predefined DHCP server. The user can specify the maximum number of hops
that a DHCP request can traverse before being discarded.
• DHCP server services: in this mode, the IP router itself serves as the DHCP
server, which provides in response to DHCP requests an IP address, an IP
subnet mask, a default gateway, and the IP addresses of two DNS servers
(primary and secondary). The user can define up to 10 different DHCP address
pools. For each pool, the user specifies the IP address range, the default
gateway, the primary and secondary DNS servers, and the lease time.
NAT/NAPT Services
The LA-110 IP router can also provide network address translation (NAT) and
network address/port translations (NAPT). The translations can apply to either the
LAN or the WAN port:
• When the address translation is defined on a LAN port, the real IP addresses
are located on the LAN side, and the virtual addresses are located on the
WAN side.
• When the address translation is defined on a WAN port, the real IP addresses
are located on the WAN side, and the virtual addresses are located on the
LAN side.
Four types of translations can be defined:
• Dynamic (temporary) translation of a group of virtual IP addresses to a smaller
group of real IP addresses, in accordance with the usage requirements
received from the hosts using virtual IP addresses. This type is similar to the
basic traditional NAT, as described in RFC2663 and RFC3022.
• Static (permanent) translation of a specific virtual IP address to a specific real IP
address. This is a form of bidirectional NAT, as described in RFC2663.
• Transparent translation (no translation at all): the real and virtual IP addresses
are identical. This is a form of bidirectional NAT, as described in RFC2663.
• Dynamic utilization of a single IP address in accordance with usage
requirements received from the virtual IP addresses, using transport identifiers
(port numbers) for multiplexing. In this case, This type is similar to NAPT, a
form of traditional NAT, as described in RFC2663 and RFC3022.
All the translations, except for the transparent translation, hide the virtual
addresses from the outside world (“outside” is determined by the type of interface,
as explained above).
F-28 IP Environment
PAT Services
included in an existing dynamic NAPT definition.
Therefore, a PAT translation can be defined only if a matching dynamic NAPT
translation exists (matching means that a SINGLE PAT entry has the same real IP
and virtual entries).
IP Routing Principles
IP Communication between Hosts within the Same Network

The exchange of information between IP hosts is made in packets using the
structure specified by the IP protocol. As explained in the IP Packet Structure
section above, IP frames carry, within their header, the IP addresses of the
destination and source hosts.
In accordance with the IP protocol, an IP host checks the addresses of all the
received frames, and accepts only frames carrying its own IP address as the
destination. The source address is then used to enable the destination to respond
to the source.
An IP host will also respond to broadcasts (frames whose destination host identifier
is “all-ones”).
Note IP hosts support additional protocols within the IP suite, e.g., protocols used for
connectivity checking, maintenance, etc. Therefore, IP hosts will accept additional
types of messages, which are beyond the scope of this description.
When checking the destination address of an IP frame, an IP host starts by
checking the network identifier. If the network identifier is different, the host will
immediately reject the frame. Therefore, IP hosts can communicate only if they
have the same network identifier.
For example, this means that when a user’s IP host is connected directly, through a
LAN, to the LA-110 LAN port, the network identifier part of the IP address
assigned to the LA-110 LAN port must be identical to the network identifier of the
user’s IP host.
IP Communication between Hosts Located on Different Networks

When the destination host is on a different IP network, before IP communication
can be established it is necessary to find a route between the local IP network to
the destination network.
When the user knows the route within the IP network that connects the two hosts
(that is, all the intermediate hosts through which the IP packets exchanged
between the two hosts must pass), it is possible to specify this route directly. This
method is called static routing, and its main advantage is security.
However, in most cases it is not possible to specify a static route. Therefore,
special procedures are needed to find a suitable route. These procedures are
called routing, and the function that implements them is called IP router, or just
router.
IP Environment F-29
The most common type of routing protocol in use is called Routing Information
Protocol (RIP), and the current version is referred to as RIP2. RIP1 is also still used,
and is supported by LA-110.
The router can be a software program running on any IP host, but most often it is
implemented on dedicated hardware, e.g., a special purpose PC.
Any router has at least two ports: a local LAN port and a WAN port. Accordingly, a
router keeps two basic types of tables:
• Local LAN table. This table includes the IP addresses of the hosts connected to
the LAN port of the router. These addresses are learned from the source
addresses of the IP frames appearing on the local LAN. The LAN table is
dynamically updated: this means that new hosts are added as they appear on
the LAN, and hosts which are inactive for a specified (long) interval are
removed.
In addition to the dynamic entries in the table, many routers permit the user to
define static addresses in the LAN table. These static addresses are not
removed from the table even if they are inactive for long periods.
• Routing table. This table includes information on the IP routes to other routers.
Routers periodically exchange special messages that enable to build the
routing information appearing in this table. The table is dynamically updated
by these exchanges, therefore new routes are added whereas old, or
disconnected, routes are removed.
In addition to the dynamic entries in the routing table, most routers permit the
user to define static entries to the desired destinations in the routing table.
These entries are permanent, and in addition they have priority over dynamic
(learned) entries: this means that the user-entered route will always be used
(provided it is active), even if a dynamic route is also available.
A router receiving an IP frame with a destination address not located on the local
LAN must find a route through the WAN or Internet to the destination. In general,
this involves “asking” the other routers whether the destination is on their local
LAN.
After the appropriate remote router is found, the process ends. At this stage, the
local router can send the IP frame to the next router on the route to the
destination; the next router then sends the frame to the third router on the path to
the destination, and so on. When the remote router gets the frame, it places it on
the local LAN, where the addressed host can read it. Responses from the host
automatically follow the same route through the Internet, but in reverse.
Default Gateways
The general IP routing process described above has two shortcomings:
• It requires significant time to complete, because it involves a rather lengthy
exchange of information
• The destination cannot influence the selection of a route, which is
automatically performed.
To partially overcome these shortcomings, the IP protocol permits the destination
host to specify one of the following routing options:
F-30 IP Environment
• The IP address (and the subnet mask) of the router to be used as a default to
establish IP communication. The router selected for this purpose is called
default gateway.
• The next hop address: this is the address to which any packets not addressed
to hosts in the same net (or subnet) will be sent. This is usually the address of a
specific IP router, which is “known” to be able to provide the route to the
desired destinations.
For example, a default gateway must always be specified when the RADview
station is not on the same IP network with the managed LA-110 unit. This is often
the case when the LA-110 unit is managed inband.
Tools for Checking IP Connectivity

The IP protocol is referred to as an unreliable connectionless packet delivery
protocol, because each packet transmitted by an IP host travels on its own through
the network until it eventually reaches its destination. To ensure reliable delivery,
higher layer protocols are used, for example, the widely-used TCP protocol.
However, using higher layer protocols cannot provide an answer to the need to
check that it is indeed possible to reach the desired IP destination address,
because configuration errors or a network fault, for example, temporary congestion
or failure of critical communication links, may still prevent the establishment of an
IP connection. Therefore, it is often necessary to check for IP connectivity.
The IP protocol suite includes a special protocol, the Internet Control Message
Protocol (ICMP), that enables IP hosts connected to the Internet to report a wide
range of errors and provide information about the conditions that caused the
errors. Support for this protocol is mandatory on every IP host.
ICMP includes a dedicated connectivity test procedure, implemented by means of
two types of ICMP messages: echo request and echo reply. This procedure is
often referred to as pinging: the host wanting to check IP connectivity to a
destination sends one or more ping (echo request) messages, and the destination
returns an echo reply message for each request. By comparing the number of
pings sent to the number received and the time needed for each reply to reach
the ping source, the source host can obtain useful information regarding the
transmission conditions.
Frame Relay Support over ATM F-31

F.5 Frame Relay Support over ATM

The serial data port of the LA-110 can be configured to support Frame Relay
equipment. To transfer Frame Relay traffic over the ATM network, LA-110 can be
configured either to encapsulate the Frame Relay PDUs (frames) in the ATM
protocol, or to translate them to the ATM protocol.
Frame Relay PDU Structure
Figure F-6 shows the structure of the Frame Relay frames (formally, the frames are
called protocol data units – PDUs).
Frame Start Flag
Frame Header DLCI (6 bits) C/R EA (0)
DLCI (4 bits) FECN BECN DE EA (1)
Information Byte 1 Payload Data
. .
. .
. .
Information Byte N Payload Data
Frame Trailer FCS (Byte 1)
FCS (Byte 2)
Frame End Flag
Figure F-6. Frame Relay PDU (Frame) Structure
Each Frame Relay PDU starts and ends with an one-byte flag, and in addition
includes:
• Two-byte header that carries the routing control data.
• Information field, which carries payload data of variable length.
• Two-byte trailer.
The frame fields have the following functions:
• Flag. The flag is used to separate between consecutive frames. Only one flag is
needed to separate consecutive frames, therefore the ending flag of a frame
can also serve as the opening flag of the next frame.
• Data Link Connection Identifier (DLCI). The standard DLCI consists of
10 bits, therefore the allowed range of DLCIs is 0 through 1023. Some values
in this range are reserved. The reserved DLCIs are as follows:
DLCI Function
0 Used for local in-channel signaling
1 through 15 Reserved for network use
16 to 991 Available for users traffic routing
992 to 1023 Reserved for network use
F-32 Frame Relay Support over ATM

The function of the DLCI is to serve as a routing label for frames.

• Command/Response (C/R) bit. The C/R bit is transparently transferred, and is
available for users protocols.
• Extended Address (EA) bit. The EA bit is used to indicate the use of extended
addressing. In general, only 10-bit DLCIs are used, and therefore the EA bit is
set to 0 in the first header byte, and to 1 in the second header byte.
• Forward Explicit Congestion Notification (FECN) bit. The FECN bit is
normally set to 0. When congestion occurs, that is, when the network does not
have sufficient resources to handle the users traffic at the current rate, the
FECN bit can be set by the network to 1, to notify downstream equipment
(that is, other equipment that receive the frame) that congestion avoidance
procedures should be performed.
This bit is intended for use by protocols which enable the destination to
control the traffic generated by the source: in response to the reception of
frames with the FECN indicator set, the destination is expected to signal the
source that it must reduce the rate at which it sends data.
• Backward Explicit Congestion Notification (BECN) bit. The BECN bit is
normally set to 0. When congestion occurs, the BECN bit can be set by the
network to 1, to notify upstream equipment (that is, the equipment that
transmits the frames) that congestion avoidance procedures should be
performed.
This bit is intended for use by protocols where the traffic is controlled by the
source: in response to the reception of frames with the BECN indicator set, the
source is expected to reduce the rate at which it sends data.
• Delete Eligibility (DE) indication. This bit is used to indicate the priority set
by the user for this frame. This bit is set to 1 for frames that have lower priority
and may be discarded in case of congestion, or when the network rejects users
data because the user exceeds its subscribed data rate.
• Information field. The information field carries the users data.
• Frame check sequence (FCS). The FCS field consists of two bytes, calculated
in accordance with the CRC16 polynomial specified by ITU-T Rec. Q.921. The
LA-110 also supports the CRC32 polynomial.
Note The CRC16 polynomial is effective at detecting errors in frames up to 4096 bytes
long. For longer frames, it is necessary to select the CRC32 polynomial. If some
equipment on the transmission path does not support the CRC32 polynomial, the
user must select higher-level protocols that can provide the error detection
function.
Handling of Frame Relay Traffic

When using the Frame Relay interface mode, the ATM protocol stack includes an
additional sublayer, located atop the AAL5 CPCS, as shown in Figure F-7.
Frame Relay Support over ATM F-33

Frame Relay PDU
FR-SSCS
AAL5 CPCS
AAL5
Segmentation and Reassembly
ATM Layer
UNI
UNI
Physical Layer
Figure F-7. ATM Protocol Stack with FR-SSCS
This sublayer, called Frame Relay Service Specific Convergence Sublayer

(FR-SSCS), performs the functions required to transport the Frame Relay PDU
through the ATM network. In particular, it is necessary to perform the following
functions:
• Convert the Frame Relay DLCI to the desired ATM VPI.VCI pair. The LA-110
user can specify, for each DLCI, the desired VPI.VCI pair.
In general, each DLCI is routed through a unique VPI.VCI pair (ATM
connection), however for connections defined on Frame Relay ports
configured for the network interworking mode the LA-110 provides the option
to route several DLCIs through the same ATM connection.
• Convert between the bits used to control congestion, in accordance with the
documents applicable to the Frame Relay port interworking mode (Frame
Relay Forum document FRF.5 for ports configured for the network
interworking mode, and document FRF.8 for ports configured for the service
interworking mode):
Conversion between the congestion indications supported by the ATM
network to the FECN and BECN bits of the Frame Relay protocol.
Conversion between the DE bit received from the Frame Relay DTE and
the CLP bit in the corresponding ATM cells. In this respect, the user can
configure the LA-110 either to perform conversion of equivalent
indications, or to set the bits to a predetermined value.
• Convert OAM information between the Frame Relay side and the ATM side in
accordance with the documents applicable to the Frame Relay port
interworking mode (FRF.5 and FRF.8).
The LA-110 enables the user to select additional conversion services to be
performed, in accordance with the selected interworking method:
• For network interworking, the user can specify the DLCI to be used at the far
end of the link, to complete the end-to-end connection.
• For service interworking, the user can select the handling of the upper layer
user protocols:
F-34 Frame Relay Support over ATM

Multiprotocol translation - the LA-110 converts the encapsulation header

from the format required by RFC 1490 (Frame Relay) to the format of RFC
1483 (ATM).
This mode is used for transferring internetworking (routed or bridged)
protocols, e.g., in LAN-to-LAN applications.
Transparent - The LA-110 transparently transfers the encapsulation header.
This mode is used when the users protocols do not conform with the
protocols supported in the translation mode, but are compatible with the
users equipment at the two ends of the connection. A typical application
for this mode is packetized voice.
F.6 Ethernet Support over ATM
Introduction to Ethernet Transmission

One of the most successful LAN technologies is referred to by the generic term
Ethernet. The Ethernet technology is suitable for a wide range of physical media:
coaxial cable, twisted pairs and optical fibers. The current standards for Ethernet
transmission cover rates from 10 Mbps to 10 Gbps. In many office LANs, Ethernet
runs at 10 Mbps and 100 Mbps; network interface cards (NICs) for PCs usually
support both of these rates.
The basic standard covering Ethernet LANs is IEEE Standard 802.3, which is very
similar to the original Ethernet V2.0 specification (ISO/IEC also have a similar
standard). In addition to the aspects covered by IEEE 802.3 standards, there is a
wide range of LAN standards (the IEEE 802 family) that cover other aspects of LAN
transmission, for example, bridging, with particular emphasis on Ethernet LANs.
Ethernet standards (in their broadest interpretation) cover the physical and data
link control layers (layers 1 and 2 in the OSI model; IP is a layer 3 protocol). The
data link control layer is split into two sublayers:
• Media access control (MAC)
• Logical link control (LLC).
Ethernet LAN Topologies

Ethernet LANs use a multidrop topology. The LANs can be implemented in two
main topologies:
• Bus topology, which consists of a single coaxial cable that runs between the
users’ stations. This topology supports only half-duplex communication
• Star (hub-based) topology, which is the main topology used today.
Figure F-8 shows the general structure of a LAN using the star topology.
Ethernet Support over ATM F-35

10/100BaseT Ethernet Hub

S D
TX Pair
RX Pair
Figure F-8. Star (Hub-Based) Ethernet LAN Topology
In the star topology, all the nodes on the LAN are connected to a common unit,
which serves as the hub of the LAN. The hub can be implemented in two ways:
• Simple Ethernet hub, which detects the transmitting node and transparently
distributes its signal to all the other nodes. A hub supports only half-duplex
communication (the same as in a bus topology).
• Ethernet switch: the switch includes more sophisticated circuits that enable
both half-duplex and full-duplex operation and prevent collisions.
The LAN cables are usually made of two twisted pairs (one transmit pair and one
receive pair). The standard connector type is RJ-45, and its pin assignment has also
been standardized. However, because of the need to use separate transmit and
receive pairs, two types of port pin assignments have developed: station ports and
hub ports (the difference is interchanging of the transmit and receive pins in the
connector). This permits to interconnect connectors of different types by a cable
wired pin-to-pin (straight cable). To interconnect ports of same type, a crossed
cable (a cable wired to interconnect the transmit pair at one end to the receive
pair at the other end) is necessary.
Interfaces operating on twisted pairs are designated in accordance with data rate:
10Base-T (10 Mbps) or 100Base-TX (100 Mbps, where X is the number of pairs).
Interfaces that support both rates are identified as 10/100BaseT.
Ethernet Communication Protocol

Ethernet is used as a generic term for a LAN transmission technology that uses
Carrier Sense and Multiple Access with Collision Detection (CSMA/CD) to enable
the transmission of short bursts of data (called frames) between two or more
stations (nodes). The simplest way to visualize the transmission technology is to use
the bus analogy. Therefore, all the users have permanent access to the full
bandwidth of the transmission medium but can only use it for short times, by
transmitting short data bursts. Each data burst has a fixed structure, called a frame.
The frame structure is explained below. The connection point of each user to the
transmission media is called a node. For identification purposes, each LAN node is
assigned a unique number, called address.
F-36 Ethernet Support over ATM

Media Access Method

Media access is performed by means of the carrier sense, multiple access protocol
(CSMA) with collision detection (CD), defined by IEEE Standard 802.3. The
protocol defines three basic steps:
• A node that wants to transmit checks that the LAN is free. If another node is
already transmitting, the node waits until the LAN is free.
• When the LAN is free, the node starts transmission and sends its frame. Each
node has equal access rights, therefore the first node that starts transmitting is
the one that seizes the LAN.
• When two nodes start transmitting at the same instant, a collision occurs. In
this case, the transmitting nodes will continue to transmit for some time, in
order to ensure that all transmitting nodes detected the collision (this is called
“jamming”). After the jamming period, all transmitting nodes stop the
transmission and wait for a random period of time before trying again. The
delay times are a function of collision numbers and random time delay,
therefore there is a good chance that an additional collision between these
nodes will be avoided, and the nodes will be able to transmit their messages.
The basic procedure described above has been developed for half-duplex
communication, because it declares a collision whenever data is received during a
local transmission. However, when using twisted pairs, separate pairs are used for
the transmit and receive directions. Therefore, each node is capable of
simultaneously transmitting and receiving (full-duplex operation), thereby doubling
the effective data rate on the LAN.
Modern Ethernet interfaces, designated 10/100BaseT, are also capable of
operation at the two basic rates, 10 Mbps and 100 Mbps. Therefore, the rate and
operating mode (half-duplex or full-duplex) are user-configurable options.
When connecting equipment from different vendors to a common LAN, four
operating modes are possible. These modes are listed below in ascending order of
capabilities:
• Half duplex operation at 10 Mbps.
• Full duplex operation at 10 Mbps.
• Half duplex operation at 100 Mbps.
• Full duplex operation at 100 Mbps.
To ensure interoperability (which practically means to select the highest transport
capability supported by all the equipment connected to the LAN), two approaches
can be used: manual configuration of each equipment interface, or automatic
negotiation (autonegotiation) in accordance with IEEE 802.3.
The autonegotiation procedure enables automatic selection of the operating mode
on a LAN, and also enables equipment connecting to an operating LAN to
automatically adopt the LAN operating mode (if it is capable of supporting that
mode).

When autonegotiation is enabled on all the nodes attached (or trying to attach) to
a LAN, the process is always successful. However, even if the nodes on an
operating LAN are manually configured for operation in a fixed mode, a
late-comer node with autonegotiation capability can still resolve the LAN operating
rate can be resolved, thereby enabling it to adopt the LAN rate. Under these
conditions, an autonegotiating node cannot detect the operating mode (half or full
duplex), and therefore they will default to half-duplex. Therefore, as a practical
configuration rule, do not enable the full-duplex mode without enabling
autonegotiation, except when all the nodes have been manually configured for the
desired operating mode (which may of course be full duplex).
Basic Ethernet Frame Structure

The frame transmitted by each node contains routing, management and error
correction information. For Ethernet LANs, the characteristics of frames are
defined by IEEE Standard 802.3.
Basic frame lengths can vary from 72 to 1526 bytes and have the typical structure
shown in Figure F-9.
• Preamble. Each frame starts with a preamble of seven bytes. The preamble is
used as a synchronizing sequence for the interface circuits, and helps bit
decoding.
• Start-Frame Delimiter (SFD) field – consists of one byte. The SFD field
indicates where the useful information starts.
• Medium-Access (MAC) Destination Address (DA) field – consists of six bytes.
The MAC DA field carries the address of the destination node.
• Medium-Access (MAC) Source Address (SA) field – consists of six bytes. The
MAC SA field carries the address of the source node.
Note In writing, MAC addresses are represented as 6 pairs of hexadecimal digits,
separated by dashes, for example, 08-10-39-03-2F-C3.
• Length/Type field – consists of two bytes that indicate the number of bytes
contained in the logical link control (LLC) data field. In most Ethernet protocol
versions, this field contains a constant indicating the protocol type (in this case,
this field is designated EtherType).
• MAC Client Data field. The MAC client data field can contain 0 to 1500 bytes
of user-supplied data.
• Padding field. The optional padding field contains dummy data, that is used to
increase the length of short frames to at least 64 bytes.
• Frame Check Sequence (FCS) field – contains four check bytes generated by a
cyclic redundancy check (CRC) code. The FCS field is used to detect errors in
the data carried in the frame.

72 to 1526 Bytes
Frame
Preamble SFD MAC Destination MAC Source Length/Type MAC Client Data
Padding Check
Address Address
Bytes Sequence
(7 Bytes) (1 Byte) (6 Bytes) (6 Bytes) (2 Bytes) (0 to 1500 Bytes)
(4 Bytes)
Start Frame
Delimiter
Figure F-9. Basic Ethernet Frame Structure
Bridging
Communication between Nodes on Same LAN

Unlike IP addresses, a MAC address is unique and identifies a single physical port.
Therefore, two Ethernet nodes attached to the same LAN exchange frame directly,
by specifying the desired MAC destination address, together with the source MAC
address. The node that identifies its MAC address in the destination field can send a
response by copying the source address of the frame to the destination address field.
Communication between Nodes on Different LANs

To enable nodes on different LANs to communicate, it is necessary to transfer
frames between the two LANs. The device used for this purpose is called MAC
bridge, or just bridge. Two types of bridges are used:
• Local bridges, which have Ethernet ports attached to the two LANs. The bridge
control mechanism learns the nodes attached to each LAN by reading the
source MAC addresses of the frames generated by the nodes. When the
destination address of a frame is not on the LAN from which it was received,
the bridge transfers it to the other LAN.
• Remote bridges, which are used in pairs. A basic remote bridge has one LAN
port and one WAN port. The WAN port communicates through a link with the
WAN port of the remote bridge connected to the desired remote LAN. In this
case, the traffic addressed to destinations not located on the local LAN is
transferred through the WAN link to the remote bridge.
Using Virtual Bridged LANs

VLAN can be used to provide separation between traffic from different sources
sharing the same physical transmission facilities, and provide information on the
relative priority the user assigns to each frame. The characteristics and use of
virtual LANs (VLANs) and of the MAC bridges capable of handling tagged frames
are defined in IEEE Standard 802.1Q.
VLANs are made possible by a slight modification to the Ethernet frame structure
shown in Figure F-9. The structure of an Ethernet frame with VLAN support is
shown in Figure F-10 (for simplicity, the figure does not include the preamble and
SFD fields).

0 4 8 12 16 20 24 28 31
Destination MAC Address (DA)
Destination MAC Address (DA) Source MAC Address (SA)
Source MAC Address (SA)
Tag Protocol Identifier (8100) PRI 0 VLAN ID
EtherType (IP = 0800) Ethernet Payload (42 to 1500 Bytes)
Ethernet Payload
.
.
.
CRC
Figure F-10. Structure of Ethernet Frame with VLAN Support
Ethernet frames with VLAN support include a tag header immediately after the
source MAC address (therefore, such frames are also referred to as tagged frames).
The tag header comprises 4 bytes:
• Two bytes for the tag protocol identifier. For Ethernet-encoded tags in
accordance with IEEE 802.1Q. These bytes carry the equivalent of 8100.
• Priority (PRI) specified by the user (3 bits: 7 is the highest priority and 0 is the
lowest priority).
• One bit for the canonical format indicator (always 0 as shown in Figure F-10).
• VLAN ID (12 bits), used to indicate the VLAN to which the frame belongs.
Transporting IP Traffic over Ethernet
Encapsulation in Ethernet Frames

IP traffic is carried in the LLC data field of the Ethernet frame (see Figure F-9). This
is called encapsulation. The EtherType value for the IP protocol is 0800.
Whenever possible, the whole IP packet (including the header) is inserted in one
Ethernet frame. However, IP packets can be much longer than the LLC data field
of Ethernet frames: in this case, it is necessary to fragment the IP packets in
accordance with the desired size of data field, and transfer each fragment in a
separate frame. The receiving IP host then reassembles the original packet from its
fragments.
Note TDMoIP packets are never fragmented. This is not necessary anyway, because a
TDMoIP packet is relatively short.
ARP Protocol
When sending IP packets over Ethernet, it is necessary to determine the MAC
address of the destination, to insert it in the Ethernet destination MAC address of
the packet. Actually, this is necessary for any physical transmission technology that
is not limited to point-to-point topologies.

This is performed by means of the ARP (Address Resolution Protocol), part of the
IP suite of protocols. ARP is used to generate a look-up table that translates IP
addresses to MAC addresses for any transmission technology. The translation is
done only for outgoing IP packets, because this is when the IP header and the
Ethernet header are created.
The ARP table contains one row for each IP host: each row has two columns, one
listing the IP address and the other listing the corresponding MAC (Ethernet)
address. When translating an IP address to an Ethernet address, the table is
searched for the row corresponding to the destination IP address, and the
corresponding Ethernet address is then found in the same row.
Whenever a packet must be sent to a new IP destination, that is, a destination
whose MAC address is not known, the IP host sends an ARP request packet, listing
its own IP address and MAC address, the destination IP address, but no destination
MAC address. When the packet reaches the destination address (using the IP
routing process), the destination returns an ARP response packet, in which its own
MAC address field is filled. The packet eventually returns to the sender, thereby
providing the missing information.
The structure of ARP packets is shown in Figure F-11.
0 4 8 12 16 20 24 28 31
Hardware Address Type Protocol Address Type

(Ethernet = 1) (IP = 2048)
Length of Hardware Length of Protocol Operation:

(MAC) Address Field Address Field ARP Request =1
(Ethernet = 6 Bytes) (IP = 4 Bytes) ARP Response =2
Source MAC Address (Bytes 0 through 3)
Source MAC Address (Bytes 4, 5) Source IP Address (Bytes 0, 1)
Source IP Address (Bytes 2, 3) Destination MAC Address (Bytes 0, 1)
Destination MAC Address (Bytes 2 through 5)
Destination IP Address (Bytes 0 through 3)
Figure F-11. Structure of ARP Packets
AAL5 CPCS PDU Fields

An LA-110 unit with LAN (Ethernet) port supports transfer of Ethernet traffic over
the ATM network using the AAL5 layer, in accordance with RFC 1483
(multiprotocol encapsulation over ATM). The Ethernet frames are transferred using
LLC-SNAP encapsulation. All the Ethernet traffic is transferred over a single
connection, irrespective of the MAC addresses of the frames.
Figure F-12 shows the structure of the AAL5 CPCS PDU payload field used to carry
Ethernet frames using the LLC-SNAP encapsulation method.

AAL5 CPCS-PDU (with LLC-SNAP Field) Payload
DSAP SSAP Control OUI PID Destination Remainder of LAN

Padding
(AA) (AA) (03) 00-80-C2 MAC Address MAC Frame FCS
(00 as
required)
(1B) (1B) (1B) (3B) (2B) (6B) (4B)
LLC SNAP
Header Header
Only when CRC
use is enabled
Figure F-12. Structure of Payload Field of AAL5 CPCS PDU Frame
The payload field includes the original LLC and SNAP headers. The PID field in the
SNAP header can assume two values:
• 0001 (hexa) to indicate the bridged IEEE 802.3 protocol, with end-to-end
transmission of the FCS field of the Ethernet frame.
• 0007 (hexa) to indicate the bridged IEEE 802.3 protocol, without end-to-end
transmission of the FCS field.
The LA-110 supports both FCS transmission options, the selection being made by
the user.
After the SNAP header, the AAL5 CPCS PDU includes optional padding bytes (0
through 47, as required to ensure that the length of the payload field is an integer
multiple of 48 bytes (the ATM cell payload length), the destination MAC address
and then the other parts of the MAC frame (see figure C-10). When the PID is
0001, the AAL5 CPCS PDU also includes the 4 bytes of the LAN frame FCS field.
F-42 Circuit Emulation over ATM

F.7 Circuit Emulation over ATM

The circuit emulation service (CES) enables the transmission of constant bit rate
(CBR) data over the ATM network, in accordance with the ATM Forum Circuit
Emulation Service Interoperability Specification. CES uses AAL1.
The LA-110 supports circuit emulation service through the fractional E1 user port,
using AAL1 in accordance with ITU-T Rec. I.363. In addition, analog voice traffic
(received through FXS interfaces) can also be supported when AAL1 is used.
The LA-110 supports only the structured data transfer (SDT) service mode.
Figure F-13 illustrates the structure of the ATM protocol stack used for CBR
transmission using AAL1.
CBR Data Stream
Service Interface
AAL1 CS
AAL1 SAR
ATM Layer
UNI
UNI
Physical Layer
Figure F-13. ATM Protocol Stack for CBR Transmission
Protocol Stack
A general description of the ATM protocol stack structure is given in the
Characteristics of ATM Service section above. The protocol stack for the CBR
service includes the following layers:
• Service Interface. The service interface is the user port, and its main function is
the processing of the E1 data stream received from users equipment.
• The next layer is the AAL1 convergence sublayer, followed by the AAL1 SAR
sublayer.
• The lower layers (ATM layer and UNI physical layer).
The following sections explain the processes, which are specific to the AAL1
protocol stack.
Processing of E1 Data Stream
The processing of the incoming E1 data stream includes:
• Physical layer processing:
Regeneration of incoming signal and recovery of the associated timing.
Transmission of E1 signal to the line.
Detection of physical layer defects and failures, support for test loopbacks,
and collection of physical layer performance statistics.
Circuit Emulation over ATM F-43

• Port timing. The service interface also handles the port timing (see general
description of timing options in Chapter 1).
In particular, the service interface generates the transmit-to-user timing. This
timing is locked to the timing recovered from the receive signal at the remote
end of the CBR link, otherwise bit integrity will be lost. This function is also
supported by the CS sublayer.
• Synchronization to the frame and super-frame structure, in accordance with
the selected E1 framing mode.
• Retrieval of payload data from the specified timeslots. For each connection
defined on the user port, the LA-110 enables the user to select the timeslots
whose data is to be transmitted to the remote end through the ATM
connection.
When the connection to the ATM network is also made through an E1 link, it
is not possible to transmit the whole payload, because some of the main link
bandwidth is reserved for ATM overhead: the maximum number of timeslots
that can be transmitted is 25 for E1 uplinks, and 18 f uplinks.
• Signaling information processing. The user can select between two modes:
Basic (non-CAS) service: in this mode, no special processing of signaling
information is performed. Signaling information may be transmitted in a
separate timeslot (for example, using CCS - common channel signaling).
CAS mode: in this mode, the service interface processes the timeslot 16 or
"robbed-bit" signaling information associated with the connection timeslots,
and transfers it using AAL1 services.
The user payload data, and optionally the associated signaling data, is transferred
to the AAL1 convergence sublayer.
Processing at the AAL1 SAR Sublayer

In the transmit direction, the AAL1 SAR sublayer receives data from the AAL1
convergence sublayer in CS PDUs (CS protocol data units) containing 47 bytes,
and generates 48-byte SAR PDUs which are transferred to the ATM layer. The
reverse is performed in the receive direction.
The user bytes are aligned with the ATM cell bytes.
The SAR PDU is formed by adding a SAR header of one byte to the 47 bytes of a
CS PDU. The SAR header contains the following information:
• Sequence number (SN) field (four bits). The sequence number is in the range
of 0 to 7, and it enables keeping track of the cell order at the receiving end.
This enables the detection of lost, or misinserted cells.
In addition, one bit indicates whether a CS sublayer is present (for structured
data transfer, the use of the CS sublayer is mandatory).
• Sequence number protection (SNP) field (four bits). The SNP field includes
three bits that carry a checksum generated by a third-order CRC code (CRC-3),
followed by an even parity bit. The parity bit improves the error detection
capabilities. Since some equipment does not support the parity bit, the user
can disable its use.
The SNP field enables the correction of single errors in the SAR header, and
the detection of two errors.

Processing at the AAL1 Convergence Sublayer

The AAL1 functionality is defined in ITU-T Rec. I.363.1. The function of the CS
sublayer is to enable the transmission of fixed-size data blocks (where each block
consists of an integer number of bytes), in the payload fields of ATM cells, while
detecting missing or misinserted cells, and providing source clock recovery.
The start of each block is indicated by a special type of pointer, the AAL1 structure
pointer. The AAL1 structure pointer consists of one byte and is inserted in the first
byte of the payload field in each even cell (0, 2, 4, 6) in the eight-cell sequence
defined by means of the SN field. It indicates the offset, in bytes, between the end
of the pointer field, and the beginning of the next structured block in the 93-byte
payload part.
The AAL1 convergence sublayer inserts the data from the service interface in
CS-PDUs (CS protocol data units) containing 47 bytes. Therefore, the payload field
of cells carrying the AAL1 structure pointer may include a maximum of 46 payload
bytes.
CS PDU structure depends on the service type: basic (non-CAS) or CAS service.
Basic Service CS PDU

For the basic service, the CS PDU includes only payload data. The data block is
formed by collecting N bytes (one from each timeslot to be carried by the
connection) from each frame. N is the data rate multiplier, N × 64 kbps, in the
range of 1 through 26 for E1 uplinks and 1 through 18 uplinks.
Figure F-14 shows a typical data block for N = 3.
..
.
.
AAL1 Structure Pointer First Time Slot in Current Frame
Second Time Slot in Current Frame
Third Time Slot in Current Frame
..
.
.
Figure F-14. Basic Service - Data Block Structure
Note that the time required to collect enough timeslots to fill a cell depends on the
number of timeslots being carried. At the minimum data rate supported by the
user port (128 kbps), corresponding to two timeslots per block, the time required
to fill a cell is approx. 3 msec. To enable the user to reduce this inherent delay, the
LA-110 enables specifying the number of payload bytes per cell: the remaining cell
bytes are then filled with padding bytes.
Circuit Emulation over ATM F-45

CAS CS PDU
For the CAS service, the CS PDU includes a payload data part and a signaling
substructure, used to carry the signaling information associated with the
connection timeslots.
• The payload part of the data block has the length of one multiframe (that is,
16 E1 frames).
• The signaling substructure contains the signaling bits associated with the
payload timeslots for the current multiframe. With 256S framing, the signaling
substructure contains four signaling bits (A, B, C, D) for each payload timeslot.
Padding bits (0s) are used to fill fields which do not carry signaling payload.
Figure F-15 shows a typical data block for N = 3 when 256S framing is used.
First Transported Timeslot of Frame
Second Transported Timeslot of Frame
AALI Pointer
Third Transported Timeslot of Frame
First Frame of Multiframe
Second Frame of Multiframe

.
.
.
. .
. .
. .
..
Last Frame of Multiframe
Signaling Bits for
First Transported
Timeslot ABCDABCD
Signaling Substructure
ABCD
Signaling Bits for Padding Signaling Bits for

Third Transported Second Transported
Timeslot Timeslot
Figure F-15. CAS Service - Data Block Structure
Dynamic Bandwidth Utilization (DBCES)

The principles governing the building of the data block structures described above
for the CAS service can be extended to support additional signaling capabilities.
One of the most important applications is dynamic bandwidth utilization over CES
(DB-CES).
To enable dynamic bandwidth utilization in an ATM network, it is necessary to
detect which timeslots of a given TDM trunk are active and which are inactive.
When an inactive state is detected in a specific timeslot, the timeslot is dropped
from the next ATM structure and the bandwidth it was using may be reutilized for
other services. This method may be applied utilizing any method of timeslot
activity detection, e.g., CAS, CCS.
This approach preserves the CES transmission characteristics while enabling
efficient utilization of the available ATM link bandwidth.

F.8 SNMP Environment

The SNMP management functions of the LA-110 are provided by an internal
SNMP agent.
SNMP management communication uses the User Datagram Protocol (UDP), a
connectionless-mode transport protocol, part of the suite of protocols of the
Internet Protocol (IP).
Note
Telnet management uses the TCP protocol over IP for management communication.
After a Telnet session is started, the management interface is similar to that used for
the supervision terminal.
SNMP Principles
The SNMP management protocol is an asynchronous command/response polling
protocol: all the management traffic is initiated by the SNMP-based network
management station (except for trap messages), which addresses the managed
entities in its management domain. Only the addressed managed entity answers
the polling of the management station.
The managed entities include a function called an “SNMP agent”, which is
responsible for interpretation and handling of the management station requests to
the managed entity, and the generation of properly-formatted responses to the
management station.
SNMP Operations
The SNMP protocol includes four types of operations:
getRequest Command for retrieving specific management
information from the managed entity. The managed
entity responds with a getResponse message.
getNextRequest Command for retrieving sequentially specific
management information from the managed entity.
The managed entity responds with a getResponse
message.
setRequest Command for manipulating specific management
information within the managed entity. The
managed entity responds with a setResponse
message.
trap Management message carrying unsolicited
information on extraordinary events (e.g., alarms)
reported by the managed entity.
Management Information Base

The management information base (MIB) includes a collection of managed
objects. A managed object is defined as a parameter that can be managed, such as
a performance statistics value.
SNMP Environment F-47

The MIB includes the definitions of relevant managed objects. Various MIBs can
be defined for various management purposes, types of equipment, etc.
An objects definition includes the range of values and the “access” rights:
Read-only Object value can be read, but cannot be set.
Read-write Object value can be read or set.
Write-only Object value can be set, but cannot be read.
Not accessible Object value cannot be read, nor set.
MIB Structure
The MIB has an inverted tree-like structure, with each definition of a managed
object forming one leaf, located at the end of a branch of that tree. Each “leaf” in
the MIB is reached by a unique path, therefore by numbering the branching points,
starting with the top, each leaf can be uniquely defined by a sequence of numbers.
The formal description of the managed objects and the MIB structure is provided in
a special standardized format, called Abstract Syntax Notation 1 (ASN.1).
Since the general collection of MIBs can also be organized in a similar structure,
under the supervision of the Internet Activities Board (IAB), any parameter
included in a MIB that is recognized by the IAB is uniquely defined.
To provide the flexibility necessary in a global structure, MIBs are classified in
various classes (branches), one of them being the experimental branch, and
another the group of private (enterprise-specific) branch. Under the private
enterprise-specific branch of MIBs, each enterprise (manufacturer) can be assigned
a number, which is its enterprise number. The assigned number designates the top
of an enterprise-specific sub-tree of non-standard MIBs. Within this context, RAD
has been assigned the enterprise number 164. Therefore, enterprise MIBs
published by RAD can be found under 1.3.6.1.4.1.164.
MIBs of general interest are published by the IAB in the form of a Request for
Comment (RFC) document. In addition, MIBs are also often assigned informal
names that reflect their primary purpose. Enterprise-specific MIBs are published
and distributed by their originator, which is responsible for their contents.
Enterprise-specific MIBs supported by RAD equipment, including the LA-110, are
available in ASN.1 format from the RAD Technical Support Department.
Management Domains Under SNMP

SNMP enables, in principle, each management station that knows the MIBs
supported by a device to perform all the management operations available on that
device. However, this is not desirable in practical situations, so it is necessary to
provide a means to delimit management domains.
SNMP Communities
To enable the delimitation of management domains, SNMP uses “communities”.
Each community is identified by a name, which is a case-sensitive alphanumeric
string defined by the user (the LA-110 SNMP agents support community names of
up to 8 characters).
F-48 SNMP Environment

Any SNMP entity (this term includes both managed entities and management
stations) can be assigned by its user community names.
Access Restriction Using SNMP Communities

In general, SNMP agents support two types of access rights:
• Read-only: the SNMP agent accepts and processes only SNMP getRequest and
getNextRequest commands from management stations which have the same
read-only community name.
• Read-write: the SNMP agent accepts and processes all the SNMP commands
received from a management station with the same write community name.
For each SNMP entity it is possible to define a list of the communities which are
authorized to communicate with it, and the access rights associated with each
community (this is the SNMP community name table of the entity).
For example, the SNMP community name table of the SNMP agent of the LA-110
can include three community names.
In accordance with the SNMP protocol, the SNMP community of the originating
entity is sent in each message.
When an SNMP message is received by the addressed entity, first it checks the
originators community: if the community name of the message originator differs
from the community name specified for that type of message in the agent, the
message it discarded (SNMP agents of managed entities report this event by means
of an authentication failure trap).
LA-110 Communities
The SNMP agent of the LA-110 can recognize the following community types:
Read SNMP community that has read-only authorization, i.e., the SNMP
agent will accept only getRequest and getNextRequest commands
from management stations using that community.
Write SNMP community that has read-write authorization, i.e., the SNMP
agent will also accept setRequest commands from management
stations using that community.
Trap SNMP community which the SNMP agent will send within trap
messages.
SNMP Environment F-49

F-50 SNMP Environment

Index
fractional E1, 1-12

—A— Frame Relay over ATM, 1-13
AAL1, 1-2, 1-4, 1-22, 1-29 IP router, 1-10
configuring, C-116 LAN services, 1-9
displaying performance statistics, C-200 leased line services over ATM, 1-10
displaying performance statistics for specific data port typical, 1-8
connection, C-184 VoDSL over LES, 1-14
Stream mode, C-189 ATM
AAL2, 1-2, 1-5, 1-8, 1-14, 1-22 adaptation layers, 1-2, 1-22, F-18
configuring, C-118 circuit emulation, F-43
displaying performance statistics, C-173 defining address for management connection, C-79
displaying performance statistics for specific displaying address for management connection, C-144
connection, C-180 displaying connections with OAM problems, C-221
AAL5, 1-2, 1-22 displaying performance statistics, C-175
OAM, 1-23
ACTIVATE BRIDGE INTERFACE, C-5
operating environment, F-13
ACTIVATE CONN DATA, C-6 service categories, C-13, F-16
ACTIVATE CONN USER, C-6
ACTIVATE ELCP, C-7 —B—
ACTIVATE IP INTERFACE, C-9 Boot
ACTIVATE TFTP, C-9 Boot manager, D-9
ADD BP, C-16 Bridge, 1-9, 1-23
ADD BRIDGE INTERFACE, C-10 activating interface, C-5
ADD BUNDLE, C-20 adding interface, C-10
ADD CONN DATA, C-22 adding port, C-16
ADD CONN USER, C-31 adding static MAC address, C-73
ADD DHCP, C-48 configuring system parameters, C-116
deleting interface, C-135
ADD FW, C-50
deleting port, C-134
ADD IP INTERFACE, C-53
deleting static MAC address, C-142
ADD NAT, C-62 displaying address table, C-167
ADD NMS, C-66 displaying interfaces, C-147
ADD PAT, C-69 displaying OAM monitoring statistics, C-218
ADD PRI, C-72 displaying performance statistics, C-178
ADD STATIC MAC ADDR, C-73 displaying ports, C-147
ADD STATIC ROUTING, C-74 displaying static MAC addresses, C-234
ADD VLAN MEMBER, C-76 modifying interface, C-244
modifying port, C-243
ADSL, 1-1, 1-21, 2-4
selecting mode, C-94
configuring port, C-97
sending OAM loopback, C-254
displaying performance statistics, C-212
displaying port settings, C-170 Bundle
operating environment, F-8 adding timeslots, C-20
deleting, C-135
Alarms, 1-40
displaying, C-148
clearing, C-77
displaying, C-145
list of, B-1 —C—
sending log, C-250 Cables
Applications CBL-RJ45/2BNC/E1, 2-8
AAL1 stream, 1-11 CBL-RJ45/2BNC/E1/X, A-8
I-1
Index LA-110 Installation and Operation Manual
CBL-RJ45/D9/F/6FT, 2-5, A-2 DEL BUNDLE, C-135

CBL-RJ45/2BNC/E1, 2-8 DEL CONN DATA, C-136
CBL-RJ45/2BNC/E1/X, A-8 DEL CONN USER, C-137
CBL-RJ45/D9/F/6FT, 2-5, A-2 DEL DHCP, C-138
DEL FW, C-139
Clock
DEL IP INTERFACE, C-140
modes, 1-35
DEL NAT, C-141
selecting, C-82
DEL NMS, C-141
CLR ALM, C-77
DEL PAT, C-142
CLR FW LOG, C-77 DEL PRI, C-142
CLR LOOP, C-78 DEL STATIC MAC ADDR LAN, C-142
CLR PM, C-78 DEL STATIC ROUTING, C-143
commands DEL SYSERR, C-78
ADD PAT, C-69 DEL VLAN MEMBER, C-144
Commands DSP ADDR ATM, C-144
ACTIVATE BRIDGE INTERFACE, C-5 DSP ALM, C-145
ACTIVATE CONN DATA, C-6 DSP ARP TABLE LAN, C-146
ACTIVATE CONN USER, C-6 DSP BP, C-147
ACTIVATE ELCP, C-7 DSP BRIDGE INTERFACE, C-147
ACTIVATE IP INTERFACE, C-9 DSP BUNDLE, C-148
ACTIVATE TFTP, C-9 DSP COMMUNITY, C-149
ADD BP, C-16 DSP CONN DATA, C-150
ADD BRIDGE INTERFACE, C-10 DSP CONN USER, C-152
ADD BUNDLE, C-20 DSP DATA, C-155
ADD CONN DATA, C-22 DSP DEFAULT GATEWAY, C-156
ADD CONN USER, C-31 DSP DHCP, C-157
ADD DHCP, C-48 DSP FW, C-160
ADD FW, C-50 DSP FW LOG, C-162
ADD IP INTERFACE, C-53 DSP IP INTERFACE, C-163
ADD NAT, C-62 DSP LAN, C-166
ADD NMS, C-66 DSP MAC ADDR, C-167
ADD PRI, C-72 DSP MAC STATIC ADDR, C-234
ADD STATIC MAC ADDR, C-73 DSP NAT, C-169
ADD STATIC ROUTING, C-74 DSP NETWORK, C-169
ADD VLAN MEMBER, C-76 DSP NMS, C-172
CLR ALM, C-77 DSP PAT, C-172
CLR FW LOG, C-77 DSP PM AAL2, C-173
CLR LOOP, C-78 DSP PM ADDR ATM, C-177
CLR PM, C-78 DSP PM ATM, C-175
conventions, C-5 DSP PM BRIDGE INTERFACE, C-178
DEF ADDR ATM, C-79 DSP PM CONN AAL2, C-180
DEF CLOCK, C-82 DSP PM CONN DATA, C-184, C-195
DEF COMMUNITY, C-83 DSP PM CONN OAM DATA, C-187
DEF DATA, C-84 DSP PM CONN OAM USER, C-191
DEF DATE, C-89 DSP PM DATA, C-199
DEF DEFAULT GATEWAY, C-89 DSP PM IP, C-204
DEF ID, C-90 DSP PM IP INTERFACE, C-205
DEF LAN, C-91 DSP PM LAN, C-206
DEF NAME, C-94 DSP PM NETWORK, C-209
DEF NETWORK, C-95 DSP PM OAM, C-214, C-221
DEF PASSWORD, C-105 DSP PM OAM ADDR ATM, C-216
DEF PSTN, C-106 DSP PM OAM BRIDGE IF, C-218
DEF SP PORT, C-114 DSP PM OAM IP IF, C-220
DEF SYSPARAMS, C-115 DSP PM USER, C-222
DEF TERM RESET, C-127 DSP PRI, C-228
DEF TERM SET, C-127 DSP PSTN, C-230
DEF TIME, C-129 DSP ROUTING TABLE LAN, C-232
DEF USER, C-130 DSP SP PORT, C-233
DEL BP, C-134 DSP STATIC ROUTING, C-235
DEL BRIDGE IF, C-135 DSP SYS, C-236
I-2
LA-110 Installation and Operation Manual Index
DSP SYSERR, C-237 DEF DATE, C-89

DSP SYSPARAMS, C-238 DEF DEFAULT GATEWAY, C-89
DSP USER, C-239 DEF ID, C-90
DSP VLAN MEMBER, C-240
DEF LAN, C-91
EXIT, C-241
DEF NAME, C-94
HELP, C-241
INIT DB, C-242 DEF NETWORK, C-95
LOOP, C-242 DEF PASSWORD, C-105
MOD BP, C-243 DEF PSTN, C-106
MOD BRIDGE INTERFACE, C-244 DEF SP PORT, C-114
MOD CONN DATA, C-244 DEF SYSPARAMS, C-115
MOD CONN USER, C-245 DEF TERM RESET, C-127
MOD FW, C-245 DEF TERM SET, C-127
MOD IP INTERFACE, C-247
DEF TIME, C-129
MOD NMS, C-247
DEF USER, C-130
MOD VLAN MEMBER, C-248
PING, C-249 Default gateway
RESET, C-250 defining, C-89
SEND ALM LOG, C-250 displaying settings, C-156
SEND FW LOG, C-252 general information, F-31
SEND LOOPBACK BRIDGE INTERFACE, C-254 Defaults
SEND LOOPBACK DATA, C-254 restoring, C-242
SEND LOOPBACK IP INTERFACE, C-255 DEL BP, C-134
SEND LOOPBACK USER, C-255 DEL BRIDGE IF, C-135
ConfiguRAD, 1-37, 3-9 DEL BUNDLE, C-135
choosing options, 3-12 DEL CONN DATA, C-136
logging in, 3-9 DEL CONN USER, C-137
logging out, 3-12 DEL DHCP, C-138
Control port DEL FW, C-139
characteristics, 3-7
DEL IP INTERFACE, C-140
configuring, C-114
DEL NAT, C-141
connecting cable, 2-9
displaying parameters, C-233 DEL NMS, C-141
pinout, A-2 DEL PAT, C-142
DEL PRI, C-142
—D— DEL STATIC MAC ADDR LAN, C-142
Data port DEL STATIC ROUTING, C-143
activating interface, C-6 DEL SYSERR, C-78
adding connection, C-22 DEL VLAN MEMBER, C-144
configuring, C-84 DHCP, 1-27
connecting cable, 2-8 adding address pool, C-48
connector types, 2-4 deleting address pool, C-138
deleting connection, C-136 displaying settings, C-157
displaying configuration, C-155 enabling, C-117
displaying connections, C-150 relay, F-28
displaying OAM performance statistics for specific server, F-28
connection, C-187 Diagnostics, 1-7
displaying performance statistics, C-199 alarms, B-1
displaying performance statistics for specific loopbacks, 1-40, 4-1, C-242
connection, C-184 pinging, C-249, F-31
modifying connection, C-244 sending OAM loopback over bridge interface, C-254
sending OAM loopback, C-254 sending OAM loopback over data port, C-254
Database sending OAM loopback over E1 interface, C-255
initializing, C-242, E-1 sending OAM loopback over FXS interface, C-255
Date, C-89 sending OAM loopback over IP interface, C-255
DEF ADDR ATM, C-79 sending OAM loopback over ISDN interface, C-255
DEF CLOCK, C-82 DLCI
DEF COMMUNITY, C-83 configuring, C-26
DEF DATA, C-84 number of, 1-29
types of, F-32
I-3
DNS relay, 1-3, 1-26 DSP SP PORT, C-233

enabling, C-117 DSP STATIC ROUTING, C-235
Downloading application DSP SYS, C-236
via XMODEM, D-10 DSP SYSERR, C-237
Downloading configuration DSP SYSPARAMS, C-238
via HTTP, D-7 DSP USER, C-239
via TFTP, C-10, D-4
DSP VLAN MEMBER, C-240
Downloading SW
via HTTP, D-6
—E—
via TFTP, C-10, D-2
E1, 1-32, 2-4
DSP, 1-34
activating interface, C-6
DSP ADDR ATM, C-144 adding connection (AAL1), C-40
DSP ALM, C-145 adding connection (AAL2), C-47
DSP ARP TABLE LAN, C-146 adding PRI, C-72
DSP BP, C-147 CBL-RJ45/2BNC/E1, 2-8
DSP BRIDGE INTERFACE, C-147 configuring general parameters, C-132
DSP BUNDLE, C-148 configuring network port, C-104
DSP COMMUNITY, C-149 connecting cable, 2-8
DSP CONN DATA, C-150 connector tytpes, 2-4
CRC-4, F-4
DSP CONN USER, C-152
deleting bundle, C-135
DSP DATA, C-155 deleting connection, C-137
DSP DEFAULT GATEWAY, C-156 deleting PRI, C-142
DSP DHCP, C-157 displaying bundles, C-148
DSP FW, C-160 displaying connections, C-154
DSP FW LOG, C-162 displaying interface information, C-239
DSP IP INTERFACE, C-163 displaying OAM performance statistics for specific
DSP LAN, C-166 connection, C-193
DSP MAC ADDR, C-167 displaying performance statistics, C-226
displaying performance statistics for specific
DSP MAC STATIC ADDR, C-234
connection, C-199
DSP NAT, C-169 displaying port utilization, C-228
DSP NETWORK, C-169 frame format, F-2
DSP NMS, C-172 line signal, F-1
DSP PAT, C-172 modifying connection, C-245
DSP PM AAL2, C-173 network, 1-21, C-104
DSP PM ADDR ATM, C-177 operating environment, F-1
DSP PM ATM, C-175 port pinout, A-7
DSP PM BRIDGE INTERFACE, C-178 sending OAM loopback, C-255
timeslot 0, F-2
DSP PM CONN AAL2, C-180
troubleshooting, 4-8
DSP PM CONN DATA, C-184, C-195 UNI, 1-5, 1-34, C-133
DSP PM CONN OAM DATA, C-187 ELCP
DSP PM CONN OAM USER, C-191 activating, C-7
DSP PM DATA, C-199 Enclosure
DSP PM IP, C-204 3D, 1-17
DSP PM IP INTERFACE, C-205 front panel, 2-6
DSP PM LAN, C-206 rear panel, 1-17, 2-6
DSP PM NETWORK, C-209 ESD, 2-2, 2-9
DSP PM OAM, C-214 EXIT, C-241
DSP PM OAM ADDR ATM, C-216
DSP PM OAM BRIDGE IF, C-218 —F—
DSP PM OAM IP IF, C-220 Firewall, 1-3, 1-26
DSP PM OAM STATUS, C-221 adding rules, C-50
DSP PM USER, C-222 clearing log, C-77
deleting, C-139
DSP PRI, C-228
displaying log, C-162
DSP PSTN, C-230
displaying settings, C-160
DSP ROUTING TABLE LAN, C-232 modifying, C-245
I-4
sending log, C-252 adding PAT, C-142

Forced login, 3-6 adding router interface, C-53
Frame Relay, 1-29 adding static route, C-74
configuring general parameters, C-26, C-84 adding VLAN member, C-76
configuring interworking, C-28 bridge, 1-2, 1-23, C-73
configuring network interworking, C-29 configuring general parameters, C-91
displaying performance statistics, C-202 connecting cable, 2-8
displaying performance statistics for specific data port connector type, 2-4
connection, C-185 defining default gateway, C-89
interworking modes, 1-30 deleting bridge interface, C-135
PDU structure, F-32 deleting bridge port, C-134
FXS, 1-30, 2-3 deleting DNCP, C-138
activating interface, C-6 deleting NAT, C-141
adding connection (AAL1), C-32 deleting router interface, C-140
adding connection (AAL2), C-37 deleting static MAC address, C-73, C-142
configuring general parameters, C-130 deleting static route, C-143
configuring signaling, C-106 deleting VLAN member, C-144
deleting connection, C-137 DHCP, 1-27
displaying connections, C-154 displaying ARP table, C-146
displaying interface information, C-239 displaying bridge address table, C-167
displaying OAM performance statistics for specific displaying bridge interfaces, C-147
connection, C-193 displaying bridge ports, C-147
displaying performance statistics, C-225 displaying default gateway, C-156
displaying performance statistics for specific displaying DHCP, C-157
connection, C-198 displaying general parameters, C-166
displaying signaling information, C-230 displaying IP interface settings, C-163
sending OAM loopback, C-255 displaying NAT entries, C-169
signaling, 1-31 displaying performance statistics, C-206
troubleshooting, 4-8 displaying routing table, C-232
displaying static MAC addresses, C-234
displaying static routes, C-235
—H—
displaying VLAN members, C-240
HELP, C-241 DNS relay, 1-3, 1-26
firewall, 1-3
—I— IP router, 1-3
INIT DB, C-242 MDIX, 1-2
ISDN, 1-31, 2-3 modifying bridge interface, C-244
activating interface, C-6 modifying bridge port, C-243
adding connection (AAL2), C-38 modifying router interface, C-247
connecting cable, 2-9 modifying VLAN member, C-248
connector type, 2-5 NAT, 1-27
deleting connection, C-137 PAT, 1-28, C-172
displaying connections, C-153 router, 1-24
displaying interface information, C-239 sending OAM loopback over bridge interface, C-254
displaying OAM performance statistics for specific sending OAM loopback over IP interface, C-255
connection, C-192 troubleshooting, 4-9
displaying performance statistics, C-223 VLAN handling, 1-2, 1-24
displaying performance statistics for specific LEDs
connection, C-195 LAN, 3-4
sending OAM loopback, C-255 WAN, 3-3
troubleshooting, 4-8 Login
forced, 3-6
—L— LOOP, C-242
LAN Loopbacks, 1-40
activating bridge interface, C-5 clearing, C-78
activating router interface, C-9 initiating, C-242
adding bridge interface, C-10 LOCAL DATA, 4-2
adding bridge port, C-16 LOCAL USER, 4-4
adding DHCP, C-48 REMOTE DATA, 4-3
adding NAT, C-62 REMOTE NETWORK, 4-1
I-5
REMOTE REMOTE DATA, 4-5 —P—

REMOTE USER, 4-3 Password, 3-2, C-105
PAT, 1-28, C-69
—M— deleting, C-142
MAC address displaying, C-172
adding, C-73 Performance monitoring
Management, 1-6, 1-36 AAL2, C-173
adding NMS, C-66 ADSL, C-212
authentication, 1-37, 3-6 ATM, C-175
connection, 2-9 bridge, C-178
defining ATM address, C-79 clearing counters, C-78
deleting NMS, C-141 data port, C-199
displaying communities, C-149 dedicated management VCC, C-177
displaying NMS, C-172 E1, C-226
modifying NMS, C-247 FXS, C-225
Web, 1-37, 3-9 ISDN, C-223
MDIX, 1-2 LAN, C-206
Menus router, C-204
map of, 3-22 router WAN interface, C-205
MOD BP, C-243 SHDSL, C-210
MOD BRIDGE INTERFACE, C-244 specific AAL2 connection, C-180
specific data port connection, C-184
MOD CONN DATA, C-244
specific user port connection, C-195
MOD CONN USER, C-245
PING, C-249
MOD FW, C-245
Plug & play, 1-6, 1-38, 3-4
MOD IP INTERFACE, C-247
Pop-up, 3-9
MOD NMS, C-247
Ports
MOD VLAN MEMBER, C-248 ADSL, 1-1, 1-21, 2-4, C-97, C-170
analog voice, 1-4, 1-30, C-106, C-130
—N— data, 1-3, 1-28, 1-29, 2-4
Name, C-94 E1, 1-32, 2-4, A-7, C-132
NAT, 1-27 ISDN, 1-4, 1-31, 2-5, C-131
adding, C-62 LAN, 1-2, 1-23, 2-4
deleting, C-141 network E1, 1-21, C-104
dynamic, C-64 SHDSL, 1-1, 1-20, 2-4, C-99, C-169
single, C-65 T1, A-7
static, C-65 WAN, 1-1, 1-20
transparent, C-65 Power
types of, C-63 connecting cable, 2-9
Network, C-95 connector pinout, A-8
NMS Power supply, 1-18, 2-11
adding, C-66 PRI
deleting, C-141 adding, C-72
displaying, C-172 deleting, C-142
modifying, C-247 displaying, C-228
PSTN, C-106
—O—
OAM —R—
selecting type, C-118 RESET, C-250
OAM performance monitoring RM-33, 2-3, 2-7
ATM connections with OAM problems, C-221 RM-33, 1-17
bridge interface, C-218 Router
management VCC, C-216
displaying NAT entries, C-169
network port, C-214
Router, 1-9, 1-24
router interface, C-220
activating interface, C-9
specific data port connection, C-187
adding interface, C-53
specific user port connection, C-191
adding static route, C-74
configuring system parameters, C-116
I-6
defining default gateway, C-89 clearing errors, C-78

deleting interface, C-140 displaying errors, C-237
deleting static route, C-143 displaying information, C-236
displaying ARP table, C-146 resetting, C-250
displaying default gateway, C-156 restoring defaults, C-242
displaying IP interface settings, C-163
displaying OAM monitoring statistics, C-220 —T—
displaying performance statistics, C-204 T1
displaying routing table, C-232 port pinout, A-7
displaying static routes, C-235 Terminal
displaying VLAN members, C-240 defining codes, C-127
displaying WAN interface performance statistics, C- resetting codes to 0, C-127
205
TFTP
modifying interface, C-247
activating, C-9
routing principles, F-29
preliminary configuration, D-1
sending OAM loopback, C-255
Time, C-129
Timeslot
—S—
adding to bundle, C-20
SEND ALM LOG, C-250
adding to PRI connection, C-72
SEND FW LOG, C-252 deleting bundle, C-135
SEND LOOPBACK BRIDGE INTERFACE, C-254 deleting PRI, C-142
SEND LOOPBACK DATA, C-254 displaying bundles, C-148
SEND LOOPBACK IP INTERFACE, C-255 timeslot 0, F-2
SEND LOOPBACK USER, C-255 Timing
SHDSL, 1-1, 1-20, 2-4 modes, 1-35
configuring port, C-99 selecting, C-82
displaying performance statistics, C-210 system, 1-36
displaying port settings, C-169
operating environment, F-5 —U—
Signaling Uploading configuration
FXS, 1-31, C-106 via HTTP, D-8
Statistics, 1-7, 1-39 via TFTP, C-10, D-6
AAL2, C-173 User, 1-37, 3-6, C-105
ADSL, C-212 password, 3-2
ATM, C-175
bridge, C-178 —V—
clearing, C-78 VLAN
data port, C-199 adding member, C-76
dedicated management VCC, C-177 deleting member, C-144
E1, C-226 displaying members, C-240
FXS, C-225 general information, F-39
ISDN, C-223 modifying member, C-248
LAN, C-206 priority, C-19
network, C-209 PVID, C-18
router, C-204
SHDSL, C-210
—X—
Superuser, 1-37, 3-6, C-105
XMODEM, D-10
password, 3-2
System
I-7
I-8
DC Power Supply Connection – AC/DC Adapter (AD) Plug
Note: Ignore this supplement if the unit is AC-powered.
Certain units are equipped with a Wide Range AC/DC power supply. These units
are equipped with a standard AC-type 3-prong power input connector located on
the unit rear panel. This power input connector can be used for both AC and DC
voltage inputs.
For DC operation, a compatible straight or 90-degree, AC/DC Adapter (AD) plug
for attaching to your DC power supply lines is supplied with your RAD product
(see Figure 1).
Connect the wires of your DC power supply cable to the AD plug, according to the
voltage polarity and assembly instructions provided below.
Caution: Prepare all connections to the AD plug before inserting it into the unit’s
power connector.
Figure 1
Preparing and Connecting the Power
Supply Cable with the AD Plug
1. Loosen the cover screw on the bottom of the AD plug to open it
(see Figure 2). AC/DC power
~100-240VAC/ 48/60VDC
input connector
2. Run your DC power supply cable through the removable cable on unit
guard and through the open cable clamp. RETURN POWER
3. Place each DC wire lead into the appropriate AD plug wire

terminal according to the voltage polarity mapping shown. 90-degree
Afterwards, tighten the terminal screws close. Wire
AD plug
terminals
4. Fit the cable guard in its slot and then close the clamp over the Open
cable. Tighten the clamp screws to secure the cable. Underside
AD plug
(top view)
of straight
5. Reassemble the two halves of the AD plug and tighten the cover AD plug Cable
clamp
Wire
terminals
screw. (closed)
6. Connect the assembled power supply cable to the unit. Cable

guard
Cable
guard
DC power DC power
cable cable
Warning:
Chassis
• Reversing the wire voltage polarity will not cause damage to the (frame)
Ground
unit, but the internal protection fuse will not function.
• Always connect a ground (earth) wire to the AD plug’s Chassis + DC power Negative
Positive
(frame) Ground terminal. Connecting the unit without a protective pole source pole
(Earthed)
ground, or interruption of the grounding (for example, by using an
extension power cord without a grounding conductor) can cause Figure 2
harm to the unit or to the equipment connected to it!
• The AD adapter is not intended for field wiring.
SUP-930-01/05
24 Raoul Wallenberg St., Tel Aviv 69719, Israel
Tel: +972-3-6458181, Fax: +972-3-6483331, +972-3-6498250
E-mail: erika_y@rad.com, Web site: www.rad.com
Customer Response Form

RAD Data Communications would like your help in improving its product documentation.
Please complete and return this form by mail or by fax or send us an e-mail with your
comments.
Thank you for your assistance!
Manual Name: ______________________________________________________________

LA-110
Publication Number: __________________________________________________________

144-200-02/05
Please grade the manual according to the following factors:
Excellent Good Fair Poor Very Poor

Installation instructions ❒ ❒ ❒ ❒ ❒
Operating instructions ❒ ❒ ❒ ❒ ❒
Manual organization ❒ ❒ ❒ ❒ ❒
Illustrations ❒ ❒ ❒ ❒ ❒
The manual as a whole ❒ ❒ ❒ ❒ ❒
What did you like about the manual?

___________________________________________________________________________
___________________________________________________________________________
___________________________________________________________________________
___________________________________________________________________________
___________________________________________________________________________
Error Report
Type of Error(s) ❒ Incompatibility with product
or Problem(s): ❒ Difficulty in understanding text
❒ Regulatory information (Safety, Compliance, Warnings, etc.)
❒ Difficulty in finding needed information
❒ Missing information
❒ Illogical flow of information
❒ Style (spelling, grammar, references, etc.)
❒ Appearance
❒ Other _________
Please list the exact page numbers with the error(s), detail the errors you found (information missing,
unclear or inadequately explained, etc.) and attach the page to your fax, if necessary.
_________________________________________________________________________________________
_________________________________________________________________________________________
_________________________________________________________________________________________
_________________________________________________________________________________________
Please add any comments or suggestions you may have.

_________________________________________________________________________________________
_________________________________________________________________________________________
_________________________________________________________________________________________
You are: ❒ Distributor

❒ End user
❒ VAR
❒ Other ________________________
Who is your distributor? _______________________________
Your name and company: ___________________________________________________________
Job title: __________________________________________________________________________

Address: __________________________________________________________________________
Direct telephone number and extension: _______________________________________________
Fax number: ______________________________________________________________________
E-mail: _____________________________________________________________________
www.rad.com
INTERNATIONAL HEADQUARTERS:
24 Raoul Wallenberg Street, Tel Aviv 69719, Israel, Tel: 972-3-6458181
Fax: 972-3-6498250, 972-3-6474436, Email: market@rad.com
U.S. HEADQUARTERS:
900 Corporate Drive, Mahwah, N.J. 07430, Tel: (201) 529-1100
Toll Free: 1-800-444-7234, Fax: (201) 529-5777, Email: market@radusa.com
Publication No. 144-200-02/05

La 110

Uploaded by

Document Information

Original Title

Copyright

Available Formats

Share this document

Share or Embed Document

Sharing Options

Did you find this document useful?

Is this content inappropriate?

Copyright:

Available Formats

La 110

Uploaded by

Copyright:

Available Formats

Installation and Operation Manual

International Headquarters U.S. Headquarters

24 Raoul Wallenberg St. 900 Corporate Drive

© 2000–2004 RAD Data Communications Ltd. Publication No. 144-200-02/05

Ports Safety Status

Electromagnetic Compatibility (EMC)

Canadian Emission Requirements

Warning per EN 55022 (CISPR-22)

Cet appareil est un appareil de Classe A. Dans un environnement résidentiel, cet

Dieses ist ein Gerät der Funkstörgrenzwertklasse A. In Wohnbereichen können

Manufacturer's Name: RAD Data Communications Ltd.

Manufacturer's Address: 24 Raoul Wallenberg St.

declares that the product:

Product Name: LA-110

conforms to the following standard(s) or other normative document(s):

EMC: EN 55022:1998 Information technology equipment – Radio disturbance

EN 55024:1998 Information technology equipment – Immunity characteristics

Safety: EN 60950: 2000 Safety of information technology equipment.

Tel Aviv, 22nd January, 2003

European Contact: RAD Data Communications GmbH, Otto-Hahn-Str. 28-30, 85521

A caution warns of possible damage to the equipment if a procedure is not

A warning alerts to the presence of important operating and maintenance

LA-110 Installation and Operation Manual i

2.5 LA-110 Enclosures ....................................................................................................... 2-6

ii LA-110 Installation and Operation Manual

Chapter 5. Configuring LA-110 for Typical Applications

Appendix A. Connection Wiring (Pin Assignment)

LA-110 Installation and Operation Manual iii

2-1. Typical LA-110 Front Panel ................................................................................................... 2-6

3-1. Forced Login ......................................................................................................................... 3-7

iv LA-110 Installation and Operation Manual

4-1. REMOTE NETWORK Loopback............................................................................................. 4-2

5-1. Network Uplink Configuration............................................................................................... 5-2

LA-110 Installation and Operation Manual v

5-43. Def Sysparams – PRI.......................................................................................................... 5-24

vi LA-110 Installation and Operation Manual

5-92. Add PAT – PAT for HTTP Server........................................................................................ 5-49

2-1. LA-110 Front Panel Indicators ................................................................................................ 2-6

3-1. General LA-110 Configuration Procedure............................................................................ 3-14

4-1. Troubleshooting Chart ........................................................................................................... 4-6

LA-110 Installation and Operation Manual vii

viii LA-110 Installation and Operation Manual

ATM Network Interface

In the VLAN-unaware mode, LA-110 forwards packets according to their

Optional Data Port

Optional User Port

Automatic Configuration Options (Plug & Play)

Diagnostics and Statistics

Typical Applications 1-7

1.2 Typical Applications

ATM Public ATM ATM

Figure 1-1. Typical Application

1-8 Typical Applications

Typical Applications 1-9

• Network Address Translation/Network Address/Port Translation (NAT/NAPT)

Subnet Mask Negotiation

Figure 1-2. Basic IP Router Application

Note For additional details, refer to Appendix F.

Leased Line Services over ATM

1-10 Typical Applications

Figure 1-3. Providing Leased Line Services

Handling of Data Port Traffic

LAN DS LAM DSLAM LAN